
SMITH'S NEW GRAMMAR. 



NGLISH GRAMMAR 



ON THE 



IPRODUCTIVE SYSTEM. 



BY ROSWELL C. SMITH. 



NEW STEREOTYPE EDITION. 



PE 1111 
.S54 
1865 
Copy 1 



PHILADELPHIA: 

SHED BY E. H. BUTLEB & CO. 



ifb L 



t LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. # 

# _ — 



# 



^e^ 



V&fiyttyM *=/$» 






'UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 






/ 



X 



SMITH'S NEW Gil A JIM A 11. 

ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 

ON THE 

PRODUCTIVE system: 

A 

METHOD OP INSTRUCTION RECENTLY ADOPTED 

IN 

GERMANY AND SWITZERLAND. 

• . 

^je^xgtteb for Skfjonte snb ^cufamxte. 



BY KOSWELL C. SMITH, 

AUTHOR OF " PRACTICAL AND MENTAL ARITHMETIC," " INTELLECTUAL AND 
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR," AND "INTRODUCTORY ARITHMETIC." 



NEW STEREOTYPE EDITION. 



PHILADELPHIA: 
PUBLISHED BY E. H. BUTLER & CO. 

1865. 

Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year I860, by Roswbll C. Smith, in the Clerk's 
Office of the District Court of the United States, in and for the District of Connecticut. 
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year I860, bv Roswkll C. Smith, in the Clerk's 
Office of the District Court of the United States, in and for the District of Massachusetts. 



76 iii 



, -:. 5 



THE PRODUCTIVE GRAMMAR, 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR 

ON THE 

PRODUCTIVE SYSTEM: 

A 

METHOD OF INSTRUCTION RECENTLY ADOPTED 

m 

GERMANY AND SWITZERLAND, 

IN THE PLACE OF 

THE INDUCTIVE SYSTEM. 

JBwfgtufc for &cf)OQls anU ®cafccmi«. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1859, hy Roswell C. Smith, io 
the Clerk's Office of the .District Court of the District of Connecticut. 



PREFACE. 



The following work was composed, as is indicated hy tha 
title, on what is styled in Germany and Switzerland the 
" Productive System of Instruction.*' It is in these countries 
that the subject of Education has been deemed a matter of 
paramount importance. The art of teaching, particularly, 
has there been most ably and minutely investigated. To 
give a brief account of the different systems which have 
prevailed there, may not be irrelevant on the present occa- 
sion, as they assist in forming an opinion of the comparative 
merits of the "Productive System," on which this work m 
principally based. 

" In reference to intellectual education, the persons who were in- 
strumental in producing the reformation in schools, in the last century, 
in these countries, may he divided into four classes — the Humanists, 
Philanthropists, Pestalozzian and the Productive Schools. 
^ " At the restoration of learning, in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, 
the classics were brought out from the libraries of the cloisters in which 
they had been buried. As they presented the only examples of exalted 
sentiments and elevated style which the secular literature of the age 
afforded, they were regarded as the only means of acquiring enlarged 
views and a liberal education ; the study of them received the proud title 
of Humanity ; and the zealous and meritorious men who employed this 
means for the revival of learning, were subsequently termed Humanists. 

" The rigid Humanists maintained that ' the Greek and Latin authors 
are the only source of sound learning, whether in philosophy or rhetoric, 
in poetry or history, in medicine or law, and even in the elements of 
religion ; all has come to us from Greece and Rome.' i The learning of 
th'e Greek and Latin languages is the only foundation of a thorough 
education;' the knowledge of the grammar ought to precede all other 
knowledge ; ' and philologists are the only thoroughly learned men.' 

"The Humanists maintained the entire sway of the learned world 
until about the middle of the last century, when the school of the 
Philanthropists arose. Disgusted with the extravagant manner in which 
the ancient languages were extolled, they were led to examine into the 
foundations of their pretensions. While they yielded the palm to the 
ancients in all that relates to matters of taste and beauty, they maintained 
that this" superiority arose from the fact, that the ancients derived their 
views directly from the inspection of nature and the observation of man, 
instead of occupying themselves, as we do, with the mere pictures of them 
drawn by others ; — they pointed to the obvious truth, that the world is older 
and vastly more experienced than it was two thousand years ago ; that in 
regard to all that relates to human knowledge, the present generation are 
really the ancients. They believed that much time was lost by the 
indiscriminate and exclusive use of the classics as the foundation of 
education, which ought to be spent in acquisition of practical knowledge ; 
and that by this tedious and laborious task, without any perceptible 

(-3) 



* PREFACE. 

advantage to the pupil, they were often disgusted with every species of 
intellectual effort. They also pointed out the moral corruption which 
arises from many of the examples and sentiments of the ancients, and 
. especially disapproved that discipline of compulsion and violence, by 
jrhich children have been forced to this ungrateful employment. They 
arged the importance of leading- by the attraction of knowledge itself 
rather than by force. They paid much attention to the developement of 
the bodily constitution and powers, and professed to aim at forming men, 
and not mere scholars. 

" But, with the ordinary weakness of human nature, in avoiding" oim 
extreme, they ran into the opposite. They forgot the valuable influence 
of these studies, properly regulated, upon the faculties and habits of tiw 
mind. 

"Notwithstanding their error, the Philanthropists unquestionably exerted 
much influence on the improvement of education. The extravagant views 
of the Humanists were considerably modified ; and although many still 
retain the exclusive maxims of their predecessors, many admit, as stated 
in the German * Conversations Lexicon," that 4 all should be embraced in 
education which can promote the formation of the man, and prepare him 
for the eternal destiny of his spirit. 1 The Philanthropists also prepared 
the way for their successors of the School of Pestalozzi, This remarkable 
man adopted many of the opinions of his predecessors of the Philanthropic 
school, especially those which related to the developement of the bodily 
powers, and the methods of discipline, and religious instruction. He per- 
ceived, however, that, in assuming practical utility as the exclusive test 
of the value of particular objects of instruction, they had too much 
neglected the developement of the mind itself. In seeking to avoid this 
error, however, he did not entirely escape the other extreme. Pie assumed, 
as a fundamental principle, that a certain developement of mind was 
accessary for every rank and every occupation. The means of this 
developement he supposed himself to have found, so far as the intellectual 
faculties were concerned, in the elements of form and number, which are 
combined in the science of Mathematics, in Language, and in Natural 
History. The Mathematics appear to have assumed a preponderance in 
practice, which was unfavorable to the regular and harmonious cultivation 
of other powers. The senses and the bodily powers he endeavored to 
develope, in accordance with the views of tlie Philanthropic school, by the 
careful examination of the various objects of nature and art, which sur- 
round the pupil, by means of music, and by gymnastic exercises, alternated 
or combined with labor. Pestalozzi himself was remarkably the creature 
of powerful impulses, which were usually of the most mild and benevolent 
kind, and preserved a child-like character in this respect, even to old age. 
It was probably this temperament which led him to estimate at a low rate 
the importance of positive religious truth in the education of children, and 
to maintain that the mere habit of faith and love, if cultivated towards 
earthly parents and benefactors, would of course be transferred to our 
heavenly Father, whenever his character should be exhibited to the 
mind of the child. The fundamental error of this view was established 
by the unhappy experience of his own institution: and his own ex- 
ample afforded the most striking evidence that the noblest impulses, 
not directed by established principles, may lead to imprudence and 
ruin, and thus defeat their own ends.* This principle, combined 

* Aa an example of this, it may be mentioned that, on one of those occasions (fre- 
quently occurring) on which he was reduced to extremity for want of the means of 
supplying his large family, he borrowed $400 from a friend for thi3 purpose. In going 
home, he met a peasant wringing his hands in despair for the loss of his cow. Pes 
talogzi put the entire bag of money into hin hands, and ran off to escape his thanks. 



P R E F A CE. 5 

with the want of tact in reference to the affairs of common life, 
materially impaired his powers of usefulness as a practical instructor 
of youth. The rapid progress of his ideas rarely allowed him to execute 
his own plans; and, according to his own system, too much time was 
employed in the profound developement of principles to admit of much 
attention to their practical application. But, as one of his admirers 
observed, he seemed destined to educate ideas and not children. He com- 
bated, with unshrinking boldness, and untiring perseverance, through a 
long life, both, by his example and by his numerous publications, tha 
prejudices and abuses of the age, in reference to education. He attacked., 
with great vigor and no small degree of suecess, that favorite maxim of 
bigotry and tyranny, that obedience and devotion are the legitimate 
offspring of ignorance. He denounced that degrading system which 
Gonsider3 it enough to enable man to procure a subsistence for himself 
and his offspring — and in this manner to merely place him on a level 
with the beast of the forest ; and which deems every thing lost whose 
value cannot be estimated in money. He urged upon the consciences 
of parents and of rulers, with an energy approaching that of the an- 
cient prophets, the solemn duties which Divine Providence had imposed 
upon them, in committing to their charge the present and future desti- 
nies of their fellow beings. In this way he produced an impulse, which 
pervaded the continent of Europe, and which, by means of his popular 
and theoretical works, reached the cottages of the poor and palaces of 
the great. His institution at Yverdun was crowded with men of every 
nation, not merely those who w T ere led by the same benevolence which 
inspired him, but by the agents of kings, and noblemen, and public insti- 
tutions, who came to make themselves acquainted with his principles, hi 
order to become fellow-laborers in his plans of benevolence. 

" It is to these companions of his labors, most of whom resided in 
Germany or Switzerland, that we owe the formation of another school, 
which has been styled the Productive School, and which now predomi- 
nates in Germany and Switzerland, It might, perhaps, with equal pro- 
priety, be termed the Eclectic School ; for it aims at embodying all the 
valuable principles of previous systems, without adhering slavishly to the 
dictates of any master, or the views of any party. It rejects alike the 
idolatrous homage to the classics, which was paid hy the Humanists — the 
unreasonable prejudices of the Philanthropists against classical and merely 
literary pursuits — and the undue predilection for the mere expansion of 
mind, to the neglect of positive knowledge and practical application, wrnch 
characterized too many of the Pestalozzian School. 

44 The leading principle of this system, is that which its name indicates 
—that the child should be regarded not as a mere? recipient of the ideaa 
of others, but as an agent capable of collecting, and originating, and pro- 
ducing most of the ideas whicl: are necessary for its education, when pre- 
sented with the objects or the facts from which they may be derived. 
While, on the one hand, they are careful not to reduce the pupil to a mere 
machine, to be moved by the will of his instructer in an assigned direc- 
tion, or a mass of passive matter, to be formed by him according to his 
own favorite model, they are equally careful to avoid the extreme, into 
which some of the preceding school have fallen, of leaving him to wander 
indefinitely, in a wrong direction in search of trutl^ in order to secure tc 
him the merit of discovery. They consider a course of education as 
divided into two parts — the period of developement and the period of acqui- 
sition. In the first period, which they consider as particularly devoted to 
developing the faculties and forming- tne habits of the mind, in ordeF to 
prepare it as an instrument for future operations, they employ the induc- 
tive pftuuMm ehiwflv. Thns t» not here of «o much importano® ws th» 



6 PR E FACE. 

habit of investigation and effort, which can only be acquired by meeting 
and overcoming difficulties. This period, which mufct be made longer 01 
shorter according to the character of the pupil, or the necessity that his 
circumstances in life may impose, is &acceeded by the period of acquhu 
tion % in which the mind is more especially called upon to exercise the 
powers tohich have been previously developed and cultivated^ in the acqui- 
sition of such positive knowledge as may prepare the individual for life 
and action. The inductive process is still employed as much as possible, 
not only because it has become, for many cases, the shortest and most 
agreeable, but because it is important to maintain the habits it has pro- 
duced, and invigorate the faculties it has served to develope. 

" But still it is far less employed than previously, and the pupil is never 
suffered to waste his time in attempting to create a science for himself, 
and thus deprived of the benefit of the experience of sages and centuries. 
On the contrary, they deem his mind capable of being elevated even more 
rapidly by following the processes of patient investigation, by which the 
most exalted minds have arrived at results that astonish and delight him, 
and of thus learning to imitate strides, which seem to him like those cf & 
giant, and to cultivate those habits of untiring attention, which the great- 
est philosophers have declared to be the principal source of that telescopic 
glance, that almost unerring power of discrimination, which seems to 
others eo nearly miraculous. 

11 Such is the Productive System, by which the powers of the pupil are 
called into complete exercise by requiring him to attempt a task unaided, 
and then assisting him in correcting his own errors, or returning from his 
own wanderings, before he is discouraged by the waste of time and th« 
frnitlessness of his efforts. They distinguish carefully between know- 
ledge and the means of obtaining it To cultivate the senses, and pre- 
sent the objects which they are capable of examining, is to open to the 
child the sources of knowledge — to piece before him a book which is ever 
open, and in which he may every moment read. This, they maintain, is 
the first and most obvious part of education, according to the dictates of 
common sense. It is one in which nothing but truth is presented to him, 
aad which, by calling his powers into constant exercise, ensures their 
improvement, and cultivates a spirit of investigation." 

The preceding extracts are taken from Art. I. Vol. I. 
No. VI. of the American Journal of Education, New Series. 
The author avails himself of this opportunity to express his 
obligations to the conductors of this valuable periodical. A 
constant perusal of its pages has afforded him many valuable 
ideas on the subject of education, and he cheerfully acknow- 
ledges material assistance derived from it in the preparation 
of the " Productive System of English Grammar," which 
is now respectfully submitted to the candid examination of the 
public. 

THE AUTHOR, 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR 



I. OF THE NOUN. 



0. What is your name ? 

(5. What is the name of the town in which you live f 
(J. What does the word noun mean? 

Ans. The word nov,n means name, 

Q. What, then, may your name be called? 

1. A NOUN. 

Q. What may all name8 be called? 

2. Nouns. 

Q. Boston is the name of a place : is Boston a noun ? and if so, wby f 

3. Boston is a noun, because it is a name. 

O. Hudson is the name of a river : is Hudson a noun, and why ? 

Q. Book is the name of something to read in : is book a noun, and wny ? 

Q. Will you now inform me what a noun is ? 

4. A noun is the name of any person, place, or thing. 

Q. Will you mention two nouns the names of persons ? two, the name* 
of things ? two, the names of different places ? 

Q. Will you tell me which words are the nouns in the following sen- 
tences, as I read them to you ? * 

" Thomas and Joseph are in the house." 

" The horse and cow are in the lot." 

" The hawk and the eagle have flown to the mountain.' 

" Trees, corn, potatoes and apples grow in the fields." 



II. NUMBER. 

Q. What is the meaning of the word number ; as, " The number of but- 
tons on your coat?" 

5. Number means one or more. 

Q. What does the word singular mean? 

6. It means one. 

Q. When, then, I speak of one thing only, as chair, what number ia h f 

7. Singular number. 

Q. What, then, does the singular number t>f nouns denote ? 

8. The singular number denotes but one thing. 

(7) 



B ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Q. Of what number is hook, and why ? 

9. Book is of the singular number, because it meana 
but one. 

Q. Of what number is chair, and why? 
Q. What does the word plural mean? 

10. It means more than one. 

Q. Of what number is lamps, and why! 

11. Lamps is of the plural number, because it means 
more than one. 

Q. Of what number is inkstand, and why ? 

Q. By adding; s to dove, we have doves , and es to box, we have &ww 
How, then, is the plural nurcSr of nouns usually formed ? 

12. By adding 6* or es to the singular, 

Q, Will you spell the plural of ounce ? glass ? vrindow ? theatre t antes* 
isnt t church ? labyrinth ? 
Q. How many numbers do nouns appear to have, and what are they? 

13. Two, the singular and plural. 

Q. Will you name a noun of the sing alar number I on® of the plural 
number ? 



III. GENDER. 

Q. What does the word gender mean? 

14. Gender signifies sex. 

Q. What does the word masculine meant 

15. It means male. 

Q, John is the name of a male : of v/hat gender or sex, then, m John f 

16. Of the masculine or. male gender. 

Q. What nouns, then, are said to be of the masculine gender t 

17. The namgs of males. 

Q. What gender, then, is man, and why? 

18. Man is of the masculine gender, because it is th^ 
name of a male. 

Q. Of what gender is uncle, and why % father t why 1 
Q. What does feminine mean ? 

19. It means female. 

Q. Susan is the name of a female : of what gender, then, is Sutanl 

20. Of the feminine gender. 

Q. What nouns, then, are said to be of the feminine gender ? 

21. The names of females. 

Q. What gender is woman, and why! 

22. Woman is of the feminine gender, because it is the 
name of a female. 

Q. Of what gender is aunt, and why ? daughter f why ? 
Q. What does the word neuter mean? 

23. It means neither. 

Q. Chair is the name neither of a male nor a female : what gender, thas* 
may it properly be called ? 

24. Neuter gender. 

Q. What nouns, thnn, mav b* swtsd to b* of thjp nenr^r #©rvifcr 9 



NOUNS. 9 

25. The names of objects that are neither males riox 
females. 

Q. Of what gender is inkstand, and why? 

26. Neuter gender, because it is the name neither of a 
male nor female. 

Q. Of what gender is bench? why? ckair? why? 

$. Parent, you know, is the name either of father or mother, that is, i\ 
is a name common to both : of what gender, then, shall we call such nouns 
ES parent, bird, &c. ? 

27. Common gender. 

Q. What nouns, then, may be said to be of the common gender ? 

28. The names of such animals as may be either males 
or females. 

Q. Of what gender is sheep, and why ? 

29. Sheep is of the common gender, because it is the 
name either of a male or female. 

Q. Of what gender is robin, and why ? 

Q. How many genders do nouns appear to have, and what are they ? 

SO. Four — the masculine, the feminine, the neuter, and 
the common. 

Q. Will you name a noun of the masculine gender ? one of the feminine ? 
one of the neuter ? one of the common ? 

Q. Will you name the gender and number of each noun in the following 
sentences, as I read them to you ? 

" James and William." " Slate and pencil." 

John and the girls." " Women and birds." 



IV. PROPER AND COMMON NOUNS. 

Q. What is the meaning of the word common ; as, "A common com- 
plaint ?" 

31. Common means general. 

Q. Although there are a vast many male children in the world, each one 
may be called by the general name of boy : what kind of a noun, then, 
would you call boy? 

32. A common noun. 

Q. When, then, is a noun called common! 

33. When it is a general name. 

Q. What does the word proper mean? 

34. It means fit or particular. 

Q. John, you know, is the particular name of a boy : what kind cf 
noun, then, may it be called ? 

35. A proper noun. 

Q. When, then, may a noun be called proper? 

36. When it is a particular name. 

Q. What kind of a noun is Susan, and why ? 

37. Susan is a proper noun, because it is a particular 
name. 

Q< What kind of q noun fa John, sand why f 



10 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. ~ 

Q. What kind of a noun is river, and why ? 

38. River is a common noun, because it is a general 
name. 



O. How many kinds of nouns do there appear to be, and what are they * 
Q. What kind of a noun is girls ? Mary ? town ? New York ? Ixtndam f 
hat ? chain ? 

Q. Will you now tell me which words are the nouns in the following sen- 
tences ; which are proper, and which common ; also their gender and number ? 
" Thomas and John." " King and queen." 

" Susan and Mary." " House arid barn," 



V. PERSON. 

Q. When a person, in speaking, says, " I, John, will do it," what person 
do grammarians call John ? 

39. The first person. 

Q. When, then, is a noun of the first person I 

40. When it is the name of the person speaking. 

Q. When I say, " James, mind your studies," what person do gram- 
marians call James? 

41. The second person, being the person spoken to. 

Q. When, then, is a noun of the second person ? 

42. When it is the name of the person spoken to, or 
addressed. 

Q. " William, James has come." What person is William, and why t 

43. Of the second person, because William is spoken 
to* 

Q. V/hen I say, " William, James has come," I am speaking to William 
about James : of what person, then, is James, and why ? 

44. Of the third person, because James was spoken 
of; that is, I w r as talking about James. 

Q. When, then, is a noun of the third person ? 

45. When it is spoken of. 

Q. " Thomas, Rufus is in the garden." What person is Thomas ? why I 
fs Rufus ? why ? 

Q. How many persons do nouns appear to have, and what are they ? 

46. Three persons — the first, second, and third. 

Q. Will you inform me which of the following nouns are proper, which 
common ; also their gender, number, and person ? 
" I, James, of Boston." u Boy and girl." 

" Henry, study your book." " William and his sister." 



VI. pASE. 

Q. We say of an animal, for instance a horse, when he is fat, that " He 
te in a good case ;" and, when he is lean, that " He is in a bad case ;" what 
therefore, does the word case mean ? 

47. Cast means condition* state. <&a 



GASES. 1L 

Q. When I say, " Charles strikes William/' " William strikes Charles/' 
you may perceive that the state or condition of Charles in the former example 
is quite different from his state or condition in the latter : in the one, Charles 
Htrik.es ; in the other, he is struck : what, then, is meant by the different 
cases of nouns ? 

48. The different condition or position they have in 
relation to other words in the same sentence. 

Q. What does the word nominative mean? 

49. -Nominative means naming. 

Q. When I say, "John strikes," he evidently does something: what, 

fcfeen, may John be called? 

50. An actor or doer. 

Q. Well, then, as the actor or doer is considered the naming or leading 
ttoun, in what case is John, when I say, " John strikes ?" 

51. In the nominative case. 

Q. What, then, is the nominative case of nouns? 

52. The nominative case is the agent or doer. 

Q. When I say, " The dog runs/ 7 in what case is dog, and why? 

53. Dog is in the nominative case, because it is the 
agent, actor, or doer. 

Q. " The cat catches mice. * In what case is cat, and why ? 
Q. When I say, " Thomas is pursuing the thief/' what is the object 
here which Thomas is pursuing? 

54.- Thief. 

Q. What does the word objective mean ? 

55. It means belonging to the object. 

Q. In what case, then, may thief be reckoned, in the phrase, "Thomaa 

pursues the thief?' 7 

56. In the objective case. 

Q. What, then, does the objective case denote ? 

57. The objective case denotes the object 

Q. When I say, " William whips John/ 7 in what case is John, and why! 

58. In the objective case, because John is the object 

Q. What does the word possessive imply ? 

59; Possession, orvnership, property, &c. 

Q. When I say, " It is John's slate/ 7 I mean to say that John owns tha 

elate : in what case, then, shall we reckon John's 1 

60. In the possessive case. 

0. What, then, does the possessive case of nouns denote ? 

61. The possessive case denotes possession, property, 
&c. 

S. When I say, " Peter 7 s knife/ 7 who owns or possesses the knife ? 
_. In what case, then, is Peter's, and why ? 

62. In the possessive case, because Peter possesses the 
knife. 

Q. In the example " John 7 s slate/ 7 you perceive that John's ends in s, 
with a comma before it : what is the comma, and what is the s, called in 
grammar? 

68. The comma is called an apostrophe, and the 5, an 
apostrophic s. 

Q. You also perceive that John's is singular : how 5 then, do xtouxm m th® 

cingubr suraber usually form their poasesaive (rasa * 



12 ENGLISH GRAMMA R. 

64. By taking after them an apostrophe with the letter s 
following it. 

Q. " On eagles' wings." Here eagles 1 is plural, and in the possesoiv? 
case : how, then, do nouns in the plural usually form their possessive case ? 

65. Simply by taking the apostrophe without the addi- 
tion of s. 

Q. But if the plural noun does not end in s, as, " men's concerns," how 
is the possessive case formed ? 

66. As the same case in the singular number is formed. 

Q. From the foregoing remarks, how many cases do nouns appear to 

have, and what are they ? 

67. Three — the nominative, possessive, and objective. 

Q. Decline sometimes means to vary the endings of a word : what, then* 
do I mean when. I ask you to decline a noun ? 

68. To tell its different cases or endings. 

Q. Will you decline John? 

69. Nominative case, ' John. 

Possessive case, John's. 

Objective case, John. 
Q. Will you decline boy, in both numbers? 

Singular. Plural 

70, Norn. Boy. Norn. Boyn. 

Pass. Boy's. Pass. Boys*. 

Ob).. Boy. Obj. Boys. 

0. When I say, " William's coat," you perceive that the noun coat fol 
lows William 1 s : by what is William 1 8 said to be governed, and why ? 

71. By coat, because it follows William's. 

Q. What, then, may be considered a rule for governing the possessive 
9&sel 

E.TTLfi Z. 

The possessive case is governed by the following 

noun. 

Q. " William's hat." Is William's a proper or common noun ? Why ? 
(36.)* 

O. What is its person ? why ? (45.)* Its number ? why ? (8.)* Its gen 
der ? why ? (17.)* Its case ? why ? (61.)* What noun follows JViUiam 1 * f 
What word, then, governs William 1 s ? What is the rule ? 

Q. When we mention the several properties of the different words in 
sentences, in the same manner as we have those of William's, above, wh&S 
is the exercise called ? 

72. Parsing. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" John's knife." 

73. John's is a noun, because it is a name — pegpeb, be- 
cause it is a particular name — masculine gender ; it is tha 
a&me of a male — third person ; it is spoken of — * singular 

• Eefey bsaJr to this oambov. 



A II T J C U-ti&. IS 

numbkk ; it means but one — possessive case; it implies 
possession — and it is governed by the noun knife, accord- 
ing to 

Rule I. The possessive case is governed hy the following 
noun. 

Knife is a noun ; it is a name — common ; it is a general 

name — neuter gender; it is neither male nor female — 

third peeson ; it is spoken of — singular number ; it means 

but one. 

§CT Let the learner parse the foregoing, till the mode of parsing the 
noun is so familiar to him, that he can do it readily, without looking in the 
book. He may then take the following exercises, which are to he parsed in a 
similar manner. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

" Peter's cap." " Stephen's coat." « Brother's knife." 

" John's slate." " Father's house." " Boys' hats." 



VII. OF ARTICLES. 

Q. When I say, " Give me a book," I evidently mean no particular book j 
fcat when I say, " Give rne the book," what do I mean? 

74. Some particular book. 

Q. Which are the words that make this difference in meaning t 

75. A and the. 

Q. What are these little words called? 

76. Articles. 

Q. What, then, are articles? 

77. Articles are words placed before nouns to limit 
their meaning. 

Q. What is the meaning of the word definite t 

78. Definite means particular. 

Q. " Give me the book." Here a particular book is referred to: what 
kind of an article, then, shall we call the 'I 

79. Definite article. 

Q. What, then, is a definite article? 

80. It points out what particular thing or things are 
meant.' 

Q. The word in, when placed before words, frequently signifies not : 
what, then, will indefinite mean? 

81. Not definite. 

Q> When I say, " Give me a knife," no particular knife is meant : what 
kind of an article, then, may a be called? 

82. Indefinite article. 

Q. Why is it so called? 

83. Because it is not used before the name of any 
particular person or thing. 



14 E-NUL1SH GRAMMAR. 

Q We Bay, " an apple," " an inkstand," &c. in preference to ' ' a app.e," 
"a inkstand," &c. : why i» this? 

84. Because it is easier to speak, and also more plea* 
sant to the ear. 

• Q. What kind of letters do apple and irtMland begin with t 

85. Vowels. 

Q, In what eases do we use an instead of a ? 

86. Before words beginning with the vowels a, e 9 z, 
u, u. 

Q. In speaking, we say, " a man," not " an man:" when, then, do we 1 
use a ? 

87. Before words beginning with consonants. 

Q. Which letters are consonants? 

88. All the letters of the alphabet, except the vowels, 
which are a, e, i, o, u ; and also w and y 9 except at the 
beginning of words, when they are consonants. 

Q. How, then, do a and an differ? 

89. Only in their use a being used before consonants, 

and an before vowels s both are called by the same name. 

Q. How many articles do there appear to be, and what are they ? 

90. Two— a or an, and the. 

Q. It is customary to say, " a boy," not " a boys ;" also, " an inkstand," 
not "an inkstands :" of what number, then, must the noun be, before 

which the indefinite article is placed ? 

91. The singular number. 

Q. What, then, is the rule for the indefinite article? 

RtrxiS ii. 

The indefinite article a or an belongs to nouns of 

the singula?" number. 

Q. We can say, " the boy," and " the boys ;" using a noun either of the 
singular or plural number after the : what, then., is the rule for the definite 
article ? 

11FLE III. 

The definite article the belongs to ?wuns in the 

• singular or plural number. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" The boy:" 

92. The is an article, a word placed before nouns to limit 
their meaning — definite ; it means a particular boy — and 
belongs to hoy, according to 

Rule III. The definite article the belongs to nouns of tfa* 
singular or plural number. 

Boy is a noun ; it is a name — common ; it is a general 
name — masculine gender ; it is the name of a male— third 
person ; it is spoken of — ■ and singular number ; it meana 
but one. 



ADJECTIVES. 15 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

" A hand." " An eagle." " The man." " The boys' hats." 

" A man." " An insect." " The men." " A man's cap." 

" A mite." " An acorn," " The boys." " The girls' room," 

• A month." " An ounce." " The mice." " The lady's bos." 



VIII. OF ADJECTIVES. 

Q. When I say, " John is an obedient, industrious, and good boy," 1 
ose certain words to describe boy : which are they ? 

93. Industrious, obedient, and good. 

Q, When I say, "a good man," to what word is the describing word 
good joined or added ? 

94. To the noun man. 

Q. What does the word adjective mean? 

95. Joined or added to. 

Q. What, then, shall we call such describing words as good, ohediertf 
industrious, &c. ? 

96. Adjectives. 

Q. What, then, are adjectives ? 

97. Adjectives are words joined to nouns to describe 
or qualify them. 

Q. " A wise man." Which word is the adjective here, and why ? 
Q, " Rufus is a good boy, but James is a better one." How are Rufus 
and James spoken of here ? 

98. In comparison with each other. 

Q. The adjectives in the last example are good and better : can you tell 
me which of these words denotes a higher degree of excellence than the 
other ? 

99. The word better. 

Q. What degree of comparison, then, shall we call better ? 

100. Comparative degree. 

Q. What, then, does the comparative degree imply? 

101. A comparison between two. 

Q. " William is tail, Thomas is taller, but Rufus is the tallest boy is 
school." What is meant here by tallest ? 

102. Exceeding all in height. 

Q. What does the word superlative mean? 

103. Exceeding all ; the highest or lowest degree. 

Q, What degree of comparison, then, shall we call tallest ? 

104. Superlative degree. 

Q. What, then, does the superlative degree do? 

105. It increases or lessens the positive to the highest 
or lowest degree. 

Q, When I say, " James is a good boy," I make no comparison between 
him and any other ; but simply assert in a positive manner, that Jamas is a 
good boy. What kind of a sentence, then, would you call this? 

106. A positive sentence. 

Q. Of what degree of comparison, then, shall wo call goodt 

107. The positive degree. 



16 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Q. What, then, does the positive degree do? 

108. It merely describes, without any comparison. 

Q. Will you compare great ? 

109. " Positive, great ; Comparative f greater; Superla 
five, greatest." 

Q. Will you compare wise in the same manner? 
Q. Wise and great are words of one syllable : how, then, are the com- 
parative and superlative degrees of words of this sort formed ? 

110. By adding r or er, st or est, to the positive. 

Q. Will you in this manner compare small ? high ? mean ? 
Q. Will you compare beautiful i 

111. " Pos. beautiful; Comp. more beautiful; Sup. most 
beautiful." 

Q. How many syllables compose the word beautiful? 

112. Three.. 

Q. How, then, are words of three, or more syllables than one, usually 
compared ? 

113. By placing more and most before the positive. 

Q. Will you in this manner compare industrious ? ingenious ? dutiful f 
Q. Will you compare wise, by using the words less and least t 

1 14. " Pos. wise ; Comp. less wise ; Sup. least wise." 

Q. Will you in like manner compare benevolent t distinguished ? dilatory t 
Q. " Good men, better men, best men." Which adjective here is the 
positive, and why ? (108.) Which the comparative ? why ? (101.) Which 
the superlative? why? (105.) 

Q. Good, you perceive, is not compared regularly, like great, beautiful, 
&c. ; and since there are many words of this description, I will give you a 
list of the principal ones, together with others, regularly compared : will you 
repeat the comparative and superlative degrees, as I name the positive % 

115. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Good, Better, Best. 
Little, Less, Least. 
Much, or many, More, Most- 
Bad, ill, or evil, • Worse, Worst. 
Near, Nearer, Nearest, or next. 
Old, Older, Oldest, or eldest. 
Late, Later, Latest, or last. 
Q. From the foregoing, how many degrees of comparison do there appear 
to be, and what are they ? , 

116. Three— the positive, comparative, and superlative. 

Q* Adjectives, you recollect, describe nouns: to what, then, do they 
naturally belong ? 

Adjectives belong to the nouns which they describe, 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" A wiser child. 

117. A is an article, a word placed before nouns to limit 
their meaning ■ — indefinite ; it means no particular child — 
and belongs to child, agreeably to 

Rule II. The indefinite artieU a or an belongs to nouns of 
the singular number. 



fROJNOUNS. 17 

Wiser is an adjective, a word joined with a noun to 
describe it — " Pos. wise ; Comp. wiser ; Sup. wisest" — made 
in the comparative degree — and belongs to child, by 

Rule IV. Adjectives belong to the noims which they de~ 
scribe. 

Child is a noun ; it is a name — common ; it is a general 
name — common gender ; it may be either male or female — 
third person ; it is spoken of— and singular number ; it 
means but one. 

exercises in parsing continued. 

1. 2. 3. 

* A dutiful son." " An ugly child." " The base man." 

M An idle boy." " An irksome task." " The whiter cloth." 
M A foolish son." " A mild reply." " The milder weather." 

4. 5. 

14 The greatest man." " The more (1) benevolent citizen," 

" The wisest prince." " The most (1) suitable method." 

" The noblest man." " The least (1) distrustful friend." 

6. 7. 

u A large, convenient, and (1) " The last choice." 

airy habitation." " The best man." 

• 4 The intelligent, industrious, " The nearest relations." 

obedient, and (1) docile " Johnson's (2) large dictionary/ 
scholar." ** Murray's small grammar." 



IX. OF PRONOUNS. 

Q When 1 say, " John goes to school, John learns fast, and John will 
fcxcel," how can I speak so as to avoid repeating John so often? 

118. By using the word he in its place; thus, "John 
goes to school, he learns fast, and he will excel." 

Q. What little word, then, may stand for John ? 

119. He. 

Q.* What does the word pronoun mean? 

120. Standing for, or instead of, a noun. 
Q. What, then, shall we call the word he, above? 

121. A PRONOUN. 

Q. What, then, is a pronoun ? 

122. A pronoun is a word used for a noun, to avoid m 
repetition of the same word. 

Q. When James says, " I will study," you perceive that 7 stands for the 
person speaking : what person, then, is it ? (39.) 

0. When I say, " James, you must s»tudy," the word you evidently is 
Epplied to James, who is spoken to : what person, then, ought you to bo 1 

123. The second person. 

1. To He omitted in parsing. 2. Johnson's is governed by dictionary, by 

Rule I. 

B 2 * 



18 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Q. When 1 say, " He (meaning William) should learn," what person 
ought he to be, and why ? 

124. The third person ; because it stands in the place 
of a noun which is spoken of. 

Q. If / invariably stands for the first person, you for the second, and M 
for the third, how can we tell the different persons of pronouns ? 

125. By the pronouns themselves. 

Q. What have these pronouns been called from this circumstance ? 

126. Personal pronouns. 

$Cr 1 will now give you a list of all the personal pronouns, which yoa 
must first examine carefully, and then answer such questions on them m 
may be asked you. 

DECLENSION OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

FIRST PERSON. 

127. Sing. Plur. 

Norn. I. We. 

Pos8. My or mine. Ours or our. 

Obj. Me. Us. 

SECOND PERSON. 

Sing, Sing, Plur, 

Norn, Thou. 'I C Norn, You. Ye or you. 

Poss. Thy or thine. > or < Poss, Your or yours. Your or yours* 
Ohj. Thee. ) ( Ohj. You. You. 

THIRD PERSON MASCULINE. 

Sing. Plur. 

Norn. He. They. 

Poss. His. Theirs or their. 

Obj, Him. Them. 

THIRD PERSON FEMININE. 

Sing, Plur. 

Norn. She. They. 

Poss. Hers or her. Theirs or their. 

Obj. Her. • Them. 

THIRD PERSON NEUTER. 

Sing. Plur. 

Norn. It. They. 

Poss. Its. Theirs or their. 

Obj. It. Them. 

0. Will you decline I in both numbers ? thou or you ? he? she? it? 

Q. In what person, number, and case is It we? my? mine? oui ji 
zurg ? me? us? thou ? ye? his? they ? them ? 

Q. In what gender, person, number, and case is he ? she ? it ? his? he^t f 
ker ? him ? 

Q. How many numbers do pronouns appear to have, and what are thsy 1 

128. Two — the singular and plural. 

Q. How many cases, and what are they? 

129. Three — the nominative, the possessive, and the 
objective. 



PRONOUNS. 19 

Q. How many persona? 

180. Three — the first, second, and third. 

Q. How many genders? 

131. Three — the masculine, feminine, and neuter. 

O. How many pronouns are there in all, of the first person ? 

Q. How many of the second, and how many of the third ? 

Q. The pronouns of the nominative case, singular, are called leading 
fcronouns : how many of these are there ? 

183. Five—/, thou or you, he, she, it 

Q. Why are not the possessive and objective cases of the singular and 
plural numbers, also the nominatives plural, reckoned in the number of the 
Jeading pronouns ? 

134. Because they are all considered as variations of 
the nominative singular. 

Q. To which of the pronouns is it customary to apply gender ? 

135. To the third person singular, he, she, it 

Q. Why are not the first and second persons each made always to repre- 
sent a different gender ? 

136. The first and second persons being always pre- 
sent, their genders are supposed to be known. 

Q. If, as we have seen, pronouns stand for nouns, what gender, number, 
and person ought they to have ? 

137. The same as the nouns for which they stand. 

Q. What, xhen, may be considered a rule for the agreement of the pro- 
nouns f 

EUL1 "Wu 

Pronouns must agree with the nouns for which they 
standi in gender, number , and person* 

QUESTIONS ON PARSING. 
Q. How many different sorts of words have we now found, and what 
are they ? 

138. Four — the Noun, the Article, the Adjective, 
and the Pronoun, 

Q. The word part, you know, means division; and speech, the power of 
using words, or language : what, therefore, shall we call these grand divi- 
sions of words ? 

139. Parts of Speech. 

Q. When, then, I ask you what part of speech boy is, for instance, what 
do you understand me to mean ? 

140. The same as to ask me whether boy is a noun 
or not. 

Q, What part of speech, then, is William, and why ? (36.) 
1. "He went to school." 
' 2. " She went to her task." 

3. " William went to his play." 

4. " John returned from his school." 

5. " I request you to mind your studies." 

6. " The book was mine, but now it is yours." 

0. Will you name the pronouns in the six foregoing examples ? 
0. How many are there in all ? 

Q. What is the gender, number, and person of those ra the nisi f stecced* 
third ? fourth ? fifth t sixth ? 



20 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Q. What is the gender of his, in the fourth sentence ? why ? (137.) It« 
number ? why ? (137.) Its person ? why ? (137.) Its case ? why ? (61.) 

Q. Will you name the nouns in the first sentence ? in the second ? third f 
fourth ? fifth I sixth ? 



X. OF THE VERB. 

Q. When I say, " James strikes William," which word tells whst 
James does ? 

141. Strikes. 

Q. The word verb means word ; and as the words in all sentences, which 
tell what the nouns do, are the principal ones, what shall such words be 
called 

142. Verbs. 

Q. If, in the phrase, "William strikes James," we leave out the word 
strikes, you perceive at once that the sense is destroyed : what reason, then, 
can you give, for calling some words in a sentence verbs, and others by a 
different name ? 

143. The words which we call verbs are the most 
important. 

Q. "William studies his lesson, 7 ' Which word is the verb here, and 
why? 

144. Studies, because it tells what William does. 

Q. When I say, " John dances," which word is the verb, and why? 
Q. When I say, " James strikes John," which word shows that an 
action is performed? 

145. Strikes. 

Q. What kind of a verb, then, shall we call strikes t 

146. An active verb. 

Q. What kind of a verb is walks, in this sentence, " John walks," and 
why ? 

147. Walks is an active verb, because it expresses 
action. 

Q. "He beat William." Which word here is the verb? Is William 
an agent or an object ? 

148. An object 

Q. When I say, " The child walks," walks, it is true, is an active verb, 
but it has no noun after it for an object, as beat has, in the phrase above ; 
neither can we supply one ; for we cannot say, " The child walks," any 
thing- : what, therefore, is to be inferred from this fact, in regard to the 
nature of active verbs ? ♦ 

149. That some active verbs will take nouns after them 
for objects, and others will not. 

Q. We will next notice this difference. The term transitive means pass- 
ing over ; and when I say, " William whips Charles," the verb whips snows 
that the action which William performs, passes over to Charles as the object, 
What kind of a verb, then, shall we call whips ? 

150. An active-transitive verb. 

Q. What, then, is an active- transitive verb ? 

151. It is one that either has, or may have, an object 
after it. 

Q. Walks, we found, would not take an object after it ; and, as mtrarm- 
ft»« means fwt passing over, what shall we call such verba as walks t 



VERBS. 21 

152. Active-intransitive verbs. 

Q. What, then, is an active-intransitive verb? 

153. An active-intransitive verb is one that expresses 
action, but will not take an object after it. 

Q. When I say, " He eats it," " He beats him," we immediately deter- 
mine that beats and eats are active -transitive verbs by the objects aftc! 
them : how, then, may transitive and intransitive verbs be distinguished ? 

154. When we can place him or it after any active 
verb, and make sense, it is transitive; otherwise, it is 
intransitive. 

Q. " James remains at home — sleeps at home — is at home." Which 
words are the verbs here ? 

155. Remains, sleeps, and is. 

Q. These verbs do not imply action, like strikes, beats, &c. : what do 
they imply? 

158. Existence, rest, or being, in a certain state. 

Q. These verbs, and others of similar character, have been called neuter 
(signifying neither) by grammarians, because they are neither active nor 
passive. On a future occasion, I will make you fully acquainted with a 
passive verb. It is sufficient for our present purpose, that you perceive the 
reason of the name of the neuter verb. What is a neuter verb ? 

157. A neuter verb is one that simply implies being or 
existence in a certain state. 

<?. Will you inform me now, in general terms, what is a correct defini- 
tion of a verb ? 

158. A verb is a word which signifies action or being. 

Q. When I say, 4i I strike," in what number and person is strike, and 
why ? 

159. Strike is of the first person singular, because its 
agent, I, is of this person and number. 

Q. Hence you may perceive, that verbs, in themselves considered, do not 
fiave person and number : why, then, are they said to have these properties, 
at all? 

160. On account of the connection which they have 
with their agents or nominatives. 

Q. "We say, " I write," and " He writes ;" hence you perceive that the 
ending of the verb varies, as its agent or nominative varies : what, then, 
will be the rule for the nominative case ? 

RULE VI. 

T?ie nominative case governs the verb in numbet 
and person. 

Q. If the nominative case governs the verb in number and person, in 
what respect must the verb agree with its nominative case ? 

RUiiE trxx. 

A verb must agree with its nominative case in 
number and person. 

Q When I say, " James beats him," the pronoun him is the object cf 
the action denoted by beats, and i3, therefore, in the objective case : what, 
than, will be a good rule for the objective case after active verbs ? 

RULE VXZX. 

Active-transitive verbs govern the objective case. 



22 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Q. I will now give you the different endings of the verb Ume, in ; *js de- 
ferent numbers and persons. Will you repeat them ? 

Singular. PlwaL 

161. First person, I love. First person, We love. 
Second person, You love. Second person, You love. 
Third person, He loves. Third person, They lot e. 

Q. Will you repeat the variations of am? 

Singular. Plural. 

162. 1 Pers. I am. 1 Pers. We are. 
2 Pers. You are. 2 Pers. You are. 
8 Pers. He is. 3 Pers. They are. 

Q. Will you repeat, in the same manner, the variations of hate t desire f 
read f 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" / study my lesson" 

163. J is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—ifiTB- 
sonal ; it always denotes the same person, (the first) — fiest 
person ; it denotes the speaker — singular number ; it 
means but one — u Nom. I" — made in the nominative case 
to study, according to % 

Rule VI. The nominative case governs the verb in number 
and person. 

Study is a verb ; it expresses action — transitive ; it ad- 
mits an object after it — "1. Pers. I study" — made in the 
first person — singular number, because its nominative 1 
is, with which it agrees, agreeably to 

Rule VII. A verb must agree with its nominative case in 
number and. person. 

My is a pronoun, a word used for a noun — personal ; it 
always represents the same person — first person ; it repre- 
sents the person speaking — u Nom. I, Poss. my, or mine' 7 — 
made in the possessive case — and governed by the noun 
lesson, according to 

Rule I. The possessive case is governed by the following 
noun. 

Lesson is a noun — common ; it is a general name — neuter 
gender ; it is neither male nor female — third person ; it is 
spoken of — singular number ; it means but one — and in the 
objective case; it is the- object of the verb study ? and 
governed by it, according to 

Rule VIII. Active-transitive verbs govern the objective case. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

Transitive Verbs. 

" I lament my fate." " He found a dollar. " 

" Yon regard your friends." " She attends the school." 

"We desire your improvement." " It retards the work/' 

"We love our children." "They shun vice." 

"You make a knife." "Ye derive com 



VERBS 23 

2. 

" I love him/' " She forsook you." 

" I lament her." " They annoy me." 

« You assist them." " We took it." 

" He struck her." " She relieved us." 

" John reads his book." 

His is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun — per- 
sonal ; it uniformly stands for the same person — masculinh 
sender, third person, singular number, because the noun 
John is, with which it agrees, agreeably to 

Rule V. Pronouns must agree with the nouns for whim 
they stand, in gender, number, and person, 

" Nom. he ; Boss, his" — made in the possessive case — 
and governed by the noun book, according to 

Rule I. The possessive case is governed by the following 
ht>un, 

gj^Tlie remaining words, book, reads, and John, are parsed as before. 
EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

3. 

u Mary studies her lesson." " Virtue rewards its followers." 

'•The girls love their books." "A disobedient son grieves his 

*Good children mind their parents." 

parents." " The intemperate man loves his 

* Bin deceives its votaries." dram." 

ICf-In parsing personal pronouns, we do not apply Rule V. unless the nouns fos 
tdiich they stand are expressed. 

Intransitive Verbs. 
4, 
-* I walk." " You smile." " John swims." 

J James runs." " They wink." " Birds fly," 

* William hops." "We dance." "Lions roar." 

Neuter Verbs. 
** William is (1.) discreet" (2.) " John's wife is fortunate." 
" James is happy." " John's brother is unhappy." 

"He was studious." " The eagle's flight was sudden." 

" He became intemperate," " The scholar's duty is plain." 

" Thou art wise." " The judge's pay is sufficient" 



XL INDICATIVE MOOD— TENSE. 

Q. When James says, " I will learn," he evidently means, by his turn 
fser of speaking, to express his intention to learn ; but when he says, " 1 
can learn," what does he mean ? 

(1 .) Is is a verb ; it implies being — neuter ; it is neither active nor pas- 
sive, but expresses being, merely—" 1 pers. I am ; 2 pers. You are ; 3 vers, 
He or William is" — made in the third person, singular, because Wil- 
liam, its nominative, is, and agrees with William, according to 

Rule VII. A verb must agree with its nominative sage in number an/l person, 
• (%) Discreet belongs to William, by Rule TV. 



24 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

165. That he has the ability to learn. 

Q. What does the word mood mean % 

166. Mood means manner. 

Q. What, then, does the mood of verbs denote ? 

167. The different manner of representing actions. 

Q. What doe3 the word indicative mean? 

168. Declaring or showing. 

Q. When I say, " William has studied," I declare some fact: in what 
mood, then, shall we class has studied ? 

169. In the indicative mood. 

Q. When I say, " Has William studied?" the only difference between 
this phrase and the foregoing consists in a change in the order of the words, 
so as to show that a question is asked : in what mood, then, shall we call 
has William studied ? 

170. Indicative mood. 

Q. What, then, is the indicative mood used for? 

171. The indicative mood is used for asserting, indi- 
eating or declaring a thing, or asking a question. 

Q. In what mood is, "They do sing?" Why? (171.) 
Q. What does the word tense mean? 

172. Tense means time. 

Q. What does present mean ? 

173. Present means now. 

Q. When I say, " The bird sings," I mean that the bird sings now : us 
what tense, then, is sings ? 

174. In the present tense. 

Q. What, then, is the present tense used for? 

175. The present tense is used to express what is now 
taking place. 

Q. In what tense is, "The dog runs?" Why? (175.) 
Q. " James wrote." " James has written." These phrases denote 
what is past: in what tense are they? 

176. In the past tense. 

Q. What does- the word future mean ; as, " At some future time ?" 

177. Future means yet to come. 

Q. In what tense are the phrases, " I will come," " I shall have come f " 

178. In the future tense. 

Q. How many grand divisions of time do there appear to be, and who* 
are they ? 

179. Three — the present, past, and future. 

Q. When I say, "John wrote," is the action here spoken of past and 
Inished? 

180. It is. 

Q. What does imperfect mean? 

181. Unfinished, or incomplete. 

Q. " John was writing when I saw him." This denotes an action un- 
finished in past time, and corresponds with what is usually denominated in 
Latin the imperfect tense : hence the origin of the name selected by English 
grammarians to denote action past and finished ; a term not all significant of 
an action finished in past time : what, then, does the imperfect tense express ? 

182. The imperfect tense expresses what took place in 
past time, however distant. 

Q. " Peter wrote yesterday, and has. written to-dav." Here both act* of 



VERUS. 25 

writing are past &nd finished ; but. which has more immediate reference to 
fhe present time ? 

183. Has written. 

Q. To distinguish this tense from the imperfect, grammarians have ca^eo 
it the perfect tense : what, then, will the perfect tense express ? 

184. The perfect tense expresses what has taken p*ace, 
and also conveys an allusion to the present time.. 

Q. "James had read before I wrote." Here, both acts are past an$ 
finished ; but which took place first t 

185. The act of reading. 

Q. What does the word pluperfect mean t 

188. More than the perfect 

Q. What tense, then, shall we call, "James had read?" 

187. The pluperfect tense. 

Q. What, then, does the pluperfect tense express ? 

188. The pluperfect tense expresses what had taken 
place at or before some past time mentioned. 

Q. " John will come." This, you know, was called the future tensas 
can you tell me why ? 

189. Because it irnpiies time to come. i 

Q. What, then, does the future tense express? 

190. The future tense expresses what will take place 
hereafter. 

Q. "I shall have learned my lesson by noon." Here, an actbn is tc 
take place at a future time specified or mentioned ; and since we already 
have one future tense, we will call that the first, and this the second future 
tense : what, then, will the second future tense express ? 

191. The second future expresses what will have taken 
piace at or before some future time mentioned. 

Q. What does synopsis mean? 

192« A concise and, general view. 

Q. I will now present you with a synopsis of all the different tenses, 

illustrated by the verb learn : will you repeat it ? 

SYNOPSIS. 

193. Pres. tense, I learn, or do learn. 

Imp. tense, I learned, or did learn, 

Perf. tense, I have learned. 

Plup. tense, I had learned. 

1st Fut. tense, I shall or will learn. 

2d Fut. tense, I shall have learned. 

%$r You shall next have the different variations of the foregoing verb, in 
each tense of the indicative mood : these I wish you to study very carefully, 
vat yo^j. may be able to answer the questions which will then be asked yon. 

194. To learn. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

FRESK^T TENSE. 

Singular, Plural 

1 Pers, I learn. 1 Pers. We learn. 

2 Pers. You learn. % Pers. You learn. 
% Pers. He, she, or it leans*. 3 Per*, They team 



2G 



ENGLISH G R A M M A R. . 



OR, 

When we wish to express energy or positiveness, thus?- 
Singular, Plural 

I. I do learn. 1. We do learn. 

&. You do learn. 2. You do learn. 

3. He does learn. 3. They do learn. 



Singular, 
1. I learned. 
S. You learned. 
3. Ee learned. 

Singular. 
I. I did learn. 
S. You did learn. 
3. He did learn. 

Singular, 

1. I have learned. 

2. You have learned. 
I. He has learned. 

Singular. 

1. I had learned. 

2. You had learned. 

3. He had learned. 



OH, 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

Plural 

1. We lear&edL 

2. You learned. 

3. They learned. 

Plural. 

1. We did learn. 

2. You did learn. 

3. They did learn. 

PERFECT TENSE. 

Plural. 

1. We have learned. 

2. You have learned. 

3. They have learmd. 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

Plural. 

1. We had learned. 

2. You had foarced 

3. They had learned. 



FIRST FUTURE 
Singular. 

1. I shall or will learn. 

2. You shall or will learn. 

3. He shall or will learn. 



TENSE. 

Plural. 

1. We shall or will learn. 

2. You shall or will learn. 

3. They shall ®r will lsom 



SECOND 

Singular. 

1. I shall have learned. 

2. You will have learned, 

3. He will have learned. 



FUTURE TENSE. 

Plural. 

1. We shall have learned. 

2. You will have learned 

3. They will have learned. 



%* For the benefit of those who choose to retain the second person singu- 
lar, as given in former treatises, the following synopsis is inserted. 

SYNOPSIS. 

195. 2d Pers. Sing. Pres. Thou learnest, or dost l(kra. 



2d Pers, Sing, Imp. a 
2d Pers. Sing. Perf. 
2d Pers, Si?rg. Plup, 
2d Pers. Sing. 1st Fut, 
2d Pers. Sing, 2d Fut. 

Q. In what mood is, " I learn ?" 
(175.) In what mood and tense is, 



Thou learnedst, or didst iearxu 
Thou hast learned. 
Thou hadst learned. 
Thou shalt or wilt learn. 
Thou wilt have *earnea. 



Why? (171.) 
11 He learns ?" 



iearn?" "I have learned?'' "I had learned?" 
4 1 shall have learned ?" 

Q. In what person and number is, "I learn ?" 
team?" " They had learned?" " He shall learn V 

Q. What does the word auxiliary mean? 

196. Auxiliary means helping. 



In what tense ? Why ? 

"We learn?" "I did 

14 1 shall or will learn ?" 

"You learn?" "We 
' "We had learned?" 



VERBS. 27 

Q. In the phrase, " I will sing," will, you perceive, is used to help form 
&e future tense of sing : will is, therefore, called an auxiliary verb, and the 
yerb sing is reckoned the principal verb : what, then, are auxiliary verbs ? 

197. Auxiliary verbs are those by the help of which 
are formed the different tenses, moods, &c. of the prin- 
cipal verbs. 

Q. The auxiliary verbs are not unfrequently denominated the signs of tbo 
tenses, because each tense has, in general, an auxiliary peculiar to itself : 
what, then, is the sign of the secondfuture ? 

198. Shall or will ham. 

O. What is the sign of the first future f 

199. Shall or will. 

Q. What is the sign of the pluperfect ? 

200. Had. 

Q. What is the sign of the perfect? 

201. Have. 

Q. What i3 the sign of the imperfect ? 

202. Did. 

Q. We can sav, " I did strike yesterday/' or, "I struck yesterday f ' how, 
then, can we tell when a verb is in the imperfect tense without the sign did 2 

203. If we can place yesterday after the verb, and 
rqake sense, it is in the imperfect tense. 

Q. What is the sign of the present tense ? 

204. Do, or the first form of the verb. 

Q. From the foregoing, how many tenses does the indicative mood appear 
to have, and what are they ? 

205. Six ■ — the present, the imperfect, the perfect, the 
pluperfect, the first and second future tenses. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" They have arrived." 

206. They is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun — 
personal ; it always represents the same person — third 
person ; it denotes the persons spoken of — plural ; it means 
more than one — " Nom. he ; Boss, his ;" Obj. him. Plural. 
Nom. they" — made in the nominative ca3e to have arrived, 
according to 

Rule VI. The nominative case governs the verb. 

Have arrived is a verb, a w T ord that implies action or being 
— active ; it implies action — intransitive ; it does no 
admit of an object— indicative mood ; it simply indicates or 
declares a thing — perfect tense ; it expresses what, has just 
taken place — " 1. I have arrived ; 2. You have arrived ; 8. He 
has arrived. Plural, 1. We have arrived; 2. You have 
arrived ; 3. They have arrived'' — made in the third person 
plural, because its nominative they is, and agrees with it, 
according to 

Rule VII. A verb must agree with its nominative case in 
tout/the* find person. 



I 



2S ENGLISH GR A M M A R . 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

1. 

"They had come." "The sun has risen.'* 

" We did go." " Dogs will fight." 

" The bird will return." " Lions will roar." 

% 

M James loves William." " Columbus discovered America.' 

" Susan beats him." " Piety promotes our happiness." 

"I have beaten them." " He will learn his lesson." 

w She had beaten us." " John did make great progress/ 

"You shall assist him." "They do study their lessons." 

" It did disturb me." " Boys love sport." 

a' 

w Do I disturb you 1" " Shall I expect your assist* 

" Did they learn their lessons 1" ance 1" 

" Have they recited ?" " Will a virtuous citizen commit 

" Does the instructor teach us ?" such (1.) acts 1" 

" Had he dismissed him 1" " Have you found your knife !" 



XII. POTENTIAL MOOD. 

Q. What does, " He may write," imply ? 

207. Permission or liberty to write. 
Q. What does, "He must write," imply? 

208. Necessity of writing. • 

Q. What does, "He can write," imply? 

209. Power or ability to write* 

Q. What does, "He should write," imply? 

210. Duty or obligation to write. 

Q. What does, "He would write," imply? 

211. Will or inclination to write. 

Q. What does the word potential mean? 

212. Able, or fowerfuL 

Q. In what mood, then, do grammarians reckon can learn, may writ^ 
and, also, must write, should write, &c. ? 

213. In the potential mood. 

Q. Why are all these different forms of representing actions considered 
to be in the potential mood, a name, as we have seen, peculiar only to thai 
form of the verb which implies power ? 

214. To prevent multiplying moods to a great and 
almost numberless extent 

Q. What, then, does the potential mood imply? 

215. The potential mood implies possibility, liberty 
power, will, obligation, or necessity. 

Q. What are the signs of this mood? 

216. May, can, must, might, couM, would, and should. 

Q What does the word conjugation mean? 
(h) A&yee.tive 



VERBS 29 

217. Uniting, combining, or joining together. 

Q. You recollect that, in varying the verb, we ioined the pronouns with 
t; hence, this exercise is called conjugation : what, then, do you under- 
stand by the conjugation of a verb ? 

218. The conjugation of a verb is the regular combi- 
nation and arrangement of its several moods, tenses, 
numbers, and persons. 

219. Conjugation of the verb Learn. 
POTENTIAL MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 
Singular, Plural. 

1 . I may, can, or must learn. 1. We may, can, or must learn. 

2. You may, can, or must learn. 2. You may, can, or must learn. 

3. He may, can, or must learn. 3. They may, can, or must learn. 

IMPERFECT TENSE. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. 1 might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or 

learn. should learn. 

2. You might, could, would, or 2. You might, could, would, on 

should learn. should learn. 

3. He might, could, would, or 3. They might, could, would, cr 

should learn. should learn. 

PERFECT TENSE. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. I may, can, or must have 1, We may, can, cr must have 

learned. learned. . 

2. You may, can, or must have 2. You may, can, or must have 

learned. learned. 

3. He may, can, or must have 3. They may, can, or must have 

learned. learned. 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. 

L I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, or 

have learned. should have learned. 

8. You might, could, would, or 2. You might, could, would, or 

should have learned. should have learned. 

3. He might, could, would, or 3. They might, could, would, or 
should have learned. should have learned. 

Synopsis of the Second Person Singular, with Thou. 
220. 
Fres. Thou mayst, canst, or must learn. 
Imp. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst learn. 
Perf. Thou mayst, canst, or must have learned. 
Plup. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst have learned. 

Q. In what mood is, "I may learn?" Why? (215.) 

0. Will you repeat the synopsis with I ? thou ? he % we ? ye t you f they t 

Q. In what mood, tense, number, and person, is, " I can learn ?" " You 

may learn ?" " You might assist ?" " They could have learned ?" "He 

must study?" 

Q. In what mood and tense is, "I have learned?" "He shall run? 

* William did sing?" 
Q. Won von conjugate learn in the present tense, potential mood ? Will 

3* 



30 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

you conjugate love in the same mood, and imperfect tense ? Strike, in ike 
perfect tense % Come, in the pluperfect tense ? 
Q. How many tenses has the potential mood? 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 

" He may return" 

221. He is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun — 
personal; it invariably represents the same person — mascu- 
line gender ; it represents a male — third person ; it de- 
notes the person spoken of— singular number ; it implies but 
one—- and in the nominative case; it denotes the agent — 
" Nom. Ae" — -nominative case to may return^ by 

Rule VI. The nominative ease governs the verb, 

May return is a verb ; it implies action or being — active ; 
it implies action — intransitive ; it does not admit an object 
after it — potential mood ; it implies possibility, liberty, &c. 
— present tense ; it denotes what may be now — -".I. I may 
or can return ; 2. You may or can return ; 3. He may or can 
return" — made in the third person, singular, because its 
nominative he is, with which it agrees, according to 

Rule VII. A verb must agree with its nominative case in 
number and person. 

EXERCISES in parsing continued. 

i. 

" He may come. 5 * " Boys may learn arithmetic." 

" He might retire." " The wind may have shaken tha 
" John can assist me." trees." 

" William must obey his in- " The lady could have procured 

strueter." her fan." 

" We may have erred." "James may catch the thief." 

" John's father would go." " They might learn." 

2. 

"I do rejoice." "The committee will visit the 
"We do learn." school." 

" John will resume his task." " An idle boy will find pev- 
" An industrious boy will be rich." erty." 



XIII. CONJUGATION OF THE NEUTER VERB 
To be. 

222. When I say, " I am at home," you know that am is a verb, because 
it implies being* or existence ; and since to be means to exist, the verb osi 
baa been called the verb to he. 

223. INDICATIVE MOOD. 

present tense. 

Singular. PlurdL 

1. I am. 1. We are. 

2. You are. S. You are. 
8. He w. 3, They am 



V E E B S . 



31 



i. 
2. 
3. 


Singular, 
I was. 
You were. 
He was. 


IMPERFECT TENSE. 

Plural, 

1. We were. 

2. You were. 

3. They were. 


1 

2 
3 


Singular, 
I have been. 
You have been. 
He has been. 


PERFECT TENSE. 

PZaraJ. 

1. We have been. 

2. You have been. 

3. They have been. 


1. I had been. 

2. You had been. 
X He had been. 


PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

Plural. 

1. We had been. 

2. You had been. 

3. They had been. 


1. 

2, 
3. 


Singular, 
I shall or will be. 
You shall or will be. 
He shall or will be. 


FIRST 


FUTURE TENSE. 

Plural, 

1. We shall or will be 

2. You shall or will be 

3. They shall or will bs 


L 

3. 


I shall have been. 
You will have been. 
He will have been. 


SECOND 


FUTURE TENSE. 

Plural, 

1. We shall have been, 

2. You will have been, 

3. They will have been. 






POTENTIAL MOOD. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural, 

1. I may, can, or must be. 1. We may, can, or mvt&t, be. 

2. You may, can, or must be. 2. You may, can, or must be. 

3. He may, can, or must be, 3. They may, can, or must be. 

IMPERFECT TENSE. 

Singular, Plural. 

1. I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, r 

be. should be. 

2. You might, could, would, or 2. You might, could, would, <# 

should be. should be. 

3. He might, could, would, or 3. They might, could, would, ef 

should be. should be. 
PERFECT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. I may, can, or must have 1. We may, can, or must hav« 

been. been, 

% You may, can, or must have 2. You may, can, or must have 

been. / been. 

3, He may, can, or must have 3. They may, can, or must haro 

been. been. 
PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

Singular. Plural. 

1 I might, could, would, or should 1. We might, could, would, <rc 

have been. should have been. 

2, You might, could, would, or 2. You might, could, would, ew 

should have been. should have been. 

1. He might, could, would, or 3. They might, could, would, 99 

should have been. should have besn. 



o2 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

324, Synopsis of the Second Person Singular, with Tho®. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. POTENTIAL MOOD. 

Pres. Thou art. Pres. Thou mayst, canst, or must be. 

Imp. Thau wast. Imp. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldstj 

Perf. Thou hast been. or shouldst be. 

Plup. Thou hadst been. Perf. Thou mayst, canst, or must 

1 Fut. Thou shait or wilt have been. 

be. Plup. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, 

2 Fut Thou wilt have been. or shouldst have been. 



XIV. QUESTIONS ON THE FOREGOING CONJUGATION. 

Q. Why is am a verb ? (158.) What is it sometimes called ? (222.) Why 
is it so called ? (222.) 

Q. Will you give the synopsis of the verb to be with I through the indica- 
tive mood ? 

Q. Will you conjugate am in the present indicative ? Imperfect f Per- 
fect? Pluperfect? 1 Future? 2 Future? Present potential? Imper- 
fect ? Perfect ? Pluperfect ? 

Q. In what mood, tense, number, and person, is, "I am ?" " Am I?" 
"You were?" "I have been?" "Have you been?" "He may or can 
be?" "We should be?" "He may have been?" "They should have 
been ?" " Thou shouldst have been ?" " Thou mayst be ?" 

Q. Will you repeat the synopsis with thou t 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" The girls were industrious.'' 9 

225. Were is a verb ; it implies action or being — neuter ; 
it is neither active nor passive, expressing simply being — 
indicative mood ; it simply indicates or declares a thing — 
imperfect tense ; it expresses past time — " 1. I was ; 2. You 
were ; 3. He was. Plur. 1. We were ; 2. You were ; 3. They 
were, or girls were" — made in the thirp person plural, be- 
cause its nominative girls is, with which it agrees, agreeaory to 

Rule VII. A verb must agree with its nominative case in 
number and person. 

Industrious is an adjective, a word joined with a noun to 
describe it — " industrious, more industrious, most industrious" 
—in the positive degree ; it describes, without any compari- 
son — and belongs to the noun girls, according to 

Rule IV. Adjectives belong to the nouns which they de 
scribe. 

$£r Foi the and girls, apply Rules III. and VI. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

«* William is attentive." " Am I young?" 

" John is studious." " Was I wrong V 1 

" We are jealous." " Have we been wicked !" 

" Thou, art dutiful." " Were they penitent V 1 



ADVERBS. 33 

* Mary has been intelligent." " Washington waa patriotic." 

** The boys will have been dutiful." " Columbus was enterprising." 
M Their estate was small." " M> wife's mother is sick." 



XV. OF THE ADVERB. 

Q. When I say. " The bird flies swiftly," I do not mean by swiftly to 
describe bird : what dops swiftly describe ? 

226. The manner of flying. 

Q. To what part of speech is swiftly joined in the phrase, " The bird 

dies swiftly?" 

227. To the verb flies. 

Q. What does the word adverb signify 

228. Joined to a verb. 

Q. What, then, shall we call all such words as swiftly t 

229. Adverbs. 

Q. " John runs very swiftly." Which word here describes or shows 
how swiftly John runs * 

230. Very. 

Q. What is the word very called, and all such words as qualify or de- 
scribe adverbs ? > 

231. Adverbs. 

Q. " Industrious, more industrious, most industrious." What are *w>re 
and most called here, and why ? 

2S2. Adverbs, because they describe or qualify adjec- 
tives. 

Q. From the foregoing particulars, what appears to be a proper definition 
o\ adverbs ? 

233. Adverbs are words joined to verbs, adjectives, and 
other adverbs, to qualify or describe them. 

Q. "John visits me often, but Thomas oftener" In this example, we 
see that adverbs may be compared: will you, therefore, compare socnt 

234. " Soon, sooner, soonest." 

Q. Will you compare wisely? 

235. " Wisely, more wisely, most wisely." 

O. How do adverbs ending in ly appear to be compared ? 

236. By the adverbs more and most. 

Q. Will you in this manner compare admirably t foolishly t 

Q. Many adverbs are compared like adjectives of one syllable, as soon 

above ; but there is a very considerable number, the comparison of which 

is not regulated by any general rule. The following list embraces adverb? 

vsriousiy compared: will you repeat the comparative and superlative of 

each, as I name the positive ? 
S37. 



Positive. 


Comparative. 
oftener, 


Superlative. 
oftenest. 


Often, 


Much, 


more, 


most. 


Well, 


better, 


best. 


Soon, 


sooner, 


soonest. 


Justly, 
Wisely, 


more justly, 
more wisely, 


most justly, 
most wisely. 


Justly, 


less justly, 


least justly. 


Badly, cr ill. 


worse. 


WOTBt 



34 ENGLISH G R A M M A E . 

5138. JVbta.-- Adverbs, though very numerous, may nevertheless he reduced to & fsv> 
classes. You will now read with "attention the following list, and I will then as& 
you some questions respecting each class. 

1. Of number : as, " Once, twice, thrice," &.c. 

2. Of order: as, " First, secondly, thirdly, fourthly, fifthly, lastly, finally," &c. 

3. Of place: as, " Here, there, where, elsewhere, anywhere, somewheje, nowhers, 
herein, whither, hither, thither, upward, downward, forward, backward, whence 
hence, thence, whithersoever," &c. 

4. Of time. 

Of time present : as, " Now, to-day," &c. 

Of time past : as, " Already, before, lately, yesterday, heretofore, hitherto, oag 
eince, long ago," &c. 

Si time to come: as, "To-morrow, not yet, hereafter, henceforth, henceforward, 
fcy and by, instantly, presently, immediately, straight ways," &c. 

Of time indefinite : as, " Oft, often, ofttimes, oftentimes, sometimes., soon, seldom? 
daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, always, when, then, ever, never, again," &c. 

5. Of quantity : as, " Much, little, sufficiently, how much, how great, enough 
abundantly," &c. 

6. Of manner or quality: as, " Wisely, foolishly, justly, unjustly, quickly, slowly," 
&c. Adverbs of quality are the most numerous kind ; and they are generally formed 
by adding the termination ly to an adjective or participle, or changing It into ly : sa r 
" Bad, badly; cheerful, cheerfully; able, ably; admirable, admirably." 

7. Of doubt: as, " Perhaps, peradventure, possibly, perchance." 

8. Of affirmation: as, " Verily, truly, undoubtedly, doubtless, certainly, yea, ye*, 
surely, indeed, really," &c. 

9. Of negation : as, " Nay, no, not, by no means, not at all, in no wise," &c. 

10. Of interrogation : as, " How, why, wherefore, whether," &c. 

11. Of comparison: as, " More, most, better, begt, worse, worst, less, least, very, 
almost, little, alike," &c. v 

When a preposition suffers no change, but becomes an adverb merely by its appli- 
cation : as, when we say, " He rides about ;" " Ke was near falling ;" " But do not 
qfter lay the blame on me." 

There are also some adverbs, which are composed of nouns, and the letter a used 
instead of at, on, &c. : as, " Aside, athirst, afoot, ahead, asleep, aboard, ashore, abed, 
aground, afloat." . 

Q. Will you name two adverbs of number ? two of order f two of place f 
rwo of time present % two of time past ? two of time to come ? two of tims 
indefinite ? two of quantity ? two of manner or quality ? two of doubt ? two 
of affirmation ? two of negation ? two of interrogation ? two of comparison ? 

Q. Adjectives describe as well as adverbs j how, then, can you teil on© 
from the other ? 

289. Adjectives describe nouns, but adverbs describe 
or qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. 

Q. This fact should be remembered ; you shall, therefore, have it in the 
form of a rule : will you repeat it ? 

E¥LE IS. 

Adverbs qualify veths 9 adjectives^ and other adverbs, 

Q. From had we form the adverb badly : how, then, may a large clua» 
of adverbs be formed ? 

240. By adding ly to adjectives. 

Q. Will you in this manner form an adverb from wise ? from great ? from 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 

" The bird sings sweetly. 99 

241. Sweetly is an adverb, a word used to qualify a verb, 
adjective, or other adverb ; in this example it qualifies the yerh 
sings, agreeably to 

Rule IX. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and oth^r 
adverbs. 
* Sin?*, binl and thr are p&reed 3i before.. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



35 



EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 
Adverbs qualifying verbs. 
**The soldiers marched slowly." " They will return soon." 
* The girls sing delightfully." " The boys write admirably." 
M Henry improves rapidly." " Susan dances elegantly." 

Adverbs qualifying adjectives. 
"He was very attentive." "James is more studious." 

"John is quite busy." " Walter is most studious." 

" William is really studious." ' " Ellen is less happy." 

Adverbs qualifying verbs and other adverbs. 
6s You learn grammar very well." " James writes most elegantly.* 
" The boys write too fast." " I will assist you most chee? 

" He will come much oftener." fully." 

Adverbs promiscuously used. 
" He has read once." " John is not happy." 

" I will first remind you." " Whither shalll fly 1" 

" I saw him yesterday." " My brother sends me the papes 

" I have eaten sufficiently." monthly." 



XVI. OF THE PREPOSITION 

Q. To say, "The cider is-— cellar," would make no sense: can yon 
Inform me what would make sense ? 

242. " The cider is in the cellar." 

Q. By placing the little word in after cider is, and before cellar, the sen- 
tence is rendered complete : what office, then, does in perform ? 

243. It connects words, and thereby shows the relation 
between them. 

Q. What does the word preposition mean? 

244. Placed before. 

Q. What, then, may those words like in be called, ag they are placed 
before other words to connect them with words preceding ? 

245. Prepositions. 

Q. What, then, are prepositions? 

246. Prepositions are words used to connect words, and 
thereby show the relation between them. 





247. List of the principal Prepositions. 


Among 
around 


\ 


at concerning 


near 


throughout 




by down 


of 


touching 


amidst 




below except 


off 


up 


athwart 




between excepting 


on 


upon 


after 




beneath for 


over 


under 


about 




behind from 


out of 


underneath 


against 




betwixt in 


respecting 


unto 


across 




beside into 


to 


with 


above 




beyond instead of 


towards 


within 


according 


to 


before notwithstanding 


through 


without 



Q. Will you mention the prepositions beginning with at with bf ct at 
tf ft if nt o? r? t? ut wt 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Will yon now repeat all the prepositions ? 
i. Do we say, "He works for I," or, "He warks for ms"! 
2- In what case is met (127.) 

What case, then, follows prepositions ? 

248. The objective case. 
Q. Tho* fact is of sufficient importance to constitute a nfie i will ym 
therefore, repeat 

RULE 2T. 

Prepositions govern the objective case. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
"John found his hat in the road." 

249* In is a preposition, a word used to connect words 
mid show the relation between them ; it here shows the relation 
between hat and road. 

Road is a noun ; it is a name — common ; it is a general 
name — neuter gender ; it is neither male nor female — third 
person ; it is spoken of — singular number ; it means but one 
—-objective case ; it is the object of the relation denoted by 
the preposition in, and governed by it according to 

Rule X. Prepositions govern the objective case* 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

"John ran through the house into "I will search the house dili- 

tbe garden." gently for him." 

v We have deceived him to our " We might learn the lesson be* 

sorrow." fore them." 

"We came in season." "According to my impression, he 

" You study grammar for your is in fault." 

improvement in language." " Notwithstanding his poverty, ha 

" From virtue to vice the progress was the delight of his ac~ 

is gradual." quaintarices." 

M They travelled into France "On all occasions she behaved 

through Italy." with propriety." 

41 He lives within his income." " Of his talents we might say 

u Without the aid of charijy, he much." 

lived very comfortably by his " We may expect a calm after * 

industry." storm." 



XVII. OF THE CONJUNCTION. 

Q, When I say, " John -his book," the sense, you perceive, ismcodfr 

©lete. Can you put a word into the blank which will complete the sens© f 

250. " John reads his book." 

• The remaining word* are pare©d as before. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 37 

Q. Can you inform me what the foregoing expression is called t 

251. A sentence. 

Q. What, tj^en. is a sentence ? 

252. A collection of words, forming a complete sense. 

Q. " Life is short." This expression is called a sentence : can you tell 
me what kind, and why ? 

253. It is a simple sentence, because it makes sense, 
and has but one nominative and one verb. 

Q. What does the term compound mean? 

254. It means composed of two or more things. 

Q. " Life is short, and art is long." This sentence is made up of tws 
simple sentences : what, therefore, may it he called ? 

255. A compound sentence. 

Q. What, then, is a compound sentence ? 

256. A compound sentence contains two or more sim- 
ple sentences connected together. 

Q. What does the term conjunction signify? 

257. Union, or joining together. 

Q. In the compound sentence, " John writes, and William learns,"' tha 
simple sentences are joined together by the word and : what word, then, 
i*»ay and be called ? 

258. A Conjunction. 

Q. " The king and queen are an amiable pair." In this sentence, words 
smd not sentences are connected by and : can you point out the words so 
•snnnected ? . 

259. King and queen. 

Q. From the foregoing particulars, what appears to be the use of tha 
conjunction ? 

260. A conjunction is used to connect words and sen- 
tences together. 

Q. When I say, " Five and four are nine," what do I mean? 

281. Five added to four make nine. 

Q. What, then, is implied by and? 

262. Addition. 

Q. When I say, " I will go, if you will accompany me," what does tits 
conjunction if imply ? 

263. Condition or supposition. 

Q. What does the word copulative mean? 

264. Uniting, joining, or linking together. 

Q. And , if, &e. are called copulative conjunctions : can you tell me why % 

265. Because a copulative conjunction connects or con- 
tinues a sentence by expressing an addition, a supposition, 
a cause, &c. 

Q. The following are the principal conjunctions of this class : will yoti 
repeat them ? 

266. " And, both, because, besides, for, if, provided, 
since, then, that, therefore, wherefore." 

Q. When I say, " James and John will come," I mean both will coma , 
but when I say, " James or John will come," what do I mean ? 

267. That either James or John, ona of them, will 
come. 



38 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Q. Are the words in this sentence, then, joined or disjoined 1 

268. Disjoined. 

Q. What word is it that expresses the disjoining? 

269. Or. 

Q. What part of speech is or ? 

270. Conjunction. 

Q. What does the word disjunctive mean? 

271. Disjoining or separating. 

Q. What kind of a conjunction, then, shall we call or$ 

272. A disjunctive conjunction. 

Q. "James will come, but Henry will not." Here the two clauses ©i 
tiie sentence are opposed to each other in meaning, and the word but sepa- 
rates these two clauses : what, then, does this word imply ? 

273. Opposition of meaning. 

Q. From the foregoing, what appears to be the use of the disjunctive 
conjunction ? 

274. The conjunction disjunctive connects sentences, by 
expressing opposition of meaning in various degrees. 

Q. The following are the principal conjunctions of this class : will yo^ 
repeat them ? 

275. " But, than, though, either, or, as, unless, neither, 
nor, less, yet, notwithstanding/' 

Q. Prepositions, you recollect, connect words, as well as conjunctions ; 
how, then, can you tell the one from the other ? 

276. Prepositions show the relation between words, but 
conjunctions express an addition, a supposition, a cause, 
or an opposition of meaning. 

Q. " He and she write." In what case is he ? she t 

Q. The pronouns he and she, you perceive, are both in the same case 
and connected by the conjunction and : when, then, may nouns and pro- 
nouns be connected ? 

277. When they are in the same case. 

Q. " She will sing and dances." How may this sentence be corrected! 

278. " She will sing and dance." 

Q. In what mood and tense is, "She will sing f " 

Q. To say, "She dance," is incorrect; dance, then, in this example, 
cannot be in the present tense : will you, then, inform me what " She will 
sing and dance" means, when fully expressed ? 

279. " She will sing and she will dance/' 

Q. Here will dance is in the future tense, as well as will sing : when, 
then, may verbs, in general, be connected ? 

280. When they are in the same mood and tense. 

Q. From the foregoing particulars, what appears to* be the rule for the 
use of conjunctions, in connecting words ? 

HlJlflU XI. 

Conjunctions usually connect verbs of the same 
mood and tense^ and nouns or pronouns of ike 
same case. 



I N T E R,J LOTIONS. 39 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" John assists Ms father and mother" 
281. And is a conjunction, a word chiefly used to connect 
words and sentences — copulative ; it connects father and 
mother. 

Mother is a noun ; it is a name — common ; it is a general 
name — feminine gender ; it is the name of a female — 
fhird person ; it is spoken of — singular number ; it means 
but one — and it is one of the objects of assists, and is, there- 
fore, in the objective case, and connected with father by the 
conjunction and, according to 

Rule XL Conjunctions usually connect verbs of the same 
mood and tense, and nouns or pronouns of the same case. 

EXERCISES' IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

* I will reward him and them at " She reads well, dances (3.) ele- 

some future time." gantly, and plays admirably 

" We in vain (1.) look for a path on the piano- forte." 

between virtue and vice." " Intemperance destroys the mind 

* e Reproof either hardens or soft- and benumbs the senses of 

ens its object." man." 

** In the morning of life, we ea- " You may read this sentence 

geriy pursue pleasure, but first, and then parse it." 

oftentimes meet (2.) with sad M He has equal knowledge, but 

disappointments." inferior judgment" 

*A good scholar never, mutters "John rises early in the morning, 

nor disobeys his instructor." and pursues his studies." 



0. Wfe 

for life," 



XVIII. OF INTERJECTIONS. 

When I exclaim, " Oh ! I have ruined my friend," " Alas ! I fea? 
fe," which words here appear to be thrown in between the sentences, 
to express passion or feeling ? 

282. Oh! Alas! 

Q. What does interjection mean? 

288. Tlirown between. 

Q. What name, then, shall we give such words as ch ! alas ! &c. f 

284. Interjections. 

Q. What, then, are interjections? 

285. Interjections are words thrown in between the 
parts of sentences, to express the passions or sudden 
feelings of the speaker. 

(1.) In vain means the same as vainly. It may, therefore, be called an 
adverbial phrase, qualifying look, by Rule IX. 

(2.) Meet agrees with we understood, and is, therefore, connected with 
pursue by the. conjunction hut, according to Rule XI. 

(3.) Dancw and plays both agree with she, understood, and arc, therefore, 
cKmnectcd the former with read*, and the latter with dances, by Rulft XI. 



40 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

LIST OF INTERJECTIONS. 

1. Of earnestness or grief; as, " O ! oh ! alas ! ah E w 

2. Of wonder; as, "Really! strange!" 

3. Of calling; as, "Halloo! ho! hem!*' 

4. Of attention; as, "Behold! lo! hark!" 

5. Of disgust f as, " Foh ! fy ! fudge ! away !" 

6. Of silence ; as, " Hush ! hist !" 

7. Of contempt; as, "Pish! tush!" 

8. Of saluting ; as, " Welcome ! hail !" 

Q. Will you examine the foregoing list, and then name an interjection of 
grief? One of wonder? One of calling ? One of attention? One of dia 
gust ? One of silence 9 One of saluting ? 

Q. How may an interjection generally be known ? 

286. By its taking an exclamation point after it. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 
" Oh ! I have alienated my friend" 

287. Oh is an interjection, a word used to express pas- 
sion or feeling. 

Idr The remaining words are parsed, as before. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

" Oh ! I must go and see (1.) my " Strange ! I did not know 
dear father before (2.) he dies." you." 

M We eagerly pursue pleasure, but, "Hush! our instructer is at the 
alas! we often mistake the door." 

road to its (3.) enjoyment." " Fy ! how angry he is !" 

(1.) The sense is, "I must go, and I must see;" the verb see, toes, 
agrees with I, understood, and is, therefore, connected with must go, u& 
«3Cfdhiff to Rule XI. 

(8.) Before, an adverb. 

($.) Apply, first, Rule V. ; fchen, Enfe L 



RECAPITULATION. 



CRITICAL REMARKS. 

0OKPOSITIO2T. 

XIX. ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

288. English Grammar teaches us to speak and write tm 
English language correctly. 

289. Grammas is divided into four parts, namely, 

290. 1. Orthography, 3. Syntax, 
2. Etymology, 4. Prosody. 



XX. OF ORTHOGRAPHY. 

291. Orthography includes a knowledge of the nature and 
power of letters, and teaches how to spell words correctly. 
This part of grammar is usually learned from spelling-book? 
and dictionaries. 
892. Orthography means word-making, or spelling, 



XXI. OF ETYMOLOGY. 

293. Etymology teaches how to form, from all the words 
in the English language, several grand divisions or sorts, com- 
monly called Parts of Speech. 

294. It includes a knowledge of 'the meaning and use of 
words — also their different changes and derivations. 

295. Etymology signifies the origin or pedigree of words. 

XIX. What does English grammar How is a knowledge of orthography 
leach? 288. usually obtained? 201. 

Into how many parts is it divided ? 289. What does orthography mean ? 292. 
What are they ? 290. XXI. What does etymology teach ? HSl 

XX. What does orthography include What does it include ? 294. 

«uid teach ? 291. What does the word signify ? 295. 

4"* (41) 



SNG L1SH GRAMMAR. 

XXII. OF SYNTAX. 

296. Syntax teaches how to arrange or form words into 
sentences correctly. 

297. It includes a "knowledge of the rules of com^osi* 

f on, formed from the practice of the best writers and 

speakers. 

298. Syntax signifies arranging or -placing together; or, as used in gram 
eaar, sentence-making. 



XXIII. ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX COMBINED, 

299. The words of the English language are usually 
divided into nine sorts, commonly called Parts of Speech, 
nanr.ely, ' 

Noun, . Pronoun, Preposition, 

Article, Verb, Conjunction, 

Adjective, .; Adverb, Interjection. 



XXIV. OF. NOUNS. 

300. A noun is the name of any person, place or thing; &s, 
man, London, knife. 

301. Nouns are of two kinds, proper and common. 
Common nouns are general names ; that is, they are names 

common to all individuals of the same kind or sort ; as, house, 
city, river. 

302. Proper nouns are particular names; that is, they 
&re the names of particular individuals of the same kind or sort ; 
as, George, Boston, Mississippi. 

303. When proper names have an article placed before them, they are 
used as common names ; as. " Re is the Cicerc of his age." 

304. When a proper noun admits of a plural, it becomes a common noon ; 

XXII. What does syntax teach ? 296. What does the word common mean 
What does it include ? 297. 31. 

What does the word signify? 298. What is a common noun ? 301. Givu 

XXIII. How many different sorts of an example. 

Brords are there ? 299. What does proper mean ? 34. 

What are they ? 299. What is a proper noun ? 302. Give an 

What are these sorts of words coin- example. 

eionly called ? 299. When proper nouns have an art/ri<s 

XXIV. What does the word noun before them, how are they used? 303 
ssean ?* Give an example. 

What is a noun ? 300. Give an esam- Are proper names used as such in iha 

^ie, plural ? 304. 

How many different kinds of nouns are Why cannot proper names faav© & 

feere, and what are they ? 301. plural? 304. 

• 8s* L J*t sjwwar. 



NOUNS. 43 

as, " The twelve Casars," or, " The seven Jameses." This w obvious 
rrom the fact, that a proper name is, in its .nature, descriptive of one object 
only, and, therefore, essentially singular. Accordingly, the nouns Span- 
lard, European, American, &c. are common nouns, as well as their pltirala, 
Spaniards, Europeans, Americans, &c* 

305. Common nouns may also be used to signify individuals, by the 
addition of articles or pronouns ; as, " The boy is studious ;" " That girl is 
discreet." 

306. When a noun signifies many, it is called a noun of multitude, or a 
collective noun ; as, " The people," " The army." 

307. Abstract signifies taken from: hence an abstract noun is the name of 
a quality abstracted from its substance ; as, knowledge, goodness, virtue, &c. 

308. To nouns belong person, gender, number and case. * 



XXV. PERSON, 
i 
S09. When any person, in speaking, introduces his own 
name, it is the first person ; as, " I, James, of the city of Bos- 
ton, do give," &c. 

810. The name of the person spoken to, is the second person ; 
as, " James, come to me." 

311. The name of the person or thing spoken of, or about, 
is the third person ; as, " James has come.' 



XXVI. GENDER. 

312. Gender is the distinction of sex. 

313. Nouns have four genders— the masculine, the feminine, 
the common, and the neuter. 

314. The masculine gender denotes the names of males; as 
man, hoy, &c. 

315. The feminine gender denotes the names of females ; as, 
woman, girl. 

What do they become when so used? When is a noun of the second person? 

104. Give an example. 310. Give an example. 

What kind of nouns are Spaniard, When is a noun of the third person J 

Americans, Spaniards 1 304. 311. Give an example. 

What effect does the use of articles XXVI. What does the word gend&r 

»p.ave on common nouns? 305. mean ? 14. 

What is a noun of multitude, or a col- v* r ha.t is gender as applied to nouns? 

&ective noun ? 306. Give an example. 312. 

What is an abstract noun ? 307. Give What (Joes the word masculine inean?15. 
mi example. , What does the masculine gender of 

What belong to nouns? "308. nouns denote? 314. Give an example. 

XXV. When is a noun of the first per- What does feminine mean ? 1j. 

son ? 309. Give an example. What docs the feminine gender denote* 

315. Give an example. 

* Spain i» the proper name of a country, and Spaniard has, by some grammarians, b?en rulied the prop* 
•libs of a people; bat th« lattter is a generic terra, charaeteriziafr any one of a creat niuabtr Pt ps^^n*, J»j 
tour cT'Enexieu wiii Sjwin. — £ncycVj;;g<fta, 



44 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



316. The common gender denotes the names of such ani« 
mals as may be either male or female ; as, -parent, bird. 

317. The neuter gender denotes the names of objects which 
are neither males nor females ; as, chair, table. 

318. Some nouns, naturally neuter, do, by a figure of speech, as it is 
called, become masculine or feminine ; as when we say of the sun, ' ' 11% is 
setting," and of a ship, " She sails well," &,c. 

319. The English language has three methods of distinguishing sex, via t 
319-1. By different words; as, 



Male. 


Female. 


Male. 


Female. 


Bachelor, 


Maid. 


Husband, 


Wife. 


Boar, 


Sow. 


King, 


Queen. 


Boy, 


Girl. 


Lad, 


Lass. 


Brother, 


Sister. 


Lord, 


Lady. 


Buck, 


Doe. 


Man, 


Woman. 


Bull, 


Cow. 


Master, 


Mistress. 


Bullock or ~) 
Steer, 5 


Heifer. 


Milter, 
Nephew, 


Spawner. 
Niece. 


Cock, 


Hen. 


Ram, 


Ewe. 


Dog, 
Drake, 


Bitch. 
Duck. 


Singer, 


C Songstress m 
£ Sine er. 


Earl, 


Countess 


Sir, 


Madam. 


Father, 


Mother 


Sloven, 


Slut. 


Friar, 


Nun. 


Son, 


Daughter. 
Hind. 


Gander 


Goose. 


Stag, 


Hart, 


Roe. 


Uncle, 


Aunt. 


Hors8 ? 


Mare. 


Wizard, 


Witch. 




319-2. By a differenc 


e of termination ; 


as, 


Male. 


Female. 


Male. 


Female. 


Abbot, 


Abbess. 


Enchanter, 


Enchantress, 


Actor, 


Actress. 


Executor, 


Executrix. 


Administrator 


, Administratrix. 


God, 


Goddess. 


Adulterer, 


Adulteress. 


Governor, 


Governess. 


Ambassador, 


Ambassadress. 


Heir, 


Heiress. 


Arbiter, 


Arbitress. 


Hero, 


Heroine. 


Baron, 


Baroness. 


Hunter, 


Huntress. 


Bridegroom, 
Benefactor, 


Bride. 


Host, 


Hostess. 


Benefactress. 


Instricter, 


Instructress. 


Caterer, 


Cateress. 


Jew, 


Jewess. 


Chanter, 


Chantress. 


Landgrave, 


Landgravine. 


Conductor, 


Conductress. 


Lion, 


Lioness. 


Count, 


Countess. 


Marquis, 


Marchioness* 


Czar, 


Czarina. 


Mayor, 


Mayoress. 


Deacon, 


Deaconess. 


Patron, 


Patroness. 


Duke, 


Duchess. 


Peer, 


Peeress. 


Elector, 


Electress. 


Poet, 


Poetess. 


Emperor, 


Empress. 


Priest, 


Priestess. 



What does the common gender denote ? 
218. Give an example. 

What does neuter mean ? 23. 

What does the neuter gender denote ? 
817: Give an example. 

What is said of nouns naturally neu- 
ler, in respect to gender? 318. Give an 
example. 

How many genders do nouns have, and 
what are they ? 30. 

How many methods are there in Eng- 
lish of distinguishing sex 7 319. 

Which is the first ; as, boy ? girl? 319-1. 

Viiil you spell the feminine correspond' 
'■#* to brother? 319-1. to boy » wtpketo? 



wizard ? friar ? Hr ? drake ? earl ? gander ? 
hart ? king ? lad ? man ? master ? singer 7 
sloven 1 son ? stag ? uncle ? 

Will you spell the masculine corro- 
sponding to maid ? girl ? madam ? daugh- 
ter? niece? 

What is the second method of distin« 
guishing sex ; as, abbot ? abbess ? 319-2. 

Will you spell the feminine corre- 
sponding to abbot ? actor ? administrator t 
baron ? benefactor ? bridegroom ? conduct- 
or? czar? duke? emperor? executor 1 
god? governor? heir? hero? host? hunt- 
er ? instructer ? Jew ? lion ? marquis ? pa- 
tron? peer? proprietor 1 ihsphsrd? esr 





NO (J 


N8. 




MaU. 


Female. 


Male. 


Female. 


Prince, 


Princess. 


Sultan, 


C Sultaness. 
C Sultana. 


Prior, 


Prioress. 


Prophet, 


Prophetess. 


Tiger, 


Tigress. 
Traitress. 


Protector, 


' Protectress. 


Traitor, 


Proprietor 


Proprietress. 


Tutor, 


Tutoress. 


Shepherd, 


Shepherdess. 


Viscount, 


Viscountess 


Songster, 


Songstress. 


Votary, 


Votaress. 


Sorcerer, 


Sorceress. 


Widower, 


Widow. 


319-3. 


By prefixing a noun 


, pronoun, or 


adjective ; as, 


A cock 


-sparrow, 


A hen 


-sparrow. 


A man-servant, 


A maid- servant. 


A he-goat, 


A she 


-goat. 


A he-bear, 


A she -bear. 


A male child, 


A female child. 


Male descendants, 


Female descendants. 



45 



XXVII. NUMBER, 



820. Number shows how many are meant, whether one o* 
more. 

321. Nouns have two numbers, the singular and the plural, 

322. The singular number expresses but one ; as, boy. 

323. The plural number implies more than one ; as, boys. 

324. Some nouns are used in the singular number only ; as 
wheat , gold, sloth, pride, dutifulness. 

325. Other nouns are used in the plural number only ; &.&> 
bellows, scissors, lungs, riches, &c. 

326. Some nouns are the same in both numbers ; as, deer, 
sheep, swine. 

327. The plural number of nouns is regularly formed by 
adding s to the singular ; as, sing, dove, plur. doves. 

328. The irregular mode of forming the plural is as follows : when the 
noun singular ends in aj, ch, soft, sh, or ss, we add es to form the plural ; 83, 
box, boxes ; church, churches ; lash, lashes ; kiss, kisses. 

329. Nouns ending in / or/e, change these terminations into ves to form 
the plural ; as, loaf, loaves ; wife, wives. 



ttrer? sultan? tiger? tutor? viscount? 
notary ? widower 7 

Will you spell the masculine corre- 
sponding to abbess? czarina? duchess? 
ambassadress? heroine! huntress? poet- 
ess ? prophetess ? widow ? 

What is the third method of distin- 
guishing sex ; as, a man-servant ? a maid- 
servant? 319-3. 

Will you spell the feminine corre- 
sponding to male child? male descendants ? 

XX VII. What does the word number 
mean? 5. 

What does the number of nouns sliow 1 

m. 

Wtiat do*s singular mean 1 6. 



What does the singular number of 
nouns imply? 322. Give an example. 

What does plural mean ? 10, 

What does the plural number of nouns 
imply ? 323. Give an example. 

How are wheat, gold, &c. used ? 324. 

How are bellows, lungs, &.c. used ? 325. 

What is said of deer, sheep, &c. ? 326. 

How many numbers do nouns have, 
and what are they ? 321. 

How is the plural number regularlj 
formed? 327. Gi^e an example. 

When do we add es to form the plural 1 
328. Give an example. 

What is the plural of loaf? 329. 

What is the rule to? it ? 388. 



46 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



330. When a noun singular ends in y, with a vowel before it, the plural 
is formed regularly ; as, key, keys ; delay, delays ; valley, valleys. But il 
the y does not have a vowel before it, the plurai is formed by changing $ 
into ies ; 2m, fiv , fiies ; beauty, beauties. 

321, The following nouns form their plurals not according to any general 
rules : — 

Plur. 
Mice. 
Lice. 
i" Cows or 
> Kine. 
"•Pence. (1.) 
Dice. (2.) 
Peas. (3.) 



Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Man, 


Men. 


Mouse, 


Woman 


Women. 


Louse, 


Child, 
Ox, 


Children, 

Oxen. 


Cow, 


Tooth, 


Teeth. 


Penny, 


Foot, 


Feet. 


Die, 


Goose, 


Geese 


Pea, 



Sing. Plur. 

Fish, Fishes. (3.) 

Cupful, Cupfuls. 

Spoonful, Spoonfuls. 

Brother-in-law, Brothers-in-law, 
Court-martial, Courts-martial. 



332. Mathematics, metaphysics, pneumatics, ethics, politics, &c. are reck- 
oned either as singular or plural nouns. The same is equally true of means.; 
alms, amends. Antipodes, credenda, minuties, literati, &c. are always plural. 
Bandit is now considered the singular of banditti. The noun news is always 
singular. Many nouns form their plurals according to the laws of th$ lan- 
guage from which they are derived. The following are of this class ; - 



Singular. 
Antithesis, 

Appendix, 

Apex, 
Arcanum, 

Automaton, 

Axis, 
Beau, 

Basis, 
Calx, 

Cherub.. 

Crisis, 

Criterion, 

Datum, 

Diaeresis, 

Desideratum, 

Effluvium, 

Ellipsis, 

Emphasis, 

Encomium, 

j&rratum, 



Plural. 

Antitheses. 
5 Appendixes or 
£ Appendices. 

Apices. 

Arcana. 

Automata. 

Axes. 

Beaux or Beans. 



Calces. 
{"Cherubim or 

(. Cherubs. 

Crises. 

Criteria. 

Data. 

Diasreses. 

Desiderata.' 

Effluvia. 

Ellipses. 

Emphases. 
5 Encomia or 
\ Encomiums, 
" Errata. 



Singular. 

Genius, 
Genus, 
Hypothesis, 
Ignis fatuus, 

Index, 

Lamina, 

Magnus, 

Memorandum, 



Plural. 

Genii. (4.) 

Genera. 

Hypotheses. 

Ignes fatui. 
{Indices or 
£ Indexes. (5.) 

Laminae. 

Magi. 
5" Memoranda or 
\ Memorandums. 
Metamorphosis, Metamorphoses. 



Parenthesis, 
Phenomenon, 
Radius, 
Stamen, 

Seraph, 

Stimulus, 
Stratum, 
Thesis, 
Vertex, 

Vortex, 



Parentheses. 

Phenomena. 

Radii or Radiuses. 

Stamina. 
C Seraphim or 
£ Seraphs. 

Stimuli. 

Strata. 

Theses. 

Vertices. 
{ Vortices or 
(_ Vortexes. 



Will you spell the plural of delay? 330. 
valley? What is the rule for forming 
these plurals? 330. 

Will you spell the plural of fiy ? 330. 
beauty ? Rule for the plural ? 

Do man, icoman, form their plurals re- 
gularly, or irregularly ? 331. 

Will you spell the plural of man ? of 
tcoman? child? ox? tooth? foot? goose? 
fiiouse ? louse ? brother ? die ? fsh ? spoon- 
ful ? court-martial ? 

Will you spell the singular of live? 
kine ? cows ? brethren ? oxen ? teeth ? 
penes? pennies? peas? jiskes? cupfuls? 
brothers-in law ? 

What is the plural of pea, when we re- 
fer to quantity ? Of fish ? 



What is the singular of banditti 1 
332. 

In accordance with what laws does 
antithesis form the plural ? 332. 

Will you spell the plural of apex? ap- 
pendix? arcanum? automaton ? axis ? cr'i 
sis? basis? criterion? datum? desidera- 
tum ? effluvium ? encomium ? erratum 7 
genius? index? memorandum? 

Will you spell the singular of buses? 
beaux? cherubs? ellipses? genii? theses? 
parentheses ? stimuli ? strata ? 

How are mathematics, optics, Sec. coc« 
sidered in regard to number? 332. 

Of what number is means? 332. alTnsl 
amends? antipodes? literati? news? 



(1.) Pennies, when the, coin it meant. (2.) Bits, for coining. (3.) Pease and fiih, meaning quantise* ; b*i 
pe&a and fishes, when number is meant. 

(4.) Genii, when denoting aerial or imaginary spirits : ganiusts, wfcea denoting pen»n» of jeniaa. <&.) /• 
lUiuur, when dosalinf pointer* or tai>l*» of content* ; indiau, when roforriut; to tltfuutirajc <jua.abt\*«. 



N GUNS. 



47 



XXVIIL CASE. 

833. Case means the different state, condition, or relation 
which nouns have to other words in the same sentence. 

334. In English, nouns have three cases — the nominative 
the possessive, and the objective. 

335. The nominative case is usually the agent or doer, and 
always the subject of the verb. 

336. The subject is the thing chiefly spoken of; as, " John assists Wil- 
liam:" here, John is the subject spoken of, or the nominative case to the 
verb assists. 

337. The possessive case denotes possession, ownership, pro- 
perty, &c. ; as, " William's book." This case may be distin^ 
guished from the other cases by the apostrophe or the letter s. 

338. A noun in the singular forms its possessive case by 
taking the apostrophe and the letter s after it ; as, " John's hat." 

339. Plural nouns usually form their possessive case simply 
by taking the apostrophe ; as, " On eagles' wings." 

340. When the plural of nouns does not end in s, they form their posses^ 
give case by taking both the apostrophe and the letter s; as, "Men's 
houses." 

341. When the singular ends in ss, the apostrophe only is added ; as, "Foi 
goodness 1 sake:" except the noun witness ; as, " The witness's deposition." 

342. Nouns ending in 'race form the possessive by adding the apostrophe 
only ; as, " For conscience 1 sake :" because an additional s would occasion 
too much of the hissing sound, or increase the difficulty of pronunciation, 

343. The objective case denotes the object of an action oi 
relation. 

344. In the sentence, " John strikes him," him is the object of the action 
denoted by strikes; and in the sentence, " He went from London to York* 
York is the object of the relation denoted by the preposition to. 



345. DECLENSION OF 



Nominative case, 
P@ssessive case, 
Objective case, 



Singular. 

Mother, 
Mother's, 

Mother, 



Plural. 

Mothers. 
Mothers'. 

Mothers. 



NOUNS. 

Singular. Plural. 

Man, Men. 

Man's, Men's. 

Man, Men. 



XXVIIL What is the meaning of. the 
word case ? 47. 

What is meant by the case of nouns ? 
333. 

How many cases have nouns, and what 
are they ? 334. 

What does nominative mean ? 49. 

What is the nominative case ? 335. 
Give an example. 

What do you understand by the subject 
afa verb ? 336. Illustrate it by an exam- 
ple. 

What does possessive mean ? 59, 

What does the possessive case denote ? 
337. Give an example. 

How may this case be distinguished 
from the oiher cases ? 337. 

How do nouns in the singular form 
their possessive case? 338. Give an exam- 



How do nouns in the plural ? 339. 

When the plural noun does not end in 
5, how is its possessive formed ? 340. Give 
an example. 

When the singular-ends in ss, how ia 
the possessive case formed ? 341. Give 
an example. 

How is the possessive case of nouna 
ending in nee formed ? 342. Give an ex- 
ample. 

Why is not the s added ? 342. 

What does the word objective mean? 
55. 

What does the objective case of 
nouns denote ? 343. Give an exam 
pie. 

What does the declension of nouna 
mean ? 68. 

WiYi you decline nuthar 9 345. m<&n 

brother ? h&t ? 



48 ENGLISH GRAMMAB, 

1VLS X. 

The jmsessive case is governed by the following noun. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" John's wife returned." 

84$. John's is a proper noun, of the masculine gender 4 
the third person, singular number, possessive case, and 
governed by wife, by Rule I. 

Wife is a common noun, of the feminine gender, the third 
person, singular number, and nominative case to returned, 
by Rule VI. 

Returned is an intransitive verb, in the indicative mood, 
imperfect tense — " 1. I returned; 2. You returned ; 3. He 
returned, or wife returned" — made in the third person, sin- 
gular, and agrees with wife, by Rule VII. 

MORE EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" William's son has come." " William's wife's sister remained 

" John's 1 brother died." in town." 

" John makes (1.) boys' hats." " Rufus studied Johnson's Diction- 

" John lost his knife." ary." 

" The boys neglected their les- " Mary's bonnet is old." 

sons." " Virtue's reward is sure." (2.) 

fti Intemperance ruins its votaries." " Rufus's hat is new." 

SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

" Brothers estate" 
347. If you examine the foregoing example, you will find it difficult to 
ascertain whether the estate is the property of one brother or more ; if of one 
duly, an apostrophe should precede the s, thus ; "Brother's estate :" but if it 
belongs to more than one, an apostrophe should follow the s, thus ; " Bro- 
thers' estate." Mistakes of this sort often occur ; hence you perceive the 
importance in writing, of attending to the subject of grammar. 

" Mans' happiness" 
348. Incorrect, because mans 1 is in the possessive case, sin- 
gular number, and, therefore, the apostrophe should he placed 
before the s, according to the observations above, and Art. 338. 

Will you repeat the rule for the posses- Why cannot you tell ? 

«:ve case ? Rule I. If only one brother is meant, how 

In the sentence, "John's wife return- should the apostrophe be placed? How, 

rd," will you parse John's? wife? re- if more than one ? 

tamed? 346. t In the phrase, " Mans' happiness," why 

Wiry is John's in the possessive case ? is it incorrect for the apostrophe to follow 

Hft. the * ? 348. 

What kind of a verb is returned? 346. What is the rule for forming the pos- 

Whji ? 153. sessive case of nouns? 338. 

In w.aat case is wife ? 346. Will you now parse man's ? 

Why ? 335. We spell the possessive case of men 

EJ^ The pupil may next parse the addz thus, 7a-a-n-(apostrophe) s; will you is 

tfonal exercises in syntax. like mannei spell the possessive of John ? 

In the phrase, " Brothers estate," does William ? Rufus ? women ? boys ? 

on? brother, or more than one, own the Jd" The remaining' jsxerciste are to bt 

estate ? 347. corrected as well as parsed. 



(1.) Aotrre-tmnsitjvo wb- (8.1 Atftactive, and belongs to reward, b> Kul* FV. 



ARTICLES. 49 

BdHTENUlCS TO BE PAUSED AND CORRECTED, CONTINUED. 

"Johns son departed." " I discovered Marias faults," 

*' Susans sister will learn." " Susan made little Harriets ben 

" Charles task is too difficult." net" 

" I have read Willi's poem," " Johnson makes mens shoes." 

EXERCISES TO BE WRITTEN.* 

349. Will you write down two sentences, each containing a 
proper noun, as for example, " William learns grammar" ? One> 
containing a common noun ? One, containing a noun of the third 
person singular 1 One, of the third person plural, and in the 
nominative case ? One, having a noun of the second person 
singular and of the feminine gender ? One, having a noun the 
name of some article of food 1 One, having a noun the name of 
some quality ? One, having a noun pf multitude ? One, having 
your own name associated with book ; as, " John Griscom's 
book"? 



XXIX. OF ARTICLES. 

350. Articles are words put before nouns, to point the n 
out, or to limit their meaning. 

551. There are two articles, a or an, and the. 

152. A or an is called the indefinite article. 

!53. The is called the definite article. 

154. The article a is called indefinite, because it means no particular per* 
son or thing ; as, " a house," " a man," that is, any house, any man. The 
article the is called definite, because it means some particular person or thing ; 
as " the house," " the man," meaning some particular house, some particu- 
lai man. 

355. J. becomes an before a vowel, and before a silent h; as, "an acorn," 
"enhour." Eut if the h be sounded, the a only is used ; as, "ahand," "a 
heart :" except when the word before which the article is placed, has its ac- 
cent on the second syllable ; as, " an heroic action," " an historical account." 

356. Before words beginning with u long, a is used instead of an ; as, " a 
union," " a university." " a useful thing." 

357. A is also used for an before the word one, because, in pronouncing 
#a«, we sound it as if written wun. 

358. The article a or an means one; as, " an ounce," " a pound. • thai 
is, one ounce, one pound. 

XXIX. What is an article ? 350. Bat if the h is sounded, which is to be 

What does definite mean ? 78. used ? 355. Give an example. 

What is the called ? 353. Why t 354. What exception to this ? 355. Give arc 

Give an example. example. 

What does indefinite mean ? 81. Do we say, " a union," or "an union -'1 

What is a or an called? 352. Why? "a university," or "en university"? 

354. Give. an example. Why? 356. 

Kow many articles are there? 351= Do we say, "a one," or "<enone"? 

Miyae them. Why ? 357. 

^ /be n d*es a become an? 355. Give an What does the article a mean? 358. 

ex* ^nple. . Give an example. 

• Eitiitr o» a tlats or ia « csudl maixiucript jx-'A fcei)t tor th« wurposa 

D 5 



50 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

HULE II. 

The indefinite article a or an belongs to nouns of ik& 

singular number. 

1ULI! III. 

Hie definite article the belongs to nouns of the singular 

or plural nu??iber, 

359. Exception, When the adjectives/e?#, great many, dozen, hundred 
thousand, &c. come between the noun and article, the noun to which th* 
indefinite article belongs, 19 plural ; as, " a few men," " a great many men." 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 
" The bird flies swiftly" 
360. The is a definite article, and belongs to bird, ac- 
cording to Rule III. 

Bird is a common now, of the common gendee, the third 

PERSON, SINGULAR NUMBER, an(3f%k the NOMINATIVE CASE tO 

flies, by Rule VI. 

Flies is an active- intransitive verb, indicative mood, 
present tense — " 1. I fly ; 2. You fly; 3. He flies, or bird 
flies" — made in the third person, singular, and agrees 
with bird, by Rule VII. 

Swiftly is an adverb, qualifyingjKea,- by Rule IX. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

"The boys have arrived season- "Children attend the school." 

ably." " William founded a university." 

" Galileo invented the telescope." " The grass is green." 

" The boy had an ulcer." " Farmers carry hay into the 

" William gave an historical ac- barn/ 1 

count (1.) of the transaction." " The good scholar obeys his in- 

" Columbus discovered the eonti- structer." 
nent of America." 

SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 
" He had a ulcer" 
861. Incorrect, because we use an before a vowel, excopt u 
long : a should, therefore be an; thus, " an ulcer." 

SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED, CONTINUED. 
" A enemy approaches." " Three barley corns make a inch.* 

"James procured a inkstand." "Eight drams make a ounce." 

" He conferred a honour." " They formed an union." 

"An unit figure occupies the low- " He quoted an hard saying." _ 
est place in whole numbers." "Thomas has lost an horse." 

What is the rule for the indefinite arti- t£i* The remaining exercises are next ft 

eie ? Rule II. be parsed from the book. 

What exception to this rule? 359. Would you say, " a ulcer," or " an ul- 

What is the rule for the indefinite cer"? Why? 361. 

article ? Rale III. §Cf" The pupil should now take the ra- 
in the sentence, " the bird fiies swift- maining sentences U be corrected. H* 

ly," how do you parse the ? tird 7 flies ? should be required to parse as well ** »§*• 

ttciftly ? 360. rect them. 

(U Apply &ui» VIU. 



adjectives; 51 

sentences to be written. 

SS2. Will yon write down two sentences, using in one the definite, 
gnd in the other the indefinite article ? One, containing a correctly uo?>ii 
before u long? ^One, having a definite article correctly used before tlw 
consonant h ? 

Will you write two nouns, the names of different things in the school 
room ? Two, the names of different cities ? One sentence, having » 
proper noun used as a common noun ? 



XXX. OF ADJECTIVES. 

863. An adjective is a word joined to a noun f to describe 
or define it ; as $ " An obedient son ." 

364. In English, an adjective is varied only to express tbo 
degrees of comparison. There are three degrees of compari* 
son — the positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 

365. The positive degree simply describes an -object; as, 
" John is good." 

366. The comparative degree increases or lessens the posi- 
tive in meaning ; as, " William is better than John." It im- 
plies a comparison between two. 

367. The superlative degree increases or lessens the positive 
to the highest or lowest degree ; as, " Thomas is the best /'' 
" Walter is the worst" 

368. It implies a comparison between three or more. 

369. The simple word, or positive, if a monosyllable, (1.) becomes the 
comparative by adding r or er, and the superlative by adding st or est, to 
the end of it ; as, wise, wiser, wisest ; great, greater, greatest. 

1 370. In words of more than one syllable, the comparison is usually mad-3 
by placing the adverbs more and most before the positive ; as, benevolent, 
more benevolent, most benevolent. 

371. The comparison is sometimes formed by the adverbs less and least , 
as, wise, less wise, least wise. 

372. Dissyllables (2.) ending in y ; as, happy, lovely, and in le, after a mute : 
(8.) as, able, ample, or accented on the last syllable ; as, discreet, polite, easily 

XXX. What is the meaning of the What does it imply ? 368. 
word adjective? 95. What is a monosyllable? 369. 

What is an adjective ? 363. Give an How are monosyllables compared ? 3691 

example. Give an example. 

How many degrees of comparison are How are dissyllables compared ? 372. 
there ? 364. What effect do less and least have o# 

Will you name them ? adjectives ? 371. 

What does the positive degree do ? 365. What is a dissyllable ? 372. 
Give an example. Will you spell the comparative and 

What does the comparative degree do 7 superlative degrees of able? lovely? am- 

SS5. Gi^e an example. pie ? discreet ? polite t 372. 

What does it imply ? 366. Which are the mutes ? 372. 

What does superlative mean ? 103. How do words of more than two syh 

What does the superlative degree do? lables almost invariably form their com' 

$87. Give an example. parison ? 372. 

<M A ^ord of one syllabi*. P* > A won! of two «yll&M«9. 

(3.) *\ \ p, t, uad * ead g terd, *rt> muim. 



02 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

admit of er and est ; as, happier, happiest ; abler, ablest, &c. Words of 
more than two syllables hardly ever admit of these terminations. 

373. In some words, the superlative is formed by adding the adverb most 
to the end of them ; as, nethermost, uttermost, uppermost. 

374. Some adjectives, having in themselves a superlative signification, do 
not admit of comparison ; as, extreme, perfect, right, wrorig, i?ifinite, cease- 
less, supreme, omnipotent, eternal. 

375. JBy adding ish to adjectives, we have a slight degree of comparison 
below the positive ; as, black, blackish ; salt, saltish. 

376. Very expresses a degree of quality, but not the highest ; as, " good/' 
'* very good." 

377. Words use'd in counting and numbering are called numeral adjectives f 
KB, one, two, three ; first, second, third. These adjectives are not compared. 

378. An adjective put without a noun, with the definite article before it, 
becomes a noun in sense and meaning, and may be considered as such m 
parsing; as, " Providence rewards the good, and punishes the bad." 

EFLE IV. 

Adjectives belong to the nouns which they describe. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX, 

" John is sincere" 

879. John is a proper noun, of the third person, singu- 
lar NUMBER, MASCULINE GENDER, and in the NOMINATIVE CASP 

to is, by Rule VI. 

Is is a neuter verb, in the INDICATIVE mood, present 
tense — " 1. I am ; 2. You are ; 3. He or John is,"— made in 
the third person singular, and agrees with John, according 

10 Rule VII. 

Sincere is an adjective, — •" sincere, more sincere, most sin- 
cere," — made in the positive degree, and belongs to John, by 
Rule IV. 

exercises in syntax continued. 

" You are studious. 1 " tc One man has come." 

" John is more studious." " Two men have departed." 

'■ William is most studious." " Twenty men will sail." 

11 Mary is intelligent." li James wrote his name on the firs* 
" James is active." page." 

'* Thomas is less active." " Here comes a great man." 

i& Charles is happy." " Here comes a greater man." 

" Mary is tall. Susan is taller." " Here comes the greatest man." 

u No composition is perfect." " The first fleet contained five him 
* ' Religion makes its votaries happy." dred men." 

•Is perfect compared? Why? 374. superlative degrees of good ? ill? mvckl 

Will you name several others that are little? 
Bot compared ? 374. When is an adjective to be considered 

How is the superlative formed in the a noun ? 378. 
word upper? 373. What is the rule for the adjective ? IV. 

\\ hat is the effect of tsh added to ad- _ " 

Jeeti ves ? 375. Give an example. J In the phrase, "John is sincere, now 

What is the force of very in compari- do you parse John? is? sincere? i 

son i 376 Why is sincere in the positive, degree I 

What are numeral adjectives? 377. 365. Why do you call is a neuter verb I 

Give an example, Are they compared ? 157 « 
B77. SJ" Let the pupil next take the nsretsw 

Will you spell the comparative «n1 that follow, end parts tut befor* 



PRONOUNS. 53 

XXXI. 

380. Double comparatives and superlatives, since they add nothing 
to the sense, should be avoided ; as, worser, more wiser, &c. ; also, 
lesser, swpremest, most infinite, &c. 

SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Q. Will you write down two sentences, each containing" a different 
adjective in the positive degree ? Two, with adjectives in the comparative 
degree? Two, with adjectives in the superlative degree? 

Q. Will you supply such adjectives in the following sentences as wiF 

make sense ? "A boy studies his lesson." " A boy deserve* 

punishment." M A man helps the man." " Merchants owt 

ships." " The instructer loves scholars." " William is a -* 

scholar, Rufus is a one, but Thomas is the — — one that I ever saw.* 1 



XXXII. OF PRONOUNS. 

881. A pronoun is a word uspd instead of a noun, to avoi** 
a disagreeable repetition of the noun. 

382. A personal 'pronoun is so called because it invari- 
ably represents the same person. There are five personal 
pronouns — I, thou or you, he, she, "it. They have person, 
number and case, like nouns ; and those of the third person 
have gender also. 

383. lis the first person, thou the second, he, she* or it, the 
third. He is masculine, she is feminine, and it is neater. 

384. Pronouns, like nouns, have three cases — the nomi- 
native, the possessive, and the objective ; and two numbers — 
the singular and plural. 

385. Mine and thine, instead of my and thy, were formerly used in the 
solemn style, before nOuns and adjectives beginning with a vowel or silent 
h ; as, "Blot out all mine iniquities." 

XXXI. Is it correct to say, " A lesser XXXII. What does the word pronoun 

evil ?" Why not ? 380. signify ? 120. 

Will you correct the following inaccu- What is a pronoun ? 381. 

racies in comparison as I read them to Why is a personal proncun so called? 

you ? 382. 

*• He is intelligenter." How many personal pronouns are 

" She is the most wisest." there, and what are they ? 382. 

44 A worser evil." Why is this number said to include all 

"William is a bad boy; Joseph is a the pronouns? 134. 

worser one." Which is the first person ? the second 1 

44 He gave a more stronger proof of the the third ? 383. 

fact than the other." To which of the pronouns do we applf 

44 The pleasures of the mind are more gender ? 383. 

(Is) preferable than those of the body." Why is not gender applied to the finst 

44 That table is round, but this is a and second persons? 136. 

rounder one, and that is the roundest of Which is masculine ? 383. which fenn- 

the three." nine? 383. which neuter? 383. 

44 This is more square." How many cases have pronouns, and 

44 A more greater concern." what are they ? 384. 

" The most fairest of all the daughters Kow many numbers? 384. 

>f Eve." Will you decline J? thou? he? shsl 

** His mother's extremest joy." it? 127. 



54 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



XXXIII. COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

386. Compound personal pronouns are formed by adding 
the word self, in the plural selves, to the simple pronouns ; as 5 
himself, themselves, &c. 

SINGULAR. 



TERSON. 

First. 
Second. 



Third, 



CASE. 

Nom. 
Pgss, 

Obj. 

Nom. 

Poss. 
Obj. 

Nom. 
Poss. 
Obj. 



Poss. 

Obj. 
Nom. 

Po3S. 

Obj. 



Myself, 
Wanting. 
Myself, 
Thyself, or") 
Yourself, 3 

Thyself, or") 
Yourself, 3 
Himself, 



Himself, 
Herself, 

Herself, 
Itself, 

Itself, 



PLURAL. 

Ourselves. 

Ourselves. 
Yourselves. 

Yourselves. 
Themselves. 

Themselves. 
Themselves. 

Themselves. 
Themselves. 

Themselves. 



Pronouns must agree with the nouns for which the$ 
stand, in gender, number and person. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" John found his knife." 

887. John is a proper noun, of the masculine gender, the third 

PERSON, SINGULAR NUMBER, and NOMINATIVE CASE tO found, by 

Rule VI. 

Found is an active-transitive verb, in the indicative mood, 
imperfect tkjise — " 1. I found ; 2. You found ; 3. He or John 
found" — made in the third person singular, and agrees with John, 
by Rule VII. 

His is a personal pronoun, of the third person singular, 
masculine gender, and agrees with John, according to Rule V. ; in 
the possessive case, and governed by knife, by Rule I. 

Knife is a common noun, of the third person singular, neuter 
sender, the objective case, and governed by found, according to 
Rule VIII. 



Of what number and person is mine 7 
ffurs ? me? toe? they 1 thine ? you ? 
your*? 127. 

Of what gender, number and person is 
he? she * it? 

Of what number, person and case is 
th£y? ours? his? hers? mine? 

In what style were mine and thine for- 
merly used 1 385. 

XXXIIL How are the compound per- 

vebu&\ oroiriOM«8 fort»«<i ? 38fi 



What is the rule for the agreement of 
personal pronouns in the phrase, " John 
found hi§ knife ?" V. 

How <fo you parse John ? 387. 

-Will you parse John in the phrase, 
" John found his knife ?" 387. 

Will you parse found? his? knife? 
387. 

SCt" The learner should next parse the re- 
maining exercises in Syntax fr^m the boek 
and then take th* txtrcistt tit ht written 



PRONOUNS. 55 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

1. 

* James obtained his request." " Ye despise reproof." 

" I will assist you." " They mend their pens." 

44 He will receive his reward." " Mary tore her handkerchief" 

" She misused him." " Virtue has its reward." 

M Sin ruins its votaries." M She deceived them." 

2. 
"An indulgent father wiL reprove "John is i& distress, and I wiS 

his son when (1.) he deserves assist him." 

it." " I found Mary and her mother iv. 

u A dutiful son gladdens the hearts trouble, and (2.) comforted (3«> 

of his parents." them." 

EXERCISES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Q. Will you compose two sentences, each having a different persona* 
pronoun of the first person ? One, having a pronoun of the first person 
plural ? 

Q. Will you fill up the following sentences with suitable pronouns, 
so as to make sense ? " — lost my hat, but found — again." " Let 
Harriet have — book, for — will need — to get her lesson." " The 
travellers lost — way, and the boys conducted — to — homes." 

Q. Will you fill up the following broken sentences with suitable 

words to make sense ? " Intemperance — evil." " Washington 

father of his — — ." " Columbus — — America." " Boston 

inhabitants." " The — — ocean is — — miles wide." u — — first 



XXXIV. OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS, 

388. In the sentence, " Both wealth and poverty are temptations; that 
tends to excite pride, this discontent;" you perceive that the word that 
represents wealth, and the word this poverty. This and that do, therefore, 
resemble pronouns, and may, for this reason, be called pronouns. 

389. When I say, " This house is mine, that barn is yours," the words 
tins and that are joined to nouns like adjectives, to define or specify them* 
they may, on this account, be called adjectives. 

390. Adjective pronouns, then, are words that resemble both 
pronouns and adjectives. These pronouns are sometimes call- 
ed pronominal adjectives, or specifying adjectives. 

391. The adjective pronouns may be divided into three 
sorts — the distributive, the demonstrative, and the indefinite. 

392. The distributive are those that relate to persons oi 
things, taken separately and singly. 

XXXIV. What are adjective pro- One in which they resemble adjectives 1 

aouns ? 390. 389. 

Why are they so called ? 388, 389. Into how many sorts may these pro- 

By what other name have these pro- nouns be divided, and what are they? 

souns been called? 390. 391. 

Will you give an example in which What is a distributive pronoun? 

ISaese words resemble pronouns? 388. 392. 



56 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

393. DISTRIBUTIVE (1.) PRONOUNS. 
Each, every, either, and sometimes neither. 

394. Each relates to two or more persons or things, taken separately, 
as, " Each of his brothers is doing well." 

395. Every relates to several persons or things, and signifies each on« 
of .them, taken separately ; as, " Every man must account for himself." 

396. Either relates to two persons or things only, taken separately, and 
signifies the one or the other; as, "I have not seen either. 11 Hence, to 
say, " Either of the three," is incorrect. 

397. Neither means not either ; that is, not one nor the other ; as, 
" Neither of my friends was there." 

898. The demonstrative (2.) pronouns are those which 
precisely point out the things to which they relate. 

99. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
Sing. Plu. 

This, These. 

That, Those. 

Former, Former. 

Latter, Latter. 

400. This and these refer to the nearest persons or things, — that and that* 
to the most distant ; as, " These gloves are superior to those." " Both wealth 
and poverty are temptations ; that tends to excite pride, this discontent." 

401. The indefinite are those that refer to things in aa 
indefinite or general manner. 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

402. Some, other, any, one, all, such, none. Of theg* 
pronouns, one and other are declined like nouns. Another 
declined in the singular, but it wants the plural. 

Sing. Plu. 

403. Norn. Other, Others. 
Poss. Other's, Others'. 
06;. Other, Others. 

Sing. Plu. 

404. Norn. One, Ones. 
Poss. One's, Ones'. 
Obj. One, Ones, 

We say, " This book," but, *' These books;" also, " One man,* 
" Twenty men:" hence, 

405. Note I. Adjective pronouns and numerals must agrse 

in number with the nouns to which they belong. 

Wliv is it so called ? 393. Which are singular ? 399. Wmcn pto« 

Which are they ? 393. ral ? 399. 

What does each refer to ? 394. Give What do this and these refer to ? 400. 

an example. Whal do that and those refer t0 ? Gin 

What does every relate to ? 395. Give example. 400. 

an example. ___. \ . . - . , P1 

What does either relate to? 396. Give What does indefinite mean ? 81. 

at\ example ' What is an indefinite pronoun ? 401. 

' What does neither mean ? 397. Which are they ? 402. 

What does demonstrative mean ? 398. Wil you decniie other ? 403. 

What are demonstrative pronouns? Will you decline one? 404. 

308. What note do you apply in parsing «& 

Which are they ? 399. jective pronouns ? Note I. 



Ik.) go called from diftribttte, to divide among several. 



PRONOUNS. 



EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 
" These two boohs belong to me" 
406. These is an adjective pronoun of the demonstrative kind* 
in the plural number, and belongs to books, according to Note I. 
Two is a numeral adjective, and belongs to books, by Note I. 
Books, belong, &c. are parsed as before. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 



"These men might remain witb 

us." 
" Those men make many pretence® 

to religion." 
"All rational beings desire happi- 
ness." 
" By application almost any boy 

may acquire an honorable 

rank in his class." 
"Good and virtuous men will, 

sooner (1.) or later (1.), attaia 

to happiness." 



*Every man performs his part in 
creation." 

M Each man arrived at his station." 

"Either party can repair the in- 
jury." 

"Some persons cannot acquire 
wealth." 

"Many people obtain riches with 
apparently little exertion." 

" One boy labors for his improve- 
ment." 

" This man neglects his affairs." 

" The old bird feeds her young ones" 
407. Ones is an indefinite pronoun, representing bird* , in tha 

COMMON GENDER, THIRD PERSON PLURAL, in the OBJECTIVE CASE, and 

governed by feeds, agreeably to Rule VIII. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

"One boy influences many others." others spend their time in idleness *, 

" None act their part too well." the former will receive praise, tha 

" Some scholars study diligently ; latter censure." 
We cannot say, " Them run," but, " They run:" hence, 
Note II. When a noun or pronoun is the subject of the 

verb, it should be in the nominative case. 
It is very common for persons in conversation to say, " Them books," 

" Them knives," &c. instead of " Those books," " Those knives," &c. 

The incorrectness here alluded to consists in substituting a personal in the 

place of an adjective pronoun : hence, 

Note III. The pronoun them should not be used in the place 
of these or those. 



In the phrase, " These two books," &c. 
will you parse these ? two ? 406. 

Will you now take the book, and parse 
tfee remaining exercises under Note I.? 

In the phrase, " The old bird feeds her 
young ones," will you parse ones? 407. 

Will you correct by Note I. the follow- 
ing examples, as I read them to you ? 

44 He will not come this two hours." 

" I dislike those sort of books." 

" I have two canes ; you may have any 
of them." 

Do we say, " They run," or, " Them 
mn ?" Why ? Note II. 

Win you now correct, by Note IT. the 
following examples as I read them to you? 



" Them will go." 

44 Him and me went to church." 

" Art thee well ?" 

" Him who is diligent will improve." 

Would you say, " Them knives," c? 
" These knives"? Why? III. 

In what does the incorrectness con 
sist? III. 

Will you correct the following expm*. 
sions ? 

44 Them boys are very idle." 

44 Bring me them pens "^ 

44 Which of them three things 4« ?<^ 
prefer ?" 

S£sT The pupil may ne*-t ta,he the sxsr> 
eises to be written. 



58 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Q. Will you compose two sentences, each having" a different adjeetiva 
pronoun ? One, having a demonstrative pronoun ? One ? having an in- 
derinite pronoun used as a noun ? 

Q. Will you fill up with pronouns suitable to make sense the follow- 
ing phrases ? M When Harriet found — book, — tore — , and then flung 
— away." " — man likes — farm, — merchandise." 

Q. Will you compose a proper exarople under Rule I. ? One under 
Rule II. ? Rule III. ? Rule IV. ? Rule V. ? Rule VI. ? 



XXXV. OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

408. In the sentence, " That man is happy, who lives virtuously," the 
word who is a pronoun, because it stands for a noun (the noun man), and it is 
a relative, because it relates or refers to this noun in the same sentence : hence, 

409. A relative pronoun is a word that usually stands for 
some noun before it in the same sentence. 

410. There are three relative pronouns, viz. 

411. Who, which, and that. 

412. Who is used in speaking of persons; as, "The man 
who came." 

413. Which is used in speaking of animals or things; as, 
" The bird which sings," " The tree which I planted." 

414. Which, however, is used in speaking of persons, when we wish to 
distinguish one of two individuals, or a particular person among many 
others ; as, " Which of the two is he V " Which of them has gone ?" 

415. That, as a relative, is often used, in speaking either of 
persons or things, in the place of who or luhich ; as, 

"The boy that reads," or, "The boy who reads;" "The bird that 
Sew," or, "The bird which flew;" "The bench that was made," or, 
" The bench which was made." 

That is used in preference to who or which, in the following cases : — 

1. In speaking both of persons and things ; as, " The man and the beas* 
that I saw, perished." 

2. In speaking of children ; as, " The child that I met." 

3. After the adjective same; as, "He is the same man that we saw 
yesterday." 

4. After the superlative degree; as, "He is the wisest man that the 
world ever produced." 

5. After the relative who ; as, "Who that reflects." 

415 — 1. Exception. That, as a relative, cannot take the preposition im- 
mediately before it ; as, " He is the same man with that you were acquaint- 
ed." For with that, read with whom. It is remarkable, however, that, 
when the arrangement is a little varied, the word that admits the preposi- 
tion ; as, " He is the same man that you were acquainted with." 

XXXV In the sentence, " That man speaking of persons ? Give an example. 

ts happy, who lives virtuously," what 414. 

part of speech is who ? Why ? 408. What When may that be used ? 415. 

tel Wh fl ?iI ly 9 l M' wo nrminllT1 , aw Is it correct to say, " The child who ?" 

w?n v ™ Y~™ Zl \ ?JT Why not ? « The same man who ?» Why 

Will you name them ? 411. t £ ltTh wi „ pqt man which *" Whv 

^ When do we use vho? Give an exam- ™[ ? «^ , who'rSSa r Why ?ot? 

' When do we use which ? Give an ex- 415 ; *' 2 ' 3> 4 ' 5 ' 

cmple. 413. What exception is men sie^M? 415 — L 

in wba* *&*<*» do w« u*# *?&ue&. in Give au exampte. 415--- 1 



PRONOUNS. 59 

116 — 1. We can say, " The man who," or " The men who," using tne 
relative who in speaking either of one man or more than one : who, then, w 
of both numbers, and is thus declined : 

Singular. Plural. 

Norn. Who, Who. 

Poss. Whose, Whose. 

Obj. Whom, Whom. 

417. Which and that are of both numbers, but they are not declined, ex- 
cept that whose is sometimes used as the possessive case of which; as, "' Ib 
there any other doctrine whose followers are punished ?" 

418. Whose, used in the manner last described, is made to represent thre 
words ; as, " Philosophy whose end," for " the end of which." 

419. Antecedent signifies going before. 

420. The noun or pronoun which goes before the relative, and to which 
the relative refers, is therefore called the antecedent of the relative ; as, 
" John, who has gone." Here, John is the antecedent of who. 

421. When you are told that who, which, and that are relatives, you should 
not get the impression that the last two are always relatives ; for that is a 
relative only when it is used in the sense of who or which; that is, when who 
or which may be used in its place, without destroying the sense ; as, " Here 
is the knife that I found," which can be altered to " Here is the knife which 
I found," without injury to the sense. 

422. That, when it points out or specifies some particular person or thing:, 
is reckoned an adjective pronoun. When not used as a relative, nor as ah 
adjective pronoun, it is reckoned a conjunction; as, " He studies that he 
may learn." 

423. Hence it appears that the word that may be used sometimes as a rela- 
tive pronoun, sometimes as an adjective pronoun^ and sometimes as a con- 
junction. 

424. Since relative pronouns stand for nouns, as well as personal pro- 
nouns, they should therefore agree with nouns in the same particulars and 
by the same rule. Rule V. will therefore apply to both. 

X EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" That man is happy who lives virtuously. 9 ' 

425. That is a demonstrative pronoun, of the singular 

number, and belongs to man, by Note I. 

Who is a RELATIVE PRONOUN, of the MASCULINE GENDER, 

third person singular, and agrees with man^yy Rule V. It 
is in the nominative case to lives, according to Rule VI. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

* That man is fortunate who es- " I met the same man in the market 
capes censure. * to-day (1.), that I met yesterday 

14 The girl whom I saw, perished." in the street. 

How many numbers has who? 416. When is that an adjective pronoun? 

Will you decline it ? 416—1. Give an example. 422. 

How many numbers have which and When a conjunction ? Give an exam- 

*hat ? Are they declined ? 417. pie. 422. 

What exception to this ? 417. How many different parts of speech 

When whose is used as the possessive may that represent ? 423. 

rase of which, how many words does it What is the rule for the agreement, of 

represent? Give an example. 418. relative pronouns? 424. 

What is the meaning of antecedent? Will you parse that, in the phrase, 

419. » That man" ? 425. 

What is the antecedent of a pronoun ? In the sentence, " That man is happy 

Give an example. 420. who lives virtuously," will you parsa 

Is that always a relative ? 421. who? 425. 

When is it a relative ? Give an exam- Will you now take the book, and p&rs« 

P&. 421, the remaining exercises ? 



GO ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

a You, who came first, should retire M That house, which stands on th« 
first" hill, once (1.) belonged to me," 

* You taught the boy whose hat I " The boy whom I instruct learna 
found." . well." 

SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

" The man which I saw" 

426. Incorrect ; because, in speaking of persons, who, whose^ 
or whom is generally to be used. It should therefore read> 
6i The man whom I saw." 

SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED, CONTINUED. 

** The bird whom I killed had made " Thou who are in prosperity must 
her nest." assist me in adversity." 

w The man which visited me has " He which shuns vice does gene- 
lefl town." rally practise virtue." 

w That man is happy whom is vir- " I, who lives by your charity, should 
tuous," be grateful." 

SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Q. Will you construct a sentence containing" the relative who 1 On©, 
containing which 7 One, containing that ? 

Q. Will you fill up the following sentences with relatives correctly 

oeed? "The man— — sins shall die." "The boy studies will 

learn." " The bird sung so sweetly has flown." Will you fill up 

the following with one or more words that will make sense ? " Intempe. 
ranee evils." " If— — truth sorry." 

Q. Will you embrace in different sentences, each of the following words 1 
Washington,* Columbus, Captain Cook, Indians, Wisdom, Riches, Jamei 
Monroe. 



XXXVI. OF COMPOUND AND INTERROGATIVE 

PRONOUNS. 

427. " I took %)hat you gave me." 

" I took that which you gave me." 

" I took the thing which you gave me." 

r< I took those things which you gave me." 

428. By examining the foregoing sentences, you will see that the word 
what, in the first example, means tfi§ same as the Words in italics in the suc- 
cessive ones : the word what, then, is clearly a pronoun ; and because it 
stands for more than one word, it is called a compound pronoun. The word 
before the relative which, in the phrase " that which," or " the thing which," 
is the antecedent of which. Hence, 

429. What is a compound relative pronoun, including 
both the antecedent and the relative, and is generally equiva 
lent to THAT WHICH. 

Instead of saying, "The man which I tences which mean the same as " I tori 

saw," what should I say? Why? 426. what you gave me" ? 427. 

Will you correct and parse the remain- What words, then, does what stand fer * 

ing exercises, and then take the exercises 428. 

to be written ? Why is what a pronoun ? 428. 

XXXVI. Will you repeat those sen- Why a compound pronoun ? 429. 

Q-.) Advem 

** Tt**. " Wtt*hiQ*ta» «tus k wm» ndrtoL" fee. FA* pu&U wuw uwiM« ***a~*1 wwCwvsm «**» ««* ***** 



?RONOUN&. 61 

480. Who, which, and what have sometimes the words ever or soever an- 
nexed (1.) to them : and each combination of this sort is called a compound 
relative ; as, whoever, whosoever, whichever, whichsoever, &c. They are no* 
often used. 

431. Who, which, and wJtat are called interrogatives, or relatives of the 
interrogative kind, when they are used in asking questions; as, " Who is 
be f " " Which is the book ?" " What are you doing f" These relatives, 
you perceive, have no antecedents, but relate to some word or phrase con- 
tained in the answer, which is called a subsequent, because it follows after 
the relative; as, "Whom did you see?" Ans. "John." Here John is 
the subsequent to which whom refers. 

432. Hence it follows, that antecedent and subsequent are opposed to each 
other in meaning ; the former signifying going before, the latter follovring after. 

433. Whether was formerly made use of to express interrogation ; as, 
" Whether of these shall I choose ?" but it. is now seldom used, the inter- 
rogative which supplying its place. 

434. Which, what, and, as we have already seen, that, when joined to 
nouns, are adjective pronouns ; as, " unto which promise our twelve tribes." 

435. When what and which are joined to nouns in asking questions, they 
are called interrogative adjective pronouns ; as, " Which horse did he take V 

436. In some instances, we find what used in the sense of an interjection; 
as, " What ! take my money, and then my life ?" 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" J will leave what is useless." 

437. What, in the example above, means the same as, "that which," or, 
" the thing which ;" we will, therefore, in parsing it, bear in mind that it 
has the government and agreement of two separate words. We will first 
parse it as standing for thing, and secondly for which. 

What is a compound relative pronoun, and is equivalent to 
19 that which," or, " the thing which." In representing thing, it 
oiay be considered a pronoun of the third person singular, neu- 
ier gender, in the objective case, and governed by leave, accord- 
ing to Rule VIII. 

What, in representing which, may be considered a relative peo- 

KOUN of the THIRD PERSON SINGULAR, NEUTER GENDER, and relates 

to thing for its antecedent, according to Rule V. and in the nomi- 
native case to is, by Rule VI. , 

Is is a neuter verb, in the INDICATIVE mood, present tense — 
"1. I am ; 2. You are; 3. He or which is"— made in the third per- 
son singular, and agrees with which, the relative part of the- pro- 
noun what, according to Rule VII. 

Useless is an adjective, in the positive degree, and belongs to 
what, by Rule IV. 

How may what be described ? 429. When are what, which, and that adjec- 

Will you give three examples of com- tive pronouns? Give an example. 434. 
pound pronouns formed by annexing ever Which of the relatives are sometimes in- 

or soever ? 430. terrogative adjective pronouns? When? 

What is the meaning of annexed? 435. 
430. When I say, "What! rob mr of my 

When are who, which, and what called money, and then take my life?'' in who* 

Interrogatives ? 431. sense is what used ? 436. 

What are the nouns called, to which In the sentence, "I will leave what is 

interrogatives refer ? 431. useless," how do you parse what? is ? 

What is the meaning of subsequent? useless? 437. 
438. What does what stand for ? 437. 

Why so called? 431. Do you parse it as one word or two J 

In the phrase, " Whom did you see ?" W T hat two ? 437. 
JStna. " John ;" which word is the subse- gj- 77ie pupil map now parse the r# 

fyAQXit ? 432. ' maining exercises on the pronoun what 

(I.) Pl«c»d after. 



62 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

* James will do what is proper." " William demands what I conn** 

14 You heard what I said." give." 

M Whatever improves delights him." " They advocate what is excellent 



XXXVII. OF THE VERB. 

438. A verb is a word that expresses action or beik& 
Verbs are of three kinds — active, passive, and neuter. 

439. An active verb expresses action, and the actor is 
always the nominative case ; as, " John runs." Active verbs 
are either transitive or intransitive. 

440. An active verb is transitive, when it either has or may 
have an object after it, on which the action terminates ; as, 
" John beats William." 

441. An active verb is intransitive, when it neither has nor 
can have an object after it. 

442. Passive means suffering or receiving* * 

443. When I say, " John is beaten by William," is beaten is a verb, 
because it expresses action ; and it is a passive verb, because it expresses 
the action received hy John ; and if John receives the action, then b© is the 
object of it : hence, 

444. A passive verb expresses action or effect received. 

445. The object is always its subject or nominative case. 

446. Active nominative, or actor, " John strikes William." 

447. Passive nominative, or object, " William is struck by 
John." 

440. By examining the foregoing examples, you will see that when the 
verb is active, its nominative is likewise active ; and when the verb is pas- 
sive, its nominative is likewise passive. 

449. The passive voice is a convenient mode of expression cm occasion! 
when we wish to state what has been done, without exposing the author > 
thus, instead of saying, "William struck John," I can, to avoid alluding 
to William, say, " John was struck." 

XXXVII. What is the meaning of In the example, " John i» beaten by 

verb?* William," which is the verb? Why! 

Why so called ? 143. What kind ? Whv ? 443. 

What is a verb ? 438. Which word is the object ? Why ? 443. 

What is an active verb ? 439. What, then, is a passive verb ? 444. 

What is always its nominative ? Give Which is the nominative to a passivs 

an example. 439. verb, the agent or the object ? 445. 

What is the meaning of transitive?^ Is the nominative to an active verb a«v 

of intransitive ?l tive or passive ? Give an example. 448 

How wiy active verbs be divided ? 439. Is the nominative to a passive verb ac. 

When is an active verb transitive? tive or passive? Give an example. 448. 
Give an example. 440. In what particular is the passive voir* 

When is an active verb intransitive ? a convenient form of expression ? Give 

Grive an example. 441. an example. 449. 

What is the meaning of passive! 442. What is the meaning of nctitvr ?§ 



9 6*» qaestiOD to 142. f S«* ^B«tioa to liWJ. t &w question to tSS. 4 &* qaostiaa to> 16J. 



MOOD. G3 

450. A neuter verb is one that is neither active nor passive, 
expressing simply either being or existence in a certain state , 
as, " He sits" " He is at home." 



XXXVIII. MOOD, OR MODE. 

45 L Mood, or mode, is the manner of representing actios 
or being. 

452. The indicative mood is used simply for indicating or 
declaring a thing, or asking a question ; as, •" I walk ;" " Do I 
walk?" 

453. The potential mood is used for expressing possi- 
bility, liberty, power, will, or obligation, either with or without 
asking a question ; as, *' I may go ;" " May I go P " He must 
read," «fec. 

454. Ol the subjunctive mood. The term subjunctive signifies subjoin- 
ed or added to. 

455. When I say, " I will go, if he desire it," the phrase, " if he desire 
it," is added on to the one before it : hence, we say, " if he desire it," is 
in the subjunctive mood. The term, however, is limited to such sentences 
as are preceded by the conjunctions if, unless, although, except, lest, &c., 
which imply doubt or some uncertainty. 

456. The subjunctive mood is used for expressing doubt or 
uncertainty. 

457. A verb in the subjunctive mood may be expressed in two different 
forms. It is equally correct to say, " If he is poor, he is respected," and 
"It he be studious, he will excel." The verbs be and is are both in the 
present tense ; and since each has the conjunction if before it, each is in 
the subjunctive mood. 

458. The phrase, " If he be studious," means the same as, " If he wiR 
be studious ;" it therefore plainly implies future time. 

459. On the contrary, in the phrase, "If he is poor," the sense plainly 
i3, "If he is now, at the present time, poor," without any reference t 
future time. 

460. Hence it appears, that, in one form of the verb, doubt only is im 
plied ; and in the other, both doubt and future time. 

What is a neuter verb ? Give an exam- How is the term subjunctive limited 

pie. 450. 455. 

How many kinds of verbs are there, What is the subjunctive mood use4 

and what are they? 438. for? 456. 

XXXVIII. What is the meaning of How many different forms has it ? 45?. 

mood ? 166. Give an example of each. 457. 

What is mood? 451. In what tense are the verbs be and is? 

What is the meaning of indicative ? 457. 
IG8 In what mood is each with the con« 

What is the indicative mood used for ? junction if before it ? 457. 
Give an example. 452. "What does, " If he be studious," mean, 

What is the meaning of potential? 212. as it respects time ? 458- 

What is the potential mood used for? "What tense, then, is referred to ? 453 
Give an example. 453. What does, " If he is poor," mean, in 

What is the meaning of subjunctive 7 respect to time ? 459. 
454. What idea, then, is implied in the on<a 

In what mood is, " If he desire it ?" form ? 460. 
*53 What two ideas in the other form ? 488 



64 ENGLISH GRAMMAR 

461 The verb ts corresponds with the common form of the verb to be, 
in the indicative mood, present tense; as, "I am, you are, he is:" — we 
will, therefore, when the verb is varied as usual, call it the common form 
of the subjunctive mood ; and when the verb is not varied in the different 
persons, we will call it the subjunctive form, since this form is peculiar to 
this mood. You should here be informed that this distinction relates only 
to the present tense, it being customary to vary the terminations of the verb 
in the remaining tenses, as usual. 

462. The following general rules will direct you in the proper use of the 
subjunctive mood : 

463. When any verb in the subjunctive mood, present tense, 
has a reference to future tim^ we should use the 

SUBJUNCTIVE FORM. 

Present Tense* 
454. ^ Singular. . Plural, 

1. If I love. 1. If we love. 

2. If thou or you love. 2. If ye or you love. 
3^ If he love. 3. If they love. 

465. When a verb in the subjunctive mood, present tense, 
has no reference to future time, we should use the 

COMMON FORM. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. If I love. 1. If we love. 

4 2. If thou lovest, orl 2. If ye love, or} 

If you love. § If you love. 

3. If he loves. 3. If they love. 

466. Other conjunctions, besides if, are used before the subjunctive 
mood. If is perhaps used most frequently, because it implies doubt more 
strongly than most others. 

467. By the foregoing, you may perceive that when the verb is in the sub- 
junctive form, some auxiliary verb is always understood ; as, " He will not be 
pardoned unless he repent," that is, " unless he will repent ;" " If thou ever 
return, thou shouldst be thankful," that is, " if thou shouldst ever return." 

468. A verb in the indicative mood is converted into the subjunctive, 
common form, simply by placing a conjunction, implying doubt, before it ; 
as, "I walk," the indicative mood, becomes subjunctive by prefixing if; 
thus, " If I walk." 

469. In like manner, a verb in the potential may be changed to the sub- 
junctive ; as, " I can go," is the potential ; " If I can go," the subjunctive. 

470. Of the iMPEUAiiVE mood. When I say, " John, mind your book," 
I command John to do something ; and because imperative means command- 
mg, we say that mind, m the phrase above, is in the imperative mood. 

With what does the verb is corre- What does, " He will not be pardoned 

gpond ? 461. unless he repent," mean ? 467. 

How is the verb varied in the common What, then, is understood ? 467. 
fi?rm of the subjunctive mood ? 461. " If thou ever return, thou shouldst be 

Why called common ? How varied in thankful :" what does this mean ? 45'J. 
the subjunctive form? Why called sub™ What, then, is understood ? 467. 

^HowlJthls distinction limited? 461. ™ at * 8 always ™ derstood in « * 

How are the remaining tenses varied? Ho ^ may a yerb in the indicatiV€ 

When do we use the subjunctive form ? f™* be converted into the subjunctive I 

When do we use the common form? In what mood is " John, mind your 

4^5. studies ?" Why ? 470. 

Why i* the conjunction if used most What is the meaning of im?trati**1 

ttaquentty in the suDjunctive mood 1 46S. 47(>. 



MOOD, 65 

471.. This mood, for reasons assigned before, (214.) embraces the follow* 
tag particulars : 

1. Command; as, "John, sit up." 

2. Entreaty; as, "Do visit me." 

3. Exhorting; as, "Remember my counsel." 

4. Permitting ; as, " Go in peace." 

472. The imperative mood, then, is used for commanding, 
entreating, exhorting, or permitting. 

473. The application of this mood is limited to the second person ; as, 
" John, come to me ;" because, in uttering a command, making an entreaty, 
&c. we must necessarily address some one ; hence, you can see the reason 
why this mood has but one person, viz. the second. 

474. We cannot, with any propriety, command a person to-day, or in 
present time, to do anything in past time, yesterday for instance; con- 
sequently a verb in this mood cannot have any past tense. 

475. When I command a person to do any thing, the performance of the 
command must take place in a period of time subsequent to that of the com- 
mand ; that is, in future time ; but the command itself must, from the very 
nature of the case, take place in present time : this mood, therefore, can- 
not, strictly speaking, have any future tense : hence, 

476. A verb in the imperative mood must be in the present tense, &nd in 
the second person. 

477. Of the infinitive mood. In the phrases, " John begins to sing," 
" The boys begin to sing," " Thou beginnest to sing," you perceive that 
the verb to sing is not varied to correspond with the number and person of 
its different agents, John, the hoys, and thou : hence, to sing is said not to 
be limited either by person or number. 

478. This mood, then, is properly denominated infinitive, signifying not 
limited : hence, 

479. The infinitive mood is used to express an action not 

limited either by person or number. 

430. To, the usual sign of this mood, is sometimes understood ; as, " Lei 
Gie go," instead of, " Let me to go ;" "I heard him say it," for, " I heard 
bim to say it." This little word to, when used before verbs in this man- 
ner, is not a preposition, but forms a part of the verb, and, in parsing, 
should be so considered. 

481. From the foregoing, it appears that there are five 
moods — the indicative, the imperative, the potential, the sub- 
junctive, and the infinitive. 



How many particulars does this mood What is the meaning of infinitival 

embrace ? 471. Why so many ? 214. 478. 

What, then, is the imperative mood In what mood is sing, in the phrases 

used for ? 472. Give an example of corn- *' John begins to sing," " The boys begin 

caanding ? one of entreating? one of to sing," "Thou beginnest to sing? T ' 

exhorting ? one of permitting ? 471. 477, 478. 

How many persons has this mood ? 473. In what particulars is this mood reck 

What person is it? 473. oned not to be limited ? 477. 

Has this mood any past tense ? Why ? What, then, is the infinitive mood 

474. used for? 479. 

When I command a person, when, if What is the usual sign of this mood ? 

at all, must the performance of the com- 480. 

mand take place? 475. Is it always expressed? Give an ex- 

When, or in what time, must the com- ample. 480 

fiis nd itself be given ? 475. How is the sign to to be parsed? 

lias this mood, then, any future tense ? 480. 

47a. Why parsed with the verb ? 480. 

How many tenses, then, has it ? How How many moods are there, and what 

Sfcany persons ? 476, are they ? 481. 

E 6* 



66 ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 



XXXIX. OF TENSE; 

482. The present tense expresses what is now taking place , 
as, " John swims." 

483. This tense is often employed to express the actions oi persons long 
since dead ; as, " Seneca reasons and moralizes well." 

484. The present tense, preceded by the words when, before, after, ae 
wn as, &c, is sometimes used to point out the relative time of a future 
ction ; as, " When he arrives, he will hear the news." 

485. This tense is elegantly applied to qualities and things which are is 
iheir nature unchangeable; as, "Truth is eternal;" "William boldfc 
asserted there was no God;" properly, " is no God." 

486. In animated (1.) historical narrations, (2.) this tense is sometimes 
used for the imperfect; as, " He enters the territory of the peaceable in- 
habitants; he fights and conquers, takes an immense booty, which he 
divides among his soldiers, and returns home to enjoy an empty triumph." 

487. The imperfect tense expresses what took place in time 
past, however distant ; as, " John died," 

488. The perfect tense expresses what has taken place, and 
conveys an allusion to the present time ; as, "I have finished 
my letter." 

489. When any particular period of past time is specified or alluded to, 
we use the imperfect tense; as, " John wrote yesterday ;" but when no 
particular past time is specified, we use the perfect tense ; as, "I have read 
Virgil many times." 

490. The perfect tense and the imperfect tense both denote a thing that 
is past ; but tne former denotes it in such a manner that there is still actually 
remaining some part of the time to slide away, wherein we declare the 
thing has been done ; whereas the imperfect denotes the thin^ or action 
past, in such a manner, that nothing remains of that time in which ii waa 
done. If we speak of the present century, we say, " Philosophers have 
made great discoveries in the present century ;" but if we speak of the last 
century, we say, " Philosophers made great discoveries in the last century." 
— " He has been much afflicted this year." " I have this week read the 
king's proclamation." " I have heard great news this morning." In these 
instances, He has been, I have read, and heard, denote things that are past; 

XXXIX. What is the meaning of pre- What does the perfect tense express? 

sent ? 173. Give an example. 488. 

What does the present tense express ? " John wrote yesterday." What tense 

482. Give an example. 482. is the verb in here ? 489. 

" Seneca reasons well." What tense Why is this tense used ? 489. 
is employed here ? Why ? 483. " I have read Virgil many times." Why 

In the phrase, " When he arrives," is the perfect tense used heie ? 483. 
future time is alluded to: why, then, is What do both the perfect and impe?* 

the present employed ? 484. feet denote ? 490. 

Do we sav, " There is," or, " there was How does the former denote it ? 490. 
so God ?" Why ? 485. How does the latter ? 49a 

What is the meaning of animated? 486. Do we say, "Philosophers made" or. 

Meaning of narrations ? 488. " have made, great discoveries in the p?©» 

" He enters the territory," &c. Why is sent century V- Why ? 490. 
the present tense used? 486. Which tense do we use in speaking oi 

What is the meaning of imperfect? 181. the last century? 490. Give an excia 

How came this term to be used, to de- pie. 490. 
note an action past and finished 1* "I have this week read the king's pro- 

What does the imperfect tense express? clamation." " I have heard greut ncv.a 

487. Give an example. 487 this morning." Which are the \ 

Meaning of perfect ?| used in these" two sentences ? 490. 

,'!.) Lively. (&) Descriptions, or telling what la* been 6oa«. 

• Sms# 'jcsatjfw to 1®1 finished, or complete. 



TENSES. — PARTICIPLES. 67 

but they occurred in this year, in this week, and to-day ; and still there 
remains a part of this year, week, and day, whereof I speak. 

490—1. In general, the perfect tense may be applied wherever the action 
is connected with the present time, by the actual existence, either of the 
author or of the work, though it may have been performed many centuries 
ago ; but if neither the author nor the work now remains, it cannot be used, 
We may say, " Cicero has written orations ;" but we cannot say, *■ Cicero 
}<uo8 written poems ;" because the orations are in being, but the poems are 
lost. Speaking of priests in general, we may say, " They have, in all ages, 
claimed great powers;" because the general order of the priesthood still 
exists : but tf we speak of the Druids, as any particular order of priests, 
which does not now exist, we cannot use this tense. We cannot say, 
" The Druid priests have claimed great powers ;" but must say, " The Druid 
priests claimed great powers ;" because that order is now totally extinct. 

491. The pluperfect tense expresses what had taken place at 
seme past time mentioned ; as, " I had finished my letter before 
my father returned." 

492. The first future tense expresses what will take place \ 
as, " John will come." 

493. The second future expresses what will have taken 
place, at or before some future time mentioned ; as, " I shall 
have finished my business before the steam-boat starts." 

494. Tense is the distinction of time, and admits of six 
variations, namely — -the present, the imperfect, the perfect, the 
pluperfect, and the first and second future tenses. 



XL. OF PARTICIPLES, 

495. In the phrase, "I found a man laboring in the field," the word 
laboring shows what the man was doing, and therefore resembles a verb. 
When I say, " The laboring man should not be wronged," laboring w 
joined to the noun man, to describe it, and therefore resembles an adjective. 

496. The word laboring, then, partakes of the nature of two different 
parts of speech ; and since participle signifies partaking of, we will call 
such words as laboring, participles. 

What do they denote ? When did these Give an example. 492. Why called first 

things occur ? 490. future 7* 

To what may the perfect tense in gen- What does the second future express! 

eralbe applied? What exception is men- Give an example. 493. 
tioned ? 490—1. How many tenses are there in all, and 

Do we say, " Cicero wrote," or, " has what are they ? 494. 
written, orations ?" " Cicero wrote," or, In what mood is, " He runs ?" Why ? 

" has written," poems ?" Why? 490—1. 452. "Does he run?" Why? 452. "I 

In speaking of priests, in general, why may run ?" Why ? 453. " Should I have 

do we say, " They have in all ages claim- studied ?" Why ? 453. " If he accept ?" 

ed great powers?" 490— 1. Why? 456. "If he accepts?" Why? 

Can we say, "The Druid priests have 456. 'To sing?" Why? 479. 
claimed great powers?" What should we In v% ^at tense is, "He sings?" Why ? 

say? Why? 490— 1. 482. " ,*id he sing ?" Why ? 487. " Ha 

What is the meaning of pluperfect? has read/" 488. Why? "Had he wot.- 

186. ten?" 491. Why? "Shall he go?" 49SL 

What does the pluperfect tense ex- " I shall have gone ?" Why ? 493 
press ? 491. Give an example. 491. XL. What parts of speech does labor- 

Meaning of future? 177. ing resemble ? Give an example. 495. 

What does the first future express? What is themes ning of participle? 493. 

e Sft* amwUco to fy*|. 



OS ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

497. All participles are derived from verbs; thus, from labor comes 
laboring ; from beat, beating; rejoice, rejoicing, &.C. : hence, 

493. The participle is a word derived from a verb, and par- 
takes of the nature of a verb and adjective. 

499. When I say, " John is writing," the participle writing shows v 
John is now doing, but has not finished ; writing, then, may be caked a 
present participle : hence, 

500. The present participle expresses what is now taking 

place, but not ftnisned. 

501 — 1. This participle always ends in ing ; as, sinning, fighting, weep- 
ing, loving, &c. There are many words of this termination, which are 
Slot participles; as, morning evening, which are nouns; uninteresting, 
unsatisfying, which are adjectives. The fact that these cannot be formed 
from verbs will furnish you with a certain rule for distinguishing the par- 
ticiple from ail other words of the same termination ; as, for instance. «»- 
interesting, we know, is not a participle, because there is no such verb as 
uninterest, from which to form it, 

501. " The letter is written." Here the participle written shows that 
the act of writing is past and finished ; it may then be called a perfect par- 
ticiple : hence, 

502. The perfect participle expresses what is past and finished, 
502—1. This participle may always be distinguished by its making sense 

with having ; thus, having written, having sung, &c. Here written and 
sung are perfect participles. 

503. "John, having written his letter, sealed it." Here you doubtless 
perceive that the act of writing took^place before that of sealing ; alsG, that 
the participle is composed of two words, having and written ; it may then 
be called a compmnd participle, and because it denotes also an action past 
and finished, it may very properly be called a compound perfect participle : 
hence, 

504. The compound perfect participle expresses what took 
place before something else mentioned. 

504 — 1. This participle is formed by placing the present participle having 
before the perfect participle of any verb ; as, having fought, having cipfared 



XLL FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE VERB. 

505. Struck is a perfect participle, from the verb strike, and this yon 
know, because it makes sense joined with having ; as, having struck. 

From what are all participles derived? Having written, having sung. Which 

407. Give an example. 497. are the perfect participles here ? 502. 

What is a participle ? 49S. " John , having written his letter, sea!- 

When I say, " John is writing," what ed it." Which took place first, the wri- 

ioes writing show ? 499. ting or sealing ? 503. 

What, then, may it be called? 499. Of what is this participle composed! 

What, then, is a present participle? 503. 
£00. What, then, may it be called ? 503. 

What does this participle always end What does having wrftten denote in 

sn? 500—1. Give an example. 500—1. reference to time and action ? 5C3. 

Are all words ending in ing partici- What may it thence be called ? 503. 
rles? Give an example of nouns of this What does a compound .perfect parti 

termination? of adjectives ? 500 -.1. cipie -express? 504. 

How, then, can the partk pie be How is this participle formed? 504. 

distinguished? Give an example. Give an example. 504. 
900—1. XLI. Striking, struck, having struck. 

"The letter is written." What does Here are three different participles : can 

the participle written show here ? What, you tell which is the present? Why? 

then, may it be called? 501. 500. Perfect? Why? 502. Compound 

WJhat is a perfect participle? 502. perfect ? Why ? 503. 

How may this participle always he What kind of a participle is struck* 

ttiown ? Give an example. 50*2—1 505 How rio you know this? &0& 



VERBS. C9 

506. Is, you doubtless recollect, is a variation of the verb to be ; aa, " 1 
ma, you are, he is:" now, by joining is with struck, we can form the pas- 
give verb is struck; "John strikes Joseph," is active; but, "Joseph is 
struck by John," is passive. 

507, In these two examples, you perceive that the sense of each is the 
same : hence, by means of the passive verb, we are enabled to express, in a 
different form, the precise meaning of the active, which, you will oftentimes 
find, contributes not a little to the variety and harmony of the language. 

-508. By examining the conjugation of the verb to be, you will discover 
that it has, in all, ten variations : viz. am, art, is, are, was, wast, were, been, 
he, and being. Every passive verb must be composed of one of these ten 
variations, and the perfect participle of any active transitive verb. Thus, 
taking was, and joining it with the perfect participle of the verb beat, namely, 
beaten, we form the passive verb was beaten, to which prefixing an object, 
or nominative case, we have the phrase, " William was beaten." 

509. It is a fact worthy to be remembered, that the passive verb always 
retains the same mood, tense, number, and person, that the verb to be has, 
before it is incorporated with the participle ; thus, " He has been," is the 
indicative perfect, third person singular ; then, " He has been rejected," is 
likewise the indicative perfect, third person singular, passive. It cannot, 
therefore, be difficult to tell the mood, tense, number, and person, of any 
passive verb, if you are familiar with the conjugation of the verb to be. 

From the foregoing particulars, we derive the following general rule : 

510. All passive verbs are formed by adding the perfect par- 
ticiple of any active-transitive verb to the neuter verb to be. 



XLIL OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

511. Auxiliary verbs are those by the help of which the 
principal verbs are conjugated. 

512. The auxiliary verbs are may, can, must, might, could, 
would, should, and shall* The following are sometimes aux- 
iliaries, and sometimes principal verbs : do, be, have, and will, 

513. When, in the formation of any tense, we use an auxiliary verb, that 
tense is called a compound one ; and the tense formed by the principal verb 
alone is called a simple tense. 



XLIII. SIGNS OF THE MOODS. 

514. The indicative mood may be known by the sense, or 

by its having no sign except in asking a question ; as, " Who 
comes here?" 

Of what verb is the verb is a varia- What fact is mentioned as worthy of 

tion ? 506. notice ? 509, 

Will you form a passive verb with is What mood, tense, number, and per- 

and strueffc 506. son, is, " He has been ?" 509. Is, " Hi 

" John strikes Joseph." How may the has been rejected ?" 509. 

sense of this sentence be expressed by a What will make the mood, tense, &c 

passive verb ? 506. of passive verbs familiar ? 509. 

What advantage does the use of the How are a}1 passive verbs formed ? 510. 

passive verb often afford us? 507. . XLIL What is the meaning of aus* 

To what does it contribute ? 507. iliary?m. 

„ . 4 . ' " . What are auxiliary verbs? 511. 

How many variations has the verb to Wiu you Iiame them ? 512> 

he in all ? 508. What are they ? 508. What verbs are used botil ag ailx ii iarf 

What will always compose one part of and principal verbs ? 512. 

a passive verb? 50& What the other XLIII. What ;* the sign of the indica- 

S*rt? 50& tiv» mood? 514. Oiw an sample 5U 



70 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

615. The potential mood has for its signs the auxiliaries 
may, can, must, might, could, would, and should ; as, " I 
could love," &c. - 

516. The subjunctive mood has usually for its signs the 
injunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, and lest ; as, 
" Unless he repent," &e. 

517. The infinitive mood has usually for its sign the word 
to ; as, to sing, 

518. The imnerative mood may be distinguished by its 
always being in the second person, and by its agreement with 
thou, or ye, or you ; as, " Depart thou," &c. 



XLIY. SIGNS OF THE TENSES OF THE 

. INDICATIVE. 

51 9. The present tense has for its sign the first form of the 
verb ; as, tveep* remain, &c. ; excepting the occasional use of 
do ; as, " I do learn." 

520. The imperfect tense has no auxiliary for a sign, except 
did, which is sometimes used. If, however, the verb is not m 
the present tense, and has no auxiliary, it follows that it is in 
the imperfect ; as, " I fought." 

521. The perfect tense has for its sign the word have ; as, 
have loved. 

522. The pluperfect has for its sign had ; as, had loved. 

523. The first future has for its sign shall or will ; as, shah 
or will love. 

524. The second future has for its sign shall have or will 
have ; as, shall have loved, or will have loved. 

525. The indicative mood has six tenses. 

526. The subjunctive mood has six tenses. 

527. The potential mood has four tenses. 

528. The infinitive mood has two tenses. 

529. The imperative mood has one tense. 

What is the sign of the potential mood? Sign of the perfect ? 521. Give an e>; 

615. Give an example. 515. ample. 521. 

What is the sign of the subjunctive Si S n of tne pluperfect ? 522. Give in 

mood ? 518. Give an example. 516. example. 522. 

What is the sign of the infimtivemood? Sign of the first future ? 523. Give an 

517. Give an example 517. ^ig^of Se second future ? 524, Civ, 
What is the sign of the imperative? a n example. 524. 

518. Give an example. 518. How many tenses has the indicative 
XLIV. What is the sign of the pre- mood? 525. 

gent indicative ? 519. Give an example. How many the subjunctive ? 53®. 

519. How many the potential ? 527. 
Sign of the imperfect? 390. Give an How many the infinitive? 528. 

»*ample. 53G How many the imperative? 529- 



VERBS. 7 x 

XLV. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

$30. When I ask you to raise your voice, in reading, you readily under- 
stand what I mean by voice ; but in grammar, its application is somewhat 
peculiar. Grammatically considered, it refers to the active and passive 
nature of verbs. 

531. The conjugation of a verb is the regular combination 
and arrangement of its several numbers, persons, moods, and 
tenses. 

532. The conjugation of an active verb is styled the 
active voice, and that of a passive verb the passive voice. 

533. Verbs are called regular, when they form their im- 
perfect tense of the indicative mood, and their perfect parti- 
ciple, by the addition of ed to the verb in the present tense, or 
d only when the verb ends in e ; as, 

Pres. Tense. Imp. Tense. Per/. Participle. 
I favour. I favoured. Favoured. 

I love. I loved. Loved. 

534. When a verb does not form its imperfect tense and 
perfect participle in this manner, it is called an irregulab 
verb ; as, 

Pres. Tense. Imp. Tense. Perf. Participle. 
I am. I was. Been. 

535. The regular verb love, and the irregular verb to &&, 
are ccajugated as follows : — 

TO LOVE and TO BE. 

ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICE CONTRASTS®. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 
ACTIVE VOICE* PASSIVE VOICE. STEUTE&, 

Singular. Singular. Singular. 

1 Pers, I love. 1 Pers. I am loved. 1 Pers. I am. 

2 Pers. You love. 2 Pers. Yon are loved. 2 Pers. You ar&. 

3 Peru. lie loves. 3 Pers. He is loved. 3 Pers. He is. 

Plural. Plural. Plural. 

1 Pers. W- love. I Pers. We are loved. 1 Pers. We are. 

2 Pers. You love. 2 Pers. You are loved. 2 Pers. You are. 

3 Pers. They love. 3 Pers. They are loved. 3 Pers. They are. 

XLV. What does voice mean in gram- When are verbs called regular ? S3B. 

ta&r? 530. Give an example. 533. 

Meaning of conjugation ? 217. Will you repeat after me the present 

What is the coniugation of an active ^nse. and name the imperfect tense and 

verb styled * *>32 perfect participle, of the verbs /avow 7 

3 . love? 533. 

What the conjugation at a pasaiv* When is a verb called irrnpular ? 534 

nrb ? 53?i Qira an example 534. 



n 


KNGLIS H GRAMMAR. 






IMPERFECT TENSE. 






Singular. 




Singular. 




&tflg*2fif: 


1. 1 loved. 




1. I was loved. 


i. 


I was. 


S. You loved. 




2. You were loved. 


2. 


You were. 


3. He loved. 




3. He was loved. 


3. 


He was. 


Plural. 




Plural. 




Plural. 


1. We loved. 




1. We were loved. 


1. 


We were. 


2. You loved. 




2. You were ioved. 


2. 


You were. 


. They loved. 




3. They were loved. 
PERFECT TENSE. 


3. 


They were. 


Singular. 




Singular. 




Singular. 


1. 1 nave loved. 




1. I have been loved. 


1. 


I have been. 


2. You have loved. 




2. You have been loved. 


2. 


You have beea 


3. lie has loved. 




3. He has been loved. 


3. 


He has been. 


Plural. 




Plural. 




Plural. 


1. We have loved. 




1. We have been loved. 


1. 


We have been. 


2. You have loved. 




2. You have been loved. 


2. 


You have been. 


3. They have loved 




3. They have been loved. 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 


3. 


They have been 


Singular. 




Singular. 




Singular. 


1. I had loved. 




1. I had been loved. 


1. 


I had been. 


2. You had loved. 




2. Yg& had been loved. 


2. 


You had been. 


3. He had loved. 




3. He had been loved. 


3! 


He had been. 


Plural. 




Plural. 




Plural. 


1. We had loved. 




1. We had been loved. 


1. 


We had been. 


2. You had loved. 




2. You had been loved. 


2. 


You had been. 


3. They had loved. 




3. They had been loved. 

FIRST FUTURE TENSE 


3. 


They had been 


Singular. 




Singular. 




Singular. 


1 . I shall or will love. 


1. I shall or will be 


!. 


I shall or will be. 


8. You shall or 


will 


loved. 


2. 


You shall or will 


love. 




2. You shall or will be 




be. 


3. He shall or 


will 


loved. 


3. 


He shall or wiU 


love. 




3. He shall or will be 
loved. 




be. 


Plural. 




Plural. 




PluraL 


1. We shall or 


v/ill 


1. We shall or will be 


1. 


We shall or will 


love. 




loved. 




be. 


2. You shall jr 


will 


2. You shall or will be 


2. 


You shall or will 


love. 




loved. 




be. 


3. They shall or 


will 


3. They shall or will be 


3. 


They shall or will 


love. 




loved. 




be. 




SECOND FUTURE TENSE, 




Singular. 




Singular. 




Singular. 


1. I shall have loved. 


1. I shall have been 


1. 


I shall have been. 


2. You will have 


lov- 


loved. 


2. 


You will have besa. 


ed. 




2. You will have been 


3. 


He will have been. 


8. He will have loved. 


loved. 










3. He will have beers 










ioved. 






Plural. 




Plural. 




P&toJ. 


1. We shall have 


lov- 


1. We shall have been 


1. 


We shall have been. 


ed. 




loved. 


2. 


You will have been. 


2. You will have 


lov- 


2. You will have been 


3; 


They will have been 


ed. 




loved. 






3. They will have 


lov- 


3. They will have been 






ed. 




loved. 







Will you conjugate love in the present 
tense, active voice, indicatiye mood ? 
638. In the imperfect ? perfect ? plii 



perfect ? first future ? cecond future ? 
present passive? imperfect? perfect? 
pluperfect? first future? second future* 



TENSES. 



Singular. 

1. I may or can love. 

2. You may or can 

love. 
8- He may or can 
love. 

Plural. 
h We may or can 
love. 



POTENTIAL MOOD. 

PRESENT TENS®. 

Singular. 

1. I may or can be lov- 

ed. 

2. You may or can be 

loved. 

3. He may or can be 

loved. 
Plural. 
1. We may or can be 
loved. 



$, You may or can 2. You may or can be 

love. loved. 

3, They may or can 3. They may or can be 

love. loved. 



Singular, 
1. I might, could, would, 

or should love* 
%. You might, could, 

would, or should 

love. 
3. He might, could, 

would, or should 

love. 
Plural. 
I. We might, could, 

would, or should 

love. 
3. You might, could, 

would, or should 

love. 
3. They might, could, 

would, or should 

love. 



Singular. 
1. 1 may or can have 
loved. 

2. You may or can have 

loved. 

3. He may or can have 

loved. 
Plural. 
1. We may or can have 

loved. 
U You may or can have 

loved. 
3. They may or can 

have loved. 



IMPERFECT TENSEc 

Singular. 

1 . I might , could , would , 

or should be loved. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
be loved. 

3. He might, could, 

would, or should 
be loved. 
Plural. 

1. We might, could, 

would, or should 
be loved. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
be loved. 

3. They might, could, 

would, or should 
be loved. 

PERFECT TENSE, 

Singular. 

1. I may or can have 

been loved. 

2. You may or can have 

been loved. 

3. He may or can have 

been loved. 
Plural. 
i. We may or can have 
been loved. 

2. You may or can have 

been loved. 

3. They may or can 

have been loved. 



Si?ig%lar. 

1. I may or can be. 

2. You may or can 

be, 

3. He may or car 

be. 

Plural. 

1. We may or cais 

be. 

2. You may or can 

be. 

3. They may or car 

be. 



Singular. 

1. I might, could, would, 

or should be. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
be. 

3. He might, could, 

would, or should 
be. 

Plural. 

1. We might, could, 

would, or should 
be. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
be. 

3. They might, could, 

would, or should 
be. 



Singular. 

1. I may or can have 

been. 

2. You may or can have 

been. 

3. He may or can have 

been. 
Plural. 

1. We may or can havs 

been. 

2. You may or can ha ■' 3 

been. 

3. They may or can 

have been. 



Will you conjugate the verb to be, or 
am, in the present? the imperfect? per- 
fect ? pluperfect ? first future ? second 
future? 

WH1 you name the first person singu- 
lar, of the present indicative, active and 
passive, of love, and the first person sin- 
gula* of the verb to ha 1 



The second person in like manner? tha 
third ? the first person plural ? second 
person plural ? third ? sirs! person singu- 
lar, imperfect ? second person 1 third 1 
first person plural ? second person plural? 
third? first person singular, perfect? 
second person ? third ? first person pi* 
ral? second? third? 



74 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



Singular. 
I. I might, could, would, 

or should have lov- 
ed. 
£. You might, could, 

would, or should 

have loved. 
8s He might, could, 

would, or should 

have loved. 
Plural, 
I We might, could, 

would, or should 

have loved. 
S. You might, could, 

would, or should 

have loved. 
S. They might, could, 

would, or should 

have loved. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

Singular, 
1. 1 might, could, would, 

or should have been 

loved. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
have been loved. 

3. He might, could, 

would, or should 
have been foved. 
Plural. 

1. We might, could, 

would, or should 
have been loved. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
have been loved. 

3. They might, could, 

would, or should 
have been loved. 



Singular, 

1. I might, could, wouM- 

or should hav« 
been. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
have been. 

3. He might, could, 

would, or should 
have been. 
Plural. 

1. We might, could, 

would, or should 
have been. 

2. You might, could, 

would, or should 
have been. 

3. They might, could, 

would, or should 
have been. 



Singular , 
1. If I love. 
%. If you love. 
3. If he loves. 
Plural. 

1. If we love. 

2. If you love. 
S. If they love. 



Singular. 

1. If I love. 

2. If you love. 

3. If he love. 

Plural. 
1. If we love. 
%, If you love. 
3. If they love. 



Singular. 
I. If I loved. 
8. If you loved, 
3.. H he loved. 
Plural. 
1. If we loved. 
S. If you loved. 
3. If they loved. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

Common Form. 
Singular. 

1. If I am loved. 

2. If you are loved. 

3. If he is loved. 

Plural. 

1. If we are loved. 

2. If you are loved. 

3. If they are loved. 

Subjunctive Form, 
Singular. 

1. If I be loved. 

2. If you be loved. 

3. If he be loved. 

Plural. 

1. If we be loved. 

2. If you be loved. 

3. If they be loved. 

IMPERFECT TENSE. 

Common Form. 

Singular. 

1. If I was loved. 

2. If you were loved. 

3. If ne was loved. 

Plural. 

1. If we were loved. 

2. Ir you were loved. 

3. If they were loved. 



Singular. 

1. If I am. 

2. If you are. 

3. If he is. 
Plural 

1. If we are. 

2. If you are. 

3. If they are. 



Singular, 

1. If I be. 

2. If you be. 

3. If he be. 
Plural 

1. If we be. 

2. If vou be. 

3. If they be. 



Singular, 

1. If I was. 

2. If you were. 

3. If he was. 
Plural 

1. If we were. 

2. If yon were. 

3. If they were. 



Will you conjugate love in like man- 
ner, through each person and voice of the 
pluperfect ? first and second futures? pre- 
sent potential ? imperfect? perfect? plu- 
perfect? present subjunctive, common 
form ? subjunctive form ? imperfect, com- 
rron form? subjunctive form.? perfect? 
pluperfect? firat and second futures? 



Will you conjugate love in the preset; 
indicative active? imperfect ? perfect ? 
pluperfect? first and second futures 5 
present passive? imperfect? perfects 
pluperfect? first and second futures? 
present indicative of to be ? imperfect f 
perfect? pluperfect? first and second 
futures ? 



TENSES. 



Singular. 
If I loved. 
If you loved. 
If he loved. 
Plural 
If we loved. 
If you loved. 
If they loved. 



Subjunctive Form* 

Singular. 

1. If I were loved. 

2. If you were loved. 

3. If he were loved. 

Plural. 

1. If we were loved. 

2. If you were loved. 

3. If they were loved. 



Singular. 

1. If I were 

2. If you were. 
3.JI he were. 

Plural 

1. If we were. 

2. If you were. 

3. If they were. 



The remaining tenses are all of the Common Form. 



Singular. 
If I have loved. 
If you have loved. 
If he has loved. 

Plural 
If we have loved. 
If you have loved. 
If they have loved. 



Singular. 
1. If I had loved. 
%. If you had loved. 
3. If he had loved. 

Plural. 
1. If we had loved. 
8. If you had loved. 
3. If they had loved. 



PERFECT TENSE. 
Singular. 

1. If I have been loved. 

2. If you have been lov- 

ed. 

3. If he has been loved. 

Plural 

1. If we have been lov- 

ed. 

2. If you have been lov- 

ed. 

3. If they have been lov- 

ed. 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
Singular. 

1. If I had been loved. 

2. If you had been loved. 

3. If he had been loved. 

Plural 

1. If we had been loved. 

2. If you had been lov- 

ed. 

3. If they had been loved. 



Singular. 

1. If I have been. 

2. If you have basn, 

3. If he ha3 been. 

Plural. 

1. If we have been. 

2. If you have been. 

3. If they have beea. 



Singular. 

1. If I had been. 

2. If you had been. 

3. If he had been. 

Plural. 

1. If we had been. 

2. If you had been. 

3. If they had been. 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

Singular. Singular. Singular. 

I. If I shall or will 1. If I shall or will be 1. If I shall or will 

love. loved. be. 

%. If you shall or will 2. If you shall or will be ) 2. If you shall or will 

love. loved. be. 

3. If he shall or will 3. If he shall or will be 3. If he shall or will 
love. loved. be. 



Will you conjugate love through each 
person of the present indicative active ? 
passive ? the neuter verb to be? also in 
the imperfect ? perfect ? pluperfect ? first 
and second futures? present potential? 
imperfect ? perfect ? pluperfect ? present 
subjunctive, in both forms? perfect? 
pluperfect? first and second futures ? 

What is the present infinitive active of 
love 7 present passive? present of to be? 
perfect active of love? perfect passive? 
perfect of to be? present participle active 
of love? present passive? "resent of to 
be? perfect of love? perfect of to be? 
compound perfect of love, in the active? 
in the passive of to be? 

In what voice and mood is, " I love ?" 
" They love ?" " They are loved ?" " Are 
they loved ?" " I do love ?" What is the 
force of do ? In what voice and mood is, 
'The inao lov#d V "He has loved 7" 



" He has been loved ?" " Has he been 
loved ?" " She had . loved ?" " She had 
been loved ?" " We shall love ?" " We 
shall be loved ?" " Shall I have been 
loved ?" " May I love ?" " May I be 
loved ?■'' " She may have loved ?" " S!w 
may have been loved ?" " If I love V* 
" If he be loved ?" " If he is loved ?" " M 
I love ?" " If I were loved ?" M If I was 
loved?" 

In what tense is, " They love ?" " Ye 
are loved ?" " She did Jove ?" " We were 
loved ?" " They shall love ?" " They 
shall be loved V " I may be loved ? 7 ' 
" If she has been loved ?" 

In what number and nerson is, " I 
love?" "We love?" "lie does love?" 
" The man did love ?" " The men were 
loved ?" " If he love ?" " If X was T 
" If I were ?" " If ye have been ?" " If 
ve ha^e lov«d7" " You may bs lo»»d V 



76 ENGLISH GRAMMAR 

Plural, Plural. Plural. 

1. If ws shall or will 1. If we shall or will be 1. If we shall or wiH 

love. loved. be. 

2. If you shall or will 2. If you shall or will be 2. If you shall or will 

love. loved. be. 

% If they shall or will 3. If they shall or will 3. If they shall or will 

love. be loved. be. 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 


Singular. 


Singular. 
1. If I shall have been 


Singular. 
1. If I shall have been. 


. If I shall have lov- 


ed. 


loved. 


2. If you shall hava 


If you shall have lov- 


2. If you shall have been 


been. 


ed. 


loved. 


3, If he shall have 


3 If he shall have lov- 


3. If he shall have been 


been. 


ed. 


loved. 




Plural. 


Plural. 


Plural. 


2. If we shall have lov- 


1. If we shall have been 


1. If we shall have 


ed. 


loved. 


been. 


8. If you shall have lov- 


2. If you shall have been 


2. If you shall have 


ed. 


loved. 


been. 


3 If they shall have lov- 


3. If they shall have 


3. If they shall have 


ed. 


been loved. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD 

PRESENT TENSE. 


been. 


Singular. 


Singular. 
2. Be you loved, or do 


Singular. 


S. Love you, or do you 


2. Be you, or do yoti 


love. 


you be loved. 


be. 


Plural. 


Plural. 


Plural. 


S. Love you, or do you 


2. Be you loved, or do 


2. Be you, or do you 


love, 


you be loved, 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 


be. 


Pres. To love. 


Pres. To be loved. 


Pres. To be. 


Per/. To have loved 


Perf. To have been lov- 
ed. 

PARTICIPLES. 


Perf To have beea, 


Pres. Loving. 


Pres. Being loved. 


Pres. Being. 


Perf. Loved. 


Perf. Loved. 


Perf. Been. 


Compound Perf. Hav- 


Compound Perf. Hav- 


Compound Perf. Hav- 


ing loved. 


ing been loved. 


ing been. 



536. For the benefit of those who wish to retain the pronoun thou, in th© 
conjugation of verbs, the following synopsis is given. The pupil can tak® 
it separately, or be taught it in connection with the other persons of tha 
verb, by substituting thou for you, in the foregoing conjugation. 



Is lw>6, as, " They love," a regular or 
ii regular verb ? why ? 533. active or pas- 
sive ? 439. What mood is it in ? why ? 
452. tense ? why ? 482. number ? person 7 
What does love agree with 7 Rule VII. 

Is are, as, " They are," a regular or 
irregular verb? why? 534. passive or 
aeuter ? why 7 450. What mood is it in 7 
why? 452. tense? why? 482. number? 
person ? Rule for its agreement ? VII. 

What is the present imperative of lovs7 
present infinitive ? 

What mood and tense is, " Love you ?" 
is, " To have been loved?" 

Will you conjugate learn in ihe pre- 
sent indicative active ? passive ? perfect 
active? perfect passive ? present poten- 
tial active? passive? imperfect active? 



passive 7 imperative present active ? pas- 
sive ? perfect infinitive active ? passive 1 
present subjunctive active in both forms? 
passive? perfect infinitive? future a©» 
rive passive ? 

What kind of verb (that is, regular of 
irregular,) what voice, mood, tense, num- 
ber, and person is, " I sing ?" " We are 
formed?" "He is?" "You are deter, 
mined?" " It rains?" "It has happen- 
ed?" " The man was respected ?" ' 4 The 
boys did study ?" " If he improve ?" " Un- 
less he repent ?" " Although she be dis- 
appointed ?" " He may depart ?" " De- 
part now?" "To love?" "To sing?" 
" To be sung ?" " To rejoice ?" " To have 
v/ept ?" " To have been seen ?" " Yo have 
£»ePT> found?" 



Pres. Thou lovest. 
Imp. Thou lcvedst. 
Per/. Thou hast loved. 
Plup.. Thou hadst lov- 
ed. 

1 Fut Thou shalt or 

wilt love. 

2 Fit*. Thou wilt have 

loved. 

537, 
Pres. Thou 

canst love. 
Imp. Thou mightst, 

couldst, wouldst, or 

shouldst love. 
Per/. Thou mayst or 

canst have loved. 
Plup. Thou mightst, 

couldst, wouldst, or 

shouldst have loved. 



TENSES. 
Synopsis with Thou. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Thou art loved. 
Thou wast loved. 
Thou hast been loved. 
Thou hadst been loved. 

Thou shalt or wilt be 

loved. 
Thou wilt have been 

loved. 

POTENTIAL MOOD, 
mayst or Thou mayst or canst be 



loved. 
Thou mightst, couldst, 

wouldst, or shouldst 

be loved. 
Thou mayst or canst 

have been loved. 
Thou mightst, couldst, 

wouldst, or shouldst 

have been loved. 



77 



Thou art. 
Thou wast. 
Thou hast been. 
Thou hadst been. 

Thou shalt or wilt be. 

Thou wilt have been. 



Thou mayst or canst 

be. 
Thou mightst, couldst, 

wouldst, or shouldst 

be. 
Thou mayst or canst 

have been. 
Thou mightst, couldst, 

wouldst, or shouldst 

have been. 



538. 
Fres. If thou lovest. 
Imp. If thou lovedst. 

539. 
Pres. If thou love. 
Imp, If thou loved. 

540. 
Perf. If thou hast loved- 
Plup. If thou hadst lov- 

1 Put. If thou shalt or 

wilt love. 
% Put. It thou shalt have 

loved. 



If thou art. 
If t\\o\k wast, 

If thou be. 
If thou wen, 
• 

If thou hast been. 
If thou hadst been. 



shalt 



wilt 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
- Common Form, 
If thou art loved. 
If thou wast loved. 

Subjunctive Form. 
If thou be loved. 
If thou w r ert loved. 

Common Form. 
If thou hast been loved. 
If thou hadst been lov- 
ed. 
If thou shalt or wilt be 

loved. 
If thou shalt have been 

loved. 
Interrogative Form. 
INDICATIVE PRESENT. 
Singular. 

1. Am I lovecj? 

2. Are you loved ? 

3. Is he loved ? 
Plural. 

1. Are we loved? 

2. Are you loved ? 

3. Are they loved ? 
on examination of the foregoing conjugation, that tba 



If thou 

be. 
If thou shalt have been. 



Singular, 

1. Ami? 

2. Are you ? 

3. Is he ? 

Plural. 

1. Are we ? 

2. Are you ? 

3. Are thev ? 



541. 

Singular. 

1. Do I love ? 

2. Do you love ? 

3. Does he love ? 

Plural. 

1. Do we love ? 

2. Do you love? 

3. Do they love ? 
542. You will find, 

,enses oi the subjunctive are in every respect similar to the corresponding ones 
)i the indicative, except the following, namely, the present and imperfect 

honor in like manner through the pas- 
sive ? also the synopsi3 of the verb to be? 
Give the synopsis of desire in the active, 
like love; in the passive ; verb to ha; firs? 
person plural active ; passive ; to be; third 
person active ; passive ; to be. 

What mood does the subjunctive r©« 
««haiblf in its tenses ? 542 



Will you give the synopsis of love join- 
ed with thou through the indicative ac- 
'ive ? passive ? Neuter verb to be ? 

Wii. you name the synopsis of learn in 
Am first person in the active voice, 
through each mood and tense ? Will you 
#eoea* the two tenses of the infinitive 
»otf the three participles? Synopsis of 



78 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

of the verb to be ; the present and imperfect of the passive , the present arid 
the second future active. The last, however, corresponds in termination, 
but not in formation. Among the exceptions should be reckoned the Tise of 
the conjunction if. There are instances, however, of the subjunctive form, 
when no conjunction is expressed, but in all such cases it is plainly under- 
stood; as, " Were I to go, he would not follow;" " Had he known me, 
ne would have treated me differently ;" that is, " If I were to go," and, " If 
he had known." Examples of this description are conjugated as follows s 

SUBJUNCTIVE FORM. 

543. IMPERFECT TENSE. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Were I. 1. Were we. 

2. Were you. 2. Were you. 

3. Were he. 3. Were they. 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. Had I loved. 1. Had we loved. 

2. Had you loved. 2. Had you loved. 

3. Had he loved. 3. Had they loved. 

544. The second person singular of all verbs* formerly (1.) ended in st ; 
as, " Thou hast," " Thou wast," &c„ This form is still retained by thai 
respectable class of persons denominated (2.) Friends, and in the Sacred (3.. 
Scriptures. (3.) 

•545. Eth, for the termination of the third person singular, obtained (4.^ 
very generally till within a recent (5.) period, especially on grave (6.) and 
didactic (7.) subjects ; as, " He that hath ears to hear, let him hear ;" " Sim- 
ple multiplication teacheth to repeat," &c. But the custom of the present 
day is decidedly (8.) against the usage. (9.) 

546. The Scriptures abound (10.) with instances of the use of the pro- 
noun ye for you ; as, " Ye are the salt of the earth ; n but it is scarcely to 
be met with in an^fetandard works of modern date. 

547. The following conjugation accords with the ancient usage of the verb. 

INDICATIVE PRESENT. - 

Singular. Singular. Singular. 

1. I love. 1. I am loved. 1. I am. 

2. Thoulovest. 2. Thou art loved. 2. Thou art. 

3. He loveth or loves. 3. He is loved. 3. He is. 

What exceptions? 542. By whom is this termination still re- 
How does the second future differ ? 542. tained ? 544. In what writings ? 544. 
Will you explain the difference 7 542. Meaning of Sacred Scriptures? 544. 
What is the sign of the subjunctive What form of the third person singa 

mood? 516. Is it always expressed? 542. lar obtained till recently ? 545. Give as 

Give an example. 542. Will you supply example. 545. 

the conjunction ? Meaning of obtained? 545. Of recentl 

Will you conjugate the v%rh to be in 545. 

the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense, On what subjects was the termination 

without its usual sign? In like manner eth used in writing? 545. 

conjugate love in the pluperfect. Meaning of grave? of didactic? 545. 

Will you conjugate love in the present In what writings do we find ye used 

active, interrogative form? passive? for yoit? 546. 

neuter verb to be ? Is it common in modern works ? 546. 

In what voice, mood, tense, number Will you conjugate love in the present 

and person is, " Do I study ?" " Did she active, according to the ancient usage I 

study ?" " Were they dismissed?" " Are 547. passive ? neuter verb to be? 

we ?" In what number and person is, " II© 

In what did the second person singular hath ?" " He hates ?" " Thou lovest ?" 

of all verbs formerly end ? 544. Give an "Thou hast?" "He learneth?" " Yo 

example. 544. learn?" " He rejoiceth?" "Thou art re- 
Meaning of formerly 7 544. joiced ?" " Thou art ?" " He weepeth ?" 



R Excepting art. 

1.) Some tune ag. 

7.) Abounding in OTfi«w>ts or instruetrre. (S.) Positive^. (9.) Ure. ( 10. ) H*v« uumy. 



O.) Some time ago. (2.) Called. (3.) The Bible. (4.) Prevailed. (S.) Late. <&) Sarioan 



VERBS. 79 

Plural. Plural. Plural. 

1. We iove. I. We are loved. 1. We are. 

8. Ye or you love. 2. Ye or you are loved. 2. Ye or you are. 

0. They love. 3. They are loved. 3. They are. 

548. &r For a further illustration of these obsolete conjugations, die 
learner is referred to those treatises on grammar in our schools, which pro- 
fess to furnish him with a sure and infallible guide to the true and proper 
use of the English language. 

RULE IT'S. 

T*he nominative case governs the verb in number and 

person. 

M verb must agree with its nominative case in number and 

person. 

HUXsEl vi-xx. 

Active-transitive verbs govern the objective case. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING. 

" William was admired for his prudence. 39 

549. William is a proper noun, of the third person, singulae 
number, masculine gender, and in the nominative case to was ad- 
mired, agreeably to Rule VI. 

Was admired is a regular passive verb, from the verb to admire 
— " Pres. admire ; Imp. admired ; Perf. part, admired. 1. I was ad- 
mired ; 2. You were admired ; 3. He or William was admired"— 
made in the indicative mood, imperfect tense, third person, sin. 
gular number, and agrees with William, according to Rule VIL 

For is a preposition. 

His is a personal pronoun, of the third person, singular num 
ber, masculine gender, and agrees with William, according to 
Rule V. — " Nom. he ; Poss. his" — made in the possessive case* 
and governed by prudence, by Rule I. 

Prudence is a common noun, of the third person, singular num- 
ber, neuter gender, objective case, and governed ojfor, by Rule X. 

EXERCISES IN PARSING CONTINUED. 

" John was applauded for his elo- " The girl was ridiculed by he? 

quence." companions." 

" The king was crowned at West* " Susan was respected for her viste 

minster Abbey." ous conduct." 

"Thomas has been esteemed." "James will be rewarded by his 
"The business will be regulated." instructer." 

" Addition teacheth ?" " He that hath was admired ? 549, for ? 549. his ? 549„ 

ears?" "He that sinneth?" "Thou prudence? 549. 

lovedst?" "Thou mightst, couldst, What is a passive verh? 444. How 

wouldst, or shouldst have lamented ?" formed ? 510. Why is admired regular * 

What is the rule for the agreement of 533. 

the verb? rule for the nominative ? rule Why is for a preposition? 246. Why 

by which verbs govern the objective case? is Ms a pronoun ? 

" William was admired for his pru- Will you now parse th<9 remaining sz 

deuce.*' Will yen parse William? 549 erciass? 



80 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

2. 

14 We may be esteemed." " Justice may have been stayed " 

" He might have been promoted." " The task must be performed." 
u William would have been de- " We should not (1.) be easily (L) 
throned." disheartened in a good cause." 

" If he be learned" 

550. If is a copulative conjunction. 

Be learned is a regular passive verb, from the verb to learn 
«— " Pres. learn ; Imper. learned ; Perf part learned. 1. I! I b# 
learned ; 2. If you be learned ; 8. If he be learned" — made in the 

subjunctive mood, subjunctive form, present . tense, third per- 
son, singular number, and agrees with he, according to Rule VII. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

l * If John be rewarded." w Although you will be disappoint- 

% If I am noticed." ed." 

** Unless he be punished." " If the man had heen elected." 

* Although they are respected." " Except he repent." 

p * Columbus discovered America." " Susan assisted the little girl." 

•America was discovered by Co- "The little girl was assisted by 

lumbus." Susan." 

** John wounded his brother." "Pain follows pleasure." 

** John's brother was wounded by " Pleasure is followed by pain." 

him." 

2. 

* An obedient son is deservedly re- " Unless great labor had been be~ 

spected by his friends." stowed on William, he would 

"An idle boy will be punish- have disappointed the expecta- 

ed." tions of his parents." 

* Without knowledge, a man is "He will not (1.) mind without 

commonly (1.) despised." corporal punishment." 

3. 

* The boy who visited me in Sep- " They that seek knowledge will 

tember, died in the city of Bos- find it." 

ton." "That lion which wa3 exhibited 

* The man whom I found perished in this town has been killed by 

in a storm of snow." his keeper." 

4. 
w ! found (2.) John and William (3.) " I have assisted him and his sistei 
in the garden witJi their father in many difficulties, to no (4.) 

and mother. (3.) purpose." 



XLVL OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

551. Irregular verbs are those which do not form their im- 
perfect tense and perfect participle by adding to the present 
tense ed, or d only when the verb ends in e ; as, 

• 4 If he be learned." Will you parse if? Why in the subjunctive form ? 463. 
550. be learned ? 550. Why in 'the sab- Will you parse the remaining exerciaae 
{unctive mood ? 456. in tfcese lessons 7 

ft.) Ad7«rt>. (2.) Irrejnlw r«rt>. (S.) For WGdam tad nvtber tpply KuJa XL (4.) MJ«fim 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



Pre*, tense. 
Go, 
Begin, 



Imperf. tense. 
Went, 
Began, 



Perf. Participle. 
Gone, 
Begun. 



ZiIST OF XHREGtTI.AR VERBS. 

Those marked r admit likewise a regular form. 



Present. 


Imperfect. 


Perf. or Pass. Part. 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


Perf. or Pass t&%. 


Abide, 


abode, 


abode. 


Hang, 


hung. r. 

heard, 

hewed, 


hunger. 


Am, 


was, 


been. 


Hear, 


heard. 


Arise, 


arose, 


arisen. 


Hew, 


hewn. r. 


Awake, 


awoke, r. 


awaked. 


Hide, 


hid, 


hidden, hid. 


Bear, to bring 
forth, 


> bare, 
* bore, 


born. 


Hit, 
Hold, 


hit, 
held, 


hit. 
held. 


Bear, to carry, 


borne. 


Hurt, 


hurt 


hurt 


Beat, 


beat, 


beaten, beat 


Keep, 
Knit 


kept, 


kept 


Begin, 


began, 


begun. 


kn"t, r. 


knit r. 


Bend, 


bent, 
bereft, r. 


bent. 


Know, 


kntw, 


knowa. 


Bereave, 


bereft, r. 


Lade, 


ladeu, 


laden. 


Beseech, 


besought, 


besought. 


Lay, 


laid, 


kid. 


Bid, 


bid, bade, 


bidden, bid. 


Lead, 


led, 


led. 


Bind, 


bound, 


bound. " 


Leave, 


left, 


left 


Bite, 


bit, 


bitten, bit 


Lend, 


lent, 


lent 


Bleed, 


bled, 


bled. 


Let, 


let, 


let 


Blow, 


blew, 


blown. 


Lie, to he dawn 


, lay, 


lain. 


Break, 


broke, 


broken. 


Load, 


loaded, 


laden, t'„ 


Breed, 


bred, 


bred. 


Lose, 


lott. 


lost. 


Bring, 
Build, 


brought, 


brought 


Make, 


made, 


made. 


built, 


built. 


Meet, 


met, 


met 


Burst, 


burst 
bought, 


burst 


Mow, 


mowed, 


mown. r. 


Buy, 


bought 


Pay, 


paid, 


paid. 


Cast, 


cast, 


cast 


Pat, 


P«t, 


put 


Catch, 


sf T - 


caught, r. 
chidden, chid. 


Read, 


read, 


read. 


Chide, 


Bend, 


rent, 


rent. 


Choose, 


chose, 


ehosen. 


Rid, 


rid. 

rode, 


rid. 


Cleave, to stick 


> regular. 




Ride, 


rode, riddec f 


or adhere, 




Ring, 


rung, rang 


rasf. 


Cleave, to split. 


clove or cleft 


cleft, clovea. 


Rise, 


TOSS, 


riwsa. 


Cling, 


clung, 


dung. 


Rive, 


rived, 


riven. 


Clotho, 


clothed, 


clad. r. 


Run, 


ran, 


ma. 


Come, 


came, 


come. 


Saw, 


saw, 


•awn. r. 


Cost, 


cost, 


cost. 


Say, 


said, 


said. 


Crow, 


crew, r. 


crowed. 


See, 

Seek, 


•aw, 


teen. 


Creep, 


crept, 


crept. 


sought, 
sold, 


sought 
■old. 


Cut, 


cut, 


cut. 


Sell. 


Dare, to venture, durst, 


dared. 


Send, 


sent, 


Beat 


Dare, to chah 


Ir 




Set, 


set, 


set. 


lenge, 


1 




Shake, 


shook, 


shakes*. 


Deal, 


' dealt, r. 


dealt r. 


Shape, 


ohaped, 


ah aped, stmpm> 


Pigi 


dug, r. 
did, 


dug. r. 


Shave, 


shaved, 
sheared, 


fhaven. r. 


Do, 


done. 


Shear, 


shorn. 


Draw, 


drew, 


drawn. 


Shed, 


shed, 


shed. 


Drive, 


drove, 


driven. 


Shine, 


shone, r. 


shone, r. 


Drink, 


drank, 


drunk. 


Show, 


showed, 


•hovro. 


Dwsil, 


dwelt, 


dwelt, r. 


Shoe, 


shod, 


shod. 


Eat, 
Fall. 
Feed, 


eat or ate, 


eaten. 


Shoot 
ShrinK, 


shot, 


shot 


fell, 


fallen. 


shrunk, 


shrunk. 


fed, 


red. 


Shred, 


shred, 


shred. 


Feel, 


felt, 


feit 


Shut, 


•hut, 


shut 


Fight, 
Find, 


fought, 
found, 


fought. 
found. 


Sing, 
Sink, 


sung, sang, 
sunk, sank, 


sung. 
sunk. 


Flee, 


fled, 


fled. 


Sit, 


sat, 


sat. 


Fling, 


flung, 


flunA 

flowC 


Slay, 


slew, - 


•lain. 


fly, 


flew, 


Sleep, 


3f 


slept. 

•liddoa. 


Forget, 


forgot, 
forsook, 


forgotten, forgot. 


Slide, 


Forcaks # 


fomaken. 


Sling. 
Slink, 


slcng, 


slung, 
eiuak. 


Freeze, 


froze, 


frozen. 


slunk, 


Get 

Gild, 


SU 


got* 


Slit, 


slit, r. 


•lit or slitte& 


gilt r. 


Smite, 


smote, 
towed. 


smitten. 


Gird, 


girt, r. 


girt. r. 


Sow, 


town. r. 


Give, 


gave, 


gives. 


Speak, 


spoke, 


spoken. 


Go, 


went, 


gone. 


Speed, 


sped, 


sped. 


Grave, 


graved, 


graven, r . 


Spend, 


spent, 


spenu 


Grind, 


ground, 


ground. 


Spill, 


ipilt, r. 


spilt, r. 


Grow, 
Have, 


grew, 
had, 


grown, 
had. 


Spin, 
Spit, 


span, 
•pit, spat, 


spun. 

•pit, spitten. J 



XLVI. When is a verb called irregu- 
lar? 551. 

Will you name the present and imper- 
fect tenses, also the perfect participle of 
fol begin? am? arise? awake? bear? 



(to carry.) bid? bite? break? choose 1 
do? drink? eat? forget? home? hnmsiil 
lie? (to lie down.) mow? rise"? «#•# 
throw 1 weave? write? 



» Gotten is nearly obsolete. Its 
t Siddx* is n*arly *eol«t». 

F 



fsrfotlm, it still in good us*. 

t^piitcn is snarly obw»{*te. 



82 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



PrutnL 


ttnperfict. 


Split, 


«plit, 


8pre*4, 


spread, 


est 


sprung, ip aii$, 
stood, 


Steal, 


stole, 


Stick, 


stuck, 


8ting, 
Stink, 


stung, 
stunk, 


Stride, 


strode, or strid, 


Strike, 


struck. 


String, 


strung, 


Striv 


strove, 


Strow & Etrew, 


i stxowed, or 
i strewed, 


Bwwur, 


swore, 


Sweat, 


swet, r. 
iswelled, 


Swell, 


Swim, 


swum, swam, 


Swing, 


swung, 



Perf. or Pan. Part. 


Present* 


Impafeet. 


split r. 

spread. 


Take, 
Teach, 


took, 
taught, 


sprung. 


Tear, 


tore, 


stood. 


Tell, 


told, 


stolen. 


Think, 


thought, 


stuck. 


Thrive, 


throve, r. 


stung, 
stunk. 


Throw, 


threw, 


Thrust, 


thrust. 


stridden. , 


Tread, 


trod, 


struck or stricken. 


Wax, 


waxed, 


strung. 


Wear, 


wore, 


striven. 


Weave, 


wove. 


^ strown, strowed, 


Weep, 


wept, 


i strewed. 


Win, 


won, 


6Worn. 


Wind, 


wound, 


swet. r. 
swollen, r. 


Work, 


wrought 


swum. 


Wring. 


wrung, 


swung. 


Write, 


wrote, 



Per/, or Ptm Par**. 

taken. 

taught. 

torn. 

told. 

thought 

thriven. 

thrown. 

thrust. 

trodd&n. 

waxen, r. 

worn. 

wovea. 

wept. 

won 

wound. 
$ wrought sr 
) worked. 

wrung. 

written. 



553. We say, " I aave seen," "I had seen," and "I am seen," usmg 
the participle seen instead of the verb saw : hence* 

Note VI. We should use participles, only, after have, and 
had, and the verb to be. 



EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 
" John has written his copy." 

554. Has written is an irregular active-transitive verb, 
from the verb to writs —- " Pres. write ; Imperf. wrote ; Perf. part. 
written. 1. I have written; 2. You have written; 3. He or John 
has written" — found in the indicative mood, perfect tense, 
third person, SINGULAR numbir, and agrees with John, by 
Rule VII. 

John, copy, and Ms, are parsed as before. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 



1. 



11 Job has struck John." 

M John has been struck by Job." 

" The men caught the thief in the 

tavern." 
" The thief was caught by the men 

in the tavern." 
"A wise son will maKe a glad 

father." 



" The act was done by William." 
"James found his little bi other in 

the boat." 
*• The instructer makes good pens." 
"The farmer ploughs the ground 

in spring." 
** I may spend my time in tha 

country." 



Will you correct, in accordance with 
Note VL, the following examples from 
the list above ? 

" John has wrote." 

" He done it well." 

44 The sun has rose." 

" The sun risen yesterday in a cloud." 

" I see him yesterday." 

" He has did his task." 

u The birds have flew away." 

° The birds flown or flew." 

•* The post is drove into the ground." 

" He began or begun to write," 

" The task is began." 

M I had went with him." 

" My brother has not spoke." 

•* The cloth is wove." 
* The boys run swiftly." 

" The thief has at©le ray watefe." 



" His copy was wrote well." 

" He was smote on his i heek." 

" John was awoke by the noise.* 1 

" My father has came." 

" He come yesterday." 

" Mary has chose the better part." 

•• He drunk to excess." 

" The book was gave to me." 

" His friends have forsook him." 

" He was not forsook by his child' 

ren." 
"The laborer worked for me forty 

days." 
" He was took and bound." 
" John has written his copy." Will 

you parse has written 7 
Why is has written an irregular verb? 

551. Why active ? 439 Why transitive* 

44f». 



EXERCISES. 



83 



* John is at home." 

" Rufus rode into the country." 
" The sun will shine." 
u The thief was confined in jail." 
"The horse ran with great vio- 
lence." 

If he will assist me, I shall be 
much (1.) obliged to him." 

* If he be virtuous, then he will be 

happy." 

•* If he is happy, then I am con- 
tented." 
Had he mentioned that circum- 
stance, I should have avoided 
my present calamities." 

"Although he acknowledged his 



3. 



11 He abode in peace." 

" They weuld be cruel." 

" We may have been negligent." 

" The boys should have been studi 

ous." 
" William was in town." 

faults, still he would not recoaz* 

pense me." 
"1 will write him, lest he neglect 

my business." 
" Should I be disappointed, I ehaU 

despair." 
"Unless he repent, he will not ba 

pardoned." 
" Were I* in your place, I would 

relieve him." 



" Thou hast benefited me." 
" Ye make no pretensions." 
"This doctrine hath no follow- 
ers." 
M If thou love me." 
* If thou art more comfortable, I 
heartily rejoice." 



" Dost thou hear me ?" 

11 Hath he many advisers ?" 

" Ye do always err." 

" Thou shall surely die." 

"If thou hadst obeyed me, thou 
wouldst not have been disap- 
pointed." 



* If Thomas, who is at school, re- 
turn in season, I will visit you." 

"The boys whom I admonished 
have reformed." 

1 The man whose life was in dan- 
ger returned in safety." 

"The task which the instructer 



imposed was performed with 
reluctance." 

"The measure which he adopts 
will succeed." 

"I have known a little child thai 
exhibited the prudence of ma- 
ture years." 



XL VII. GOVERNMENT OF THE INFINITIVE. 

555. When I say, " John begins to read," to read is a verb in the infini 
tive mood ; and it follows, as you perceive, the verb begins : hence we say 
that it is governed by begins. 

"He is beginning to read." Here, the infinitive follows the participls 
beginning ; it is, therefore, governed by beginning. 

1 * He is eager to learn." Here, the infinitive follows the adjective eager; 
we therefore say that it is governed by eager. 

" He has an opportunity to learn." Here, the infinitive, to learn is 
governed by the noun opportunity, because it follows the noun. 

In like manner the infinitive may be governed by pronouns; as, " Iheie 
is a fine opportunity for him to learn :" hence, 



XLVII. " John begins to read." In 
what mood is to read 7 555. Why ? 479. 
By what is it governed 7 555. Why 7 555. 

" He is beginning to read." What go- 
verns t9 read in this case ** 555. 

" He is eager to learn.'* What governs 
to learn in this case 7 555. Why 7 555. 



" He has an opportunity to learn V 
What part of speech governs to learn in 
this example 7 555. Why ? 555. 

" opportunity for him to learn." 

What does the infinitive here fol- 
low? By what, then, is it governed 1 
555. 



64 english grammar. 

rule sii. 

The infinitive mood may he governed by verbs, parties 
pies, adjectives, nouns, and pronouns. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" James begins to learn" 

558. To learn is a regular transitive verb — " Pres. learn 3 
Irnperf. learned; Perf. part, learned" — made in the infinitjlvb 
Hood, present tense, and governed by begins, agreeably to 
Rule XII. 

James and begins, are parsed as before. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED* 

44 George desires to learn." " A knowledge of the rules of 

14 He is eager to learn." grammar teaches us to write 

44 He has a desire to study." correctly." 

44 It seems to please John." u He should seek to obtain know- 
44 William has come to see us." 



14 They are determined to ex- " We may be taught to write, read, 
eel." and spell." 

Omission of to, the usual Sign of the Infinitive, 

44 John saw the man strike (1.) the 44 1 heard the clock strike." 

boy." 44 The tutor bade him do it." 

"The instructor made him sub- 44 The soldiers dare not rebel." 

mit" 44 My uncle let the boys play in the 
44 They need not proceed in such garden." 

haste." 44 See (2.) the blind beggar dance." 

Note VII. The infinitive mood is sometimes governed by 
conjunctions or adverbs ; as^ " The summit of a mountain so 
high as to be invisible." 

EXAMPLES. 
"They are about (3.) to depart." "He desired no more (4.) than (5,) 

44 He is ' wise enough (3,) to study." to know his duty." 



. XLVIII. 

557. We have before seen, that participles partake of tne nature of two 
parts of speech, namely, verbs and adjectives. One point of resemblance 
which participles have to adjectives, is in referring to some noun in the sen» 
tence in which they are used ; as, " The sun is setting :" here, the parties 
pie setting is said to refer to the noun sun : hence, 

What, then, may be regarded as a rule " They are about to depart." By what 

f er the government of the infinitive? XII. is the infinitive here governed ? What is 

"John begins to learn." Will you the note for this ? VII. 

parse to learn? James? begins? 55& XLVIII. What is a participle? 498. 
Is to ever omitted ? 480. " The sun. is setting." What is set- 
Will you now parse the exercises in ting? 557. To what, then, does setting 

the lessons which follow ? refer ? 557. Rule ? XIII. 

What is the infinitive mooa used for? Will you now parse setting ii 

479. full? 

(I.) Strike, h governed by Rule XII. 

(2.) Se* is in the iupcratiTs, agresiag w»tb thou or ymi, understood, b? Rnl* JT3 

(8.) AiSvYsrK u.) Nona. (S.) Ceiuaw.ti«w. 



PARTICIPLES. 85 

RULE XIII. 

Participles refer to nouns, 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" The wind is rising" 

558. Rising is a present active participle, from the irregulai 
erb to rise — "Pres. rise; Imp. rose; Perf. part, risen'' — and it 
efers to wind, according to Rule XIII. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 
1. 
" The moon is setting." " Mary was playing." 

" The sun is rising." " I have been writing. 

" The trees are growing." " I found hira crying." 

" John was dancing." " I left him rejoicing." 

PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. 
" The rising sun cheers us." 

559. Rising is a participial adjective, from the verb to rise — 
M Pres. rise ; Imp. rose ; Perf. part, risen" — and belongs to sun, by 
Rule IV. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

2. 

" The setting sun reminds us of " We view with pleasure the twink- 
declining years." ling stars." 

* The roaring winds alarm us." " The roaring cataract strikes w 
"The rippling stream pleases with awe." 

us." " The laboring man should not. k 4 

* The singing-master visited me." defrauded." 

3. 
"Having dined, I returned to "Having slept, he recovered his 

school." strength." 

" Having fought bravely, they were " Having retired to rest, he waa 

at last (1.) overcome." seized with violent pain." 

"John, having exercised too vio- "The thief, having escaped, waa 
lently, fainted." never afterwards seen in that 

region." 

4. 

* William returned, mortified at his " A child left to follow his own in. 

loss." clinations is most commonly 

*The stream, swollen by the rains, ruined." 

overflowed its banks." " Admired and applauded, he ba- 

" The man accustomed to his glass came vain." 

seldom reforms." 

Will you parse the next lesson ? What kind of a participle is, " Having 

Will you parse rising, in the sentence, dined V 504. Why ? 504. 

"The rising sun?" 559. Why is it call- Who dined, in the phrase, "Having 

ed a participial adjective? Ans. Because dined, I returned to school ?" 

a describes, like an adjective, and im- To what, then, does having dined ro« 

plies action, like a participle. fer? Rule XIII. Will you now parse tlio 

Will you now parse the next lesson? remaining lessons ? 



86 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

5. 

" A dissipated son grieves his youth into his own foouss, end 

parents." rendered to him deserved assit- 

w We must not neglect any known tance" 

duty." ** William befriended the deserted 

**My father took the forsaken man." 

6. 

R The men, being fatigued by labor, feet, was severely and justly 

sought rest in sleep." punished." 
u William, being dismissed from col- "The tree, Laving been weighed 

lege, retired to the country." down for a long time by abitn- 

u Thomas, after having been re- dance of fruit, at last (1.) fell te 

peatedly admonished to no ef- the ground." 

iULi xxv. 

dctive participles, from active-transitive verbs, govern the 
objective case. 

" James is beating John" 

580. John is a proper noun, of the third person, singula? 
dumber, masculine GENBEB., objective case, and governed by beat- 
tng, by Rule XIV. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 
1. 

u John is striking William." immediately set off for Bos- 

u Susan is studying her lesson." ton." 

M Mary has been repeating her les- " I spied the cat watching & 
son to her mother." mouse." 

44 The teamster, seeing the stage " Having given directions to his 
upsetting, ran and prevented servants, he left his family 

it." and took the stage for Wash* 

"Having obtained my request, I ington." 

" He delights in fighting" 

561. Fighting is a participial noun, in the objective case, and 
governed by the preposition in, according to Rule X. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 
1. 
w Job was exhausted by wrest- " Job practises fencing daily. 

ling." "The instructer teaches reading, 

"Mary acquired a livelihood by writing, and spelling, in hi* 

sewing." school." 

M Walter excels in writing. " Whispering is forbidden in 

w Fishing delights me." school." 

"Beating John." Will you parse ing? 561. Why is Jij^iw^ called a par- 
John 7 560. Beating ? 558. ticipial noun ? Jlns. Because it implies 

Will you parse the remaining exercises S!^"^ ? JE? n icipIe ' and haS ' alS °' 
;*• *\, a iLmaJr. „v n „„i the sense of a noun. 

in the lesson above ? wm yQU parge ^ regt rf the exercisat 

" In fighting " Will you parse figkt- in this lesson ? 



EXERCISES. 87 

2. 

562. " You will much oblige me by sending those books" 
Sending is a participial noun, in the objective case, and 
governed by the preposition by, according to Rule X. 

Books is a common noun, of the third person, plural number, 
neuter gender, objective case, and governed by the active par- 
ticiple sending, according to Rule XIV. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED, 

44 James derives pleasure from read- " Mary's reading has been useful 

ing useful books." in improving her taste in com- 

"John is above doing a mean ac- position." 

tion." " I am discouraged from under- 

u Parents are pleased at seeing taking this study." 

the progress of their chil- " A good instructer takes.no delight 

dren." in punishing." 

The present participle, when used as a noun, often has the definite article 
the before it, and the preposition lof after it ; as, " By the observing of truth, 
you will command respect." With equal propriety, however, it may he 
said, "By observing truth," &c., omitting both the article and the pre- 
position. If we use the article without the preposition, or the preposition 
without the article, the expression will appear awkward : hence, 

Note VIII. The definite article the should be used before, 
and the preposition of after, participial nouns, or they should 
both be omitted. 

EXERCISES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 



"By the observing these rules, he 

will avoid mistakes." 
"•He prepared them for the event 

by the sending to them proper 

information." 
• In writing of his letter, he made 

some mistakes." 



" In the regarding his interests, 
he neglected the public af- 
fairs." 

" He was sent to prepare the way 
by preaching of repentance." 

" Keeping of one day in seven (1.) 
is required of Christians." 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 



" William calls George." 

"John's father will reward his in 
dustry." 

'George's father's carriage passed 
the tavern." 

* If William return, he will be dis- 
appointed." 

h John has beaten his little brother 
most shamefully." 



"John will be punished for his 
insolence-" 

"We may improve under *mr in- 
structer, if we choose." 

"He who would excel in learn- 
ing, must be attentive to \m 
books." 

" She begins to improve." 



" By sending those books." Will you 
parse sending ? 562. books ? 562. 

Will you parse the remaining exercises 
in this lesson ? 

From what are present participles 
formed? 4&7. 

How may participles in ing be distin- 
guished from other parts of speech of the 
tame termination ? 500. 



Instead of saying, " By the observing 
these rules," what should I say ? Why i 
Note VIII. 

Will you now parse and correct the 
exercises under Note VIII. ? 

Will you parse the promiscuous exer- 
cises in Syntax 1 Next take those to fr* 
written. 



p. »fTK>*Ta! »4j«rtiw». btlouftn* U» dtc\i». a*i*r«t»od. \>* *J»»a I 



88 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

563. Will you compose a sentence, containing an active-transitive verb ! 
One, containing a neuter verb ? One, containing a passive verb ? Ono, 
expressing the same sense as the last in an active form ? Will you com- 
pose a sentence having a verb in the potential mood ? One, in the sub- 
junctive mood ? One, in the imperative mood ? One, in the infinitive 
mood ? One, having an adjective in the superlative degree ? One, hav. 
ing the article an correctly used before a vowel ? One, having an adjec- 
tive ixi the positive degree that has in itself a superlative signification 1 
One, containing the relative whose 1 One, containing which 1 One, with 
what used as a compound pronoun ? One, having who used as an inter- 
rogative pronoun ? One, having a verb in the subjunctive mood, common 
form ? 

Will you construct one or more sentences, which will make sense with 
the word truth contained in them ? One, with the word wisdom contain- 
ed in it ? One, with the word knowledge ? One, with the word learn- 
ing ? One, with the word science ? 

Will you construct a sentence about prudence ? One about history ? 
One or more on the following subjects, namely, geography, gardening, 
farms, orchards ? 

Will you fill up the following phrases with suitable words to make 

sense, namely, " Industry health f " By — we acquire V 

" In youth — — characters — — ?" " Arithmetic — — — business ? w 
"Washington — live hearts pf his — — ?" 



XLIX. OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 

564. The verbs have, be, will and do, when they are unconnected with s 
principal verb, expressed or understood, are not auxiliaries, but principal 
verbs ; as, ll We have enough ;" " I am grateful ;" " He wills it to be so ;" 
" They do as .they please." In this view, they also have their auxiliaries ; 
as, " I shall have enough ;" "I will be grateful," &c. 

565. The peculiar force of the several auxiliaries will appear from ths 
following account of them. 

566. Bo and did mark the action itself, or the time of it, with greatex 
energy and positiveness ; as, "I do speak truth;" " I did respect Trim ;' 
" Here am 1, for thou didst call me." They are of great use in negative 
(1.) sentences ; as, " I do not fear ;" " I did not write." They are almost 
universally employed in asking questions; as, "Does he learn?" "Did 
he not write?" They sometimes also supply (2.) the place of another 
verb, and make the repetition of it, in the same or a subsequent sentence, 
unnecessary ; as, " You attend not to your studies as he does ;" (i. e. "as 
he attends," &c.) " I shall come, if I can; but if I do not, please to 
excuse me;" (i. e. " if I come not.") 

567. May and might express the possibility or liberty of doing a thing; 
can and could, the power; as, "It may rain;" "I may write or read;- 1 
' He might have improved more than he has ;" "He can write much bet* 
ter than he could last year." 

XLIX. Which are the auxiliary verbs? What effect have do and did in sen 

532. tences? 566. Give an example. 566. 

What is an auxiliary verb 7 511. Will you give an example in which th» 

What a principal one ?* repetition of the principal verb is un. 

When are have, be, will, and do princi- necessary ? 566. 

pal verbs? 564. Give an example of What do may and might express 1 

oach. 564. 567. 

(1.) TVunrfoff. tSL\ T* W n« ****■**«*****> **? 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 89 

568. Must is sometimes called in for a helper, and denotes necessity ; as, 
" We must speak the truth, whenever we do speak, and we must not pre- 
varicate." (1.) 

569. Will, in the first person singular and plural, intimates (2.) resolution 
and promising ; in the second and third person, it only foretells ; as, "I 
will reward the good, and will punish the wicked ;" " We will remember 
benefits, and be grateful ;" " Thou wilt, or he will, repent of that folly ;'* 
" You, or they, will have a pleasant walk." 

570. Shall, on the contrary, in the first person, simply foretells ; in this 
second and third persons, it promises, commands, or threatens; as, "I 
shall go abroad ;" " We shall dine at home ;" " Thou shalt, or you shall., 
inherit the land ;" " Ye shall do justice, and love mercy ;" " They shaU 
account for their misconduct." The following passage is not translated (3.; 
according to the distinct and proper meanings of the words shall and will ; 
" Surely goodness and mercy shall follow me all the days of my life ; and 
I will dwell in the house of the Lord for ever." It ought to be, "will 
follow me," and, " I shall dwell." — The foreigner who, as it is said, fell 
into the Thames, and cried out, "I will be drowned! nobody shall help 
me !" made a sad misapplication of these auxiliaries. 

571. These observations respecting the import (4.) of the verbs will and 
shall, must be understood of explicative sentences ; for when the sentence 
is interrogative, just the reverse, (5.) for the most part, takes place : thus, 
"I shall go," " You will go," express event (6.) only; but, " Will yois 
go?" imports intention; and, " Shall I go ?" refers to the will of another. 
But, " He shall go." and, " Shall he go ?" both imply will ; expressing o? 
referring to a command. 

572. When the verb is put in the subjunctive mood, the meaning of these 
auxiliaries likewise undergoes (7.) some alteration ; as the learners wih 
readily perceive by a few examples : " He shall proceed ;" " If he shall pro- 
ceed ;" " You shall consent ;" " If you shall consent." These auxiliaries 
are sometimes interchanged (8.) in the indicative as?id subjunctive moods ; 
to convey the same meaning of the auxiliary ; as, " He will not return ;" 
1 ' If he shall not return ;" "He shall not return ;" " If he will not return/* 

573. Would primarily (9.) denotes inclination of will ; and should, obliga- 
tion ; but theyboth vary their import, and are often used to express simple 
event. 

574. Do and have are sometimes used as principal verbs, according to fch» 
following 

S'EriEi'OPSZS. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Pres. I do. I have. 

Imp. I did. I had. 

Perf. I have done. I have had. 

Pimp. I had done. I had had. 

1 Put. I shall or will d^. I shall or will have. 

2 Put. I shall have done. I shall have had. 

What is the use of must ? 568. all the days of my life ; and I vvi'5 dw&iJ 

What does will intimate in the first in the house of the Lord for ever." 570. 

person singular? plural? 569. Give an Iu what consists the mistake in the 

example. 569. In the second and third expression which the foreigner mada 

persons ? 569. Give an example. 569. when he fell into the Thames ? 570. 

What does shall intimate in the first What do shall and will denote in inter- 

person ? 570 Give an example. 570. rogative sentences ; as, " Shall I go ?" 

In what particular is the translation of " Will you go ?" 571. 

the following passage incorrect? "Sure- What do would and should primarily 

ly goodness and mercy shall follow me denote ? 573. 

fi.l Tojfcan the truth. (2.) Shows. (3.) Expraaa!. (4.) Meaning (5. C<w.trsry 

'«.) Wtat bap7>.*4«3. (7. 1 Srufer* (S.> To evchony* «>aa tnr ihm ottww. >9.) In th* ftnrt i»l<u» 

8* 



DO ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

675. POTENTIAL MOOD. 

' Fres. I may or can do. I may or can have. 

Imp, I might, could, would, or I might, could, would, or should 

should do. have. 

Per/. I may or can have done. I may or can have had. 

Plup. I might, could, would, or I might, could, would, or should 
should have done. have had. 

576. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Pres. 1. If I do. If I have, &c 

576—1. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Pres. Do you, or Do you do. Have you, or Do you have. 

577. INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Pres. To do. To have. 
Per/. To have done. To have had, 

578. PARTICIPLES. 
Pres. Doing. Having. 
Perf. Done. Had. 
Camp, perf. Having done. Having had. 



L. OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

579. Defective verbs are those which are used only in some 
of the moods and tenses. 

580. The following are the principal ones : 

Pres. Tense. Imp. Tense. Perf. Participle. 

May, Might, (Wanting.) 

Can, Could, 

Will, Would, 

Shall, Should, 

Must, Must, 

Ought, Ought, 

Quoth, 

581. Of these, ought and must, you perceive, are not varied. 

582. Ought and quoth are always used as principal verbs. Ought is the 
flame in the imperfect tense as in the present, and is always followed by an 
infinitive ; as, " He ought to study ;" "He ought to have read." In this 
last example, ought is in the imperfect ; and in the first, it is in the present. 
This we determine by the infinitive, which follows the verb, thus : when 
she present infinitive follows ought, ought is in the present tense ; but when 
the perfect infinitive follows it, it is in the imperfect tense. 

583. In English, verbs are often used both in a transitive and intransitive, 
or neuter signification. Thus, to flatten, when it signifies to make even or 
level, is an active -transitive verb ; but when it signifies to grow dull or in- 
sipid, it is an intransitive verb. 

Will you repeat the synopsis of do Which are not varied ? 581. 

through all the moods 1 of have? How are ought and quoth always used 1 

Will you conjugate do in the present 582. 

tense ? have in the perfect tense ? How can you tell when ought is in the 

What is the perfect participle of do? present tense ? 582. 

af have? the compound perfect of do ? of When is it in the imperfect tense ? 583. 

have? Give an example of each tense. 582. 

L. What are defective verbs 7 5*79. When is to flatten transitive, and when 

Will you mention the principal one*, intransitive ? 583. 

wstfr their imperfect t«*nees7 580 Row, then, aw verb* oit«n used f 583. 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 91 

584. A. neuter or intransitive verb, by the addition of a preposition, may 
become a compound active-transitive verb ; as, to smile is intransitive ; it 
r-annot, therefore, be followed by an objective case, nor be changed into 
the passive form. We cannot say, "She smiled him," or, "He was 
smiled;" but we say, very properly, "She smiled on him;" "He was 
emiled on by her." 

585. Prepositions affect the meaning of verbs in different ways. To cast 
means to throw; as, "He cast a stone at her." To cast up, however, 
means to compute ; as, "He casts up his accounts."* In all instances in 
which the preposition follows the verb, and modifies its meaning, it should 
be considered a part of the verb, and be so treated in parsing. 

586. There are some verbs, which, although they admit an objective 
case after them, still do not indicate the least degree of action; as, "I 
resemble my father." This seeming inconsistency may be easily recon- 
ciled by reflecting that, in all such cases, the verb has a direct reference to 
its object. Of this nature are the verbs retain, resemble, own, have, &e. 

587. Some neuter or intransitive verbs admit of a passive form, and are 
thence called neuter passive verbs ; as, " John goes home to-night." Here 
goes is an intransitive verb. But in the sentence, " John is gone home," 
is gone is a neuter passive verb. Again, in the phrase, " William comes," 
comes is an intransitive verb ; and in the phrase, " William is come," is 
come is a neuter passive verb. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" William had had many advantages " He has had many precious oppor- 

before he improved them in a tunities." 

proper manner." " John will do as his instructor 
** A good scholar will not do what (1.) directs." 

is forbidden by his instructor. " " He may have had time." 

2. 

11 1 own this book." u I cannot believe nim." 

** Charles resembles his parents." " His father does not hesitate te 

14 He retains his place." trust him." 

3. 

* The farmer casts seed into the " She smiles sweetly." 
ground." " She smiled on John." 

M The merchant casts up his ac- " John was smiled on by fortune ia 
counts often." g every undertaking." 

4. 

M The instructor has come." " Mary was gone before her mother 

" Our instructer has come." came." 

"William has gone to visit his "When they came to town, they 

parents." made many purchases." 

" Susan has gone." 



How can an intransitive verb be- Is resemble, strictly speaking, a transx 

come transitive 7 584. Give an example, tive verb ? 586. 

584. Why does it admit an object after it 1 

What does to cast mean ? 585. 586. 

Meaning of to cast up ? 585. There are several verbs of this class' 

When may the preposition be reckoned will you name some of them ? 586. 

ft part of the verb ? 585. What is a neuter passive verb? 587 

How should it be considered in pars- Give an example. 587. 

Sag ? 585. Will you now parse the next lessons? 

I!. > WhAi «t»».->» for «0,al ^ki«k." or. «* tk» flsiner «1»teb Aonlr «hii*> V VJ » Bl jt *?n.. 



£2 ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 

LI. OF ADVERBS. 

589. Adverbs are words joined to verbs, participles, adjoc* 
lives, and other adverbs, to qualify them. 

589. Expressions like the following, namely, a few days $go, Ion* since % 
none at all, at length, in vain, by no means, a great deal, &c, are denomi- 
nated adverbial phrases, when they are used to qualify verbs or participles, 
by expressing the manner, time or degree of action. 

590. The definite article the is frequently placed before adverbs of the 
comparative and superlative degrees, to give the expression more force ; as, 
" The more he walks, the better he feels.' ' When the article is used in 
this sense, both the article and adverb may be reckoned an adverbial ghrase, 
and be so considered in parsing. 

591. You have doubtless noticed that, most words ending in ly are ad- 
verbs. The reason of this is that ly is a contraction of the adverb like : 
thus, from manlike we form manly : gentlemanly is a contraction of gentle- 
manlike. — Hence, 

592. If you meet with a word ending in ly, implying in its signification 
ike idea of like, you; may conclude at once that it is an adverb. 

RUX.ZS IX. 

Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives, and other 

adverbs. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" In vain we look for perfect happiness" 

593. In vain is an adverbial phrase, and qualifies look, accord- 
ing to Rule IX. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

** John has come again, but William " William acted very nobly." 

has not." " I will by no means consent." 

•» Very many persona fail of happi- " He wrote a long letter a few daya 

ness." a go«" (!•) 

* A vast many evils are incident to " John was writing carelessly." 

man in his wearisome journey w I have admonished her once and 

through life." again." 

64 Tiie instructress has at length " A few days ago, there was much 

arrived." excitement in town." 

LI. What is the meaning of adverb ? When are they to be considered ad- 

228. verbial phrases? 589. 

To what is the adverb joined ? 588. i s the article the ever joined to an ad- 

For what purpose ? 588. ver b ? 590. For what purpose ? 590. 

*<£?% mbSIJ 1 ™* nt PanS ° f SPeGCh What do the article and adverb form 

does it qualify ? 588. . . 7 «. qo 

Which are thev ? 588. m sucn cases # m 

What is the definition of an adverb ? How 1S ** t( > b e considered in parsing ? 

588. 599. 

Are adverbs compared ?* How came most words ending in ly to 

Will you compare wisely? 235. soon? be considered adverbs? 591. Give an 

234. example. 591. 

Row are they compared? 236. How can we determine between words 

Will vou compare the adverbs muck? ending in ly, whether or not they are ad- 

well? bad? ill? 237. verbs? 592. 

Some adverbs are not regular in their What rule do you apply when you 

comparison, will you name one? 237. parse an adverb? IX. 

Will you name four or five adverbial " In vain we look." Will you pars* 

phrases? 589. in vain? 593. 



(1.) J f«* d«v* «**■ ~w •dvwrfcial vhr*— •"'*** bb«*kmi ♦#» USA 



"F RE POSITIONS. 93 

Note IX. To qualify verbs, participles, adjectives, and 
ather adverbs, we should use adverbs ; but to qualify nouns, 
we should use adjectives. 

SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 
w William writes good."* " Harriet dresses neat." 

M Susan studies diligent" " On conditions suitably to his rank. 1 * 

u He speaks fluently and reasons " He speaks correct." 

correct" " Mary sings admirable." 

* John writes tolerable well, but " He writes elegant." 

readst miserable." " He reads and spells very bad." 

SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

594. Will you write down a sentence, containing a compound active- 
transitive verb ? One, having a neuter-passive verb? 

Will yon compose two or more sentences about a lion 1 Two or mora, 
about sheep ? Two or more, about a cow ? One, about an ox ? One, about 
a dog ? One, about a cat? One, about Africans 1 One, about Indians ? 
One, about fishes ? One, about steam-boat disasters ? One, about stage 
accidents ? 



LII. OF PREPOSITIONS. 

595. Prepositions are used to connect words, and to show 
the relation between them. 

596. We not unfrequently meet with verbs compounded of a preposition 
and verb ; as, " to uphold" " to Mtvest," " to overlook ;" and this com- 
position sometimes gives a new sense to the verb ; as, " to understand," 
"to withdraw" But the preposition more frequently occurs after the verb, 
and separate from it ; as, "to cast up" "to fail on." The sense of the 
verb, in this case, is also materially affected by the preposition. 

598. The prepositions after, before, above, beneath, and several others, 
sometimes appear to be adverbs, and may be so considered; as, "They 
had their reward soon after ;" " He died not long before ;" " He dwells 
above :" but if the noun time or place be added, they lose their adverbial 
form ; as, " He died not long before" [that time] , &c. 

599. There is a peculiar propriety in distinguishing the correct use of the 
dhTerent prepositions. For illustration, we will take the following senten- 
ces : " He walks with a staff by moonlight ;" " He was taken by stratagem, 
and killed with a sword." Put the one preposition for the other, and say, 

Will you next parse the remaining ex- compounded? 596. Give an example 
ercises ? 596. 

When should we use adverbs? Note Whe re is the preposition more fre- 

l „ r . 1S .. „ „ A TV quently. placed? 595. Give an example^ 

When adjectives ? Note IX. 595 

M^^SS^ WherelniS . Wiilyounamefourprepositionswhich 

Will you now parse and correct the re- S<f any instances a ^ ear t0 be adve ' bsl 

maining exercises ? *** 

LII. What is the meaning of prepori- How may they be converted into pre- 

tim ? 244. positions again ? 598. 

What are prepositions ? 595. " He walks by a staff with moonlight." 

Will you repeat the list ? 217. Will you correct this sentence, and the© 

With what are verbs not unfrequently repeat the phrase ? 



* For the adjective good, we shonld use tb« adsorb t&sfl, according to Note IX. 

! Reads ap-ses wiin John understood, asd i», ft/vrfore, ocxuwctsd wiM* vrritM lw f-Jfcs totrfttKetfea hut, agr«w 
AlytnRtfeXL 



94 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

M He walks by a staff with moonlight ;" " He was taken with stratagem, 
and killed by a sword;" and it will appear that they differ in signification 
more than one, at first view, would be apt to imagine. 

Prepositions govern the objeetive case, 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 
s " John lives within his income" 

600. Within is a preposition. 

Income is a common noun, of the third person, singular ric- 
her, neuter gender, objective case, and governed by within, ac- 
cording to Rule X. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

"Thomas made his fortune by in- He made the sun to shine by 

dustry." day, and the moon (1.) to give 

M Susan labors with her needle for light by night." 

a livelihood." " Beneath the oak lie acorns in 

M Respecting that affair, these was great abundance." 

a controversy." " John, who is at all times watch- 

M In six days God made the world, ftd of his own interest, will 

and all things that are in it attend to that concern." 

SENTENCES TO RE WRITTEN. 

601. Will you fill up the following sentences with suitable prepositions 

to make sense ? " John was — the house when he was seized a 

fit." " The busy bee — summer provides food — the approaching winter 
— the prudence — a rational being." 

Will you supply the objects to the following? "James was catch- 
ing ." " He was beating ." " He supports ." 

Will you supply agents or nominative cases to the following ? was 

running." " was dancing." 

Will you supply verbs in the following? "A dutiful child hii 

parents." " Grammar ■ us correctly." 

Will you compose two or more sentences about boys ? One, about 
whales ? One, about snakes 1 One, about foxes ? One, about parents 1 
One, about brothers ? One, about sisters 1 One, about uncles ? One, about 
mntsl 



LIII. OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

602. A conjunction is a word that is chiefly used to con- 
nect sentences, so as, out of two or more sentences, to maki 
hut one. 

Will you repeat the rule respecting the What is a simple sentence ? 253. Give 

government of nouns by prepositions ?X. an example. A compound sentence 1 

" John lives within his' income." Will 256. Give an example, 
you parse toithin ? 600. income? 600. Why called compound? 254. 

Will you now take the remaining ex- LIU. Meaning of conj-unction ? 257 
• ercises to be parsed; after which, those What is a conjunction? 602. 
to be written ? Meaning of copulative? 264. 



(1.) The sense is, " Be ms.de the mooa." Mom, ta»H; if in th» object! v« caj*, goveroad by mad* «e<i*nsttMC« 



i coiKiacted with nm, by Bui* XX 



INTERJECTIONS. 95 

603. Relative pronouns, as well as conjunctions, serve to connect sen- 
tences ; as, •' Blessed is the man who feareth the Lord." 

604. Conjunctions very often unite sentences when they appear to unit© 
only words; as, in the following sentences: "Duty and interest forbid 
vicious indulgences." " Wisdom or folly governs us." Each of thes© 
forms of expression contains two sentences, namely, the first, "Duty for- 
bids vicious indulgences;" "Interest forbids vicious indulgences:" tho 
second, " Wisdom governs us ;" " Folly governs us." 

Conjunctions connect verbs of the same mood and tense, 
and nouns or pronouns of the same case. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

605. " William writes and ciphers" 
And is a copulative conjunction. 

Ciphers is a regular active intransitive verb, from the verb 
to cipher — " Pres. cipher ; Imperf. ciphered ; Per. part, ciphered. 
1. I cipher; 2. You cipher; 3. He or William ciphers' ; — made in the 

INDICATIVE MOOD, PRESENT TENSE, THIRD PERSON SINGULAR, and 

agrees with William understood, and is connected to writes by the 
conjunction and, agreeably to Rule XL 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

u John ciphers rapidly, and reads " Though he is lively, yet he La not 

correctly." too volatile." 

w If we contend about trifles, and " If he has promised, he should ad 

violently maintain our opin- accordingly." 

ions, we shall gain but few " He denied that he circulated the 

friends." report" 

SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

606. Will you compose a sentence containing the conjunction if? One, 
containing and? As many sentences as there are conjunctions which 
follow ; each sentence containing one ? Although. Unless. For. Be. 
must. Therefore. Or. Neither. Nor. 

Will you compose a sentence about Jackson ? One, about Clay ? Oiw 
%hout Monroe ? One, about Madison ? 



LIV. OF INTERJECTIONS. 

607. Interjections are words thrown in between the 
narts of sentences, to express the passions or sudden feelingi 
of the speaker. 

What is the use of the copulative con- Do conjunctions ever connect senten* 
Junction 7 265. ces when they appear to connect words 

Will you repeat the list of copulative only 7 604. Give an example. 604. 

^ U v. n f^° DS !/- 2 - 0, ,- - •* , <™ "William writes and ciphers." WiSJ 

What does disjunctive signify ? 271. you parse and ? 605 . cipher3 ? m . 

What does the disjunctive conjunction .«..„ . 4 , \ . _ . .. 

connect? °74 Will you, in the next place, take ths 

Will you repeat the li*t of them ? 275. exercises to be parsed and written, and 

What is the rale for pcnnecting worda dls P° se of tnem? 
by conjunctions ? XI. JAW. What is the meaning of t«*#* 

What other words, besides conjun©- jeetion? 283. 
itou* and prepositions, «>asgct? 603. What are interjections? <KTC. 



98 ENGLISH GRaMMAR. 

608. We do not say, "Ah, I!" "Oh, I!" bat, "Ah, me!" "-Oh, 
me !" using the objective case after the interjection. The pronoun hare 
spoken of, you perceive, is of the first person : hence, 

Note X. Pronouns of the first person are put in the objec- 
tive case, after the interjections Oh ! O ! ah ! &c. 

609. We say, " O thou persecutor!" " Oh, ye hypocrites!" " O thou 
who dwellest," &c. : hence, 

Note XL The interjections O ! oh ! and ah ! require the 

nominative case of pronouns in* he second person. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

610. " Ah, me! I must perish. 1 *' 

Ah is an interjection. 

Me is a personal pronoun, of the first person, singular, objeo 
tive case, and governed by ah, agreeably to Note X. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 

*0, thou (1.) who hast murdered "Ah! unhappy (2.) thou, who art 

thy friend !" deaf (3.) to the calls of duty 

'" O, thou who hearest prayer !" and honor." 

M Ah, me! must I endure all "Oh! happy (4.) us, surrounded 

this ?" with so many blessings." 

SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

611. Will you compose a sentence containing alas ? One, containing 
©& ? One, about volcanoes ? One, about lakes ? One, about islands ? One, 
shout Webster the statesman ? One, about a good scholar ? One, about s 
poor scholar ? One, about a good instructer ? 



LV. OF THE AGREEMENT OF NOUNS. 

612. Apposition, in grammar, signifies the putting of two nouns in the 
same case. 

613. When I say, " John the mechanic has come," I am speaking oi 
only one person ; the two nouns, John and mechanic, both meaning or 
referring to the same person ; consequently they are put, by apposition, in 
tie same case : hence, 

£ a tr life xv. 

When two or more nouns, in the same sentence, signify 
the same thing, they are put, by apposition, in the same 
case. 

Will yon repeat from the list six inter. Will you now take the remaining ex 

Actions? 285. ercises to be parsed and written ? 

How may an interjection generally be LV. Meaning of apposition ? 612. 

feaown? 286. "John the mechanic." How man. 

" Ah, me !" In what case is me ? 610. persons are here spoken of? 613. Bhould 

What rule or note applies to met X. then, the two nouns, John and v\r- 

" O thou," &c. What note applies to ckanic, be in the same, or a dider^ 

S&0»? XI. case? 613. 

11 Ah, me !" Will you parse ah? ms? What is the rule for this agreemeaO 

no. xv. 



(1.) Fox- tliou, apply Nota XI. 
&,) Moasj to %e%4\ by Sals F! 



(2.) Agr»w Trith «A#u, by Ral» IV. 
(4.) Apply Rui« IV. 



EXERCISES. 97 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

614. " Webster the statesman has left us" 
Statesman is a common noun, masculine gender, third person, 

UINOULAR NUMBER, NOMINATIVE CAKE, aild put ill appOSltlOIl With Wbk- 

iter, by Rule XV. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 
1. 
14 John the Baptist was beheaded." " Cicero, the orator, flourished m 
•" David the thief, was apprehend- the time of Catiline, the con- 

ed " spirator." 

u Johnson, the bookseller, has failed "I visit Thompson, the professor, 

in business.* often." 

* \ consulted Williams, the law- "John, the miller, died yester 
yee." day." 

2. 
"If John will not go, I will go my- "We will inspect the goods our- 

self." (1.) selves." 

" You yourself are in fault." " I, I am the man who committed 

a They themselves were mistaken." the deed." 

EemarJc 1. — For the same reason that one noun agrees with another in 
case, it agrees with it in number and person also. 

M I, Alexander, by the grace of God, " We, the representatives of the 
emperor of all the Russians, people of these colonies, do 

promulgate this law." make this declaration." ( 

Remark 2. — When one noun describes or qualifies another, the one so 
qualifying becomes an adjective in sense, and may be so considered m 
parsing. Accordingly, Tremont, in the phrase, " Tremont House," w air 
adjective belonging to House, by Rule IV. 

615. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

14 The Marlborough Hotel is situated " John Dobson was in town yester- 

in Washington-street." day." 

u The firm of Messrs. Williams & " John Johnson, the blacksmith, has 

Sons, has failed." broken his leg." 

Remark 3. — When the nouns which refer to the same person or thing are 
separated by verbs ; as, " Webster is a statesman," it is customary to 
apply one or more of the following rules : 

1. Any verb may have the same case after it as before it, when both words 
refer to the same thing. 

2. The verb to be, through all its variations, has the same case after it a$ 
that which next precedes it. 

1 Webster the statesman." Will you "Tremont House." What part of 

parse statesman ? 614. speech is Tremont ? Remark 2. How 

Will you now parse the succeeding ex- used here ? Remark 2. Will you parse 

crcises ? it in full ? 

" I will go myself." Will you parse Will you now parse all the exercises 

myself? under Remark 2 ? 

How is the compound personal pro- What is the rule or rules usually giv- 

BBoun formed in the singular ? 386. How en for parsing statesman, in the phrase 

5H the plural ? 386. " Webster is a statesman ?" Remark 3. 

When one noun is put in apposition 1, 2, 3, 4. 

with another, in what particulars does it In the same sentence, do Webster and 

agree with it ? Remark 1. statesman both mean or refer to the same 

Will you now parse the next exer- person ? In what case, then, ought they 

etaes 1 to be ? 613. By what rule ? XV. 

i\ \ Myt$!,f it & compound perooiaJ pronoun, ftnt person, singular, nominative cane, and put is apportion 
«r4ii H by Rulo TW 

G 9 



93 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



3. Passtvs verb* of 7taming, judgistg, £c. have the same case after them at 
before them.. 

4. Neuter verbs have the tame case afte* them as before them. 

616. The foregoi&g rules, in the opinion of the writer, are wholly mne- 
cessary, tending merely to confuse the mind of the learner by requiring him 
to make a distinction in form, when there exists none in principle. In cor- 
roboration of this fact, Mr. Murray has the following remark : — 

617. " By these examples it appears, that the verb to be has no govern- 
ment of case, but serves in all its forms as a conductor to the cases ; so th&t 
the two cases, which, in the construction of the sentence, are the neu be- 
fore and after it, must always be alike. Perhaps this subject will be snore 
intelligible by observing that the words, in the cases preceding and following 
the verb to be, may be said to be in apposition to each other. Thus, in th* 
sentence, * I understood it to be him? the words it and him are in apposi 
tion ; that is, they refer to the same thing, and are in the same case." 

618. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX, • 

1. 

44 Webster is a statesman." 

** John is a good scholar." 

u William will become a distinguish- 
ed and valuable citizen." 

44 She walks a queen." (1.) 

"He is styled Lord (1.) Mayor (1.) 
of London." 

** He was named John." (1.) 



" She moves a queen." (1.) 

M Julius CaBsar was that Roman gen- 
eral who conquered the Gauls." 

"Tom struts a soldier." (1.) 

" Will sneaks a scrivener." 

" Claudius Nero, Caligula's uncle, 
a senseless fellow, obtained the 
kingdom." 



** Susan took her to be Mary." (1.) 
"I took him to be John (2.) Og- 

den." 
* We at first took it to be her, but 

afterwards were convinced that 

(3.) it was notshe." 
" He is not the person who (4.) it 

seemed he was." 
" I understood it to be him (1.) who 



is the son of Mr. (2) John 

Quincy (2.) Adams." (1) 
" She is not now the person whom 

they represented her (1.) to 

have been." 
" Whom (5.) do you fancy them to 

be?" 
" The professor was appointed tutor 

to the prince." 



Remark 3. — It not unfrequentty happens that the connecting verb is omit- 
ted ; as, " They made him captain ;" that is, to be captain. 

3. 
" They named him John." , " They proclaimed him king." 

" The soldiers made him gen- v His countrymen crowned him em. 
eral." peror." 

619. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 
" It might have been him, (6.) but " She is the person who I under 



there is no proof (7.) of it' 
"Though I was blamed, it could 

not have been me." 
•* I saw one who I took to be she." 



stood it to have been." 
" Who do you think me to be ?" 
" Whom do men say that I am V* 
" Whom think ye that I am ?" 



What office does the verb to be perform 
between cases ? 617. 

Are the cases next before and after it, 
alike, or different ? 617. 

What is the opinion of Mr. Murray 
respecting the cases before and after to 
be? 617. 

How does he think it and him should 



be parsed in the phrase, " I understood h 
to be him ?" 617. 

WiM you now parse lessens 1, 2, and 3 ? 

Is the verb to be always expressed ? Re- 
mark 3. Give an example. Bemark 3. 

Will you now take the sentences to be 
parsed and corrected ; also, those to b# 
written ? 



(1.) Apply Rule XV. (2.) Remark 2. (3.) Conjunction. 

S» Rule XV (6.) Whom agrees with them, by Rale XT 

wwdinyr to Rule TV. CI. ) Apply Rule VI. 



(4.) Who b put is appotftiou with A*, 
(9.) Him ihould be he to nyree vith it, »•<»• 




NOUNS. 99 

680. SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Will you compose a sentence having nouns in apposition ? One, having 
nouns in apposition, but separated by a verb ? One, having a noun used as 
an adjective ? 

Will you construct a sentence having in it the word who ? One, having 
whose ? One, having whom ? One, having what ? One, having that ? One, 
having man? One, having woman? One, having hoy ? One, having girh? 
One, having parents ? 



LVi. OF NOUNS USED INDEPENDENTLY. ' 

621. To address signifies to speak to; as, "James, your father has 
come." The name of the person addressed must always be of the second 
person ; and a noun in this situation, when it has no verb to agree with it, 
and is wholly disconnected with the rest of the sentence, is said to be inde- 
pendent* Hence, 

huls zvi. 

When an address is made, the name of the person or thing 
addressed is in the nominative case independent 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

622. " John, will you assist me ?" 

John is a proper noun, of the second person, singular number^ 

MASCULINE GENDER, &nd NOMINATIVE CASE INDEPENDENT, according *4 

Rule XVI. 

EXERCISES IN SYNTAX CONTINUED. 



M My lords, (1.) the time has come "Rufiis, you must improve yoni 

when we must take some de- time." 

cisive measures." " Gentlemen of the jury." 

u In making this appeal to you, my "James, (1.) study (2.) your book." 

fellow-citizens, I rely entirely " William, do try to get your lesson 

on your candor." to-dav." 

2. 

^Boys, attend to your lessons." "My dear children, let no root of 

* Girls, come into schooL" bitterness spring up among 

* Did you speak to me, girls ?" you." 

LVI. ° James, your father hag come." When is a noun independent ? 621. 

Which word here is the name of the per- What is the rule for a noun put indo- 

son addressed? pendently? XVI. 

What is the meaning of to address ? In the sentence, " John, will you assist 

821. me ?" will you parse John ? 622. 

Of what person is a noun when an Will you next parse the rest of the 

•ddress is mad* ? 621. exercises in this rule ? 



:i. ) SbiU XV\. <%.) !w>pw*tjT« *uwd. und sigrwa ^itli thou or vm aarfntntocxj, toy Rul» TH. 



100 ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 

LV1L OF NOUNS IN THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 

623. In the phrase, " The sun being risen, we set sail, ' the first clause 
ftf the sentence, namely, " The sun being risen," has nothing to do with 
the remainder : the noun and participle may, therefore, when taken together, 
be said to be in the nominative case independent ; but as we have already 
one case of this nature, we will, for the sake of making a distinction, cali 
this (the noun joined with a participle) the nominative case absolute. Hence* 

RiFSflB xvxx. 

k noun or fronoun before a participle, and independent 
of the rest of the sentence, is in the nominative case 
absolute. 

624. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

41 The sun (1.) being risen, (2.) we "Wellington having returned to 

departed." England, tranquillity was re- 

* Egypt being conquered, Alexander stored to France." 

returned to Syria." " Bonaparte being conquered, the 

61 Shame being lost, all virtue was king was restored." 

lost." "The conditions being observed, 

"The soldiers retreating, victory the bargain was a mutual 

was lost" benefit." 

625. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

** Him (3.) only excepted, who was " Him being destroyed, the re- 
ft murderer." maining robbers made their 

v Her being dismissed, the rest of escape." 
the scholars behaved well." 



LVIIL OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Note XII. — A verb in the infinitive mood is sometimes 
placed independently ; as, " To be frank, I own I have injured 
you." 
I 626. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

M To con&ss the truth, I was in " To tell the plain truth, I persuaded 

fault." him to stay." 

14 To display his power, he oppres- " To convince you, I will continue 

sed his soldiers." here till you return." 

LVII. " The sun being risen, we set LVIIL " To confess the truth, I 

aail." How many words in this sen- was," &c. How is to confess used? — 

tence, used independently, are taken to- Note XII. 

get her 7 623. What is the rule for it 7 Note XII. 

Why is this case denominated the case Wfa { th infiniti ve mood used for 1 

absolute? 623. 4-0 

^What is the rule for the case absolute 7 ^ QW many tenseg ha8 it ? m 

Will you now take the parsing exer- What is its usual sign ? 517. 
cises under Rule XVII., and then the Will yau now parse the exercises un- 
Bentences to be corrected 7 der Note XII. ? 

(l.) In the nominative case absolute with being ristn, by Rule XVU. (2.) Rnle XIII. 

(8.) When a noun U in tbe cast absolute, itahould be in the nominative ca*>. Kim should tb*re»re «>• M 
V Rnle XV»|, 



MOOD. 101 

" To play is pleasant." What is pleasant ? "To play." The infinitive 
to play is, then, the nominative case to is. " Thou shalt not kill, is required 
of all men." What is required? " Thou shalt not kill." The verb is re- 
quired, then, agrees with " Thou shalt not kill," as its nominative. Hence, 

626-1. Note XIII. — The infinitive mood, or part of a 

sentence, is frequently put as the nominative case to a verb of 

the third person singular. 

627. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

**To excel requires^Pflimch exer- 'Thou shalt not kill, is the com 
tion." mand of God." 

'To abandon friends will sink a "Honor thy father and thy mo 
man's character." ther, is required of all men." 

"To practise religion is our du- "To write a fair hand requires 
ty." practice." 

Remark 1. — To excel is the nominative case to requires, by Note XIII., 
and requires agrees with to excel, by Rule VII. In parsing, " Thou shalt 
not kill," we first apply Rules VI., VII. and IX. The whole phrase is 
considered the nominative to is required, by Note XIII. 

2. The infinitive mood, or a part of a sentence, is frequently the object 
of a transitive verb ; as, " Boys love to play." What do boys love ? " To 
olay." The object of love, then, is to play. " Children do not consider 
how much has been done for them by their parents." Consider what! 
11 How much has been done for them hy their parents ;" including for the 
object of the verb the whole phrase in italics. 

Note XIV. — The infinitive mood or part of a sentence, may 

have an adjective or participle agreeing with it, when there is 

no noun, either expressed or understood, to which the adjective 

may belong. 

623 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" To see the sun is pleasant/' " Defraud not thy neighbour, is 
" To practise virtue will be produc- binding on all." 

tive of happiness." " To do good to our enemies, is not 
* To be ridiculed is unpleasant." natural to our hearts." 

Remarks. — Pleasant agrees with, w to see the sun," by Note XIV. Bind- 
ing agrees with, " Defraud no X thy neighbour," by the same authority. To 
is apply Rule VII. ; to sun, Rule VIIL ; to the infinitive to see, Note XIII. 

629. SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Will you compose one or more sentences having an infinitive governed 
by a participle ? One, using an infinitive after a noun ? One, describing 
the manner of playing baUl One, or more, on the manner of playing 
tag ? One, on the duty of children to mind their parents ? One, or more, 
on industry ? One, on the business you intend to pursue for life ? 

,s To play is pleasant." What is plea- Since we have a rule for to love, as a 

eaut ? What, then, is the nominative to verb, there is no necessity for considering 

%$ 7 626-1. Rule 7 Note XIII. it the object in parsing : what rule, then, 

" Thou shalt not kill, is required of all will you apply to it 7 XII. 

jaen." What is required 7 Will you name an example in which 

What is the nominative to is required ? there * s part of a sentence used as the 

626-1. Rule 7 Note XIII. ' obje. " of a verb? 627. Remark 2. 

Willyou now parse the remaining ex- "To seethe sun is pleasant." Will 

ercisea under this rule 7 * you parse pleasant ? to see 7 the 7 sun ? is? 

" Boys love to play." What in the ob- Will you now parse the remaining •* 

foot of lov§ ? 627, Remark 2. ercises under Note XIV. 



102 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

LIX. 

630. In the phrase. " John and James are here," the sense is, that " John 
and James are both here ;" two persons are therefore spoken of, which ren- 
ders it necessary to use the plural verb are, to agree with two nouns which 
individually are singular : hence, 

Two or more nouns or pronouns 9 of the singular number, 
connected together by and, either digressed or under- 
stood, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns, agreeing 
with them in the plural number. 

631. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

* William and James run." " John and Joseph can get their 

* Mary and Harriet study, and they lessons." 

will therefore excel." " Time and tide wait for no 

v You and I are in fault." man." 

* John and Thomas say they intend " My coat and pantaloons were 

to study Latin." made by Watson." 

Remarks.-— -. William is one of the nominatives to the verb run. James is 
in the nominative case to the verb run, and is connected with the noun Wil- 
liam, by Rule XI. Run agrees with William and James, by Rule XVIII. 

632. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

* Mary and her cousin has come." " The farmer and his son is in 
w You and I makes progress in our town." 

studies." u Susan and her sister is deceitful" 

•*Life and health is both uncer- "William and John both writes a 
tain." good hand." 

Remarks. — For has come, we should read have come, that the verb may be 
plural, when it has two nominatives connected by and, according to Rule 
XVIII. 

Exception 1. — When and connects two or more nouns in the singular, 
which refer to the same person or thing, the verb must be singular ; as, 
" Pliny the philosopher and naturalist has greatly enriched science." 

633. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

M That superficial scholar and " In that house live a great and 

critic have given new evi- distinguished scholar and states- 

dence of his misguided judg- man." 

ment." M Mr. Cooper, the sailor and novel- 

"There go a benevolent man and ist, visit La Fayette, the patriot 

scholar." and philanthropist." 

LIX. When I say, " John and James Will you parse the succeeding exer 

are here," of how many persons do J cises ? 

speak ? M Pliny the philosopher and naturalist 

Should we, then, use is or are ? 630. has greatly enriched science." Why 

What is the rule for are? XVIII. should we use has, in this sentence, in- 

Will you now parse the exercises un- stead of have ? Exception 1. 

der Rule XVIII. ? "That superficial scholar and critic 

" William and James run." Will you have given." Why is have given incor- 

parse William in full? andt James? rect? Exception 1. 

*un ? What is the rule for has come ? Excep- 

Will von parse the next exercises ? tion 1. 

"Mary and her cousin has come."— Will you correct and parse the remark 

Wfcv is this incorrect ? fi32 ing exercises 7 



EXERCISES. 103 

Exception 2. — When two or more nouns in the singular, connected by and , 
have each or every joined with them, the verb must be in the singular number ; 
es, " Every person, every house, and every blade of grass, was destroyed." 

634. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

rt Every man, and every woman, w ^Caeh man and each woman, were 

and every child, were taken." particularly alluded to in tho 

M Every tree, stick and twig, were report of the affair." 
consumed." 

Remark. — Were, in the first of these examples, should be changed for was, 
because reference is had to each person, individually considered, which, in re- 
spect to the verb, is the same in effect as if one person only was spoken of. 

Note XV. — Every is sometimes associated with a plural 

noun, in which case the verb must be singular ; as, " Every 

hundred years constitutes a century." 

635. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

1 Every twenty-four hours afford to " Every four years, add another day 
us the vicissitudes of day and to the ordinary number of dayai 

night." in a year. 

Remark. — Afford, in the example above, is a violation of the note : it should 
be affords, in the singular number. The reason of this is, that ' ' every twenty- 
four hours," signifies a single period of time, and is, therefore, in reality sin- 
gular. 

Note XVI. — A verb in the plural will agree with a col- 
lective noun in the singular, when a part only of the indi- 
viduals are meant; as, "The council were divided in their 
sentiments." When the noun expresses the idea of unity, the 
verb should be singular; as, "The council was composed 
wholly of farmers." 

Remarks. — In the foregoing example, we use the plural verb were divided, 
because we refer to the individuals composing the council ; but if no allusion 
of this sort had been made, and we had spoken of it as one entire body, we 
should have used the singular verb, according to the common rule ; as, " The 
council is composed wholly of farmers.'' 

We apply to council, in the first example, Note XVI. ; to were divided, 
the same note ; and to council, and v)as composed in the second example, 
Rules VI. and VII. % 

636. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" The council were divided in their " My people do not consider." 

sentiments." "The multitude eagerly pursue 

*A part of the men were mur- pleasure as their chief good." 

dered." 

In the first example, under Exception " The council were divided." Why 

8, why use was destroyed, rather than not was ? Note XVI. Remarks. Rule ? 

acre destroyed ? Exception 2. Note XVI. 

Will you parse the remaining exercises When is a noun called collective ? 30o\ 

under this exception, after having cor- In what circumstances would it be 

rectedthem? proper to use the singular verb? Note 

" Every twenty-four hours afTord to XVI. Give an example. 

us." What does "every twenty-four How do you parse council? Note XVI. 

hours" signify, one period of time, or Remarks. Were divided? Note XVI 

more ? What is wrong, then ? Why ? Remarks. Was c&mpzsed, in the second 

635. Remark. example? Note XVI. 

What is the rule for this? Note XV. Will you now parse and correct tht 

Will you correct and pane the other remaining exercises under this note? 
example ? 



104 ENGLISH GRAMMAR 

637. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 
** My people doth not consider." " The committee wad divided is 
* The people rejoices in that which their sentiments, and has re- 

should give it sorrow " ferred the business to \ g**°rsi 

"The multitude rushes to certain meeting." 

destruction." 



LX. 

638. Negative means denying; and affirmative, asserting or declaring 
positively. A sentence in which something is denied is a negative one, and 
a sentence in which something is affirmed or positively asserted, is an affirm- 
ative one. "Vice degrades us," is an affirmative sentence, and "Labor 
does not injure us," is a negative one. Not, nothing, none at all, by no 
means, no, in no wise, neither, no, none, fyc, are negative terms. 

The phrase, "I have nothing," has one negative, and means, "I have 
not any thing." The phrase, "I have not nothing," cannot mean the same 
as " I have nothing," but must mean, on the contrary, " I have something." 
This last, you perceive, is an affirmative sentence, and signifies the same as 
the foregoing one, "I have not nothing." Two negatives, therefore, are 
equal to an affirmative. Hence, 

EULE SIX. 

Two negatives in the same sentence, are equivalent to 

an affirmative. 

9 639. SENTENCES TO BE PARSED AND CORRECTED. 

" He spends all the day in idleness, " Be (1.) honest, nor (2.) take (3 t ) 

and I cannot prevail on him to no shape nor semblance of dis- 

do nothing." guise." 

H He cannot get no employment in " He is so (4.) indolent, that he wiU 

town." not do nothing." 

; * I cannot by no raea^is consent." " I did not say nothing." 

•* I shall not take no interest in the " He cannot do nothing acceptable 

affair." to John. 
M I never studied no grammar." 

Remarks. — For nothing, in the above examples, j^ad anything, in accord- 
ance with Rule XIX. 

LX. What is the meaning of negative ? What is "I have not nothing" equal 

S38. affirmative? 638. to in expression ? 638. 

What is a negative sentence? 638. What, then, can we say of two neg*- 

An affirmative one? 638. Give an ex- tives? Rule XIX. 
ample of each. iVill you next take the exercises undeaf 

Will you name a few negative terms? Faile XIX ? 
£38. What is a noun ? 4. article ? 350. 

How many negatives has the phrase adjective? 363. pronoun? 3^1? verb? 

k 'I have nothing," and what does it 438. participle? 498. adverb? 588. 

mean ? 638. preposition ? 595. conjunction ? 602. 

Meaning of " I have not nothing"? interjection? 607. common noun ? 301. 

638. proper noun ? 302. definite article ? 80. 

Flow many negatives has it ? indefinite article ? 83. 

What kind of a sentence is " I have How many properties in grammar have 

something"? 638. nouns? 308. How many have verbs?* 

;l.) Be agrees with thou or you understood, by Rule VIL 
( 2 ) For rior } read and . 

($A Take w iu the imperative mood and ap-eea with thou or you understood, and U ftsrafcr* eonntrt*! to A* 
accord ins to Rule XL 
<4.) Adverb. 
• Mood, tease, number, and pcraoa. 



EXERCISES. 



105 



640. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 



1 Deep rivers move with silent ma- 
jesty; but small brooks are 
noisy." 

* Deeds are fruits ; words are but 

leaves." 

4 It is a bad horse indeed that will 
not carry his own provender." 

"The hog never looks up to him 
who threshes down the acorns." 

*Add not trouble to the grief- 
worn heart." 

* If the counsel be good, it is no 

matter who gives it." 
" By others' faults wise men correct 

their own." 
"When the world says you are 

wise and good, ask yourself if 

it be true." 

* Sin and misery are constant com- 

panions." 



" Power discovers the disposition of 

man." 
"Quarrels are easily begun, but 

with difficulty ended." 
" Force without forecast is of little 

worth." 
11 Rome was not built in one day." 
" In youth and strength think of 

old age and weakness." 
" All are not saints who go ta 

church." 
"To say well is good, but to do 

well is better." 
"No fear should deter us from 

doing good." 
"Pride, perceiving Humility hon- 
orable, often borrows her 

cloak." 
" Say what is well, but do what is 

better." 



641. 



SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 



Will you compose one sentence describing the business of an imtrue* 
Iter? One,- the business of a doctor? One, the business of a lawyer? One, 
of a dentist ? One, of a surgeon 7 One, of a farmer ? One, of a, black- 
smith ? One, of a miller ? One, of a merchant 7 One, of a grocer ? One, 
of an apothecary 7 One, of a legislator 7 One, of a judge 7 One, of a 
colonel ? One, of a captain 7 One, of a general ? One, of an agent in @ 
factory ? One, of the directors of a bank 7 



LXI. 

642. When I say, :{ He taught me grammar," I mean, tl He taught 
grammar to me: grammar , then, is the object of the verb, and me is 
governed by the prepo&t^n to, understood. In the first example, we hava 
two objective cases after the verb taught ; and since there are many instan- 
ces like the preceding, in which transitive verbs are followed by two objec- 
tive cases — hence the following, 



How many participles are there?* 
What are they ? 500, 502, 504. 

When is a verb active ? 439. 

When transitive ? 440. When intran- 
iitive? 441. How may it be known? 
154. 

Will you decline I? thou? he? she? 
it? 127. 

Of what person is /? my? usl their? 
you? 127. 

W:iat is mood? 451. the indicative? 
452. potential? 453. subjunctive? 456. 
infinitive? 470. imperative? 472. How 
many tenses has the indicative? 525. 
subjunctive? 526. potential? 527. in- 
finitive? 528. imperative ? 529. What 



are the signs of the present tense ? 519, 
imperfect? 520. perfect? 521. pluper 
feet ? 522. first future ? 523. second fa. 
ture? 524. 

Will you now parse the promiscuous 
exercises ? 

Will you next take the sentences to b« 
written ? 

LXI. " He taught me grammar."' 
What does this mean ? 642. What, thezs, 
is the object of the verb, and by what ia 
grammar governed ? 642. By what is ww 
governed? 642. 

How many objective cases, then, fok 
low the verb taught ? 642. 



i06 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



Two objective cases, the one of a person, and the other 
of a thing, may follow transitive verbs, of asking, 
teaching, giving, fyc. ; a preposition being under* 
stood. 

He taught me grammar" 

Remark 1. — In the foregoing example, me and grammar are both govern- 
ed by taught, according to Rule XX. 

643. EXAMPLES IN SYNTAX. 

"My instructer gave me a valu- 
able book, for my attention to 
study." 

" She forbade him the presence of 
the emperor." 

"The French denied him the 
privilege of an American citi 
zen." 



* He taught me grammar." 

w William asked me some ques- 
tions." 

"My mother wrote me a precious 
letter in the month of May." 

" They allowed him his seat in 
Congress." 

14 John gave me a detailed account 
of the whole transaction." 



LXIL 

644. The natural construction of the passive voice requires the object of 
the active verb to become the nominative to the passive verb; as, "He 
taught me grammar ;" " Grammar was taught me." In some few instan- 
ces, just the reverse takes place ; as, "I was taught grammar ;" here the 
object, grammar, is placed after the verb : we therefore derive the following 

i 

1ULS XXI. 

An objective case may follow passtje verbs of asking, 
teaching, and some others ; as, " I was taught gram- 
mar." 

$3r Apply to I Rule VI. ; to was taught, Rule VII. ; to grammar, Rulb 
XXI. 



645. 



EXERCISES _N SYNTAX. 



u John taught me music." " I was taught grammar." 

rf< Music was taught me by John." " The presence of the emperor was 
64 A question was asked me." forbidden Theresa." 

** Theresa was forbidden the pre- " Reading is taught in almost every 
sence of the emperor." school." 



What rule is given for cases of this 
description? XX. 

By what are me and grammar govern- 
ed ? 642. Remark 1. * 

Will you next parse the exercises un- 
ici Rule XX.? 

LXII. What is the natural construc- 
tion of the pnmivv voice iu reference to 



the object ? 644. Give an example. 644. 
Give an example where the reverse taken 
place. 644. 

Where is the object placed ? 644. 

44 1 was taught grammar." Will you 
parse I? was taught ? grammar ? 

Will you next take the exercise* un 
der Rule XXI. 7 



EXERCISES. 107 



LXIII 

646 When I say, " He came home last May," the sense is, whsn folly 
txpressed, " He came to his home in last May." " John continued four 
years at the university ;." that is, " during four years." " The horse ran a 
mile ;" that is, " over the space of a mile. ' " John went that way ;" that 
is, " over that way." From these facts we derive fhs following 

RULE XXII. 

Home, and nouns signifying which way, how far, how 
long, or time when, fyc, are in the objective case ; a 
preposition being understood. 

647. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

" He came home last May." " Susan rides out every day." 

* John continued four years at the "William sleeps comfortably all 

university." night." 

" John went home once a month." "John was absent from home six 
"Charles studies six hours every years." 

day." " James lived six years at Boston, 
K John rode that way." twelve years at Dedham." 

" He ran a mile." 

Note XVII. — After the woras like and unlile, the preposi- 
tion to or unto is frequently understood ; as, " He is like his 
father;" that is, "like to his father." "She is unlike her 
sister ;" that is, " unlike to her sister." 

648. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 

"He is like his brother." "John behaves like a man in a vio- 

" William, unlike his father, falsi- lent rage." 

fied his word." " He is unlike any other mortal." 

Note XVIII.— Nouns signifying duration, extension, quan- 
tity, quality or valuation, are in the objective case, without any 
governing word. The following are examples : 

" The Atlantic ocean is three thou- " The cart weighs fifteen hundreu 

sand miles (1.) wide." pounds." 

"• William's knife is worth eighteen " The wall which separates China 

pence, or twenty-five cents." from Tartary, commonly called 

* For that article, which is richly the great Chinese wall v is fifteen 

worth a dollar, (2.) we cannot hundred miles long, and from 

always get fifty cents." twenty to thirty feet in height.** 

" The chasm is fifty feet broad." 

Remarks. — (1.) The noun miles is governed according to Note XVI1L 
(2.) Apply Note XVIII. 

LXIII. 4, He came home last May." Will you parse the exercises undev 

What does this mean, when more fully Rule XXII? 

expressed? 648. Will you parse home? What is the note respecting like an* 

May ? unlil;e ? XVII. 

" John continued four years at the uni- " He is like his father." How is f&th*+ 

versity." " The horse ran a mile." What parsed ? Note XVII. 

Ao these sentences mean, when fully ex- Will you next take the remaining «x» 

pressed 1 ercises under Note XVII ? 



108 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Note XIX. - - The conjunction as, after such, many and 
same, is generally considered a relative pronoun ; as in tha 
following examples : 

" Ke receives into his school as " He took such books as pleased 

many scholars as (1.) apply." him." 

M Our instructor, who is serupii- "He exhibited the same course 

lously exact in the execution of conduct as was once before 

of justice, punishes severely exhibited on the same occa- 

all such as disobey his com- sion." 

mands." 

Remarks. ~ (1.) As is a conjunction, used here as a relative, according to 
tlse Note preceding ; of the third person plural, masculine gender, agreeing 
with scholars, according to Rule V. ; and' in the nominative case to apply, 
according to Rule VI. 

Note XX. — The conjunction than seems to have the force 
of a preposition before the relative whom, in a sentence where 
a comparison is made ; as follows : 

"Which, when Beelzebub per- "Alfred, than whom, Solomon ex- 

ceived, than whom, (1.) Satan cepted, a wiser king never 

(2.) excepted, (3.) none higher reigned, was one of the earliest 

sat." English kings." 

Remarks.— (1.) Whom is governed by the conjunction than, used as a pre- 
position, according to Note XX.--(2.) Apply Rule XVII. — (3.) Participle 
agreeing with Satan, by Rule XIII.— It is somewhat remarkable, that if, 
in the fast two examples, the personal pronoun he were substituted for 
whom, it would be in the nominative case ; as, "A wiser king never reigned 
than he? 7 that is, " than he was." 

649. SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Will you compose a sentence having a proper example under Ruli 
I, ? II. ? III. ? IV. ? V. ? VI. ? VII. ? VIII. ? IX. ? X. ? XI. ? XII. ? 
XIII.? XIV.? XV.? XVI.? XVII.? XVIII. ? XIX.? XX.? XXL? 
XXII.? 

Will you construct a sentence descriptive of the calamities arising from 
fire ? one, on losses by sea ? one, on the fatal effects of lightning ? one, 
on the character of our forefathers ? one, on each of the seasons ? one, on 
the effects of rain ? one, on the manner of making hay ? one, on the ap- 
pearance of soldiers when training ? one, on the celebration of the fourth 
of July ? one, on the utility of fire ? one, on the utility of wood ? one, on 
the usefulness of the cow ? one, on fruit 7 

When is the conjunction as used as a What does English grammar teach 1 

relative pronoun ? Note XIX. 288. How many parts of speech are 

Will you parse as, in the phrase " He there in English ? 299. 
received into his school as many scholars What does orthography include ? 291. 
as applied" ? Note XIX. What does it teach us ? 291. 

Will you parse the remaining exercises What does etymology teach? 293. 
under this Note ? What are proper nouns ? 302. 

When is than considered a preposition ? What are common nouns ? 301. 
Note XX. Give an example. In what manner may proper nameg b« 

What would be the efiect of using the used as common names ? 303. 
personal pronoun instead of the relative? How may common names be used to 

Observation under Note XX. Give an represent individuals? 304. 
example. What is a collective noun? 306. 

Will you now take the sentences to be What four things belong to nouns ? 30a 
parsed and written ? What is gender? 312. Masculine 

How many articles are there? 351. gender? 314. Feminine gender? 315. 

Will you name them? 351. When do Common gesder? 316. Neuter gendar* 

are use a ? 87. 357. When an 1 86. 317. 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 109 

LXIV. OF WORDS USED AS DIFFERENT PARTS 
OF SPEECH. 

650. That is a relative, 

When who or which may be substituted ior it, and ma&e sense; as, 
41 The man that [who] arrived yesterday." 

651. That is a demonstrative pronoun^ 

When it is joined with a noun to point it out ; as, " That man is intelii-: 
gent." 

652. That is a conjunction, 

•In all cases when it is neither a relative nor a demonstrative pronoun : 
as, "He studies that he may learn." 

653. But is a preposition, 

When it has the sense of except ; as, " All but [except] John 
eame." 

654. But is an adverb, 

When it has the sense of only ; as, " This is but [only] doing our 
duty." 

655. But is a conjunction, 

In all cases when it is neither an adverb nor preposition ; as, " He called, 
*ut I refused to go." 

656. As is a relative, 

When it follows many, such, or same; as, "Let such as hear take 
feeed." 

657. As is an adverb, 

When it is joined to an adverb or adjective in the sense of so ; as, " Ha 
does as well as he can." J 

658. As is a conjunction, 

In all cases except when it is an adverb or relative ; as, " He did as I 
directed him." 

659. Either is a conjunction, 

When it corresponds to or ; as, " Either the one or the other." 

660. Either is a distributive pronoun, 

When it means, "one of the two;" as, "You can take eithei 
toad." 

661. Both is a conjunction, 

When it is followed by and ; as, " We assisted him both for his sake 
and our own." 

How may nouns, naturally neuter, be noun? 651. Give an example. When a 

ton verted into the masculine or feminine conjunction ? 652. Give an example. 
gender? 3i8. When is but a preposition ? 653. Giv® 

What is the feminine corresponding to an example. When an adverb ? 654. 

bachelor ? 319. How is the feminine here Give an example. When a conjunction? 

formed ? 655. Give an example. 

Will you spell the feminine corre- Whe ? is «» a relati 7 ? ?f Give . an 

ipondini to lad ? king- ? benefactor ? 319. example. When an adverb ? 657. Give 

How is the feminine here formed ? ■* example. W^n a conjunction ? 658. 

,,..,, ,. . . Give an example. 

Will you spell the feminine corre- When is ^^ a conjunction? 653 

aponding to baron? poet? priest! Jew? Give an example. When a distributive 

eotary? tutor? hero? duke 7 iwtructer? pronoun ? 660. Give an example. 
* 1 *' . When is both a conjunction ? 661. Give 

LXIV. When is that a relatwe ? 650. an example. When an adjective nsra- 

Bive an example. A demonstrative pro- noun ? 662. Give an example. 

10 



110 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

662. Both is an adjective pronoun, 

When it means, " the two ;" as, " Both the men are guilty." 

663. Yet is a conj miction, 

When it follows though; as, "Though he reproves me, yet lestetiw 
Dim." In all other cases, it is an adverb; as, "That event has yet %$ 
come." 

664. For is a conjunction, 

When it means the same as because ; as, " He trusted him, for he kne^ 
that he would not deceive him." 

665. For is a preposition, 

I& all instances except when it is a conjunction; as, "He works fw 
me." 

68Q. What is a compound relative, 

When it stands for, " that which ;" as, "I will take what [that which] 
you send me." 

667. What is an interrogative relative pronoun, 
When used in asking questions ; as, " What do you want ?" 

668. What is an adjective pronoun, 

When joined with a noun ; as, " What strange things he said I" 

669. What is a compound adjective pronoun, 

When joined with nouns, and has the sense of two or more words ; as, 
" In what manner he succeeded, is unknown to me ;" that is, " The man- 
ner t?i which he succeeded, is unknown to me." 

670. What is an interjection, 

When used to express wonder ; as, " What ! take my money I" 

671. Then is a conjunction, 

When it has the sense of therefore ; as, "If he has commanded it, then 
I must obey." 

672. Then is an adverb, 

When it refers to time ; as, " Did you heal it thunder then?" 

673. Much is a noun, 

When it stands for quantity ; as, " Where much is given, much will be 
required." 

674. Much is an adjective, 

When it is joined to nouns ; as, " Much labour fatigues us." 

675. Much is an adverb, 

When it qualifies the same parts of speech that the adverb does ; as, 
" Thou art much mightier than I." 

676. More is a noun, 

When it implies quantity ; as, " The more we have, the more *n 
want." 

When is yet a conjunction ? 663. Give When an interjection? 670. Gave as 
an example. When an adverb? 663. example. 

G w^ an ® x ^ m P le ' . ,. , APA „. When is then a conjunction ? 671. Qlva 

When is for a conjunction? 664 Give example. When an adverb? 672, 

an example. When a preposition ? 665. ci example. 

Give an example. w . . *\ _ _^_ v _. 

When is what a compound relative? When is much a noun? 673. Give an 

668. Give an example. When an inter- example. When an adjective ? 674. Giya 

rotative relative pronoun ? 667. Give an an example. When an adverb 1 675 

example. When an adjective pronoun ? Give an example. 

068. Give an example. When a com- When is mar* ■ nonn ? 676. Give a* 

pound pronoun ? 669. Give aa example, nxample. 



EXERCISES. 



Ill 



677. More and most are adjectives, 

When they qualify a noun; as, " The" more joy I have, the more 
sorrow I expect; "Most men are mistaken in their pursuit of hap- 
piness." 

678. More and most are adverbs, 

When used in comparison ; as, " This boy is more obedient than that;' 1 
"* The soil of Cuba is most fertile." , 



679. PROMISCUOUS 

They perfume their garments." 

* A perfume is a sweet odor." 
*They rise early in the morn- 
ing." 

* A rise sometimes signifies the be- 

ginning." 
*Rufus speaks the language of 

truth." 
4 James performed his part well." 

* A well is a fountain of water." 

* A well man is one who enjoys his 

health." 
•We frequently walk in the gar- 
den." 

* The Jews fast often." . 
1 He walks very fast" 

* The refuse signifies the worthless 

remains." 

* Desert not a friend." 

' Joseph's brethren came and bowed 

down before him." 
4 William went after his slate." 



EXERCISES IN SYNTAX. 



44 His elder brethren came before 
Benjamin did." 

"* John left after William came." 

il Evil communications corrupt good 
manners." 

44 Corrupt conversation is very fool- 
ish." 

44 A walk in the fields in the sum- 
mer season is delightful." 

44 A true fast is abstaining from 
iniquity." 

41 Sin is a moral evil, and the caus« 
of natural evils." 

44 Protest not rashly, lest thou have 
to repent of it." 

44 A protest is a solemn declaration 
against a thing." 

44 Do nothing rashly, lest thou pre- 
cipitate thyself into inextricable 
difficulty." 

44 Hasty promises are seldom kept." 



2. 



44 The man that I saw, was ex- 
ecuted." 

44 That man that you met yesterday 
in the street, was taken and 
sent to Boston, that he might 
have an impartial trial." 

41 We assisted him both for your 
sake and our own." 



44 Did you hear the report of tho 

cannon then ?" 
44 Where, much is given, much will 

be required." 
44 Future time is yet to come." 
44 He trusted him, for he knew 

that he would not deceive 

him." 



When are more and most adjective,?? 
677. Give examples of each. When ad- 
verbs? 678. Give examples of each. 

What is number? 5. What does the 
singular number denote ? 8. What the 
plural? 10. 

What nouns have the singular form 
only ? 324. What the plural ? 325. What 
are the same in both numbers ? 326. 

How is the plural number of nouna 
generally formed ? 327. 

When nouns end in cA, sh, &c, how do 
they form the plural ? 328. 

How do those ending in/or/e? 329. 

How is the plural formed, when the 
singular ends in v, with no other vowel 
in the same syllable ? 330. 

What is case? 333. The nominative 
«*«e? 33& Possessive rune 7 337 How 



formed ? 338. How formed when the sin 
gular ends in ss ? 341. 

What does the objective case express 
343. 

Will you decline man? book? 345. 
chair? 345. 

Will you parse the promiscuous exer- 
cises ? 

What is an adjective? 363. Waal 
does the positive state express? 365. 
Comparative? 366. Superlative? 367. 
How is the comparative formed in mono- 
syllables? 369. How in more syllables 
than one ? 370. 

How do you compare the following ad- 
jectives? — good? bad? wise? little 1 
small? virtuous? many? old? 115. 

When does an adjective become a noua 
in paw rig? 378. 



112 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



** Both the men are guilty.", 
"Although he reproves me, yet I 

esteem him." 
" All but John came." 
" This is but doing- our duty." 
"Ke called me, but I refused to 

t go." 
" Let such as hear take heed." 
u He did as I directed him." 
M You may take either the one or 

the other." 
^EUher road will conduct you to 

the right place." 
* If he has commanded it, then I 

must obey." 



" He works for me." 
" He refused what was sent him." 
" What strange things he saw ! w 
"In what manner he succeeded Is 

unknown to me." 
" What ! will you take my life ?" 
" The more we hav^, the more we 

want." 
"The more joy I have, the more 

sorrow I expect." 
" The most dutiful children are the 

happiest children." 
" Much labor fatigues me." 
"Thou art much mightier than I 
am." 



" Susan is determined to learn." 
" By framing excuses he prolonged 
his stay." 
Jfhe man who is faithfully at- 
tached to religion may be relied 
on with confidence." 
James, do visit me " 



" Virtue and vice are opposites." 
"When John's father asked him 
that question, he heard him, but 
refused to answer him." 
" The wall is sixty feet high." 
" To meet our friends after a long 
absence affords us much joy." 



LXV. CONTRACTIONS. 



Of the Auxiliary Have, also o/Had. 

" I 've satisfied myself." 
"They'd determined to let him 
go." 



680. 

u They 've forsaken him." 

u I 'd gone when you came." 

" They 'd just returned from town." 



681. 



Of Will and Would. 



* I '11 finish my work first." 
"They'd sing songs till midnight, 
if they were urged." 



"He is still determined that he'll 

not forbear." 
" He '11 at last mind me." 



Will you name a few adjectives which 
have in themselves a superlative signifi 
cation ? 374. 

What is a pronoun ? 38t. A pe/sonal 
pronoun ? 382. Why called personal " 
382. 

How many persons have pronouns in 
each number ? 383. How many num 
hem ? 384. 

Tv? which of the pronouns is gender ap- 
pked? 382. 

How many cases have pronouns ? 38-1 

Will you decline I? thou? he? she? 
it? 127 

What kind of a pronoun is myself? 386. 
How formed ? 386. 

What is a relative pronoun? 409. 
Why called relative ? 408. 

What is said of the relative what ? 429. 

How ought who to be applied 7 413. 



How which? 413. How may that be 
used? 415. 

When are pronouns called interroga 
tive? 431 

What are adjective pronouns? 390. 
How many kinds of adjective pronouns 
are there ? 391. 

Which are the demonstrative? 398. 
Why so called ? 398. The distributive 1 
393. Whv so called ? 393. The indefi- 
nite ? 402. Why so called ? 401. 

To what do this and that refer ? 400. 

Will you decline one? 404. ether 1 
403. 

What is the rule by which pronoune 
agree with their antecedents ? V. 

Which words in sentences are antece- 
dents? 420. 

What are subsequents? 431. 

Will you pars* the exercises marked $? 



CONTRACTIONS. 113 

682. Of Am and Is. 

«T hat man's rich." . "Tis strange that she will not 

w *T is true she 's dead." * regard the kind assistance of 

** I 'm sorry that you have misspent her friend." 
your time." 

683. Of Cannot and Will not. 

He can't endure such afflictions." " He won't disobey me." 
4 You can't be absent at such "You won't mistake the direc- 
times." tion." 

684. Omissions of the Principal Verb after an Interrogative 

Sentence. 

*Who will assist me?" "John" "What will make me respectable 

[will assist me]. and Imppy ?" " Virtue." 

K What sent our forefathers to this "Who taught him grammar?" 

country?" « The love of liberty." " Mr. Williams." 

685. Omissions of the Principal Verb after an Auxiliary. 

" Stephen will go if John will" " He received me in the same man- 
[go] . ner that I would you. 

* Susan shall walk, but John shall " I will do it as soon as I can." 

not." " The > work is not completed, but 

" 1 have recited ; have you ?" soon will be." 

686. Omissions of the Principal Verb after Than and As. 

w Thomas is a better scholar than "Johnson is richer than James." 

William" [is]. " Susan is not so beautiful as 

**He was more beloved than Cin. Mary." 

thia, but not so much ad- "She is more playful than her 
mired." brother." 

687. Omissions of the Verb To be. 

* Sweet th* pleasure, rich the trea- " Delightful task, to rear the tender 

sure." thought, 

" A child of freedom thou. n To teach the young idea how to 
" Sweet the music of birds." shoot." 

" Dear the schoolboy's sport." 

What is a verb ? 438. tive? 472. Subjunctive? 456. Infim 

What is an active verb? 439. tive ? 479. 

When is an active verb transits? What are participles ? 498. How may 

440. When intransitive ? 441. the participles in ing be distinguished 

What is a passive verb? 444. How from other words of like termination? 

formed? 510. 500. 

How may a transitive verb be known ? How many, and which are the partiei- 

154. pies 1\ What does the present express ? 

How an intransitive ? 154. 500. Perfect ? 502. Compound perfect ? 

What is a neuter ve/b? 450. 504. 

Will you next take the exercises mark- LXV. Will you next parse the con- 
ed 3 ? tractions ? 680. 

What belong to verbs ?*- What is tense ? 494. What is the pre 

How many numbers have they? How sent used for? 482. The perfect ? Imper- 

many persons?! feet? 488. Pluperfect? 491. First fu- 

What is mood ? 451. How many are ture ? 492. Second future ? 493. 

the*e ? 481. Will you name them ? Under what circumstances do we us« 

What ii the indicative mood used for ? the present tense to denote the relative 

452. Ths potential ? 453. The impera- time of a future action ? 484. 

» $2ood, t*jw«, smnsber saad peraoa. ? Thra>». % Three — tbt present, parfeet, &ad eampoond portiMsfc. 

E 10* 



114 ENGLISH GRAMMAR 

688. Omissions of May, JVIioht, Could, Would, and Should. 

M Live long and be happy." u He might not weep, nor laugSi, 

** Who will entreat the Lord that he nor sing." 

spare our lives ?" " Should I forgive you, and allow 

M I could not think, nor speak, nor you to depart, you would not 

hear." reform." 

689. Omissions of the Conjunction before the Verb in the Sub- 

junciive Mood, 

* If he will repent and reform, I " Had I improved my time as 1 

will assist him." ought to have done, I should 

** Unless good order be restored, and have been well qualified for 

the former officers be re-elected, business." 

there will be an end to ■ the ad- " Were there no alternative, I would 

ministration of justice." not do that." 

690. Omissions, of For after Verb, implying the idea of serving, 

84 Make me a pen." " Bring me some water." 

« Order me a carriage." " Purchase him a knife." 

691. Omissions of the Interjection, 

** Sweet cnild ! lovely child I thy " Thou Preserver and Creator c5f all 

parents are no more." mankind." 

w Sweet blossom ! precious to my' " My beloved Ulrica ! hast thou, too, 

heart." . forgotten me ?" 

692. Omissions of the Relative, 

44 Several men are there come from " I trust that he I desire to see m 
Europe," ' much, will speedily return." 



LXVI. INVERTED SENTENCES. 
693. The Nominative Case placed after the Verb, 

w Smack went the whip, round went guished for his learning 1 and 

the wheels ; politeness." 

Were ever folks so glad ?" " And in soil ringlets waved he? 

" There goes a man alike distin- golden hair." 

in what sort of descriptions do we use Will you now parse the omissions? 

f he present for the past tense ? 486. 684, &c. 

What is the conjugation of a verb? 531. How is the passive verb formed ? 510. 

What is the conjugation of an active Will you decline love in the indicative 

verb st j ied ? 532. A passive verb ? 532. present, passive ? and the verb to be in the 

How many tenses has the indicative ? imperfect ? Perfect ? Pluperfect ? First 

525. Potential ? 527. Subjunctive? 526. future? Second future ? Present poten- 

fmperative? 529. Infinitive? 528. tial ? Imperfect? Perfect? Pluperfect? 

What is the sign of the present indica- Present subjunctive, common form ? Im- 

live? 519. The imperfect? 520. Per- perfect? Perfect? Pluperfect? First fu- 

(ect? 521. Pluperfect? 522. First fu- ture ? Second future ? 

tare? 523. Second future? 524. The In what voice, mood, tense, number and 

potential mood? 515. Infinitive ? 517. person, is, " Hove?" "We love?" " They 

Subjunctive ? 518. How many persona are loved V " You are ?" " I did learn ?" 

baa the imperative? 518. How many "John was instructed?" "He was?" 

tenses ? 529. How many forms has the " They have returned ?" " Have the? 

subjunctive mood ? 461. In what do they gone ?" " They have been ?" " I had 

££SBbx ? 461. tead 7" " They had been distinguished r 



SENTENCES TRANSPOSED. 115 

694. The Objective Case before the Verb. 

* Tyrants no more their savage na- " Me glory summons to the martial 
ture kept, scene." x 

And foes to virtue wondered how " The rolls of fame I will not now 
they wept." explore." 

695. SENTENCES TO BE WRITTEN. 

Will you compose a sentence exemplifying Rule VIII. ? One, Rule 
IX.? X.? XL? XII.? XIII. ? XIV.? Will you compose a sentence on 
the use of the dog ? One, on the clouds ? One, on night ? One, on wind ? 
One, on snow ? One, 'on hail ? One, on ice? One, on slating? One, on 
fishing ? One, on courage ? One, on cowardice ? One, on filial duty % 
Dae, on indolence ? One, on schools ? 

696. SENTENCES TRANSPOSED. 
" Here rests his head upon the lap of earth, 

A youth, to fortune and to fame unknown." 

Transposed, 

u A youth, unknown to fortune and to fame, rests here his head upoa 
the lap of earth." 

" When, young, life's journey I began, 

The glittering prospect charmed my eyes , 
I saw along the extended plain, 

Joy after joy successive aise : 
But soon I found 't was all a dream, 

• And learned the fond pursuit to shun, 
Where few can reach the purposed aim, 

And thousands daily are undone." 

Transposed. 
"I began life's journey when young, and the glittering prospect 
charmed my eyes ; I saw joy after joy successive rise, along the ex- 
tended plain : but soon I found it was all a dream ; and learned to shun 
the fond pursuit, where few can reach the purposed aim, and thousands 
are daily undone." 

" Needful austerities our wills restrain, 
As thorns fence in the tender plant from harm." 

Transposed. 

** Needful austerities restrain our wills, as thorns fence in the tender 
plant from harm." 

" Thou hadst been" ? " You shall be Will you give the synoria of desire in 

•aught" 1 " Shall I be punished" ? " He the active voice, with the participles ? 

Eiall have been" ? Of the same in the passive * Of do in tha 

LX'VI. Will you parse the inverted active ? In the passive ? 
sentences? G93, &c. When is a verb called regular? 533. 

In what voice, mood, tense, number and When irregular ? 534. 
person, is " Love thou" ? " I may go" ? Will you repeat the present and imper 

" You may be regarded" ? "You might feet tenses, also the perfect participle 

be rejoiced"? "She may have been re- of am? see? hear? do? weep? sink] 

fused" ? " We should have been" ? " If swim ? 

I have" ? " If thou have" ? " If thou Will you next take the sentences to ba 

hasff ? " To have" ? " To have been" ? written ? 

Will you give the synopis of learn, What are auxiliary verbs ? 511. 
through all the moods, tenses, &c, in the How many and which are they ? 512. 
. Srst person, including the participle ? What are defective vprbs ? 579. 
learn, in like manner, in the passive? What is an adverb? 588. Why ks 

Tfaa verb to be io the same manner ? called ? 228. 



116 ENGLISH GTRAMMAR. 

* On some fond breast the parting soul felies, 
Soi ae pious drops the closing- eye requires* 
E'en from the tomb the voice of nature cries, 
E'en in our ashes live their wonted fires." 

Transposed. 
** The parting" soul relies on some fond breast ; the closing eye requires 
lome pious drops ; the voice of nature cries, even from the tomb ; asad 
ifeeir wonted fires live even in our ashes." 

" From lofty themes, from thoughts that soared on high 
And opened wondrous scenes above the sky, 
My Muse I descend ; indulge my fond desire , 
With softer thoughts my melting soul inspire, 
And smooth my numbers to a female's praise ; 
A partial world will listen to my lays, 
While Anna reigns, and sets a female name 
Unrivalled in the glorious lists of fame." 

Transposed. 

" O my Muse I descend thou from lofty themes, and from thoughts that 
soared on high, and opened wondrous scenes above the sky ; indulge thou 
my fond desire ; and do thou inspire my melting soul with softer thoughts, 
and smooth my numbers to a female's praise ; a partial world will listen 
to my lays, while Anna reigns, and sets a female name unrivalled in the 
glorious lists of fame." 



In what manner are adverts compared? 
236, 234. 

What are the phrases which do the of- 
fice of adverbs called ? 589. 

Will you name a few ? 589, 

What is a preposition ? 595. 

Will you repeat the list of preposi- 
tions? 247. 

What is a conjunction? 602. Con- 
junction copulative ? 265. Why so call- 
ed ? 264. Conjunction disjunctive ? 274. 
Why so called ? 271. 

Will you repeat the list of copulative 
conjunctions? 266. Of disjunctive con- 
junctions? 275. 

What is an interjection? 607. Why 
so called ? 283. Mention a few ? 285. 

What is syntax ? 296. What is a sen- 
tens® ? 252. A simple sentence ? 353. 



What is the rule for the agreement of 
nouus? XV. Articles? II., III. Ad- 
jectives? IV. Pronouns? V. Verbs? 
VII. Participles ? XIII. Agreement of 
a verb plural with two nouns singular ? 
XVIII. Adjective pronouns and numer- 
als ? Note 1. 

What is the nrie by which a verb agrees 
with a noun of multitude, or collective 
noun ? Note XVI. Rule for the objective 
case after a transitive verb ? VIII. 

What is the rule for the objective case 
after a preposition ? X. After a partici- 
ple ? XIV. Rule for the adverb ? IX. 
Eule respecting the interjections Ot ohi 
ah! fee? NoteX. 

Will you parse the sentences marked 
transpofbd f 



GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 



SYNTAX. 

That part of Grammar which treats of the formation and souml 
tf the letters, the combination of letters into syllables, and syllables 
into words, is called Orthography. 

That part which treats of the different sorts of words, their vari- 
ous changes and their derivations, is called Etymology. 

That part which treats of the union and right order of words in 
the formation of sentences, is called Syntax. 

Grammar may be considered as consisting of two species, 
Universal and Particular. Universal Grammar explains the 
principles which are common to all languages. Particular 
Grammar applies those principles to a particular language, •modi- 
fying them according to the genius of that tongue, and the 
established practice of the best writers and speakers by whom it 
is used. 

Language, in the proper sense of the word, signifies the expres- 
sion of our ideas, and their various relations, by certain articulate 
sounds, which are used as the signs of those ideas and relations. 
An articulate sound is the sound of the human voice, formed by the 
organs of speech. 

Letters are the representatives of certain articulate sounds, the 
elements of the language. 

The letters of the English Language, called the English Alphabet, 
are twenty-six in number, each of which constitutes the first prin- 
ciple, or least part of a word. 

Letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 

A vowel is a letter that can be perfectly sounded by itself. The 
rowels are «, e, i, o, w, and sometimes w and y. W and y are con- 
sonants when they begin a word or syllable; but in every otheff 
situation they are vowels. 

A consonant is a letter that cannot be perfectly sounded without 
the aid of a vowel ; as, 6, d, /, I. All letters except the vowela are 
consonants. 

Consonants are divided into mutes and semi-vowels. 
The mutes cannot be sounded at all, without the aid of a vowel 
They are 6, p, t % d % &, and c and g hard. 

(11?) 



118 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

The serai- vowels have an imperfect sound of themselves. They 
are /, I, m, n, r, v, s, z, x, and c and g soft. 

Four of the semi-vowels, namely, I, m, n, r, are called liquids, 
because they readily unite with other consonants, and flow, as it 
were, into their sounds. 

A diphthong is the union of two vowels, pronounced hy a single 
impulse of the voice ; as, oi in voice, ou in ounce. 

A triphthong is the union of three vowels^ pronounced in like 
manner; as, eau in beau, lew in view. 

A proper diphthong is that in which both the vowels are sounded ; 
as, oi in voice, ou in ounce. 

An improper diphthong has but one of the vowels sounded ; as, ta 
In eagle, oa in boat. ♦ 

A Syllable is a sound, either simple or compounded, uttered by 
a single impulse of the voice, and constituting a word or part of a 
word ; as, a, an, ant. 

A word of one syllable is called a Monosyllable ; a word of two 
syllables, a Dissyllable ; a word of three syllables, a Trisyllable ; a 
word of four or more syllables, a Polysyllable. 

Words are articulate sounds, used by common consent as signs of 
our ideas. 

Words are of two sorts, primitive and derivative. 

A primitive word is that which cannot be reduced to a simpler 
word in the language ; as, man^ good. 

A derivative word is that which may be reduced to a simpler 
worrf ; as, manful, goodness. 

The elementary sounds, unde? their smallest combination, produce 
a syllable ; syllables, properly combined, produce a word; words, 
duly combined, produce a sentence; and sentences, properly com- 
bined, produce an oration, or discourse. 

A sentence is an assemblage of words, forming complete sense. 

Sentences are of two kinds, simple and compound. 

A simple sentence has in it but one subject, and one finite* verb ; 
w, " Life is short." 

A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences 
Connected together; as, "Life is shirt, and art is long." 

As sentences themselves are divided into simple and compound, so the 
members of sentences may be divided likewise into simple and compound 
members ; for whole sentences, whether simple or compound, may become 
members of other sentences, by means of some additional connection ; as 
in the following example : *' The ox knoweth his owner, and the ass his 
master's crib ; but Israel doth not know, my people doth not consider." 
This sentence consists of two compounded members, each of which is 
subdivided into two simple members, which are properly called clauses. 

A phrase is two or more words rightly put together, making 
sometimes a part of a sentence, and sometimes a whole sen- 
tence. 

The principal parts of a simple sentence are the subject, the 
attribute, and the object. 

* Finite verbs are those to which number and perton eppertain. Verba in tfet 

^KtSnitivfl mood ba^** **o r&ay&nt to mnwhar and pwriwvn. 



SYNTAX. 119 

The subject is the thing chiefly spoken of, the attribute is the 
losing or action affirmed or denied of it ; and the object is the thing 
affected by such action. 

The nominative case denotes the subject ; and usually goes before 
the verb or attribute ; and the word or phrase denoting the object, 
follows the verb; as, "A wise man governs his passions." Here a 
wise man is the subject ; governs, the attribute or thing affirmed ; 
and his passions , the object. 

Syntax principally consists of two parts, Concord and Govern- 
ment Concord is the agreement which one word has with another 
in gender, number, case, or person. Government is that power 
which one part of speech has over another, in directing its mood, 
tense, or case. 

What is Orthography? Etymology? Syntax? How many kinds of 
grammar are there ? What are they ? What is universal grammar ? Par- 
ticular grammar ? What is language ? What is an articulate sound ? What 
are letters ! What are the letters of the English language called ? What 
does each constitute ? How are letters divided ? What is a vowel ? Which 
are they? How many do they make? When are w and #• consonants ? 
when vowels ? What is a consonant ? Give an example. Which letters are 
consonants f How are the consonants divided ? What is a mute ? Which 
are they ? What is a semi- vowel ? Which are they ? Which of the semi- 
vowels are called liquids, and why ? What is a diphthong ? Give an exam- 
ple. What is a triphthong 1 Give an example. "What is a proper diphthong ? 
Give an example. What is an improper diphthong ? Give an example. 
What is a syllable ? monosyllable ? dissyllable ? trisyllable ? polysyllable ? 
What are words ? Of how many sorts are they f What is a primitive word ? 
Give an example. What is a derivative word ? Give an example, "^hai 
does an elementary sound produce ? What do syllables produce ? Words f 
Sentences ? What is a sentence ? How are sentences divided ? What is a 
simple sentence ? Compound sentence ? Give an example of each. How 
are the members of sentences divided ? Give an example. What "s a phrase t 
What are the principal parts of a simple sentence ? What is the subject? the 
attribute ? the object ? What does the nominative case denote ? and where 
is it usually placed in a sentence ? Give an. example. Of how many parts 
does Syntax consist ? What are they ? What is concord ? Government f 

The right construction of sentences may perhaps be 
best learned by correcting examples of wrong construc- 
tion. Exercises in false syntax for the pupil, assisted by 
rules and notes to parse and correct, will therefore now 
be given. 

The following contain all the notes and observations 
in Murray's large Grammar, together with all his ex- 
ercises in false syntax. 

1ULE VIZ. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE I. 

A verb must agree with its nominative case in number 
and person. 

The following are a few instances of the violation of this rule : " Whm 
flgnifift* &oo^ opinion*, wh<an on? pra/rtic^ ia bad ? ,f " wh»t ti&nif* " 



120 



ENGLISH SRAMMAR. 



" There's two or three of us, who have seen the work;" "there are" 
"We may suppose there was more impostors than one;" "there wen 
more." " I have considered what have been said on both sides in this con- 
troversy ;" " what has been said." "*If thou would be healthy, live tem- 
perately;" "if thou wouldst. 11 "Thou sees how little has been done;" 
" thou seest. 11 " Though thou cannot do much for the cause, thou may and 
should do something ;" " canst not, mayst, and shouldst. 11 " Full many a 
flower are born to blush unseen ;" "is born." "A conformity of inclina- 
tions and qualities prepare us for friendship ;" "prepares us. ' "A variety 
of blessings have been conferred upon us;" " has been." " In piety and 
virtue consist the happiness of man;" "consists. 11 "To these precepts 
are subjoined a copious selection of rules and maxims;" " is subjoined." 

" If thou would be healthy, live temperately." Which word is wrong in 
this example ? In what particular, wrong ? Why ? What is the Rule for 
it ? How, then, would you correct the example ? — " There was more equi- 
vocators." Which word is wrong here ? What correction should be made ? 
Whyf 

$3" The pupil is first to answer the questions on each Rule or Note, then to 
correct and parse the subsequent exercises. It is suggested to the teacher, that 
the pupils shquld direct their attention first to the Rules and exercises under 
them, exclusively, omitting the Notes, (f*c, for a review, when all may be 
taken in course. 



* Disappointments sinks the heart 
of man; but the renewal of 
hope give consolation." 

'The smiles that (1.) encourage 
severity of judgment hides ma- 
^ce and insincerity." 

4 He dare not act (2.) contrary (3.) 
to his instructions." 

'Fifty pounds of wheat contains 
forty pounds of flour." 

4 The mechanism of clocks and 
watches were totally unknown 
(4.) a few centuries ago." (5.) 

4 The number of inhabitants in 
Great Britain and Ireland, do 
not exceed sixteen millions." 

4 Nothing (6.) but vain and fool- 
ish pursuits (7.) delight some 
persons." 

4 A variety of pleasing objects 
charm the eye." 

4 So (8.) much (9.) botn (10.) of 
ability and merit (11.) are sel- 
dom (12.) found." 

*In the conduct of Parmenio a 
mixture of wisdom and folly 
, (11.) were very (8.) conspicu- 
ous." 

*He is an author (13.) of more 



credit than Plutarch, (14.) or 
any other (15.) that (11.) writ 
lives too (12.) hastily." 

4 The inquisitive (16.) and cu- 
rious (11.) is generally talka- 
tive." (17.) 

4 Great pains has been taken to re- 
concile the parties." 

4 The sincere (16.) is always es- 
teemed." 

4 Has the goods been sold to ad- 
vantage ? and did thou embrace 
the proper season ?" 

4 There is many occasions (6.) in 
life, in which silence and sim- 
plicity (11.) is true wisdom." 

4 The generous (16.) never re- 
counts minutely the actions 
they have done; nor the pru- 
dent, (7.) those (15.) they will 
do." 

1 He need not proceed (2.) in such 
haste." 

'The business that (1.) related U 
ecclesiastical meetings, mat- 
ters (11.) and persons, (11.) 
were to be ordered accord- 
ing (18.) to the king's direc 
tion." 



(1.) See 650. (2.) Apply Rule XII. See 480. (3.) Adjective. (4.) &ul» 
XIII. (5.) A few centuries ago— an adverbial phrase, 589 ; or apply Note XVIII., 
64S, to centuries, and Rule IX. to ago. (6.) Rule VI. (7.) Rule XI. (8.) 239. 
(9.) 673. (10.) 661. (11.) Rule XI. (12.) Adverb. (13.) Rule XV. 613 
(14.) " Plutarch ia." (15.) Note I. 405, and Rul« XL '16.) 378. (17.) Rule 
TV. <18„> 847. 



SYNTAX. 



121 



4a him were happily blended 
true dignity with soilness of 
manners." 

"The support of so (1.) many (2.) 
of his relations, were a heavy 
tax (3.) upon his industry; 
but thou knows he paid it 
cheerfully." 

*What (4.) avails the best senti- 
ments (5.) if persons do not 
live suitably to them ?" 

* Not one (6.) of them whom thou 
sees clothed (7.) in purple, are 
completely happy." 

1 And the fame of this person, 
and of his wonderful actions, 
were diffused (8.) throughout 
the country." 

!< The variety of the productions 
of genius, like (9.) that (10.) 
of the operations of nature, are 
without limit." 

4 In vain (11.) our flocks and fields 
increase our store, 



When our abundance makea ua 
wish (V2.) tor more." 

44 Thou shalt love thy neighbour 
as (13.) sincerely as (14.) thou 
loves thyself." 

44 Has thou no better reason for cen- 
suring (15.) thy friend and com 
panion?" (16.) 

"Thou, who art the Author (17.) 
and Bestower (16.) of life, can 
doubtless restore it also ; but 
whether thou will please to re* 
store it, or not, that thou only 
knows." 

44 O thou my voice (18.) inspire, 

Who touched (19.) Isaiah's hallow 
ed lips with fire." 

44 Accept (20.) these grateful tears 
for thee they flow ; 

For thee, that ever felt (21.) an- 
other's; woe." 

44 Just to thy word, in every thought 
sincere ; 

Who knew (22.) no wish but what 
the world might hear." 



1. The infinitive mood, or part of a sentence, is sometimes put as the 
nominative case to the verb ; as, " To see the sun is pleasant ;" " To be 
good is to be happy ;" "A desire to excel others in learning and -virtue is 
commendable ;" " That warm climates should accelerate the growth of 
the human body, and shorten its duration, is very reasonable to believe ;" 
44 To be temperate in eating and drinking, to use exercise in open air, and 
to preserve the mind free from tumultuous emotions, are the best preser- 
vatives of health." 

" To see the sun are pleasant." Which word is wrong in this example I 
In what particular, wrong ? What is pleasant ? What, then, is the nomina- 
tive case to is ? Is there one thing, or more than one, here spoken of, as be- 
ing pleasant ? Why, then, should we use is in preference to are ? What is 
the Rule for is ? (23.) Rule for, " To see," or, 44 To see the sun V (24.) 

$3" When examples are referred to without being quoted, the teacher may 
read them to the pupil. 

44 To be temperate in eating," &c. How many things are here spoken 
of as being the best preservatives ? Should we, then, use the singular os 
plural verb ? Rule for it ? (25.) 



1. 



■ To do unto all men, as we would 
that they, in similar circumstan- 
ces, should go unto us, constitute 
the great principle of virtue." 

61 From a fear of the world's cen- 



sure, to be ashamed (24.) of the 
practice of precepts, which the 
heart approves and embraces, 
mark a feeble and imperfect 
character." 



(!.},239. (2.) 378. (3.) Rule XV. 633. (4.) Rule VIII. (5.) Rule VI. 

(6.) Note I, 405, and Rule VI. (7.) Rule XIII. (8.) 510. (9.) Rule IV 

(10.) " that variety"— Note I. 405, and Rule X. See Note XVII. 647. (11.) Ad- 

verbial phrase. (12.) Rule XII. 555. See 480. (13.) Adverb. (14.) Con- 

Junction. (15.) Participial noun. (16.) Rule XI. (17.) Rule XV. 613. 

(18.) Kule VIII. (19.) "Who Uuchedst or didst touch." (20.) "AccepS 

thou 1 — imp. mood. (21.) " didst feel." (22.) " Who knewest or didst know." 

(83.) RuJ« VIL (84.) Note XIII. 626. or. Note 1. th\a &>»£«. (2JD Bui* XVltt 

U 



122 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



" The erroneous* opinions which 
we form concerning- (1.) hap- 
piness and misery gives rise 
to all the mistaken (2.) and 
dangerous passions that em. 
broils our life." 
To live soberly, righteously, and 
piously t are required of all . 
men." 
That (3.) it is our duty to pro- 
mote the purity of our minds 
and bodies, to be just (4.) and 
kind to our fellow-creatures, 
and to be pious and faithful to 
Him that mada us, admit not 
of any doubt in a rational and 
well (5.) informed mind." 

B To be of a pure and humble 
mind, to exercise benevolence 
towards others, to cultivate 
piety towards God, is the sure 
means (6.) of becoming peace- 
ful and happy." 

* It is an important truth, that re- 
ligion, vital religion, the re- 
ligion of the heart, are the most 



powerful auxiliaries of re&exm, 
) in waging war with the pas 
sions, and promoting that sweei 
composure which constitute the 
peace of God." 

"The possession of our senses 
entire, of our limbs uninjured, 
of a sound understanding, of 
friends and companions, are 
often overlooked ; though it 
would he the ultimate wish (6.) 
of many, who, as far as we can 
judge, deserves it as much as 
ourselves." 

" All (7.) that make a figure on the 
great theatre of the world, the 
employments of the busy, the 
enterprises of the ambitious, 
and the exploits of the warlike ; 
the virtues which forms the 
happiness, and the crimes which 
occasions the misery of man- 
kind;, originates in that silent 
and secret recess of thought, 
which are hidden from every 
human eye." 



2. Every verb, except in the infinitive mood, or the participle, ought to 
Vave a nominative case, either expressed or implied ; as, " Awake ; arise ;' 
that is, " Awake ye ; arise ye." 

We shall here add some examples of inaccuracy, in the use of the verb 
without its nominative case. " As it hath pleased him of his goodness to 
give you safe deliverance, and hath preserved you in the great danger," &c. 
The verb hath preserved has here no nominative case, for it cannot be pro- 
perly supplied by the preceding word, Am, which is in the objective case 
It ought to be, "and as he hath preserved you ;" or rather, " and to pre- 
serve you." " If the calm in which he was born, and lasted so long, had 
continued;" '■ and which lasted," &c. " These we have extracted from 
an historian of undoubted credit, and are the same that were practised," 
&c. ; " and they are the same." " A man whose inclinations led him to 
be corrupt, and had great abilities to manage the business ;" " and who had," 
&e. " A cloud gathering in the north ; which we have helped to raise, and 
may quickly break in a storm upon our heads ;" " and which may quickly." 

"As it hath pleased," &c. What correction should be made in this 
example ? Why ? Recite the Note. s 



* If the privileges to which he has 

an undoubted right, and he has 
long enjoyed, should how be 
wrested from him, (8.) would 
be flagrant injustice." 

* These curiosities we have im- 

ported from China, and are 



imilar to those which were 

some time ago brought fiora 

Africa." 
"Will martial flames forever fire 

thy mind, 
And never, never (9.) be to Leaven 

resigned ?" 



(1,1 Preposition. 
Rule IV. (5.) 

(ft.) '* it WMJLd" 



(2.) Rule XIII. (3.) Conjunction. (4.) "just person*. 1 * 
Adverb. (6.) Rule XV. (7.) Notfl I. 405. R»le Vt 

($.) " Jfnd wilt tkoit «m*r h*?" 



SYNTAX. 123 

3. Every nominative case, except the case absolute, and when an aadresa 
is made to a person, should belong to some verb, either expressed or im- 
plied; as, "Who wrote this book?" "James;" that is, "James wrote 
it." " To whom thus Adam," that is, " spoke." 

One or two instances of the improper use of the nominative case, without 
any verb, expressed or implied, to answer it, may be sufficient to illustrate 
the usefulness of the preceding observations. 

" Which rule, if it had been observed *j neighboring prince would havs 
wanted a great deal of that incense which had been offered up to him." The 
pronoun it is here the nominative case to the verb observed ; and which rule 
is left by itself, a nominative case without any verb following it. This form 
of expression, though improper, is very common. It ought to be, " If this 
rule had been observed," &c. " Man, though he has great variety of 
thoughts, and such from which others as well as himself might receive pro- 
fit and delight, yet they are all within his own breast." In this sentence, 
the nominative man stands alone, and unconnected with any verb, either 
expressed or implied. It should be, " Though man has great variety," &c» 

11 Which rule, if it," &c. What is the nominative case to observed? Hag 
the noun rule any verb following it, to which it may be the nominative case ? 
Is this form of expression much used ? Is it not proper ? What correction 
should be made ? Why ? Recite the Note. 

3. 

"(1.) Two substantives, when they "Virtue, however it may be neg- 

come together, and do not lected for a time, men are so 

signify the same thing, the constituted as ultimately to ac- 

former (2.) must be in the knowledge and respect genuine 

genitive case." merit. 1 * 

4. When a verb comes between two nouns, either of which may be under- 
stood as the subject of the affirmation, it may agree with either of them ; 
but some regard must be had to that which is more naturally the subject of it, 
as also to tfiat which stands next to the verb ; as, " His meat was locusts 
and wild honey ;" "A great cause of the low state of industry were the 
restraints put upon it;" " The wages of sin is death." 

" The wages of sin is death," or, ^Death is the wages of sin." What 
is the nominative case to is ? Is this nominative, in the first example, before 
or after is ? What is the rule for wages ? (3.) Recite the Note. What do 
you mean by the subject of the affirmation ? (4.) 

4. 

" The crown of virtue is peace and " His chief occupation and enjoy- 
honor." ment were controversy." 

5. When the nominative case has no personal tense of a verb, but is put 
before a participle, independently on the rest of the sentence, it is called the 
case absolute ; as, " Shame being lost, all virtue is lost;" " That having 
been discussed long ago, there is no occasion to resume it." 

As, in the use of the case absolute, the case is, in English, always the 
nominative, the following example is erroneous, in making it the objective. 
" Solomon was of this mind ; and I have no doubt he made as wise and true 
proverbs, as any body has done since ; him only excepted, who was a much 
greater and wiser man than Solomon." It should be, "he only excepted." 

What is the rule for the case absolute ? (5.) " He only excepted." Which 
word is wrong in this example ? In what particular, wrong ? What correc- 
tion should be made ? 

(1.) " When two substantives eome together." (2.) w the first of them." 

'*.) Hul« YV. mx (I,) Tto nomination •■*». (5-> Fu!« "JTVH. 683 



1£4 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

5. 

— « Him destroyed, All this (2.) will soon follow/' 

Or won to what (1.) may work "Whose gray top 

his utter loss, Shall tremble, him descending." 

The nominative ease is commonly placed before the verb ; but sometii^es 
it is put after the verb, if it is a simple tense ; and between the auxiliary and 
the verb or participle, if a compound tense; as, 

1st. When a question is asked, a command given, or a wish expressed ; 
as, " Confidest thou in me ?" " Read thou !" " Mayst thou be happy !" 
" Long li\3 the king l M 

2d. When a supposition is made without the conjunction if; as, " Were 
it not for this ;" " Had I been there." 

3d. When a verb transitive is used; as, "On a sudden appeared the 
king." 

4th. When the verb is preceded by the adverbs here, there, then, thence, 
hence, thus, &c. ; as, "Here am I;" " There was he slain;" "Then 
cometh the end;" "Thence ariseth his grief;" "Hence proceeds hii 
anger;" " Thus was the affair settled." 

5th. When a sentence depends on neither or nor, so as to be coupled with 
another sentence ; as, " Ye shall not eat of it, neither shall ye touch it, lest 
ye die." 

Some grammarians assert, the phrases as follows, as appears, form what 
are called impersonal verbs ; and should, therefore, be confined to the sin- 
gular number; as, "The arguments advanced were nearly as follows ;" 
" The positions were *« appears incontrovertible ;" that is, " as it follows," 
"as it appears." If we give (say they) the sentence a different turn, and, 
kistead of as, say such as, the verb is no longer termed impersonal ; but 
properly agrees with its nominative, in the plural number ; as, " The argu- 
ments advanced were nearly such as follow ;" " The positions were such 
as appear uncontrovertible."* 

They who doubt the accuracy of Home Tooke's statement, " That as, 
however and whenever used in English, means the same as it, or that, or 
which;" and who are not satisfied whether the verbs, in the sentence first 
mentioned, should be in the singular or the plural number, may vary the 
form of expression. Thus, the sense of the preceding sentences may be 
conveyed in the following terms i-a*' The arguments advanced were nearl? 
of the following nature i" " The following are nearly the arguments which 
were advanced;" "The arguments advanced were nearly those which 
follow;" "It appears that the positions were incontrovertible;" "That 
the positions were incontrovertible is apparent;" " The positions were in- 
controvertible is apparent;" "The positions were apparently incontro 
vertible." 

Where is the nominative case usually placed ? Mention a few instances 
in which the nominative follows the verb. What do some grammarians say 
of the phrases as follows, as appears ? What is Dr. Campbell's opinion con- 
earning them ? 

(1.) " that which:' 437. (2.) Note I. 405, 

* These grammarians are supported by general usage, and by the authority of as 
eminent critic on language andLcomposition. " When a verb is used impersonally,*' 
Bays Dr. Campbell, in his Philosophy of Rhetoric, " it ought undoubtedly to be in the 
singular number, whether the neuter pronoun be expressed or understood." For this 
reason, analogy and usage, favor this mode of expression ; " The conditions of ths 
Agreement were as follows " and not " as follow:'' A few late writers have incon- 
siderately adopted this last form, through a mistake of the construction. For ths 
sarae reason, we ought to say, " I shall consider his censure? so far oiOf «* sondes na 
my friend's conduct," and not " bo far as cortcsm" 



SYNTAX. 125 

AVXiB XVIII. 

Corresponding with Murray's Gramma V 
RULE II. 

Two or more nouns or pronouns of the singmar number* 
connected together by and, either expressed or under- 
stood, must have verbs, nouns and pronouns agreeing 
with them in the plural number. 

This rule is often violated ; some instances of which are annexed. " And 
&;> was also James and John, the sons of Zebedee, who were partners with 
Simon ;" " and so were also." " Ail joy, tranquillity and peace, even for 
ever and ever, doth dwell;" "dwell for ever." "By whose power all 
good and evil is distributed ;" " are distributed." " Their love, and their 
natred, and their envy, is now perished ;" " are perished." " The thought- 
less and intemperate enjoyment of pleasure, the criminal abuse of it, and 
the forgetfulness of our being accountable creatures, obliterates every seri- 
ous thought of the proper business of life, and effaces the sense of religion 
and of God;" it ought to be, "obliterate' 1 and "efface. 17 

" All joy, tranquillity, &c, doth dwell." Which word is wrong in this 
example ? In what particular, wrong ? What correction, then, shouid be 
made ? Why ? Recite the Rule. 

"Idleness and ignorance is the "The planetary system, boundless 
parent of many vices." space, and the immense ocean, 

* Wisdom, virtue, happiness, dwells affects the mind with sensations 

with the golden mediocrity." of astonishment." 

" In unity consists the welfare and " Humility and love, whatever (3.) 

security of every society." obscurities may involve religi- 

* Time and tide waits for no man." ous tenets, constitutes the 
u His politeness and good disposi- essence of true religion." 

tion was, on failure of their " Religion and virtue, our best sup- 

effect, entirely changed." port (4.) and highest honour, 

"Patience and diligence, lika (1.) confers on the mind principles 

faith, (2.) removes moun- of noble independence." 

tains." , "What (5.) signifies the counsel 

"Humility and knowledge, with and care of preceptors, when 

poor apparel, excels pride and youth think they have no (6.) 

ignorance under costly attire." need of assistance ?" 

1. When the nouns are nearly related, or scarcely distinguishable in 
sense, and sometimes even when they are very different, some authors 
have thought it allowable to put the verbs, nouns and pronouns in the sin- 
gular number; as, " Tranquillity and peace dwells there;" "Ignorancs 
and negligence has produced the effect ;" " The discomfiture and slaughter 
was very great." But it is evidently contrary to the first principles of 
grammar, to consider two distinct ideas as one, however nice may be theii 
shades of difference ; and if there be no difference, one of them must be 
superfluous, and ought to be rejected. 

To support the above construction, it is said, that the verb may be under 
stood as applied to each of the preceding terms ; as in the following exam- 
ple : "Sand, and salt, and a mass of iron, is easier to bear than a map 
without understanding." But besides the confusion, and the latitude of 

(1.) Adverb. (2.) Rule X. See Note XVII. 047. (3.) Note I. 405. 

U«) Rule XV. (5, x Rule VIII. (6.) S3*. 

11* 



126 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

application, which such a construction won id introduce, it appears to ba 
more proper and analogical, in cases where the verb is intended to be ap 
plied to any one of the terms, to make use of the disjunctive conjunction, 
which grammatically refers the verb to one or other of the preceding terms^ 
in a separate view. To preserve the distinctive uses of the copulative and 
disjunctive conjunctions, would render the rules precise, consistent and 
intelligible. Dr. Blair very justly observes, that "two or more substan- 
tives, joined by a copulative, must always require the verb or pronoun to 
which they refer, to be placed in the plural number." 

" Tranquillity and peace dwells there." What dwells ? Is it not, then, g 
violation of Rule XVIII. to use dwells in the singular number ? When do 
gome writers think it allowable to put the verbs, nouns and pronouns in the 
singular number ? Is this usage grammatical ? In what does the incorrect- 
ness consist? If there be no difference in the meaning of terms, are both 
necessary ? What ou^ht to be done with the superfluous one ? How do 
some attempt to support the above construction I How would they read, on 
this principle, the example beginning with, " Sand, and salt, and a mass of 
iron, is easier," &c. ? (1.) In examples like the last, what conjunction can 
we substitute in the place of and, which will better express the sense ? 
What does Dr. Blair say on this subject ? 

1. 

a Much does human pride and self- " Prido and self-sufficiency stifles 

complacency require correction.'* sentiments of dependence on 

"Luxurious living, and high plea- our Creator; levity and at- 

sures, begets a languor and tachment to worldly pleasures 

satiety that destroys all enjoy- destroys the sense of gratitude? 

merit." to him." 

2. In many complex sentences, it is difficult for learners to determine, 
whether one or more of the clauses are to be considered as the nominative 
case ; and, consequently, whether the verb should be in the singular or the 
plural number. We shall, therefore, set down a number of varied exam- 
ples of this nature, which may serve as some government to the scholar 
with respect to sentences of a similar construction. "Prosperity, with 
humility, renders its possessor truly amiable." "The ship, with all he? 
furniture, was destroyed." "Not only his estate, nis reputation too has 
suffered by his misconduct." " The general, also, in conjunction with the 
officers, has applied for redress." " He cannot be justified ; for it is true, 
that the prince, as well as the people, was blameworthy." " The king, 
with his life guard, has just passed through the village." " In the mutual 
influence of body and soul, there is a wisdom, a wonderful wisdom, which 
we cannot fathom." " Virtue, honour, nay, even self-interest, conspire to 
recommend the measure." " Patriotism, morality, every public and pri- 
vate consideration, demand our submission to just and lawful government." 
" Nothing delights me so much as the works of nature." 

In support of such forms of expression as the following, we see the 
authority of Hume, Priestley, and other writers ; and we annex them for 
the reader's consideration: "A long course of time, with a variety of 
accidents and circumstances, arc requisite to produce those revolutions." 
" The king, with the lords and commono, form an excellent frame of 
government." "The side A, with the sides B and C, compose the tri- 
angle." i: The fire communicated itself to the bed, which, with the rami 
ture of the room, and a valuable library, were all entirely consumed." It 
is, however, proper to observe, that these modes of expression do not 
appear to be warranted by the just principles of construction. The words, 
" A long course of time," " The king," " The side A," and "which," 
are the tme nominatives to the respective verbs. In the last example, 
the word all should be expunged. As the preposition with governs the 
abjective cs.se in English, ana, if translated into Latin, would govern 

. h) " S&ad is easier, and salt is easier and a mass of iron U easier," k&. 



SYNTAX. 127 

she ablative case, it is manifest, that the clauses following with, in the pre- 
ceding sentences, cannot form any part of the nominative case. They can- 
not be at the same time in the objective and the nominative cases. The 
following sentence appears to be unexceptionable, and may serve to explain 
the others: " The lords and commons are essential branches of the British 
constitution : the king, with them, forms an excellent frame of govern- 
ment." 

" The side A, with the sides B and C, compose the triangle.". In this sen- 
tence, what is the nominative case to compose ? Should the verb, then, be 
singular or plural ? What difficulty is mentioned in the beginning of this 
Note? 

2. 
Good order in our affairs, not virtue is wanting, have a very 

mean savings, produce great limited influence, and are often 



profits." 

* The following treatise, together " That superficial scholar and critic s 

with those that accompany it, like some renewed critics of our 

were written many years ago, own, have (2.) furnished most 

for my own private satisfac- decisive proofs that they (3.) 

tion." knew not the characters of this 

** That great senator, in concert Hebrew language." 

with several other eminent per- " The buildings of the institution, 

sons, were the projectors (1.) of have been enlarged ; the ex- 

' the revolution." pense of which, added (4.) to 

14 The religion of these people, as the increased price of pro- 
well as their customs and visions, render it necessary to 
manners, were strangely mis- advance the terms of admis- 
represented." sibn." 

•Virtue, joined to knowledge and "One, added to nineteen, make 

wealth, confer great influence twenty." 

and respectability. But know- "What (5.) black despair, what 

ledge, with wealth united, if horror, fills the mind I" 

3. X£ the singular nouns and pronouns, which are joined together by a 
copulative conjunction, be of several persons, in making the pluraJ pronouns 
agree with them in person, the second person takes place of the third, and 
the first of both ; as, " James, and thou, and 1, are attached to our coun- 
try ;" " Thou and he shared it between you. 11 

" James, and thou, and I, am attached to our country." What is wrong 
m this example ? In what particular, wrong ? What correction should be 
made ? Why ? " Thou and he shared it between him." Will you correct 
this example ? Why use you instead of him '( Will you repeat the Note ? 

3. 

" Thou, and the gardener, and the " My sister and I, as well as my 
huntsman, must share the brother, are daily employed 

blame of this business amongst in their respective oeeupa* 

them" tiens." 

* Though the construction will not admit of a plura! verb, the sentence wouU 
certainly stand better thus : " The king, the lords, and the commons, form an ex« 
salient constitution." 
(1.) Rule XV. 613. (2.) 632. Exception 1. (3.) " h$ huru n 

(4.) Eule XIII. 557. >5.) m. # 

/ 



128 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Corresponding with Murray's Gframraar, 
RULE III. 

The ccnjunction disjunctive has an effect contrary to thai 
of the conjunction copulative ; for as the verb, noun 
or pronoun, is referred to the preceding terms taken 
separately, it must he in the singular number; as 9 
"Ignorance or negligence has caused this mistake f 
" John, James, or Joseph, intends to accompany me ;" 
"There is, in many minds, neither knowledge nor 
understanding. 

The following sentences are variations from this rale : "A man may see 
& metaphor or an allegory in a picture, as well as read them in a descrip- 
tion ;" " read it. 11 " Neither character nor dialogue were yet understood ;" 
" was yet." " It must indeed be confessed, that a lampoon or a satire do 
not carry in them robbery or murder ;" " does not carry in it. 11 " Death, 
or some worse misfortune, soon divide them;" it ought to be, "divides" 

" Neither character nor dialogue were yet understood." What is wrong 
in this example ? Why ? Will you correct it ? What is the Rule for this 
correction ? 

" Man's happiness or misery are, in " When sickness, infirmity, or re- 

a great measure, put into his verse of fortune affect us, the 

own hands." . sincerity of friendship is prov- 

1 Man is not such a machine as a ed." 

clock or a watch, which move "Let (1.) it be remembered, (2.) 

merely as they are moved?" that (3.) it is not, the uttering, 

44 Despise no infirmity of mind or or the hearing of certain words 5 

body, nor any condition of life ; that constitute the worship of 

for they are, perhaps, to be your the Almighty." 

own lot." " A tart reply, a proneness to re- 

" Speaking impatiently to servants, buke, or a captious and Con- 
or anything that betrays inat- tradictious spirit, are capable 
tention or ill-humour, are cer- of imbittering (4.) domestic life, 
tainly.criminal." (5.) and of setting friends ai 

M There are many faults in spelling, variance." 
which neither analogy nor pro- 
nunciation justify." 

x. When singular pronouns, or a noun and pronoun of different persons, 
are disjunctively connected, the verb must agree with that person which is 
placed nearest to it; as, "I or thou art to blame;" "Thou or 1 am in 
feult ;' "I, thou, or he, is the author of it ;" " George or I am the per- 
son." But it would be better to say, "Either I am to blame, or thou 
trt," &c. 

" I or thou am to blame." How should this be altered? What is the 
Rale for it ? 

1. 

* Either (6.) thou or I art greatly " I or thou am the person (7.) who 
mistaken, in our judgment on must undertake the business 

the subject" proposed." 

(1.) Imperative mood, agreeing with thou or you understood, by Rule VI. 
(2=; Infinitive, 489. (3.) Conjunction. (4.) Rule X. <5.) Sale XIV. 5Sa 
(6.) 659, (7. > Rule XV. 613. 



SYNTAX. 129 

S. When a disjunctive occurs between a singular noun, or pronoun, and 
i plural one, the verb is made to agree with the plural noun and pronoun, 
as " Neither poverty nor riches were injurious <to him ;" '* I or they were 
offended by it." But in this case, the plural noun or pronoun, when it can 
conveniently be done, should be placed next to ihe verb. 

" I or they was offended." What is wrong in this example ? What is 
the Rule for the correction ? 

2. 

r Both (1.) of the scholars, or one of "Whether one person or more w&s 

them at least, was present at concerned in the business, does 

the transaction." not appear." 

4 Some parts of the ship and cargo "The cares of this life, or the de- 
were recovered ; but neither (2.) ceitfulness of riches,, has choked 
the sailors nor the captain was the seeds of virtue m many s 
saved." promising (3.) mind." 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar. 
RULE IV. 

& verb in the plural will agree with a collective noun if, 
the singular, when a part only of the individuals ar 
meant; as, "The council were divided in their sen 
timents." When the noun expresses the idea, of unity 
the verb should be singular; as, "The council was 
composed wholly of farmers." 

We ought to consider whether the term will immediately suggest the idea 
of the number it represents, or whether it exhibits to the mind the idea of 
the whole, as one thing. In the former case, the verb ought to be plural ; 
m the latter, it ought to be singular. Thus, it seems improper to say, " The 
peasantry goes barefoot, and the middle sort makes use of wooden shoes." 
It would be better to say, " The peasantry go barefoot, and the middle sort 
make use," &c, because the idea, in both these cases, is that of a number. 
On the contrary, there is a harshness in the following sentences, in which 
nouns of number have verbs plural, because the ideas they represent seem 
not to be sufficiently divided in the mind: "The court of Rome were not 
without solicitude." "The house of commons were of small weight." 
44 The house of lords were so much influenced by these reasons." " Ste- 
phen's party were entirely broken up by the captivity of their leader." "An 
army of twGirtv-four thousand were assembled." . " What reason have the 
church of Romo for proceeding in this manner ?" " There is indeed no con- 
stitution so tame and careless of their own defence." — " All the virtues of 
mankind are to be counted upon a few fingers, but his follies and vices ar© 
innumerable." Is not mankind, in this place, a noun of multitude, ajjj 
such as requires the pronoun referring to be in the plural number, their t 

" The peasantry goes barefoot," &c. What correction is necessary m 
\his example ? Why ? 

*The people rejoices in that "The court have just ended, aftev 

which should give it sor- having sat through the triaJ 

row." of a very long cause." 

'The flock, and not the fleece, "The crowd were so great, thaS 

are, or ought to be, the ob- the judges with difficulty made 

jects of the shepherd's care." their way through them." 

fi.) «tt rg.i goitfuaetiWn wbn followed bv wf. a) Rule XIXSl 



ISO 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



*The corporation of York consist 
of a mayor, aldermen, and a 
common council." 

* The British parliament are com- 

posed of king", lords and com- 
mons." 

* When the nation complain, the 

rulers should listen to their 
voice." 
16 In the days of youth, the multi- 
tude eagerly pursues pleasure 
as its chief good." 

* The church have no power to in- 

flict corporal punishment." 

*The fleet were seen mailing (I.) 
up the channel." 

*The regiment consist of a thou- 
sand (2.) men." 

'The meeting have established 
several salutary regulations." 

4 The council was not unanimous, 
and it separated without com- 
ing (3.) to any determina- 
tion." 

* The fleet is all arrived and moored 

(4.) in safety." 



4 This people drawetn near to mo 
with their mouth, and honoreth 
me with their lips, but their 
heart is far from me." 

4 The committeeman divided in it* 
sentiments, and it has referred 
the business to the general 
meeting." 

4 The committee were very full 
when this point was decided; 
and their judgment has not 
been called in question." 

4 Why (6.) do this generation wish 
for greater evidence, when so. 
much (5.) is already given ?" 

4 The remnant of the people were 
persecuted with great severi- 
ty." 

4 Never were any people bo (6.) 
much (6.) infatuated (7.) as the 
Jewish nation." 

4 The shoal of herrings were of an 
immense extent." 

4 No society are changeable with the 
disapproved (8.) misconduct of 
particular members." 



Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 

RULE V. 

Pronouns must agree with the nouns for which they stand, 
in gender, number and person. 

Of this rule there are many violations to be. met with ; a few of which 
may be sufficient to put the learner on his guard. "Each of the sexes should 
keep within its particular bounds, and content themselves with the advantages 
of their particular districts :" better thus ; " The sexes should keep within 
their particular bounds," &c. " Can any one, on their entrance into the 
world, be fully secure that they shall not be deceived ?" "on his entrance," 
and " that he shaft." 44 One should not think too favorably of ourselves ;" 
"of one 1 s self." " He Tiad one acquaintance which poisoned his principles ; ' ' 
" who poisoned." 

Every relative must have an antecedent to which it refers, either "ex- 
pressed or implied ; as, " Who is fatal to others, is so to himself;" that is, 
" the man who is fatal to others." 

Who, which, what, and the relative that, though in the objective case, are 
always placed before the verb ; as are also their compounds, whoever, who- 
soever, &c. ; as, "He whom ye seek ;" " This is what, or the thing which, 
or that you want;" " Whomsoever you please to appoint." 

What is sometimes applied in a manner which appears to be exceptiona- 
ble ; as, " All fevers, except what are called nervous," &c. It would at 
least be better to say, " except those which are called nervous." 

" One should not think too favorably of ourselves." How should this 
contence be altered ? What is the Rule for it ? Are the relatives placed bo- 
fore or after the verb ? 



(1.) Rule XIII. 
?&) Adverb 



(2.) Note I. 405. (3.) 561.- 

17,) " u?«r* infatuated," 



(4.) Euie XI. 
(S.) Rn)« XIII. 



(5.) STSL 



! Y N T A A 



131 



w Ths exercise of reason appears as 
(1.) little (2.) in these sports- 
men, as in the beasts whom, they 
sometimes hunt, and by whom 
they are sometimes hunted." 

"They which seek Wisdom will 
certainly find Aer." 

" The male amongst birds seems to 
discover no beauty, but in the 
color of its species." 

,a Take handfuls of ashes of the 
furnace, and let Moses sprinkle 
it towards heaven, in the sight 
of Pharaoh ; and it shall be- 
come small dust." 

M Rebecca took goodly raiment, 
which were with her in the 
house, and put them upon 
Jacob." 

M The wheel killed another man, 
which is the sixth which have 
lost their lives by this means." 

44 The fair sex, whose task is not 
to mingle in the labors of pub- 
lic life, has its own part assign 
ed it to act." 

"The Hercules man-of-war foun- 
dered at sea; she overset, and 
lost most (3.) of her men." 

w The mind of man cannot be long 
without some food to nourish 
the activity of his thoughts." 



" What is the reason txmt our Ian* 
guagc is less refined than 
those of Italy, Spain, oi 
France ?" 

" I do not think any one should 
incur censure for being (4.) 
tender (5.) of their reputa- 
tion." 

" Thou who hast been a witness 
(6.) of the fact, 3an give an 
account of it." 

" In religious concerns, or what 
(7.) is conceived to be such, 
(8.) every man must stand or 
fall by the decision of the great 
Judge." 

«* Something like (9.) what (10.) 
have been here premised, are 
the conjectures of Dryden." 

"Thou great First Cause, (11.) 
least understood ! (12.) 
Who all my sense confined, (13.) 

To know but this, that fihou art 
good, 
And that*myse!f (11.) am blind, 1 

Yet gave (14.) me in this dark 
estate," &c. 

"What (6.) art thou, (11.) speak, 
that, (15.) on designs un- 
known, (16.) 

While others sleep, thus range (17.) 
the camp alone ?" 



1. Personal pronouns, being used to supply the place of the noun, are 
not employed in the same part of a sentence as thG^noun which they repre- 
sent ; for it would be improper to say, " The kin** he is : ust ;" "I saw her 
the queen;" "The men they were there;" "Many words they darken 
speech;" "My banks they are furnished with bees." These personals 
are superfluous, as there is not the least occasion for a substitute in the 
same part where the principal word is present. The nominative case they t 
in the following sentence, is also superfluous: "Who, instead of going 
about doing good, they are perpetually intent upon doing mischief." 

" The king he is just." Will you correct this sentence, and tell why it 
is wrong ? 



1. 



"Whoever (18.) entertains such 
an opinion, he judges errone- 
ously." 

m The cares of this world, they 



often choke the growth of vir- 
tue." 
" Disappointments and afflictions, 
however disagreeable, they otlen 
improve us." 



2. The pronoun that is frequently applied to persons as well as to things ; 
but after an adjective in the superlative degree, and after the pronominal 



(1.) Rule IX. (2.) Adverb. ' (3. N 676. (4.) 561. (5.) Rule IV. 

i'6.) Rule XV. (7.) '« those which:' 437. (8.) " such concerns," Rule IV. 

g.) Rule IV. (10.) Rule VI. and X. Note XVII. (11.) Rule XV. (12.) Euit 
•Kill. (13.) " confinedst." (14.) " gavest." (15 ) Conjunction, 

f!6.) Rule XIII. (17.) " dest range," (18.) " W« who." 



132 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

adjective same, it is generally used in preference to who or which; m, 
" Charles Xll. king of. Sweden, was one of the greatest madmen that the 
world ever saw ;" " Catiline's followers were the most profligate that could 
be found in any city •" " He is the same man that we saw belore." There 
are cases wherein we cannot conveniently dispense with this relative as 
applied to persons : as, first, after who, the interrogative ; " Who, that has 
any sense of religion, would have argued thus ?" Secondly, when persons 
make but a part of the antecedent; "The woman, and the estate, that 
became his portion, were too much for his moderation." In neither ol 
these examples could any other relative have been used. 

To what is the pronoun that applied ? and when is it used in preference 
to who or which ? (416. 1, 2, 3- 4, 5 ) Give an example. 

2. 

H Moses was the meekest man "They are the same persons wh& 

whom we read of in the Old assisted us yesterday." 

Testament." « The men and things which he has 

a Humility is one of the most ami- studied, have not improved his 

able virtues which we can pos- morals." 
sess." 

3. The pronouns whichsoever, whosoever, and the like, are elegantly 
divided by the interposition of the corresponding substantives : thus, " On 
whichsoever side the king cast his eyes," would have sounded better, if 
written, " On which side soever," &c. 

Will you give an example in which the compound pronoun whichsoever 
may be divided with propriety ? 

X 

* Howsoever beautiful they appear, contemplated, they appear to 

they have no real merit." advantage." 

" In whatsoever light we view " However much he might despise 

him, his conduct will bear in- the maxims of the king's ad- 

spection." ministration, he kept a total 

w On whichsoever side they are silence on that subject." 

4. Many persons are apt, in conversation, to put the objective case of the 
personal psonouns, in the place of these and those ; as, " Give me them 
books," instead of " those books." We may sometimes find this fault 
even in writing; as, " Observe them three there." We also frequently 
meet with those instead of they, at the beginning of a sentence, and where 
there is no particular reference to an antecedent; as, " Those that sow in 
tears, sometimes reap in joy ;" " They that, or they who sow in tears." 

It is not, however, always easy to say, whether a personal pronoun or a 
demonstrative is preferable, in certain constructions. " We are not unac- 
quainted with the calumny of them [or those] who openly make use of the 
warmest professions." 

Give me them books." Why is this sentence incorrect ? 

4. 

* Which of them two persons has injuries, than those (2.) that 

most distinguished himself?" are most (3.) forward in doing 

M None (1.) more impatiently suffer (4.) them. (5.) 

5. In some dialects, the word what is improperly used for that, and some- * 
fimec we find it in this sense in writing ; " They will never believe but what 1 
have been entirely to blame." " I am not satisfied but what," &c, instead of 

" but that" The word somewhat, in the following sentence, seems to be used 
improperly : " These punishments seem to have been exercised in somewhat 



fj ) Rul* VI f9J ■ Vcitf I. 4G5. t'3J S77. (4.) 551. £5.) Ruli SFV 



SYNTAX. 133 

an arbitrary manner." Sometimes we read, "In somewhat of." The 
meaning is, " in a manner which is, in some respects, arbitrary." 
Will you give an example of the improper use of what instead of that 1 

5: 

M He would not be persuaded but "These commendations of his 
what (1.) I was greatly in children appear to have been 

fault. made in somewhat (2.) an in- 

judicious manner. 

6. The pronoun relative who is so much appropriated to persons, that there 
is generally harshness in the application of it, except to the proper names of 
persons, or the general terms man, woman, &c. A term which only implies 
the idea of persons, and expresses them by some circumstance or epithet, -will 
hardly authorize the use of it ; as, " That the faction in England who most 
powerfully opposed his arbitrary pretensions." " That faction which" would 
have been better ; and the same remark will serve for the following examples : 
" France, who was in alliance with Sweden." " The court who," &c. " Thi 
cavalry who," &c. " The cities who aspired at liberty." " That party 
among us who," &c. " The family whom they consider as usurpers." 

In some cases, it may be doubtful, whether this pronoun is properly aj> 
* plied or not ; as, " The number of substantial inhabitants with whom som« 
cities abound." For when a term directly and necessarily implies persons, 
it may in many cases claim the personal relative. " None of the company 
whom he most affected could 'cure him of the melancholy under which he 
labored." The word acquaintance may have the same construction. 
How is the relative who used ? 

6. 
" He instructed and fed the " He was the ablest minister which 
crowds who (3.) surrounded James ever possessed." 

him." "The court, who gives currency 

w Sidney was one of the wisest and to manners, ought to • be ex* 

most active governors, which emplary." (4.) 

Ireland had enjoyed for several " I am happy in the friend which I 
years." , have long proved." 

7. We hardly consider little children as persons, because that term gives 
us the idea of reason and reflection; and, therefore, the application 01 the 
personal relative who, in this case, seems to be harsh: " A child who." It 
is still more improperly applied to animals: " A lake frequented by that 
fowl whom nature has taug^ft to dip the wing in water." 

Do we say, " A child who," or " A child which" ? Will you repeat the 
Note for this ? 

7. 
M The child whom we have just " He is like (4.) a oeast (5.) of 
seen, is wholesomely fed, and prey, who destroys without 

not injured by bandages or pity." 

clothing." 

8. When the name of a person is used merely as a name, and it does not 
refer to the person, the pronoun who ought not to be applied. "It is no 
wonder if such a man did not shine at the court of queen Elizabeth, wha 
was but another name for prudence and economy." Better thus : " whose 
name was but another word for prudence," &c. The word whose begins 

w likewise- to be restricted to persons ; yet it is not done so generally, but that 
good writers, even in prose, use it when speaking of things. The construc- 
tion is not, however, generally pleasing, as we may see in the following 
instances: " Pleasure, whose nature," &c. " Call every production, who84 
parts and whose nature," &c. 

(1.) " that," Conjunction. (2.) " in a manner which u, in some respects, ttys- 
«&*©«*," t3.) " that" (4.) Rule IV (5.) Rule X. Note XVII. 

12 



134 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

In one case, however, custom authorizes us to use which, with respaet to 
persons ; and that is, when we want to distinguish one person of two, or a 
particular person among a number of others. We should then bay, 4 Which 
of the two," or " Which of them is he or she ?" 

11 The court of queen Elisabeth, who," &c. Will you correct this sen 
tence, and give the Note for it ? 

8, 
? Having- once disgusted (L) him, deceive and betray, should be 

he could never regain the favor avoided as the poisonous ad- 

ef Nero, who was indeed another der." 

name for cruelty." "Who of those men came to hia 

44 Flattery, whose nature (2.) is to assistance ?" 

9. As the pronoun relative has no distinction of number, we sometimes 
find an ambiguity in the use of it; as, when we say, "The disciples of 
Christ, whom we imitate," we may mean the imitation either of Christ, oi 
of his disciples. The accuracy and clearness of the sentence depend very 
much upon the proper and determinate use of the relative, so that it may 
readily present its antecedent to ihe mind of the hearer or reader, without 
my obscurity or ambiguity 

What is remarked in this Note on the use of the relative pronoun ? 

9. 

** The king (3.) dismissed his min- " There are millions of people ia 
ister without o.ny inquiry; who the empire (4.) of China whose 

had never before committed so support is derived almost entire- 

unjust an action." ly from rice." 

10. It is and it was are often, after the manner of the French, used in a 
plural construction, and by some of our best writers ; as, " It is either a few 
great men who decide for the whole, or it is the rabble that follow a sedi- 
tious ring-leader ;" " It is they that are the real authors, though the soldiers 
are the actors of the revolution;" " It was the heretics that first began to 
rail," &c. ; " 'Tis these that early taint the female mind." This license in 
the construction of ?* is, (if it be proper to admit it at all,) has, however, 
been certainly abused in the following sentence, which is thereby mane a 
very awkward one: "It is wondertul the very few accidents, which, in 
several years, happen from this practice." 

How are it is and it was often used ? Give ai^xample in which they a?® 
used incorrectly in this sense. 

10. 
** It is remarkable his continual 4 * It is indisputably true hia asser 
endeavors to serve us, notwith- tion, though it is a paradox." 

standing our ingratitude." (5.) (6.) 

11. The interjections ! oh ! and ah ! require the objective case of a pro- 
noun in the first person after them ; as, " O me ! Oh me ! Ah me !" but 
the nominative case in the second person ; as, " O thou persecutor !" " O 
ye hypocrites !" " O thou who dwellest," &c. 

The neuter pronoun, by an idiom peculiar to the English language, is 
frequently joined, in explanatory sentences, with a noun or pronoun of the 
masculine or feminine gender ; as, " It was I ;" "It was the man or woman 
that did it." 

The neuter pronoun it is sometimes omitted and understood : thus we 
Bay, "As appears, as follows," for "As it appears, as it follows;" and 
" May be," for " It may be." 
_ ,* 

(1.) " Having disgusted." Rule XIII. (2.) "the nature of which." (3./ ;• TU 
king, who had never" &c. (4.) " There are in the empire," &e. (5.) " His con- 

li%U3.l" /tec. ; ending tl?e wntecf? with, " *r<? remarkabfa." (-5.) " jFJSj AssaHum^ 



SYNTAX. 135 

Thd neutet pronoun it is sometimes employed to express, 

1st. The subject of any discourse or inquiry ; as, " 11 happened on a sum- 
mer's day ;" " Who is it that calls on me ?" 

2d, The state or condition of any person or thing ; as, "How is it with 
you?" 

3d. The thing, whatever it be, that is the cause of any effect or event ; 
or any person considered merely as a cause ; as, " We heard her say it was 
sot he ;" " The truth is, it was I that helped her." 

Why is it incorrect to say, " Oh I" ? Why incorrect to say, " Oh thee" 

11. 

Ah! unhappy thee, who art "Oh! happy we, surrounded wi lib 
deaf to the calls of duty and so many blessing's." 

of honor." 



Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE VI. 

The relative is the nominative case to the verb, when, 
no nominative case comes between it and the verb ; as, 
" The master who taught us ;" " The trees which are 
planted." 

When a nominative case comes between the relative and 
the verb, the relative is governed by some, word in its 
own member of the sentence ; as, " He who preserves 
me, to whom I owe my being, whose I am, and whom 

I serve, is eternal." 

In the several members of the last sentence, the relative performs a dif- 
ferent ofrice. In the first member, it marks the agent ; in the second, it 
submits to the government of the preposition ; in the third, it represents the 
possessor ; and in the fourth, the object of an action i and therefore it must 
be in the three different cases, correspondent to those offices. 

When both the antecedent and relative become nominatives, each to 
different verbs, the relative is the nominative to the former, and the an- 
tecedent to the latter verb; as, " True philosophy, which is the ornament 
of our nature, consists more in the love of our duty, and the practice of 
virtue, than in great talents and extensive knowledge." 

A few instances of erroneous construction will illustrate both branches of 
She sixth rule. 'The three following refer to the first part : " How can we 
avoid being grateful to those whom, by repeated kind offices, have proved 
themselves our real friends ?" " These are the men whom, you might sup- 
pose, were the authors of the work." " If you were here, you would find 
three or four, whom you would say passed their time agreeably." In alJ 
these places, it should be who, instead of whom. The two latter sentences 
contain a nominative between the relative and the verb ; and, therefore, 
seem to contravene the rule ; but the student will reflect, that it is not the 
nominative of the verb with which the relative is connected. — The remain- 
ing examples refer to the second part of the rule : " Men of fine talents 
are not always the persons who we should esteem." " The persons who 
you dispute with are precisely of your opinion." " Our tutors are our 
benefactors, who we owe obedience to, and who we ought to love." In 
these sentences, whom should be used instead of who. 

II These are the men whom, you might suppose, ww," &,«. Will voa 
«torr<v,t th'm eTrauYir&to. and giv* trw* n?l« thr it f 



13$ ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

* We are dependent on each others' " They who have labored to makw 

assistance : whom is there that U3 wise and good, are the per. 

can subsist by himself?" sons who we ought to love and 

w If he will not hear his best friend, respect, and who we ought to 

whom shall be sent to admonish be grateful to." 

him ?" " The persons, who conscience and 

"They who (1.) much is given to, virtue support, may smile at thft 

will have much (2.) to answer caprices of fortune." 

for." (3.) " From the character of those wh$ 

w It is not to be expected that you associate with, your own 

they, whom in early life have will be estimated." % 

been dark and deceitful, should " That (4.) is the student who I 

afterwards become fair and in- gave the book to, and whom, i 

genuous." am persuaded, deserves it." 

1. When the relative pronoun is of the interrogative kind, the noun or 
pronoun containing the answer, must be in the same case as that which 
contains the question ; as, " Whose books are these?" " They are John's." 
" Who gave them to him?" " We. 11 " Of whom did you" buy rhem ?" 
" Of a bookseller; him who lives at the Bible and Crown."- " Whom did 
you see there ?" " Both him and the shopman." The learner will readily 
comprehend this rule, by supplying the words which are understood in the 
answers. Thus, to express the answers at large, we should say, " They 
are John's books ;" " We gave them to him ;" " We bought them of him 
who lives," &c. ; " We saw both him and the shopman." As the relative 
pronoun, when used interrogatively, refers to the subsequent word .ar 
phrase containing the answer to the question, that word or phrase may 
properly be termed the subsequent to the interrogative. 

" Of whom did you buy them ?" " Of a bookseller ; he who lives," &c. 
What is wrong in this sentence, and how may it be corrected ? What is the 
Note for it ? 

1. 
"Of whom were the articles "Who was the money paid to?" 

bought?" "Of a mercer; he "To the mercer and his 

(5.) who resides near (6.) the clerk." 

mansion-house." " Who counted it ?" " Both th* 

"Was any person besides (6.) the clerk and him." 

mercer present?" "Yes, both 

him and his clerk." 



RULE XXV. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar. 
RULE VII. 

When the relative is preceded by two nominatives of 
different persons, the relative and verb may agree in 
person with either, according to the sense ; as, " I am 
the man who command you ;" or, " I am the man who 
commands you." 

The form of the first of the two preceding sentences expresses the meaning 
rather obscurely. It would be more perspicuous to say, " I, who command 
you, am the man." Perhaps the difference of meaning produced by referring 
me relative to different antecedents, will be more evident to the learner m the 

a) " to whom." (2.) 673. (3.) 596. (4.) Note I. 405. 

(5.) Rul* XV («.) 247. 



SYNTAX. 137 

following sentences : " I am the general who gives the ordeis to-dav ;" " 1 
am the general, who give the orders to-day; 5 '' that, is, U I, who giv® the 
orders to-day, am the general." 

When the relative and the verb have been determined to agree with either 
of the preceding nominatives, that agreement must be preserved throughout 
the sentence; as in the following instance: "I am the Lord, that makeih 
all things; that stretcheth forth the heavens alone." Isa. xliv. 24. Thus 
far is consistent : the Lord, in the third person, is the antecedent, and the 
verb agrees with the relative in the third person : "lam the Lord, which 
Lord, or he, that makeih all things." If I were made the antecedent, the 
relative and verb should agree with it in the first person; as, "Jam the 
Lord, that make all things; that stretch forth the heavens alone." But 
should it follow, " that spreadeth abroad the earth by myself," there would 
arise a confusion of persons, and a manifest solecism. 

" I am the man who command you." " I am the man who commands 
fou." What is the nominative to command in the first sentence ? What to 
commands in the second ? Rule for each ? Why is the verb of a different 
person in different sentences ? 

"1 acknowledge that (1.) I am "I perceive that thou art a pupil 

the teacher, (5.) who adopt who possesses bright parts, but 

that sentiment, and maintains who hast cultivated them but 

the propriety of such meas- (3.) litfle." (4.) 

urea." (2.) " Thou art he (5.) who breathest on 

**Thou art a friend (5.) that hast the earth with the breath of 

often relieved me, and that has spring, and who covereth it 

not deserted me now, in the with verdure and beauty." 

time of peculiar need." " I am the Lord (5.) thy God, (5.) 

"I am the man who approves of who teacheth thee to profit, 

wholesome discipline, and who and who lead thee by the waj 

recommend it to others ; but I thou shouldst go," 

am not a person who promotes " Thou art the Lord who did choosa 

useless severity, or who object Abraham, and broughtest him 

to mild and generous treat- forth (4.) out of (6.) Ur of tha 

merit" Chaldees." 

mux,^ xtr. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE VIII. 

Adjectives belong to the nouns which they describee 

Note I. Adjective pronouns and numerals must agree m 
number with the nouns to which they belong. 

1. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

A tew instances of the breach of this rule are here exhibited : " I haw 
not travelled this twenty years ;" " these twenty." " I am not recommend- 
ing these kind of sufferings ;" " this kind." " Those set of books was © 
valuable present ;" " that set." 

" I have not travelled tins twenty years." How should this be altered f 
Why ? 

** These kind of indulgences soften - playing (9.) this two hours.* 9 

and injure the mind." (10.) 

** Instead (7.) of improving (8.) " Those sort of favors did real in. 

yourselves, you have been jnry, under the appearance of 

kindness," 

(1.) 652. (2.) " adopts and maintains, 1 * or " adopt and maintain." (3.) 85& 

(4.) Adverb. (5.) Rule XV. (6.) 247. (7.) S47, <R) 561 (9.) Rufo 

Till. (10.) Rule XXII. 646. 

12* 



138 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

■The chasm made (1.) by the earth- "How many a eoriow (5 should 
quake was twenty foot (2.) we avoid, if we were not m- 

broad, (3.; and on® hundred dustrious to make them 1*' 

fathom (4.; in depth." x "He saw one or more persons (6*) 

enter (7.) the garden." 

1. The word means, in the singular number, and the phrase "btfthis 
means " " by that means," are used by our best and most correct writers ; 
namely, Bacon, Tiilotson, Atterbury, Addison, Steele, Pope, &c.* They 
are indeed, in so general and approved use, that it would appear awkward, 
if not affected, to apply the old singular form, and say, "by this mean ;" 
" by that mean ;" "it was by a mean;' 1 although it is more agreeable to 
the general analogy of the language. " The word means (says Priestley) 
belongs to the class of words, which do not change their termination on ac- 
count of number ; for it is used alike in both numbers." 

The word amends is used in this manner, in the following sentences : 
" Though he did not succeed, he gained the approbation of his country ; 
and with, this amends he was content. 1 " " Peace of mind is an honorable 
amends for the sacrifices of interest." " In return, he received the thanks 
of his employers, and the present of a large estate : these were ample 
amends for all his labors." " We have described the rewards of vice , the 
good man's amends are of a different nature." 

It can scarcely be doubted, that this word amends (like the word means } 
had formerly its correspondent form in the singular number, as it is derived 
from the French amende, though now it is exclusively established in the 
plural form. If, therefore, it be alleged, that mean should be applied in the 
singular, because it is derived from the French moyen, the same kind of 
argument may be advanced in favor of the singulai amende ; and the general 
analogy of the language may also be pleadecfm support of it. 

Campbell, in his Philosophy of Rhetoric, has the following remark on 
the subject before us : " No persons of taste will, I presume, venture so 
far to violate the present usage, and consequently to shock the ears of the 
generality of readers, a3 to say, ' By this mean, by that mean. 1 " 

(1.) Rule XIII. (2.) Note XVIII. 648. (3.) " chasm— bra#d." Rule IV 

(4.) Rule IX. (5.) " many sorrows." (6.) " one person, or more than one." 

(7.) Rule XII. 

* " By this means he had them the more at vantage, being tired and harassed with 
a long march." Bacon. 

" By this means one great restraint from doing evil would be taken away." " And 
this is an admirable means to improve men in virtue." " By that means they have 
rendered their duty more difficult." Tillotson. 

" It renders us careless of approving ourselves to God, and by' that means securing 
the continuance of his goodness." " A good character, when established, should not 
be rested in as an end, but employed as a means of doing still further good." 

Atterecry. 

" By this means they are happy in each other." " He by that means preserves his 
superiority." Addison. 

41 Your vanity by this means will want ; ts food." Steels;. 

" By this means alone, their greatest obstacles will vanish." Pops. 

" Which custom has proved the most effectual means to ruin the nobles." 

Dean Swift. 

" There is no means of escaping the persecution." " Faith is not only a means of 
obeying, but a principal act of obedience." Dr. Youno. 

" He looked on money as a necessary means of maintaining and increasing power.** 

Lord Lyttlxton's Henry II. 

" John was too much intimidated not to embrace every means afforded for bif 
safety." Goldsmith. 

"Lest this means should fail." " By means of ship-money, the late king," &c 
**The only means of securing a durable peace." Ruks 

" By this means there was nothing left to the parliament of Ireland," &c. 

Blackston*. 

" By this means so many slaves escaped out of the hands of their masters*' 

Dr. Robertson. 

u By tkts means they bear witness to each other." Bcrrk. 

44 By this means the wrath of man was made to turn against itself." Dr. Blair. 

*» A magazine, which has, by this means, contained," &c. " Birds, in general, pro 
ms« their food bv means of their bc&k. n ft* Pal*? 



SYNTAX. . 139 

Ijowth and Johnson seem to be against the use of means Hi the singula? 
number. They do not, however, speak decisively on the point ; but rath&i 
dubiously, as ix they knew that they were questioning eminent authorities 
as well as general practice. That they were not decidedly against the ap- 
plication of this word to the singular number, appears from their own lan- 
guage : "Whole sentences, whether simple or compound, may become 
members of other sentences by means of some additional con?itctio7i."-— 
Dr. Lowth's Introduction to English Grammar. 

" There is no other method of teaching that of which any one is ignorant, 
but by means of something already known." — Dr. Johnson. Idhr. 

It is remarkable that our present version of the Scriptures makes no use, 
as far as the compiler can discover, of the word mean ; though there arc* 
several instances to be found in it of the use of means, in the sense and con-, 
nectibn contended for. " By this means thou shalt have no portion on th?3 
side the river." Ezra iv. 16. " That by means of death,'' 1 &c. Heb. ix. 
L5. It will scarcely be pretended, that the translators of the sacred volumes 
did not accurately understand the English language ; or that they woultf 
have admitted one form of this word, and rejected the other, had not their 
determination been conformable to the best usage. An attempt, therefore, 
to recover an old word, so long since disused by the most correct writers, 
seems not likely to be successful : especially as the rejection of it is not 
Attended with any inconvenience. 

The practice of the best and most correct writers, or a great majority of 
them, corroborated by general usage, forms, during its continuance, the 
ftandard of language ; especially if, in particular instances, this practice 
continue after objection and due consideration. Eveiy connection and ap- 
plication of words and phrases, thus supported, must therefore be prope? 
*ud entitled to respect, if not exceptionable in a moral point of view. 

<< Si vo l e i usus 

11 Quern penes arbitriam est, et jus, et norma loquendi" Hon. 

On this principle, many forms of expression, not less deviating from the 
general analogy of the language than those before mentioned, are to be con- 
sidered as strictly proper and justifiable. Of this kind are the following: 
" None of them are varied to express the gender ;" and yet none originally 
signified no one. " He himself shall do the work :" here, what was at first 
appropriated to the objective, is now properly used as the nominative case. 
" You have behaved yourselves well :" in this example, the word you 13 put 
in the nominative case plural, with strict propriety ; though formerly it was 
confined to the objective case, and ye exclusively used for the nominative. 

With respect to anomalies and variations of language, thus established, it is 
the grammarian's business to submit, not to remonstrate. In pertinaciously 
opposing the decision of proper authority, and contending for obsolete modes 
of expression, he may, indeed, display learning and critical sagacity ; and, 
in some degree, obscure points that are sufficiently clear and decided ; but he 
cannot reasonably hope either to succeed in his aims, or to assist the learner, 
in discovering and respecting the true standard and principles of language. 

Cases which custom has left dubious, are certainly within the gram- 
marian's province. Here, he may reason and remonstrate on the ground 
of derivation, analogy, and propriety : and his reasonings may refine and 
improve the language : but when authority speaks out, and decides the 
point, it were perpetually to unsettle the language, to admit of cavil and 
debate. Anomalies, then, under the limitation mentioned, become the 
Caw, as clearly as the plainest analogies. 

The reader will perceive that, in the following sentences, the use of the 
word mean in the old form has a very uncouth appearance : " By the mean 
of adversity we are often instructed." "He preserved his health by mean 
of exercise." ' ' Frugality is one mean of acquiring a competency." They 
should be, " By means of adversity," &c. ; " By means of exercise," &c. ; 
" Frugality is one means," &c. 

Good writers do indeed make use of the substantive (1.) mean in the singtt- 

(1.) JVbira* are aom«time# called twfot«nfitva« 



140 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

ifar number, and in that number only, to signify mediocrity, middle rat© &c*. 
&s, " This is a mean between the two extremes." But in the se^se d 
instrumentality, it has long been disused by the best authors, and by almost 
every writer. 

This means and that means should be used only when they refer to what 
is singular ; these means and those means, when they respect plurals ; as, 
" He lived temperately, and by this means preserved his health ;" " The 
(scholars were attentive, industrious, and obedient to their tutors ; and by 
these means acquired knowledge." 

We have enlarged on this article, that the young student may be led to 
reflect on a point so important as that of ascertaining the standard of pro- 
priety in the use of language. 

In what number is the word means used ? What does Dr. Priestley remark 
* concerning the use of this word ? What other word is used in this manner f 
What does Dr. Campbell remark in regard to the use of the phrase, "By 
this mean ?" Do Dr. Lowth and Dr. Johnson approve of the use of means 
in the singular number? Do good writers make use of the substantive (1.) 
mean in the singular number? Give an example. When should "This 
means" and " That means"*be used ? When " These meuis" and " Those 
means f" 

1. 
64 Charles was extravagant, and by " This person embraced every op- 

this mean became poor and portunity to display his talents ; 

despicable." and by these means rendered 

54 It was by that ungenerous mean himself ridiculous." 

that (2.) he obtained his end." . " Joseph was industrious, frugal 
64 Industry is the mean of obtaining and discreet ;• and by this 

competency." means obtained property and 

feS Though a promising measure, it is reputation." 

a mean which I cannot adopt" 

2. W r hen two persons or things are spoken of in a sentence, and there is 
occasion to mention them again for the sake of distinction, that is used in 
reference to the former, and this tin reference to the latter: as, " Self-love, 
which is the spring of action in the soul, is ruled by reason : but for that, 
man would be inactive ; and but for this, he would be active to no end." 

How are the pronouns that and this used ? 

2. ft 

** Religion raises men above them- upon the earth in those than in 

selves ; irreligion sinks them these ; because there is a much 

beneath the brutes : that (3.) slower evaporation." 

binds them down (4.) to a poor, Rex and Tyrannus are of very 

pitiable speck of perishable different characters. The on3 

earth ; this opens for them a (3.) rules his people by laws to 

prospect to the skies." which they consent ; the other 

66 More rain falls in the first two (5.) by his absolute will and 

summer months, than in the power : this is called freedom 

first two winter ones ; but it that (5.) tyranny." 
makes a much greater show 

3. The distributive adjective pronouns each, every, either, agree with the 
nouns, pronouns and verbs, of the singular number only ; as, " The kins 
of Israel, and Jehoshaphat, the king of Judah, sat each on his throne •, 
" Eveiy tree is known by its fruit ; unless the plural noun convey a col- 
lective idea ; as, " Every six months ;" " Every hundred years." The fol 
lowing phrases are exceptionable: "Let each esteem others better than 
Shentselves ;" it. ought to be, " himself.' 1 " The language should be both 
perspicuous and correct : in proportion as either of these two qualities are 
wanting, the language is imperfect ;" it should be, " is warning." " Every 

• (I.) Note 1, p. J3? (2.) 659. (3.) 407. Rute VI. (4 ) Advcrk 

15.) Bule XL 



a Y NT AX. 141 

$ne of the Imters bear regular dates, and contain proofs of attachment;" 
"bears a regular date, and contains.'' 1 "Every town and village were 
burned ; every grove and every tree were cut down:" " was burned, and 
mas cut down." 

Either is often used improperly, instead of each. ; as, " The king of Israel, 
and Jehoshaphat the king of Judah, sat either of them on his throne;" 
** Nadab and Abihu, the sons of Aaron, took either of them his censer." 
Each signifies both of them taken distinctly or separately ; either properly 
signifies only the one or the other of them, taken disjunctively. 

*" The king of Israel, and Jehoshaphat the king of Judah, sat either of 
them on their throne." Will you correct this, and give the rule for it ? 



14 Each of them, in their (1.) turn, is productive of much (7.) in- 

receive the benefits to which ward joy or bitterness." 

they are entitled." " Whatever (8.) he undertakes, 

u My counsel to each of you is, that either (9.) his pride or his 

you (2.) should make it your folly disgust us." 

endeavor to come to a friendly " Every man and every woman 

agreement." were numbered." 

*By discussing what (3.) relates to " Neither of those men seem to have 

each particular, in their order, any idea that their opinions 

we shall better understand the may be ill founded." 

subject." "When benignity and gentleness 

* Every person, whatever (4.) be reign within, (7.) we are al- 

their station, (5.) are bound ways (7.) least (7.) in hazard 

by the duties of morality and from without: (10.) ev^ry per- 

religion." , son and every occurrence are 

11 Every leaf, every twig,' (6.) beheld in the most favorable 

every drop of water, teem with light." 

life." "On either side of the river was 

M Every man's heart and temper there the tree of life." 

4. Adjectives are sometimes improperly applied as adverbs ; as, " Indif- 
ferent honest ; excellent well ; miserable poor ;" instead of " Indifferently 
honest; excellently well*; miserably poor." "He behaved himself con- 
formable to that great example;" "conformably." "Endeavor to live 
hereafter suitable to a person in thy station ;" " suitably. 1 ' " I can never 
think so very mean of him ;" " meanly. 11 " He describes this river agree- 
able to the common reading;" "agreeably. 11 "Agreeable to my promise, I 
now write ;" " agreeably. 11 "Thy exceeding great reward ;" when united 
to an adjective, or adverb not ending in ly, the word exceeding has ly added 
to it; as, " exceedingly dreadful, exceedingly great;" "exceedingly well, 
exceedingly more active :" but when it is joined to an adverb or adjective, 
having that termination, the ly is omitted ; as, " Some men think exceeding 
clearly, and reason exceeding forcibly;" " She appeared on this occasion, 
exceeding lovely." — " He acted in this business bolder than was expected." 
" They behaved the noblest, because they were disinterested." They should 
have been, "more boldly, most nobly. 11 The adjective pronoun such is often 
misapplied; as, " He was such an extravagant young man, that he spent 
his whole patrimony in a few years ;" it should be, " so extravagant a young 
man 11 "I never before saw such large trees;" " saw trees so large. 11 
When we refer to the species or nature of a thing, the word such is properly 
applied ; as, " Such a temper is seldom found :" but when degree is signb 
fied, we use the word so ; as, " So bad a temper is seldom found." 

Adverbs are likewise improperly used as adjectives; as, " The tutor ad 
dressed him in terms rather warm, but suitably to his offence ;" " suitable. 11 

(1.) " Ms." (2.) « he." (3.) 437. (4.) Rula XV. (5.) Rule VI 

(6.) Rule X J. (7.) Adverb. (& Rule VI ll. f9.) fi». (10.) "/ram 

without." j. e. " externally." 589 



142 ENGLISH G K A Al MAR. 

" They were seen wandering about solitarily and distressed , " »olitar$J 
" He lived in a manner agreeably to the dictates of reason and religion ;' 
" agreeable" " The study of syntax should be previously to that of punc 
tuation ;" " previous. 1 ' 

Young persons who study grammar, find it difficult to decide, in particular 
constructions, whether an adjective, or an adverb, ought to be used. A fe\i 
observations on this point, may serve to inform their judgment, and direo 
their determination. They should carefully attend to the definitions of the 
adjective and the adverb ; and consider whether, in the case in question 
quality or manner is indicated. In the former case, an adjective is proper \ 
sn the latter, an adverb. A number of examples will illustrate this direction, 
and prove useful on other occasions. 

" She looks cold — She looks coldly on him." 
'• He feels warm — He feels warmly the insult offered to him." 
lt He became sincere and virtuous — He became sincerely virtuous." 
" She lives free from care — He lives freely at another's expense." 
" Harriet always appears neat— She dresses neatly." 
" Charles has grown great by his wisdom — He has grown greatly in re- 
putation." 

" They now appear happy — They now appear happily in earnest." 
" The statement seems exact—- The statement seems exactly in point." 
The verb to he, in all its moods and tenses, generally requires the word 
immediately connected with it to be an adjective, not an adverb ; and con- 
sequently, when this verb can he substituted for any other, without varying 
the sense or the construction, that other verb must also be connected with 
an adjective. The following sentences elucidate these observations : " This 
is agreeable to our interest." " That behaviour was not suitable to his sta- 
tion." " Rules should be conformable to sense." " The rose smells [is] 
,Bweet." " How sweet the hay smells [is] !" " How delightful the country 
appears [is] !" " How pleasant the fields look [are] !" " The clouds look 
[are] dark." " How black the sky looked [was] !" "The apple tastes 
[is] sour!" "How bitter the plums tasted [were] !" "He feels [is] 
happy." In all these sentences, we can, with perfect propriety, substitute 
some tenses of the verb to be, for the other verbs. But in the following 
sentences we cannot do this : " The dog smells disagreeably." " George 
feels exquisitely." " How pleasantly she looks at us !" 

The directions contained in this Note are offered as useful, not as complete 
and unexceptionable. Anomalies in language every where encounter us ; 
but we must not reject rules, because they are attended with exceptions. 

Why is " indifferent honest" an incorrect expression ? Do we say, " ex- 
ceeding dreadful," and " exceeding great" ? What, then, do we use in the 
place of exceeding ? When, then, do we use exceedingly ? When exceeding ? 
" The tutor addressed him in terms rather warm, but suitably to his of- 
fence," Why is mis sentence wrong ? Correct it. How can we tell whether 
an adjective or an adverb ought to be used ? Which do we use, when quality 
is indicated ? Which, when manner is indicated ? Which does the verb to he 
generally require to be connected with it, the adjective or adverb ? To illus- 
trate the distinct and proper use of both the adverb and adjective, I will give 
you some examples. Would you then say, " He is diligently and attentive- 
ly," or " diligent and attentive" ? " She will be happy," or " happily" ? 
" He looks cold," or " coldly" ? " She looks cold on him." Can we use 
is for looks, and make sense ? Would you, then, say, " She looks cold on 
him," or "coldly on him" ? " She lives freely [is] from care" ? ^hy ? 
" He lives free at another's expense" ? "He feels warmly" ? "He feels 
warm the insult offered him' ? "He became sincerely and virtuously" ? 
" He became sincere virtuous" ? Why? " Harriet always appears neatly — 
She dresses neat" ? " Charles has grown great by his wisdom — He is grown 
great in his reputation" ? " They now appear happily — They now appear 
happy in earnest" ? " The statement seems exactly — The statement seems 
exact in point ?" " How sweetly the hay smells !" ? " How delightful the 
country appears !" ? " How pleasant the fields look !" f " The clouds look 
darkly" ? " The apples' taste sourlr" ? 



SYNTAX. 



143 



«* She reads proper, writes very neat, 
and composes accurate." 

11 He wa3 extreme prodigal, and his 
property is now near exhaust- 
ed." 

u They generally succeeded; for 
they lived conformable to the 
rules of prudence." 

w We may reason very clear and ex- 
ceeding strong, without know- 
ing that there is such a thing 
as a syllogism," 

44 He had ma^ virtues, and was 
exceeding beloved." 

M The amputation was exceeding 
well performed, and saved the 
patient's life." 

" He came agreeable to his promise, 
and conducted himself suitable 
to the occasion." 

41 He speaks very fluent, reads ex- 
cellent, but does not think very 
coherent." 

44 He behaved himself submissive, 
and was exceeding careful not 
to give (1.) offence." 

44 They rejected the advice, and con- 
ducted themselves exceedingly 
indiscreetly." 

u He is a person of great abilities, 
and exceeding upright ; and is 
like to be a very useful member 
(2.) of the community." 



4 The conspiracy was the easier 
(3.) discovered, from its (4.1 
being known (5.) to many." 

4 Not being fully acquainted with 
the subject, he could affirm no 
stronger (6.) than he did." 

4 He was so deeply impressed with 
the subject, that few could speak 
nobler upon it." 

4 We may credit his testimony, for 
he says express, that he saw the 
transaction." 

4 Use a little wine for thy stoma6h's 
sake, and thine often (7.) in- 
firmities." 

4 From these favorable beginnings, 
we may hope for a soon (8.) 
and prosperous issue." 

* He addressed several exhortations 
to them suitably to their cir- 
cumstances." 

4 Conformably to their vehemence 
of thought, was their vehemence 
of gesture." 

4 We should implant in the minds? 
of youth such seeds and prin- 
ciples of piety and virtue, as 
(9.) are likely to take soonest 
anil deepest root." 

4 Such (10.) an amiable disposition 
will secure universal regard." 

4 Such distinguished virtues seldom 



5. Double comparatives and superlatives should be avoided ; such as, ** a 
worser conduct ;" " on lesser hopes ;" " a more serener temper ;" "the 
most straitest sect ;" " a more superior work." They should be, " worse 
conduct ;" " less hopes ;" " a more serene temper ;" " the straitest sect ;" 
" a superior work." 

" A worser conduct." Will you correct this sentence, and give the Rule 
for it? 



5. 



M *T is more easier to build two 
chimneys than to maintain 
one." 

v The tongue is like (11.) a race- 
horse, CIS.) which runs the 
faster (13.) the lesser weight it 
carries." 



44 The pleasures of the understand- 
ing are more preferable than 
(14.) those of the imagination, 
or of sense." 

44 The nightingale sings : hers is 
the most sweetest voice in the 
grove." 



(1.) Rule XII. (2.) Rule XV. (3.) "more easily" (4.) Rule I. 

(5.) "being known''' — participial noun. (6.) "not affirm more strongly" 

(7.) " thy frequent." (8.) "speedy." (0.) 656. (10.) " A disposition 

tv amiable,'" &c. See the Note, a few lines before tne close. (11.) Rule Vi 

(Itf.) Rule X.-Nnte XVJT. 647. (1£) 59B: Cii.) " fr^f trail* to." 



144 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

** The Most Highest hath created us " The Supreme Being is the moai 
for his glory, and for our own wisest, and most powerfullest, 

happiness." and the most best of beings." 

6. Adjectives that have in themselves a superlative signification, do not 
properly admit of the superlative or comparative form superadded ; such as 
chief, extreme, perfect, right, universal, supreme, &c. ; which are sometimes 
improperly written chiefest, extremest, perfectest, rightest, most universal, 
most supreme, &c. Trie following expressions are, therefore, improper: 
" He sometimes claims admission to the chiefest offices." "The quarrel 
became so universal and national." " A method of attaining the rightest 
and greatest happiness." The phrases, "so perfect," "so right,' r "so 
sxtreme," "so universal," &c, are incorrect; because they imply that 
thing is less perfect, less extreme, &c, than another, winch is not 



Is ic proper to say, " The most perfect work ?" Why not? 

6. * 

44 Virtue confers the supremest (1.) " His work is perfect ; (4.) his 
dignity on man ; and should be brother's, more perfect ; and 

his chiefest desire." his father's, the most perfect 

44 His assertion was more true (2.) of all." 

than that of his opponent ; nay, " He gave the fullest and most sin- 
the words of the latter were cere proof of the truest friend- 

most untrue." (3.) ship." 

7. Inaccuracies are often found in the way in which the degrees of com • 
oarison are applied and construed. The following are examples of wrong 
construction in this respect : " This noble nation hath, of all others, admit- 
ted fewer corruptions." The word fewer is here construed precisely as if 
it were the superlative. It should be, " This noble nation hath admitted 
fewer corruptions than any other." We commonly say, " This is the 
weaker of the two," or, " the weakest of the two ;" but the former is the 
regular mode of expression, because there are only two things compared. 
"The vice of covetousness is what enters deepest into the soul of anv 
other." " He celebrates the church of England as the most perfect of all 
others." Both these modes of expression are faulty: we should not say, 
" the best of any man," or, " the best of any other man," for, " the best 
of men." The sentences may be corrected by substituting the compara- 
tive in the room of the superlative : " The vice, &c, is w r hat enters deeper 
into the soul than any other." " He celebrates, &c, as more perfect than 
any other." It is also possible to retain the superlative, and render the 
expression grammatical: "Covetousness, of ail vices, enters the deepest 
into the soul." " He celebrates, &c, as the most perfect of all churches." 
These sentences contain other errors, against which it is proper to caution 
the learner. The words deeper and deepest, being intended for adverbs, 
Should have been more deeply, most deeply. The phrases more perfect and 
most perfect are improper ; because perfection admits of no degrees of com- 
parison. We may say, nearer or nearest to perfection, or more or less 
imperfect. 

In speaking: of two persons, should we say, " The weaker of the two," 
&r, " The weakest of the two?" Why ? 

7. 

' A talent of this kind would, per- " He spoke with so much propriety, 
haps, prove the likeliest of any that I understood him the best 

other (5.) to succeed." of all the others (6.) who spike 

tt He is the strongest of the two, on the subject." 

but not the wisest" " Eve was the fairest of all hes 

daughters." 

(1.) " the supremest — supreme." (2.) " better founded '." (3.) "net true." 

f4.) " veil executed— still better—but" (5.1 n «#.*' (6.) " <f all v>he* 



SYNTAX. 145 

8. In some cases, adjectives should not be separated from their substan- 
tives, even by words which modify their meaning, and make but one sense 
with them; as, "A large enough number, surely." It should be, "A 
number large enough." " The lower sort of people are good enough 
judges of one not very distant from them." 

The adjective is usually placed before its substantive; as, " A generate 
man ;" " How amiable a woman !" The instances in which it comea^fter 
the substantive, are the following : 

1st. When something depends upon the adjective ; and when it gives a 
better sound, especially in poetry ; as, " A man generous to his enemies ;" 
" Feed me with food convenient for me ;" "A tree three feet thick ;" "A 
body of troops fifty thousand strong;" "The torrent tumbling through 
rocks abrupt." 

2d. When the adjective is ernphatical; as, "Alexander the Great;" 
" Lewis the Bold ;" " Goodness infinite;" " Wisdom unsearchable." 

3d. When several adjectives belong to one substantive; as, "A man 
just, wise, and charitable ;" "A woman modest, sensible, and virtuous." 

4th. When the adjective is preceded by an adverb ; as, " A boy regularly 
studious ;" "A girl unaffectedly modest." 

5th. When the verb to he, in any of its variations, comes between a sub- 
stantive and an adjective, the adjective may frequently either precede or 
follow it ; as, " The man is happy " or, " 'Happy is the man, who makes 
virtue his choice :" " The interview was delightful;" or, "Delightful was 
the interview." 

6th. When the adjective expresses some circumstance of a substantive 
placed after an active verb ; as, " Vanity often renders its possessors despica- 
ble." In an exclamatory sentence, the adjective generally precedes the 
substantive ; as, " flow despicable does vanity often render its possessor!" 

There is sometimes great beauty, as well as force, in placing the adjective 
before the verb, and the substantive immediately after it ; as, " Great is the 
Lord ! just and true are thy ways, thou King of saints !" 

Sometimes the word all is emphatically put after a number of particulars 
comprehended under it. "Ambition, interest, honor, all concurred." Some- 
times a substantive, which likewise comprehends the preceding particulars, 
is used in conjunction with this adjective; as, "Royalists, republicans, 
churchmen, sectaries, courtiers, all parties, concurred in the illusion." 

An adjective pronoun, in the plural number, will sometimes properly as- 
sociate with a singular noun ; as, " Our desire, your intention, their resigna- 
tion." This association applies rather to things of an intellectual nature, 
than to those which are corporeal. It forms an exception to the general rule. 

A substantive with its adjective is reckoned as one compounded word ; 
whence they often take another adjecuve, and sometimes a third, and so 
on; as, " An pld man; a good old man; a very learned, judicious, good 
old man." 

"Though the adjective always relates to a substantive, it is, in many in- ■ 
stances, put a3 if it were absolute ; especially where the noun has been 
mentioned before, or easily understood, though not expressed ; as, " I often 
survey it." 

Is it correct to say, " A large enough number" ? How should it be alter- 
ed ? What is the Note for it ? Should the adjective be placed usually before 
vr after the noun ? 

8. 

" He spoke in a distinct enough pair of gloves : he is the servant 

manner to be heard by the of an old rich (2.) man." 

whole assembly." "The two first (3.) in the row are 

* Thomas is equipped with a new cherry-trees, the two others art 

(1.) pair of shoes, and a new pear-trees." 

(1.) " a fai-r of n «as thou." (2.) " riek old." (3.) Note I.— Rule VI. 

K 13 



14G ENGLISH GRAMMAI 

BLUXiB II 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar* 
RULE IX. 

Hie indefinite article, a or an, belongs to nouns of the 
a singular number. 

HtTXiS III. 

llie definite article, the, belongs to nouns of the singu- 
lar or plural numbers. 

The articles are often properly omitted : when used, they should be justly 
applied, according to their distinct nature ; as, " Gold is corrupting ; the sea 
is green; a lion is bold." 

It is the nature of both the articles to determine or limit the thing spoken 
of. A determines it to be one single thing of the kind, leaving it still un 
certain which ; the determines which it is, or, if many, which they are. 

The following passage will serve as an example of the different uses of a 
and the, and of the force of the substantive without any article : " Man vt as 
made for society, and ought to extend his good will to all men ; but a man 
will naturally entertain a more particular kindness for the men with whom 
he has trie most frequent intercourse ; and enter into a still closer union 
with the man whose temper and disposition suit best with his own." 

As the articles are sometimes misapplied, it may be of some use to ex- 
hibit a few instances : " And I persecuted this way unto the death." The 
apostle does not mean any particular sort of death, but death in general : 
the definite article, therefore, is improperly used : it ought to be, "unto 
death," without any article. 

" When he, the Spirit of truth, is come, he will guide you into all truth ;' 
that is, according to this translation, "into all truth whatsoever, into truth 
of all kinds ;" — very different from the meaning of the evangelist, and from 
the original, "into all the truth;" that is, "into all evangelical truth, all 
truth necessary for you to know." 

" Who breaks a butterfly upon a wheel ?" it ought to be " the wheel," 
used as an instrument for the particular purpose of torturing criminals. 
" The Almighty hath given reason to a man to be a light unto him:" it 
should rather be, " to man, 1 '' in general. " This day is salvation come to 
this house, forasmuch as he also is the son of Abraham;" it ought to be, 
"a son of Abraham." 

These remarks may serve to show the great importance of the proper use 
of the article, and the excellence of the English language in this respect ; 
which, by means of its two articles, does most precisely determine the 
extent of signification of common names. 

What is the nature of the articles ? What does the article a determine f 
What the article the ? 

* The fire, the air, the earth, and the " (4.) Wisest and be3t men soma- 

water, are' four elements (1.) of times commit errors." 

the philosophers." " Beware of drunkenness ; it im 

14 Reason was given to a man tc pairs understanding; wastes 

control his passions," an estate ; destroys a reputa- 

M We have within us an intelligent tion ; consumes the body ; and 

principle, distinct from (2.) body renders the (5.) man of ths 

and from matter." brightest parts the (5.) Rom- 

tt A man is the noblest work of (3.) mon jest (8.) of the meanest 

creation." clown." 



(1.) " Fir*, air," &c. " tfte four ;" &&. (2.) " the body." (3.> • tit 

creation." (4.) " Th$ winest." f5.) M a-" '8-) &uha XV 



SYNTAX. 147 

* He is a much better writer than a " Purity has its seat in the heart, 

reader," but extends its influence over 

"The king has conferred on him so much of outward conduct, 

the title of a duke." as to form the great and nia- 

" There are some evils of life which terial part of a character." 

equally affect prince and peo- "The profligate man is seldom or 

pie." never found to be the good hus- 

" We must act our part with a con- band, the good father, -or the 

stancy, though reward of our beneficent neighbor." 

constancy be (1.) distant." " True charity is not the meteoi 

We are placed here under a trial which occasionally glares, but 

of our virtue." the luminary which, in ita 

* The virtues like his are not easily orderly and regular course, 

acquired. Such qualities honor dispenses benignant inilu- 

ihe nature of a man." ence." 

1. A nice distinction of the sense is sometimes made by the use or omis- 
sion of the article a. If I say, " He behaved with a little reverence/' my 
meaning is positive. If I say, " He behaved with little reverence," my 
meaning is negative. And these two are by no means the same, or to be 
used in the same cases. By the former, I rather praise a person ; by the 
latter, I dispraise him. For the sake of this distinction, which is a very 
useful one, we may better bear the seeming impropriety ,of the article a 
before nouns of number. When I say, " There were few men with him,'* 
I speak diminutively, and mean to represent them as inconsiderable : 
whereas, when I say, *' There were a few men with him," I evidently 
intend to make the most of them. 

What is the difference in meaning between the expressions, "We be- 
haved with a little reverence," and, " We behaved with little reverence ?" 

1. 

M He has been much censured for " There were so many mitigating 

conducting himself with a lit- (3.) circumstances attending 

tie attention to his business." his misconduct, particularly 

" Bo bold a breach cf order called that (4.) of his open confes- 

for (2.) little severity in punish- sion, that he found (5.) 'few 

ing the offender." * friends who were disposed to 

"His error was accompanied with interest themselves in his fa- 

eo little contrition and candid vox." 

acknowledgment, that he found " As his misfortunes were the fruit 

a few persons to intercede for of his own obstinacy, a few per- 

him." sons pitied him," 

9„ In general, it may be sufficient to prefix the article *o the former of 
two words in the same construction ; though the French never fail to repeat 
it in this case. "There were many hours, both of the night and day, 
wh:ch he could spend, without suspicion, in solitary thought." It might 
have been, " of the night and of the day." And, for the sake of emphasis, 
we often repeat the article in a series of epithets. "He hoped that this 
title would secure him an ample and an independent authority." 

1& the article to be repeated before two words in the same construction I 

2. 

"The fear of shame, (6.) the desire " He was fired with desire of doing 
cf approbation, prevent many something, though he knew not 

bad actions." yet, with distinctness, either end 

** In this business he was influenced or means." 

by a just and (7.) generous prin- 
ciple." 



CI.) 4S4. (2.) " a little." (3.) 559. (4.) "that ctrewntta*** " Note I.— 

Bale 3T$V (5.) " a few" 350. (6.) " and the." '1.) ' a g«nerom. w 



148 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

3. In common conversation, and in familiar style, we frequently omit the 
articles, which might be inserted with propriety in writing, especially in a 
grsve style. " At worst, time might be gamed by this expedient." " Ai 
the worst" would have been better in this place. " Give me Iwm John 
Baptist's head." There would have been more dignity in saying, ki John 
the Baptist's head ;" or, " The head of John the Baptist." 

The article the has sometimes a good eiTect in distinguishing a person by 
an epithet. " In the history of Henry the Fourth, by Father Daniel, w*j 
ars surprised at not finding him the great man." " I own I am often Fur- 
prised that he should have treated so coldly a man so much the gentleman." 

This article is often elegantly put, after the manner of lbs French, for 
the pronoun possessive ; as, " He looks him full in the face ;" that is, " in 
his face." "In his presence they were to strike the forehead on the 
ground ;" that is, " their foreheads." 

We sometimes, according to the French manner, repeat the same article, 
when the adjective, on account of any clause depending upon it, is put after 
the substantive. " Of ail the considerable governments among the Alps, a 
commonwealth is a constitution the most adapted of any to the poverty of 
those countries." " With such a specious title as that of blood, which, 
with the multitude, is always a claim the strongest, and the most easily 
comprehended." " They are not the men in the nation the most difficult 
to be replaced." 

" At worst, time might be gained," &c. What word may properly be 
inserted in the beginning of this sentence ? What is the Note for it ? 

3. 

* At worst, I could but incur a gen- " At best, his gift was but a peer 
tie reprimand." offering, when we consider his 

estate." 

B.'UILM Z. 

torresponding with Murray's Grammar, 

RULE X. 

The possessive case is governed by the following noun. 

When the annexed substantive signifies the same thing as the first, there 
Is no variation of case ; as, " George, king of Great Britain, elector of 
Hanover," &c. ; " Pompey contended with Ccssar, the greatest general 
of his time;" "Religion, the support of adversity, adorns prosperity." 
Nouns thu3 circumstanced are said to be in apposition to each other. The 
interposition of a relative and verb will sometimes oreak the construction ; 
as, " Pompey contended with Caesar, who uas the greatest general of his 
time." Here the word general is in the nominative case, according to Rule 
XV., or Note 4, under Rule VIII. 

The preposition of, joined to a substantive, is not always equivalent to the 
possessive case. It is only so, when the expression can be converted mto 
the regular form of the possessive case. We can say, *' the reward of 
virtue," and, " virtue's reward ;" but though it is proper to say, " a crowa 
of gold," we cannot convert the expression into the possessive case, an<J. 
say, '* gold's crown." 

Substantives govern pronouns as well as nouns, in the possessive esse; 
as, " Every tree is known by its fruit ;" " Goodness brings its reward ;" 
" That desk is mine" 

The genitive (1.) its is often improperly used for 'tis or it is ; as, "Its 
my book ;" instead of, * 4 It is my book." 

The pronoun his, when detached from the noun to which it relates, is to be 
considered, not a3 a possessive pronoun, but as the genitive case of the per- 
sona! pronoun; as, " This composition is his" "Whose book is that?" 
" His." If we used the noun itself, we should say, " This composition m 

(I.) O? posaassiv*. 



SYNTAX, 149 

John's." " Whose book is that?" "Eliza's." The position will be still 
more evident, when we consider that both the pronouns in the following 
sentences must have a similar construction : " Is it her or his honor that is 
tarnished ?" " It is not hers, but his" 

Sometimes a substantive in the genitive or possessive case stands alone, 
the latter one by which it is governed being understood; as, "I called at 
the bookseller's," that is, "at the bookseller's shop. 11 

" Religion, the support of adversity, adorns prosperity. 1 ' What is said of 
the nouns religion, and support, in respect to each other ? When is the pre- 
position of joined to a substantive equivalent to the possessive case ? Give 
an example. 
44 My ancestors virtue is not mine." " A mothers tenderness, and a 

(1.) fathers care are natures gifts 

" His brothers offence will not con- for mans advantage." 

demn him." **A mans manners' frequently in* 

" I will not destroy the city for ten fluence his fortune." 

sake." "Wisdoms precepts' form the 

"Nevertheless, Asa his heart (2.) good mans interest and hap- 

was perfect with the Lord." piness." 



44 They slew Varus, he that was 44 They slew Varus, who was him 
mentioned before." that I mentioned before." 

1. If several nouns come together in the genitive (3.) case, the apostrophe 
with s is annexed to the last, and understood to the rest ; as, " John and 
Eliza's books;" " This was my father, mother and uncle's advice." But 
when any words intervene, perhaps on account of the increased pause, the 
sign of the possessive should be annexed to each ; ae, Si They are John's 
as well as Eliza's books ;" " I had the physician's, the surgeon's and tka 
apothecary's assistance." 

11 John's and Eliza's books." Will you correct this sentence, and giv8 
:he Rule for it ? 

1. 
"It was* the men's, (4.) women's "This measure gained the king, 
(5.) and children's lot to suffer as well as the people's appro- 

great calamities." bation." 

"Peter's, John's and Andrew's "Not only the counsel's and at- 
occupation, was that of fisher- torney's but the judge's opinion 

men." also, favored his cause." 

2. In poetry, the additional 5 is frequently omitted, but the apostrophe re- 
tained, in the same manner as in substantives of the plural number ending 
in s ; as, " The wrath of Peleus' son." This seems not so allowable in 
prose, .which the following erroneous example will demonstrate: " Moses* 
minister;" " Phinehas' wife ;" " Festus came into Felix' room ;" " These 
answers were made to the witness' questions." But in cases which would 
give too much of the hissing sound, or increase the difficulty of n^ununcia- 
tion, the omission takes place even in prose; as, "For righteousness'' 
eake ;" " For conscience' sake." 

Is the additional s ever omitted ? Give an example. 

2. 

And he cast himself down at "If ye suffer for righteousness'* 
Jesus feet." sake, happy are ye." 

w Moses rod wa3 turned into a "Ye should be subject for con. 
serpent." science's sake." 

"For Herodias sake, his brother 
Philips wife." 

'1 ) Rule I. (2.) " Asa's hea$t." ^3.) Or possessive. (4.) " Men" is her* 

is the possessive case, the apostrophe being understood ; therefore apply Rule t 

l&. i rt 3f*** v.mnke.-n ;" (*l " i'i was ih* lot <?/*." »V«a. 

■J o* 



150 ENGLISH GRAMMAR." 

3. Little explanatory circumstances are particularly awkward between a 
genitive case and the word which usually follows it; as, "She began to 
extol the farmer's, as she called him, excellent understanding." It ought 
to be, " the excellent understanding of the farmer, as she called him." 

" She began to extol the farmer's, as she called him, excellent under* 
standing." Will you correct this sentence, and give the Rule for it I 

3. 

M They very justly condemned the " They implicitly obeyed the pro* 
pruaigal's, as he was called, tector's, as they called him, 

senseless and extravagant con- imperious mandates." 

duct." (1.) 

4. When a sentence consists of terms signifying a name and an office, or 
&l any expressions by which one part is descriptive or explanatory of the 
3tker, it may occasion some doubt to which of them the sign of the genitive 
ease should be annexed ; or whether it should be subjoined to them both. 
Thus, some would say, "I left the parcel at Smith's the bookseller ;" others, 
" at Smith the bookseller's ;" and perhaps others, " at Smith's the book- 
seller's." The first of these forms is most agreeable to the English idiom ; 
and if the addition consists of two or more words, the case seems to be less 
dubious ; as, "I left the parcel at Smith's,' the bookseller and stationer." But 
as this subject requires a little further explanation, to make it intelligible to 
the learners, we shall add a few observations tending to unfold its principles. 

A phrase in which the words are so connected and dependent, as to admit 
of no pause before the conclusion, necessarily requires the genitive sign at 
or near the end of the phrase ; as, " Whose prerogative is it f " " It is the 
king of Great Britain's;" "That is the duke of Bridgewater's canal;" 
" The bishop of LandafTs excellent book;" " The Lord Mayor of Lon- 
don's authority ;" " The captain of the guard's house." 

When words in apposition follow each other in quick succession, it seems 
also most agreeable to our idiom, to give the sign of the genitive a similar 
situation ; especially if the noun which governs the genitive be expressed ; 
as, " The emperor Leopold's ;" " Dionysius the tyrant's;" "For David 
my servant's sake;" "Give me John the Baptist's head;" "Paul the 
apostle's -advice." But when a pause is proper, and the governing noun not 
expressed ; and when the latter part of the sentence is extended ; it appears 
to be requisite tbat the sign should be applied to the first genitive, and un- 
derstood to the other; as, " I reside at lord Stormont's, my old patron and 
benefactor;" "Whose glory did he emulate? He emulated Caesar's, the 
greatest general of antiquity." In the following sentences, it would be very 
awkward to place the sign either at the end of each of the clauses, or at the 
end of the latter one alone : " These psalms are David's, the king, priest, 
and prophet of the Jewish people ;" " We staid a month at lord Lyttleton's, 
the ornament of his country, and the friend of every virtue." The sign of 
the genitive case may very properly be understood at the end of these mem- 
bers, an ellipsis at the latter part of sentences being a common construction 
in our language » as the learner will see by one or two examples : " They 
wished to submit, but he did not;" that is, " he did not wish to submit.'* 
" He said it was their concern, but not his ;" that is, not his concern." 

If v/e annex the sign of the genitive to the end of the last clause only, we 
shall perceive that a resting-place is wanted, and that the connecting circum- 
stance is placed too remotely, to be either perspicuous or agreeable ; as, 
" Whose glory did he emulate 1 He emulated Caesar, the greatest general of 
antiquity's ;" " These psalms are David, the king, priest, and prophet of the 
Jewish people's." It is much better to say, " This is Paul's advice, the Chris- 
tian hero, and great apostle of the gentiles," than " This is Paul the Christian 
hero, and great apostle of the gentiles' advice." On the other hand, the ap 
plication of the genitive sign to both or all of the nouns in apposition, would 
be generally harsh and displeasing, and perhaps hi some cases incorrect ; 
«o» "The emperor's Leopold's ;" * King's George's;" "Charles's the 

(1.) " th$ **«**£**•.*' 4r.e ** qf tht prodigal, *« hs w«* «aU#*L** 



SYNTAX. 151 

Second's;" 4t The parcel was left at Smith's the bookseller's and station- 
er's." Th*. rules which we have endeavored to elucidate wiL prevent the 
inconvenience of both these modes of expression ; and they appear to bs 
simple, perspicuous, and consistent with the idiom of the language. 

Which is most agreeable to the English idiom, to say, " Smith's the 
bookseller," or, " Smith the bookseller's ?" When the words are connect- 
ed and dependent, where is the genitive (1.) sign to be placed? 

When words in apposition follow each other in quick succession, wfcsre 
should the sign of the genitive be placed ? What effect is perceived if we 
annex the sign of the genitive to the end of the last clause only of the sen- 
tence ? Give an example. What is the effect of applying the genitive sign 
4*0 both or all the nouns in apposition ? Give an example. 

4. 
" I bought the knives at Johnson's " 1 will not for David's thy father's 
(2.) the cutler's." (3.) sake." 

M The silk was purchased at Brown's .,„ . , c * ± . 

4l , r i 7 j i i , ,. w He took refuse at the governor, 

the mercer s and haberdasher ■$. ,, , . , & . .. fe , „ ' 

u t j x? u *t m the king s representative s. 

".Lord reversnam the generals fe r 

tent." (4.) , " Whose (5.) works are these T 

K This palace had been the grand They are Cicero, the most elo- 

sultan's Mahomet's." quent of men's." 

5. The English genitive has often an unpleasant sound ; so that we daily 
make more use of the particle of, to express the same relation. There k 
something awkward in the following sentences, in which this method has 
not been taken: " The general, in the army's name, published a declara- 
tion ;" " The commons' vote ;" " The lords' house ;" " Unless he is very 
ignorant of the kingdom's condition." It were certainly better to say, " In 
the name of the army;" " The votes of the commons ;" " The house of 
lords ;" " The condition of the kingdom." It is also rather harsh to use 
tvvo English genitives with the same substantive ; as, " Whom he acquaint- 
ed with the pope's and the king's pleasure." " The pleasure of the pope 
and the king," would have been better. 

We sometimes meet with three substantives dependent on one another, 
and connected by the preposition of applied to each of them; as, " The 
severity of the distress of the son of the king, touched the nation;" but 
this mode of expression is not to be recommended. It would be better to 
say, " The severe distress of the king's son touched the nation." We 
have a striking instance of this laborious mode of expression, in the follow- 
ing sentence : " Of some of the books of each of these classes of litera- 
ture, a catalogue will be given at the end of the work." 

"In the army's name." How may this expression be altered for the 
oetter ? 

5. 

" The world's government is not " It was necessary to have both ihz 

left to chance." (6.) physician's and the surgeon's 

" She married my son's wife's bro- advice." (9.) 

ther." (7.) " The extent of the prerogative of 

fe This is my wife's brother's part- the king of England is suf- 

ner's house." (8.) ficiently ascertained." 

6. In some cases, we use both the genitive termination and the preposition 
#f ; as, " It is a discovery of Sir Isaac Newton's." Sometimes, indeed, un- 
less we throw the sentence into another form, this method is absolutely neces- 
sary, in order to distinguish the sense, and to give the idea of property, strict- 

:l.j Or possessive. (2.) " Johnson's shop." Rule I. (3.) " cutler." See 

.V-we I. under this Rule. (4.) " The tent of lord," &c. (5.) 431. (b.) " T%? 

fmarninent of the world" (7.) " the brother of my son's wife." (8.) " 7'ACf 

SJitsa hslonjrg te the partntr qf §a# wif^t broth-try (9.) • th» advise both <j#™ 



152 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

ly so called, which is the most important of the relations expressed by tha 
genitive case ; for the expressions, •' This picture of my friend/' and, " This 
picture of my friend's," suggest very different ideas. The latter only is that 
of property, in the strictest sense. The idea would, doubtless, be conveyed 
in a better manner, by saying, " This picture, belonging to my friend." 

When this double genitive, as some grammarians term it, is not necessary 
to distinguish the sense, and especially in a grave style, it is generally omit- 
ted. Except to prevent ambiguity, it seems to be allowable only in caseg 
which suppose the existence of a plurality of subjects of the same kind. In 
the expressions, '* A subject of the emperor's ;" " A sentiment of my bro* 
ther's ;" more than one subject, and one sentiment, are supposed to belong 
to the possessor. But when this plurality is neither intimated, nor neces- 
sarily supposed, the double genitive, except as before mentioned, should not<> 
be used ; as, " This house of the governor is very commodious ;" " The 
crown of the king was stolen;" " That privilege of the scholar was never 
abused." But, after all that can be said for this double genitive, as it is 
termed, some grammarians think that it would be better to avoid the use 
of it altogether, and to give the sentiment another form of expression. 

Are there any cases in which we use both the genitive termination and the 
preposition of ? Give an example. Is this double genitive ever omitted ? 



" That picture of the king's does " This estate of the corporation's 20 
not much resemble (1.) him." much encumbered." 

** These pictures of the king (2.) " That i-s the eldest son of the king 
were sent to him from Italy." of England's." 

7. When an entire clause of a sentence, beginning with a participle of the 
present tense, is used as one name, or to express one idea or circumstance, 
the noun en which it depends may be put in the genitive case : thus, instead 
of saying, " What is the reason of this person dismissing his servant so 
hastily ?" that is, " What ia the reason of this person in dismissing his ser- 
vant so hastily?" we may say, and perhaps ought to say, " What is the 
reason of this person's dismissing of his servant so hastily ?" just as we 
say, " What i3 the reason of this person's hasty dismission of his servant?" 
So also, we say, " I remember it being reckoned a great exploit ;" or, more 
properly, " I remember its being reckoned," &c. The following sentence 
is correct and proper: " Much will depend on the pupil's composing, but 
more on his reading frequently." It would not be accurate to say, "Much 
will depend on the pupil composing," &c. We also properly say, " This 
will be the effect of the pupil's composing frequently ;" instead of, " of the 
pupil composing frequently. 

" What is the reason of this person dismissing his servant so hastily?" 
Will you correct this sentence, and give the rule for it ? 



M What (3.) can be the cause of the the Hollanders their throwing 

parliament neglecting so im- off the monarchy of Spain, 

poriant a business." and their withdrawing entire- 

** Much depends on this rule being ly their allegiance to thai 

observed." crown." 

44 The time of William making " If we alter the situation of any of 

the experiment, at length ar- the words, we shall presently 

rived." be sensible of the melody suffer- 

H It is very probable that this as- »ng." 

sembly was called, to clear "Such will ever be the effect cf 

some doubt which the king youth associating with vici*&i 

had about the lawfulness of companions." 

(1.) 386. C2) O. u These pistufSM bfl-m^i^^ to tk* itn^." fc*. (3.* Rul» T^ 



SYNTAX. 153 

J&t/XiS VIII. 

Corresponding witn Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XL 

Active transitive verbs govern the objective t ase. 

Is EngUsb, the nominative case, denoting the subject, usually goes bcforo 
tlhi verb ; and the objective case, denoting the object, follows the verb ac 
tivo ; and it is the order that determines the case in nouns ; as, " Alexander 
conquered the Persians." But the pronoun, having a proper form for each 
of those cases, is sometimes, when it is in the objective case, placed before 
the verb ; and, when it is in the nominative case, follows the object and 
verb ; as " Whom ye ignorantly worship, him declare I unto you." 

This position, of the pronoun sometimes occasions its proper case and 
government to be neglected ; as in the following instances: " Who should 
I esteem more than the wise and good?" " By the character of those who 
you choose for your friends, your own is likely to be formed." Those are 
tkj persons who he thought true to his interests." " Who should I see the 
other day but my old friend?" ''Whosoever the court favors." In all 
these places, it ought to be whom, the relative beuig governed in the objective 
ease by the verbs esteem, choose, thought, &,c. " lie, who, under all proper 
circumstances, has the boldness to speak truth, choose for thy friend;" it 
should be " him who," &c. 

Verbs neuter and intransitive do not act upon, or govern, nouns and pro- 
nouns. "He sleeps," "they muse," &c, are not transitive. They are, 
therefore,, not followed by an objective case, specifying the object of an ac- 
tion. But- when this case, or an object of action, comes after such verbs, 
though it may carry the appearance of being governed by them, it is affected 
by a preposition or some other word understood; as, "He resided many 
years [that is, for or during many years] in that street ;" " He rode several 
miles [that is, for or through the space of several miles] on that day;" 
"He lay an hour [that is, during an hour] in great torture." In the 
phrases, "To dream a dream," "To live a virtuous life," "To run a 
race," "To walk the horse," "To dance the child," the verbs certainly 
assume a transitive form, and may not, in these cases, be improperly de- 
nominated transitive verbs. 

How is the nominative case usually known in English ? How the objec- 
tive ? Do neuter verbs govern nouns and pronouns? In the phrase, " Eff 
resided many years in that street," hew do you parse years ? When verba 
naturally neuter assume a transitive fbim, what may they then be called ? 
44 They who opulence has made "She that is idle and mischievous, 
proud, and who luxury has reprove sharply." 

corrupted, cannot relish the " Who did they send to him on so 
ciraple pleasures of nature." important an errand ?" 

M You have reason to dread his " That is the friend (4.) who you 
wrath, which one day (1.) will must receive cordially, and who 

destroy ye both." you cannot esteem too highly." 

u Who have I reason to love so (2.) " He invited my brother and I to 
much (2.) as this friend (3.) of see and examine (3.) his li- 

my youth ?" brary." 

* Ye % who were dead, hath he " He who committed the offence* 
quickened." you should correct, not I, whs 

" V/ho did they entertain co free- am innocent." 

ly?" "We should fear and obey the 

w The man who he raised from ob- Author of our being, even He 

scurity, is dead." who has power to reward or 

"'Ye only have I known of all the punish us forever." 

families of the earth." " They who he had most (5.) in- 

'• He and they we know, but who j area, lie had the greatest reasoa 

(4) are you ?" to love." 

fi> *»'.• xx n~"~~"~f2.> kriv^h (?. ) Rut* *T~~"~ '^Z)~uu\«~¥v r r fs.i &>* ' 



154 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

1. Some writers, however, use certain neuter or intransitive verbs as if 
they were transitive, putting after them the objective case, agreeably to the 
French construction of reciprocal verbs ; but this custom is so foreign to the 
idiom of the English tongue, that it ought not to be adopted or imitated, 
The following are some instances of this practice : " Repenting him of hia 
design.' " The king soon found reason to repent him of his provoking 
s-ucn dangerous enemies." "The popular lords did not fail to enlarge 
themselves on the subject." " The nearer hi3 successes approached him io 
the throne." " Go, flee thee away into the land of Judah." " I think it 
b}" 'io means a fit and decent thing to vie charities," &c. " They hav* 
fepciit their whole time and pains to agree the sacred with the profane 
chronology." - 

" Repenting him of his design." Will you repeat the note which shows 
this sentence to be incorrect ? 

1. 
* Though he now takes pleasure in before him, the humbler he 

them, he will one day (1.) re- grew." 

pent him (2») of indulgences so " It will be very difficult to agree 
unwarrantable." hi3 conduct with (3.) the prin- 

a The nearer his virtues approach- ciples he professes." 

ed him to the greai example • 

2. Active-transitive verbs are sometimes as improperly made neutrr oi 
intransitive ; a3, "I must premise with three circumstances ;" " Those who 
think to ingratiate with him by calumniating me." 

" I miurt premise with three circumstances." Will you correct this sen- 
tence, and give the rule for it ? 

S. 
u To ingratiate (4.) with some by " I shall premise with two or tbrp« 
traducing others, makes a base general observation*. " 

and despicable mind." 

3. The neuter verb (5.) is varied like the active ; but, having, in some 
degree, the nature of the passive, it admits, in many instances, of the pas- 
give form, retaining still the neuter signification, chiefly in such verbs ao 
.signify some sort of motion, or change of place or condition; as, "I am 
come ;" "I was gone ;" "lam grov/n ;" "I was fallen." The following 
examples, however, appear to be erroneous, in giving the neuter verbs a 
passive form, instead of an active one : "The rule of our holy religion, from 
which we are infinitely swerved" " The whole obligation of that law and 
covenant was also ccased. ,:> " Whose number was now amounted to three 
hundred." " This mareschal, upon some discontent, was entered into a 
conspiracy against his master." "At the end of a compaign, when half 
the men are deserted or killed. ' It should be, "have swerved," "had 
ceased," &c. 

" I am come." Why should net this be " I have come" ? 

3. 

11 If guch maxims and such prac- " The mighty rivals are now at 
tices (6.) prevail, what has length agreed." 

(7.) become of decency and " The influence of his corrupt ex- 
virtue ?" ample was (8.) then entirely 

84 1 have come, according to the ceased." 

time proposed ; but I have " He was entered into the con- 
fallen upon an evil hour." nection before the consequences 

were , considered. " 

(1.) Rule XXII. (2.) " repent of." (3.) " to make agree iciih," ice. 

(A. " ingratiate ourselves." (5.) By neuter and active, Mr. Murray here means 

what in this work are styled intransitive and transitive verba. ■» (6.) Rule XL 

'Y.i " ?•# becooae." (8.) " had " 



SYNTAX. 155. 

Rule XV. When two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, 
signifying the sai$e thing, come together, they are put by appo- 
sition in the same case 

9£r The examples which follow may be corrected by this Rule or the follow- 
ing Note. 

4. The verb io be, through all its variations, has the same case after it a? 
that which next precedes it. " / am he whom they invited." " It may he 
{or, it might have been) he, but it cannot be, (or, could not have been) .?.' 
" It is impossible to be they." " It seems to have been he who conducted 
himself so wisely." M It appeared to be she that transacted the' business." 
" I understood it to be him" " I believe it to, have been them" " We at 
first took it to be her ; but were afterwards convinced that it was not she." 
" He is not the person who it seemed he was." " He is really the person 
who he appeared to he." " She is not now the woman whom they repre- 
sented her to have been." "Whom do you fancy him to be?" By these 
examples, it appears that this substantive verb has no government of case ; 
but serves, in all its forms, us a conductor to the cases ; so that the two 
cases which., in the construction of the sentence, are the next before and 
after it, must always be alike. Perhaps this subject will be more intelligible 
to the learner, by observing, that the words in the cases preceding and fol- 
lowing the verb to be, may be said to be in apposition to each other. Thus, 
in the sentence, " I understood it to be him," the words it and him are in 
apposition ; that is, " they refer to the same thing, and are in the same case." 

The following sentences contain deviations from the rule, and exhibit the 
pronoun in a wrong case. " It might have been him, but there is no proof 
of it." " Though I was blamed, it could not have been me." " I saw one 
whom I took to be she." "She is the person, who I understood it to have 
been." " Who do you think me to be ?" " Whom do men say that I am ?" 
" And whom think ye that I am ?" 

Passive verbs, which signify naming, &c, have the same case before and 
after them; as, "He was called Caesar;" " She was named Penelope;" 
"Homer is styled the prince of poets ;" "James was created a duke ;" 
" The general was saluted emperor ;" " The professor was appointed tutor 
to the prince." 

"I am him whom they invited." Will you correct this sentence, and 
give the rule for it 1 

4. 

* u Well may you be afraid ; it is (2.) who conducted the business ; 

him indeed." but I am certain it was not hira." 

li 1 would act the same part, if I " He so much resembled my bro- 

were him, (1.) or in his situa- ther, that, at first sight, I took 

tion." it to be he." 

u Search the Scriptures, for in them " Afler ail their professions, is it 

ye think ye have eternal life ; possible to be them ?" 

and they are them which testify " It could not have been her, for 

of me." she always behaves discreet- 

* Be composed : it is me : you h&ve ly." 7 

no cause for fear." " If it was not him, who do you 
w I cannot tell who has befriended imagine it to have been ?" 

me, unless it is him from whom " Who do you think him to be ?'* 

I have received many benefits." " Whom do the people say that we 
• 4 1 know no*, whether it were them are ?" 

* When the verb to be is understood, it has the same case, before and after it, as 
when it is expressed ; as, " He seems the leader of the party ;" " He shall continue 
Etewa-d ;" " They appointed me executor ;" " I supposed him a man of learning ;" 
— that is, " He seems to be the leader of the party," &c. Nouns in apposition are 
in the same case ; as, " We named the man Pompey ;" "They may term Charles a 
visionary, but they cannot call him a deceiver ;" " Hortensius died a martyi ;" " The 
pentle Sidney lived the shepherd's friend." 

f 1.) tt«l« XV. (2.) " tley roer$ th».penma. t * 



156 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

5. The auxiliary let governs the objective case ; as, " Let him bewar© ; 
^ Let us judge candidly ;" M Let them not presume ;" " Let George Btu&$ 
bis lesson." 

iJ Let us judge candidly." In what case is us ? What is the rule I 

5. 
* Whatever (1,) others do, let (2.) " Let them and we unite to oppast 
thou and / act wisely." this growing (3,) evil." 

1¥LB ZZX. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XII. 

He infinitive mood may be governed by verbs, participles, 
adjectives, nouns and pronouns. 

The preposition to, though generally used before the latter verb, is some- 
imes properly omitted ; as, " I heard him say it ;" instead of, " to say it.'* 

The verbs which have commonly other verbs following them, in tha 
infinitive mood, without the sign to, are, bid, dare, need, make, see, hear, 
feel, and also let, not used as an auxiliary ; and perhaps a few others ; as, 
" I bade him do it ;" " Ye dare not do it ;" "I saw him do it ;" " I heard 
him say it ;" " Thou lettest him go." 

Will you name the verbs which have commonly other verbs in the infini- 
tive mood after them, without the sign to ? 

" It is better (4.) live on a lit- " I need not to solicit him to do a 

tie, (5.) than outlive a good kind action." 

deal." "I dare not to proceed so hastily, 

f * You ought not walk too hastily." lest 1 should give offence." 

**I wish him not wrestle with his "I have seen some )^oung persons 

happiness." to conduct themselves very dis- 

creet V 

1. In the following passages, the word to, the sign of the infinitive mood, 
where it is distinguished by Italic characters, is superfluous and improper : 
" I have observed some satirists to use," &c. " To see so many to make 
so little conscience of so great a sin." " It cannot but be a delightful spec- 
tacle to God and angels, to see a young person, besieged by powerful temp- 
tations on every side, to acquit himself gloriously, and resolutely to hold out 
against the most violent assaults ; to behold one in the prime and flower Gi" 
his age, that is courted by pleasures and honors, by the devil, and all the 
bewitching vanities of the world, to reject all these, and to cleave stead- 
fastly unto God." 

This mood has also been improperly used in the following places : " I am 
not like other men, to envy the talents I cannot reach." ' ' Grammarians have 
denied, or at least doubted, them to be genuine." " That all our doings may 
be ordered by thy governance, to do always what is righteous in thy sight." 

The infinitive is frequently governed by adjectives, substantives, and par- 
ticiples ; as, " He is eager to learn ;" " She is worthy to be loved ;" " They 
have a desire to improve ;" " Endeavoring to persuade." 

The infinitive mood has much of the nature of a substantive, expressing 
the action itself which the verb signifies, as the participle has the nature of 
an adjective. Thus the infinitive mood does the office of a substantive in 
different cases: — in the nominative ; as, " To play is pleasant^" — in the 
©bjective ; as, " Boys love to play ;" "For to will is present with me , 
but to perforin that which is good, I find not." 

The. infinitive mood is often made absolute, or used independently on the 
rest of the sentence, supplying the place of the conjunction that with the 
potential mood ; as, "To confess the truth, I was in fault;" "To begin 
with the first ;' " To proceed ;" " To conclude ;" — that is, " That I may 
confess," &c. 

(I.) Rule Vni. fO.) Imp. Eale VT. (3.) 553. (4.) * to liver Rule X tl 



SYNTAX. 157 

" I have observed soma satirists to use," &c. What is incorrect in this 
sentence ? 

In the expression, " He is eager to learn/' will you parse to learn? What 
is the rule ? (1.) " To play is pleasant." Will you parse to play, and give 
a rule tor it ? (I.) " To confess the truth, I was in fault." How is to con- 
fess parsed '( What is the rule for it ? (2.) 

I, 

*It is a great support to virtue, " To see (6.) young persons who are 
when we seo a good mind to courted by health and pleasure, 
maintain (3.) its patience and to resist all the allurements 
tranquillity, under injuries and of vice, and to steadily pursue 
affliction, and to cordially for- virtue and knowledge, is cheer- 
give its oppressors." ing and delightful to every good 

*It is the difference of their con- mind." 

duct, which makes us to ap- " They acted with so much reserve, 

prove the one, and to reject the that some persons doubted them 

other." to be sincere." (7.) 

M We should not be like many per- " And the multitude wondered, when 

sons, to (4.) depreciate the vir- they saw the lame to walk, and 

tues we (5.) do not possess," the blind to see." (8.) 

E¥LE ZXlTX. 

Coi responding with Murray's Gramma*, 
RULE XITI. 

In the use of words and phrases ivkic?t 9 in point of time? 
relate to each other, a due regard to that relation 
should be observed. Instead of saying, " The Lord 
hath given, and the Lord hath taken away," we 
should say, " The Lord gave, and the Lord hath 
taken away." Instead of, " I remember the family 
more than twenty years/' it should be, "I have re- 
membered the family more than twenty years." 

It is not easy to give particular rules for the management of the moods and 
tenses of verbs with respect to one another, so that they may be proper and 
consistent. The best rule that can be given, is this very general one—" To 
observe what the sense necessarily lequires." It may, however, be of U38 
to give a few examples of irregular construction. " The la3t week I in- 
tended to have written" is a very commcn phrase ; the infinitive being in 
the past time, as well as the verb which it follows. But it is certainly wrong; 
for how long soever it now is since I thought of writing, to write was then 
present to me, and must still be considered as present, when I bring back 
that time, and the thoughts of it. It ought, therefore, to be, " The last week 
I intended to write. 11 The following sentences are also erroneous: "I 
cannot excuse the remissness of those whose business it should have been, 
as it certainly was their interest, to have interposed their good oflices." 
" There were two circumstances which made it necessary for them to have 
lost no time." ',' History painters would have found it difficult to have in- 
vented such a species of beings." They ought to be, to interpose, to lose, 
to invent. "On the morrow, because he would have known the certainty 
wherefore he was accused of the Jews, he loosed nim." It ought to be. 
"because he would know, 11 or, rather, " being willing to know. 11 "The 

a.) Rule XII. (2.) Note XII. LVIII. (3.) For to maintain read maintain* 

(4.) "wAc." (5.)"tAey" (6.) Note XIII. (7.) " their sincerity, « 

{8.) " persons who had been lame, ttalHn^ : and those who had teen blind, teeing" 

14 



158 ENGLISH GRA M M A R . 

blind man said unto him, Lord, that I might receive my sigh:." " If b* 
any means 1 might attain unto the resurrection of the dead." May, in boui 
places, would have been better. "From this biblical knowledge, he ap- 
pears to study the Scriptures with great attention ;" " to have studied," &.c. 
" I feared that I should have lost it, before I arrived at the city ;" " sliould 
lose it." "I had rather w T alk ;" it should be, "I would rather walk." " It 
would have afforded me no satisfaction, if I could perform it ;" it should be, 
* * if" I could have performed it ;" or, "It would afford me no satisfaction, ii I 
could perform it.*' 

To preserve consistency in the time of verbs, we must recollect that, in 
the subjunctive mood, the present and imperfect tenses often carry with 
Chem' a future sense ; and that the auxiliaries should and would, in the im- 
perfect times, are used to express the present or future, as well as the past. 

" I intended to have written." "Will you point out the incorrectness of 
this sentence, and give a rule for it f 

46 The next new year's day 1 shall hold on all the opportunities, 

be (1.) at school three years." which the imprudence, weak- 

** And he that was dead (2.) sat up, ness, or necessities of princes 

and began to speak." afford it, to extend its author- 

H I should be obliged to him, if ity." 

he will gratify me in that par- " Fierce as he moved, his silver 

tieular." shafts resound." 

"And the multitude wondered, "They maintained that scripture 

when they saw the dumb to conclusion, that all mankind 

speak, the maimed to be whole, rise from one head." 

the lame walk, and the blind "John will earn his wages when 

seeing." (3.) his service is completed." 

** I have compassion on the mul- " Ye will not come unto me that 

titude, because they continue ye might have life." 

with me now three days." " Be that as it will, he cannot justi- 

M In the treasury belonging to the fy his conduct." 

cathedral in this city is pre- "I have been at London a year, 
served (4.) with the greatest and seen the king last sum- 
veneration, for upwards of six mer." 

hundred years, a dish which "x\fter we visited London, we re- 

they pretend to be made of turned, content and thankful, 

emerald." to our retired and peacefai 

K The court of Rome gladly laid habitation." 

1. It is proper further to observe, that verbs of the infinitive mood in the 
following form — to ivrite, to be writing, and to he toritten — always denote 
something contemporary with the time of the governing verb, or subsequent 
to it ; but when verbs of that mood are expressed as follows — co have been 
writing, to have written, and to have been written — they always denote some- 
thing antecedent to the time of the governing verb. This remark is thought 
to be of importance ; for, if o\ily attended to, it will, in most cases, be suf- 
ficient to direct us in the relative application of these tenses. 

The following sentence is properly and analogically expressed: "I found 
him better than 1 expected to find him." " Expected to have found him," 
is irreconcilable alike to grammar and to sense. Indeed, all verbs expressive 
of hope, desire intention, or command, must invariably be followed by the 
present, and not the perfect of the infinitive. Every person would perceive 
an error in this expression — " It is long since I commanded him to have dont 
it," yet "expected to have found" is no better, It is as clear that the 
finding must be posterior to the expectation, as that the obedience must be 
posterior to the command. 

In the sentence which follows, the verb is with propriety put in the perfect 
Sense of the infinitive mood : " It would have afforded me great pleasure, aa 

(1.) " shall have been." (9.) " had been dead." (3.) See the la*t example undsi 
*&© preceding Rule. (4.) "a dJsb has been preserved" 



8Y iNTAX, 159 

often as I reflected upon it, to have been the messenger of such intelligence.' 
As the message, in this instance, was antecedent to the pleasure, and not 
contemporary with it, the verb expressive of the message must denote thai 
antecedence, by being in the perfect of the infinitive, (i the message and 
the pleasure had been referred to as contemporary, the subsequent verb 
would, with equal propriety, have been put in the present of the infinitive j 
as, "It would have afforded me great pleasure, to be the messenger of such 
intelligence." In the former instance, the phrase in question is equivalent 
to these words — " If I had been the messenger ;" in the latter instance, to 
this expression — " Being the messenger." 

It is proper to inform the learner, that, in order to express the past time 
with the defective verb ought, the perfect of the infinitive must always be 
used ; as, " lie ought to have done it." When we use this verb, this is the 
only possible way to distinguish the past from the present. 

In support of the positions advanced under this rule, we can produce th$ 
sentiments of eminent grammarians ; amongst whom are Lowth and Camp- 
be' 1 , But there are some writers on grammar who strenuously maintain,. 
that the governed verb in the infinitive ought to be in the past tense, when 
the verb which governs it is in the past time. Though this cannot be ad- 
mitted, in the instances which are controverted under this rule, cr in any in- 
stances of a similar nature ; yet there can be no doubt that, in many cases, 
in which the thing referred to preceded the governing verb, it would be pro- 
per and allowable. We may say, " From a conversation I once had with 
him, he appeared to have studied Homer with great care and judgment." It 
would be proper also to say, "From his conversation, he appears to hav$ 
studied Homer with great care and judgment*;" " That unhappy man is sup- 
posed to have die<? by violence." These examples are not only consistent 
with our rule, but they confirm and illustrate it. It is the tense of the 
governing verb only, that marks what is called the absolute time ; the tense 
of the verb governed marks solely its relative time with respect to the other. 

To assert, as some writers do, that verbs in the infinitive mood havs no 
lenses, no relative distinctions of present, past and future, is inconsistent 
with just grammatical views of the subject. That these verbs associate with 
verbs in all the tenses, is no proof of their having no peculiar time of thei'r 
own. Whatever period the governing verb assumes, whether present, past, 
or future, the governed verb in the infinitive always respects that period, 
and its time is calculated from it. Thus, the time of the infinitive may bo 
before, after, or the same as, the time of the governing verb, according as 
the thing signified by the infinitive is supposed to be before, after, or present 
with the thing denoted by the governing verb. It is, therefore, with great 
propriety, that tenses are assigned to verbs of the infinitive mood. The 
point of time from which they are computed, is of no consequence ; since 
present, past, and future, are completely applicable to them. 

We shall conclude our observations under this rule, by remarking, that, 
though it is often proper to use the perfect of tne infinitive after the govern- 
ing verb, yet there are particular cases in which it would be better to give 
the expression a different form. Thus, instead of saying, " I wish to havo 
written to him sooner," " I then wished to have written to him sooner," 
" He will one day wish to have written sooner;" it would be more per- 
spicuous and forcible, as well as more agreeable to the practice of good 
writers, to say, " I wish that I had written to him sooner," " I then wish- 
ed that I had written to him sooner," " He will one day wish that he had 
written sooner." Should the justness of these strictures be admitted, there 
would still be numerous occasions for the use of the past infinitive-; a% we 
*nay perceive by a few examples : " It would ever afterwards have been a 
source of pleasure, to have found him wise and virtuous." " To have 
deferred his repentance longer, would have disqualified hirn for repenting 
at all." " They will then see, that to have faithfully performed their duty, 
would have been their greatest consolation." 

" I expected to nave found him." Will you correct this sentence, and give 
a rule for it. ? What tense of the infinitive must be used to express past time 
with the defective verb ought ? Give an example. Js it proper ever to mm 
the perfect of the infinitive after xhe governing verb ? Give an ex&mpJa. 



160 



E N G L 1 S II GRA M MAR, 



" I purpose to gj to London in a 
few months, and after I shall 
finish (1.) my business there, 
to proceed (2.) to America." 

44 These prosecutions of William 
seem to be the most iniquitous 
measures pursued by the court 
during the time that the use of 
parliaments was suspended." 

* From the little conversation I had 

with him, he appeared to have 
been a man of letters," 

* 1 always intended to have reward- 

ed my son according to his 
merit." 

m It would, on reflection, have given 
me great satisfaction, to relieve 
him from that distressed situa- 
tion." 

w li required so much care, that I 
thought I should have lost it 
before I reached home." 

"We have done no more than it 
was our duty to have done." 

H R «j would have assisted one of his 
friends, if he could do it with- 
out injuring the other; bat as 
that could not have been done, 
he avoided all interference." 

* Wkint it not be expected that he 

would have defended an au- 
thority, which had been so 



long: exercised without contra 
versy ?" (3.) 

"These enemies of Christianity 
were confounded, whilst they 
were expecting to have found 
an opportunity to have betrayed 
its author." 

" His sea-sickness was so great, 
that I often feared he would 
have died before our arrival." 

M If these persons had intended to 
deceive, they would have takea 
care to have avoided what would 
expose them to the objections 
of their opponents." 

" It was a pleasure to have received 
his approbation of my labors, 
for which I cordially thanked 
him." 

M It would have afforded me still 
greater pleasure, to receive his 
approbation at an earlier period ; 
but to receive (4.) it at all, re- 
flected credit upon me." 

"To be censured hj him, would 
soon have proved an insuper 
able discouragement." 

" Him portioned maids, apprenticed 
orphans blest, 

The young who labor, and the old 
who rest" 

** The doctor, in his lecture, said, that 
fever always produced thirst" 



EUL2! XX\r. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XIV. 



Motive participles from active transitive verbs govern the 
objective case. 



* Esteeming (5.) their$dves wise, 

they became fools." 
•* Suspecting not only ye, but they 

also, I was studious to avoid all 

intercourse." 
K I could not avoid considering, (6.) 



in some degree, they as enemies 
to me ; and he as a suspicious 
friend." 
" From having exposed (7.) hisself 
too freely, in different climates, 
he entirely lost his health." 



I . Participles are sometimes governed by the article ; for the present parti- 
ciple, with the definite article the before it, becomes a substantive, and must 
have the preposition of after it ; as, " These are the rules of grammar, by the 
observing of which, you may avoid mistakes." It would not be proper to 



a ) " shall have finished:' (2.) Rule XX. (3.) " Might it not have b*s* t " &&. 
R..)"U»&m>« received." Not* XIIJ. (5.) Rule XTTI. (6.) Rule VIII. (?.) »1 



SYNTAX. 161 

gay, *by the observing which," nor, "by observing of which ;" but tne 
phVa-vj, without either article/ or preposition, would be right; as, "by ob 
bervit^ which." The article a or an has the same effect; as, " This was 
a, betraying of the trust reposed in him." 

This rule arses from the nature and idiom of our language, and from aa 
plain a principle as any on which it is founded : namely, that a word which 
nas the arricle before it, and the possessive preposition of after it, must be & 
noun ; and, if a noun, it ought to follow the construction of a noun, and nr/ 
to have the regimen of a verb. It is the participial termination of this son 
of words, that is apt to deceive us, and make us treat, them as if they wer& 
of an amphibious species, partly nouns and partly verbs. 

The following are a few examples of the violation of this rule : "He was 
sent to prepare the way by preaching of repentance ;" it ought to be, "by 
the preaching of repentance," or, " by preaching repentance." " By the 
continual mortifying our corrupt affections ;" it should be, " by the continual 
mortifying of,*' or, "by continually mortifying our corrupt affections." 
" They laid out themselves towards the advancing and promoting the good 
of it;" " towards advancing and promoting the good." " It is an over- 
valuing ourselves, to reduce every thing to the narrow measure of our 
capacities;" "it is overvaluing ourselves," or, "an overvaluing of our- 
selves," " Keeping of one day in seven," &c. ; it ought to be, " the keep- 
ing of one day,'' or, " keeping one day." 

A phrase in which the article precedes the present participle, and the pos- 
sessive preposition follows it, will not, in every instance, convey the sam<* 
meaning as would be conveyed by the participle without the article anJ 
preposition. " He expressed the pleasure he had in the hearing of th« 
philosopher," is capable of a different sense from, "He expressed the 
pleasure he had in hearing the philosopher." When, therefore, we wish, 
for the sake of harmony or variety, to substitute one of these phraseologies 
for the other, we should previously consider whether they are perfect!" 
similar m. the sentiments they convey. 

" By the observing of which." Will you parse observing ? Rule for it ? 
What words in this sentence may be omitted with propriety ? Would it W 
pr ipe? to omit one cf them only ? 

I 

By observing of truth, you will to be the most advantageous!? 

command esteem, as well as situated for gaining of wisdom 

secure peace." Poverty turns our thoughts tou 

** He prepared them for this event, much upon the supplying fu 

by tk? sending to them proper wants ; and riches upon the en- 

information." joying our superfluities." 

4 * A person may be great or rich " Pliny, speaking of Cato the Cen 

by chance ; but cannot be wise sor's disapproving the Grecian 

or good without the taking pains orators, expressed himself thus." 

for it." '• Propriety of pronunciation is the 

M Nothing could have made her giving t0 every word that sooad, 

so unhappy, as the marrying which the most polite U££&'s 

a man who possessed such of the language appropriates 

principles.' ; to it." 

"The changing times and seasons, " The not attending (1.) to this rule, 
the removing and setting up is the cause (2.) of a very corn- 
kings, belong to Providence mon error." 
alone." M This was in fact a converting the 

" The middle station of life seem3 deposite to his own use. 

2. The same observations which have been made respecting the effect of 

the article and participle, appear to be applicable to the pronoun and partici- 
ple, when they are similarly associated ; as, " Much depends on their observ- 

fl.) Rule VI. (?.) fru!e XV 

L 14* 



162 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

wg of the rale, and error will be the consequence of their neglecting of it;" 
instead of " their observing the rule, and their neglecting it." We shall per 
eeive this more clearly, if we substitute a noun Cor the pronoun ; as, " Much 
depends upon Tyro's observing of the rule," &c. But, as this construction 
sounds rather harshly, it would, in general, be better to express the senti- 
ment in the following, or some other form : " Much depends on the rule's 
being observed ; and error will be the consequence on its being neglected .*" 
or, " on observing the rule ;" and, "of neglecting it." This remark ma| 
be applied 'to several other modes of expression to be found in this work ; 
which, though they are contended for as strictly correct, are not always the 
mast eligible, on account of their unpleasant sound. 

We sometimes meet with expressions like the following : " Informing cf 
his sentences, he was very exact;" " From calling of names, he proceeded 
to blows." But this is incorrect language ; for prepositions do not, like arti- 
cles and pronouns, convert the participle itself into the nature of a substan- 
tive ; as we have shown above m the phrase, " by observing which." Ana 
yet the participje, with its adjuncts, may be considered as a substantive phrase 
m the objective case, governed by the preposition or verb, expressed or nn 
derstood ; as, "By promising much, and performing but little, we become 
despicable ;" " He studied to avoid expressing himself too severely." 

" Much depends on their observing of the rale." Would this sentence 
be correct if the preposition of were omitted ? Will you repeat the note ? 

2. 
*' There will be no danger of their the directions, that we lost our 

(1.) spoiling their faces, or of way." 

their gaining converts." u In tracing of his history, we dis. 

"For his avoiding that precipice, cover little that is worthy of 

he is indebted to his friend's imitation." 

care." " By reading of books written by 

u U was from our misunderstanding the best authors, his mind be. 

came highly improved." 

3. As the perfect participle and the imperfect tense are sometimes different 
in their form, care must be taken that they be not indiscriminately used. *It 
is frequently said, " He begun," for " he began ;" " He run," for " he 
ran;" " He drunk," for " he drank ;" the participle being here used in- 
stead of the imperfect tense : and much more frequently the imperfect tense 
instead of the participle ; as, " I had wrote," for "I had written ;" "I was 
chose," for " I was chosen ;" " I have eat," for " 1 have eaten." " His 
words were interwove .with sighs ;" " were interwoven." " He would have 
spoke;" "spoken." "He hath bore witness to his faithful servants;" 
" borne." " By tbje means he overrun his guide ;" " overran" " The sun 
has rose ;" * * rtsQJJF ' "His constitution has been greatly shook, but his 
mind is too strong to be shook by such causes ;" "shaken" in both places. 
" They were verses wrote on glass;" "written." "Philosophers have 
often mistook the source of true nappiness ;" it ought to be, " mistaken." 

The participle ending in ed is often improperly contracted by changing ed 
into t ; as, " In good behavior he is not surpast by any pupil of the school ;" 
" She was much distrest;" they ought to be, "surpassed " "distressed" 
Is it correct to say, "He begun" ? What is wrong in the expression? 
Will you repeat Note 3 ? Can the participle ending in ed be contracted to e, 
with propriety? 

3. 
" Bj ioo eager pursuit, he run a " He was greatly heated, and drunk 
great risk of being disappoint- with avidity." 

ed." (2.) " Though his conduct was, in some 

* h.e had not long enjoyed repose, respects, exceptionable, yet he 

before he begun to be weary of dared not commit so great sa 

aaving nothing to do." offence as that which was pro. 

posed to him." 



(1.) Omit " their. " (%.)■ Pr$s. pass, part, used as a. noun — P.i!«» X. 



SYNTAX. 



163 



*A eecond deluge learning thus 

o'errun, 
And the monks finished what the 

Goths begun." 
H If some events had not fell out 

very unexpectedly, I should 

have been present" 
64 He would have went with us, had 

he been invited." 
He returned the goods which he 

had stole, and made all the re- 
paration in his power." 
M They have chose the part of honor 

and virtue." 
K His vices have weakened his mind, 

and broke his health." 
w He had mistook his true interest, 

and found himself forsook by 

his former adherents." 
u The bread that has been eat is 

soon forgot." 
M No contentions have arose amongst 

them since their reconciliation." 
M The cloth had no seam, but was 

wove throughout" 
" The 1? rsach language is spoke in 

every state in Europe. 



1 His resolution was too strong 
to be shook by slight opposi- 
tion." 

4 He was not much restrained after- 
wards, having took improper 
liberties at first." 

4 Ke has not yet wore off the rough 
manners which he brought with 
him." 

'You who have forsook your 
friends, are entitled to no con- 
fidence." 

'They who have bore a part in 
the labor, shall share the re- 
wards." 

* When the rules have been wan- 

tonly broke, there can be no 
plea for favor." 

* He writes as the best authors 

would have wrote, had they 
writ on the same subject." 

' He heapt up great riches, but p«?&l 
his time miserably." 

'He talkt and stampt wife sucfe 
vehemence, that he was sus- 
pected to be insane." 



Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XV. 

Adverbs, though they have no government of case, tense 
Sfc, require an appropriate situation in the sentence 
viz* for the most part, before adjectives, after verbs 
active or neuter, and frequently between the auxiliary 
and the verb ; as, " He made a very sensible dis- 
course ; he spoke unaffectedly and forcibly, and was 
attentively heard by the whole assembly." 

A few instances of erroneous positions of adverbs may serve to illustrats 
the rule. " He must not expect to find study agreeable always ;" " always 
agreeable." " We always find them ready when we want them ;" " we 
tind them always ready," &c. " Dissertations on the prophecies which havs 
remarkably been, fulfilled ;" " which have been remarkably" "Instead oi 
looking contemptuously down on the crooked in mind or in body, we should 
look up thankfully to God, who hath made us better ;" " Instead of looking 
down contemptuously, &,c, we should thankfully look up," 6lc. " If thou 
art blessed naturally with a good memory, continually exercise it;" " na- 
turally blessed," &c. " exercise it continually" 

Sometimes the adverb is placed with propriety before the veft, or at some 
distance after it ; sometimes between the two auxiliaries ; and sometimes a* 
ter them both ; as in the following examples : " Vice always creeps by de- 
grees, and insensibly twines around us those concealed fetters, by which we 
are at last completely bound." " He encouraged the English barons to curry 
fcheir opposition farther ;" " They compelled him to declare that he would 
abjure the realm fo-ever ,*" instead of, " to carry farther their opposition .•" 



164 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

and " to abjure forever the realm." " He has generally been reckoned as 
honest man ;" " The book may always be hacl at sucn a place •" in pre* 
ference to " has been generally," and " may be always." " These rules 
will be clearly understood, after the* have been diligently studied," is pre- 
ferable to, " These rules will clearly be understood, after they have diligently 
been studied." 

From the preceding remarks and examples, it appears that no exact and 
determinate rule can be given for the placing of adverbs, on all occasions. 
The general rule may be of considerable use ; but the easy flow and per- 
spicuity of the phrase, are the things which ought to be chiefly regarded. 

The adverb there is often used as an expletive, or as a word that adds 
nothing to the sense ; in which case it precedes the verb and the nominative 
noun ; as, " There is a person at the door ;" " There are some thieves in 
the house ;" which would be as well, or better, expressed by saying, " A 
person is at the door;" " Some thieves are in the house." Sometimes, it 
is made use of to give a small degree of emphasis to the sentence; as, 
" There was a man sent from God, whose name was John." When it is 
applied in its strict sense, it principally follows the verb and the nominative 
case ; as, " The man stands there. 11 

What word is misplaced in the sentence, "He must not expect to find 
study agreeable always" ? Will you correct the sentence, and give the Rule 
for the position of adverbs ? How is the adverb sometimes placed with re- 
spect to the verb ? With respect to the auxiliary ? 

" He was pleasing not often, (1.) be- " So well educated a boy gives great 

cause he was vain." hopes to his friends." 

"William nobly acted, though he "Not only he found her employ- 
was unsuccessful." ed, but pleased and tranquil 

* We may happily live, though our also." 

possessions are small." " We always should prefer our duty 

* From whence (2.) we may date to our pleasure." 

likewise the period of this " It is impossible continually to be 

event." at work." 

'•It cannot be impertinent or ri- "The heavenly bodies are in mo- 

diculous, therefore, to remon- tion perpetually." 

strate." •* Having not known, or having not 

K He offered an apology, which not considered, the measures pro- 
being admitted, he became sub- posed, he failed of success." 
missive." " My opinion was given on rather 

** These things should be never a (5.) cursory perusal of the 



book." 

* Unless he have more government " It is too common with mankind, 

of himself, he will be always to be • engrossed and overcome 

discontented." totally, by present events." 

H Never (3.) sovereign was (4.) so "When the Romans were pressed 

much beloved by the people." with a foreign enemy, the 

M He was determined to invite back women contributed all their 

the king, and to call together rings and jewels voluntarily, ts 

his friends." assist the government." 

1. The adverb never generally precedes the verb; as, "I never was 
csere ;" "He never conies at a proper time." When an auxiliary is used, 
it is placed indifferently, either before or after this adverb ; as, " He was 
never seen (or never was seen) to laugh from that time." Never seems to 
be improperly used in the following passages: "Ask me never so much 
dowry and gift." "If I make my hands never so clean." " Charm ha 
never so wisely." The word ever would be more suitable to the sense. 

(1,) "nottftenpleasinfr." {%) 58£ (3.) - Afe. M (4.) " «w » - 

(*.) '•« mlker,"- Rule IX 



SYNTAX. 165 

How is the advex'b never generally placed with respect to the verb ? Givs 
an example. Give an example where the word aever is improperly used 
instead of ever. 

i. * 

* They could not persuade him, " If some persons' opportunities were 
though they were never so elo- never so favorable, they would 

quent." be indolent to improve them." 

2. In imitation of the French idiom, the adverb of place where is often 
sed instead of the pronouns relative and a preposition. " They framed* a 
protestation, where they repeated all their former claims ;" i e. " in which 
they repeated." " The king was still determined to run forwards, in the 
3ame course where he was already, by his precipitate career, too fatally ad- 
vanced ;" i. e. " in which he was." But it would be better to avoid this 
mode of expression. 

The adverbs hence, thence, and whence, irnplv a preposition ; for they sig- 
nify, " from this place," " from that place," " from what phce." It seems, 
therefore, strictly speaking, to be improper to join a preposition with them, 
because it is superfluous ; as, ''This is the leviathan, from whence the wita 
of our age are said to borrow their weapons ;" " An ancient author prophe- 
sies from hence." But the origin of these words is little attended to, and 
the preposition from so often used in construction with them, that the omis- 
sion of it, in many cases, would seem stiff, and be disagreeable. 

The adverbs here, there, where, are often improperly applied to verbs sig- 
tjfying motion, instead of the adverbs hither, thither, whither ; as, "Be 
came here hastily;" "They rode there with speed." They should be.. 

He came hither ;" " They rode thither" &c. 

" They framed a protestation where they repeated all their former claims." 
Will you correct this sentence, and repeat Note 2? 



u He drew up a petition, where he " George is active ; he walked 

too freely represented his own there in less than an hour. 1 ' 

merits," (1.) 

■* His follies had reduced him to a " Where arc you all going" in such 

( situation where he had much to haste ?" 

fear, and nothing to hope." " Whither have they been since 

* It is reported that the prince will they left the city ?" 

come here to-morrow." 

3. We have some examples ofjidverbs being used tor substantives : " In 
1687, he erected it into a community of regulars, since when it has begun 
to increase in those countries as a religious order," i. e. "since which 
time" "A little while, and I shall not see you;" i. e. a short time." 
" It is worth their while ;" i. e. " it deserves their time and pains." But 
this use of the word rather suits familiar than grave style. The same may 
be said of the phrase, " To do a thing anyhow ;" i. e. "in any manner :" 
or, " somehow ;" i. e. " in some manner." " Somehow, worthy as th&m 
people are, they are under the influence of prejudice." 

Will you repeat this note, and give an example under it ? 

3. 

44 Charles left the seminary too " Nothing is better worth the while 
early, since when he has (3.) of young persons, than th« 

made very little improve- acquisition of knowledge and 

ment." (2.) virtue." 

(1.) Rule XXII. (2.) " and from that time he," Ice. ; or, " and has tins* maioJ 1 

&*• 63 ) "the time and attention of," 4ul 



106 ENGLISH GRAKlMAR.' 

HPZaSS 111. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 

RULE XVI. 

7ho negatives, in the same simple sentence, are equivalent 
to an affirmative ; as, " Nor did they not perceive him f* 
i. e. " They did perceive him." 

It is better to express an affirmation by a regular affirmative, than by two 
{separate negatives, as in the former sentence ; but when one of the nega- 
tives is joined to another word, as in the latter sentence, the two negatives 
form a pleasing and delicate variety of expression. 

Some writers have improperly employed two negatives instead of one ; 
as, in the following instances : " I never did repent of doing good, nor shall 
not now;" "nor shall I now" "Never no imitator grew up to his 
author ;" " never did any" &c. " I cannot by no means allow him what 
his argument must prove ;" " I cannot by any means," &c. ; or, " I can 
hy no means." " Nor let no comforter approach me ;" " nor let any com- 
forter," &c. " Nor is danger ever apprehended in such a government, no 
more than w T e commonly apprehend danger from thunder or earthquakes;" 
it should be, "any more" " Ariosto, Tasso, Galileo, no more than 
Raphael, were not born in republics;" "Neither Ariosto, Tasso, no? 
Galileo, any more than Raphael, was born in a republic." 

Should we express an affirmation by an affirmative, or by two separate 
negatives ? Will you give an example of the improper use of two negatives f 

* Neither riches nor honors, nor no "Do not interrupt me y ourselves, 

such perishing goods, can satisfy nor let no one disturb my retire 

the desires of an immortal ment." 

spirit." "These people do not judge wise 
** Be honest, nor take no shape nor iy, nor take no proper measure 

semblance of disguise." to effect their purpose." 

" We need not, nor (1.) do not, con- " The measure is so exceptionable, 

fine his operations to narrow that we cannot by no means 

limits." permit it." 

"I am resolved not to comply with " I have received no information on 

the proposal, neither at present, the subject, neither from him 

nor at any other time." nor frcm his friend." 

" There cannot be nothing more " Precept nor discipline is not so 

insignificant than vanity." forcible as example." 

u Nothing never affected her so " The king nor the queen was 

much, as this misconduct of not all deceived in the busi- 

her child." ness." 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XVII. 

Prepositions govern the objective case. 

The following are examples of the nominative case being used instead of 
the objective : "Who servest thou under?" "Who do you speak to?" 
" We are still much at a loss who civil power belongs to." " Who dost 
thou ask for ?" " Associate not with those who none can speak well of." 
In ail these places, it ought to be, " whom" 

The prepositions to and for are often understood, chiefly before the pro 
fcouns : as, " Give me the book ;" " Get me some paper ;" that is, * U me," 



SYNTAX. 167 

'for me." " Wo is me ;*' i. e. " to me." " He was banished England ;" 
b/e. "from England." 

" Who do you speak to?" Will you correct this sentence, and explain 
whv it is wrong ? " Give me the book." What is understood in this sen- 
tence ? 
" We are all accountable creatures, to ? Who does he ofFsr such 

each for hisse If" language to ?" 

u ' They willingly, and oftheirselves, "It was not he that they were so 

endeavored to make up the dif angry with." 

ference." " What concord can subsist between 

4 He laid the suspicion upon some- those who commit crimes, and 

body, I know not who in the " they (2.) who abhor them ?" 

company." " The person who I travelled with v 

W I hope it is not I who (1.) he is has sold the horse which he rode 

displeased with." on during our journey." 

" To poor we, there is not much "-It is not I he is engaged with." 

hope remaining." "Who did he receive that inteili- 

"Does that boy know who he speaks gence from ?" 

1. The preposition is often separated' from the relative which it governs ; 
as, "Whom wilt thou give it to f ' instead of, " To whom wilt thou give 
it f ■ "He is an author whom I am much delighted with ;" " The world is 
too polite to shock authors with a truth, which generally their booksellers 
are the first that inform them of." Thi&is an idiom to which our language 
is strongly inclined ; it prevails in common conversation, and suits very well 
with the familiar style in writing : but the placing of the preposition before 
the relative is more graceful, as well as more perspicuous, and agrees muck 
better with the solemn and elevated style. 

Will you repeat this Note, and give an example under it ? 

1. 
" To have no one whom we heartily " He is a friend whom 1 am highly 
wish well to, and whom we are indebted to." 

warmly concerned for, is a de- 
plorable state." 

2. Some writers separate the preposition from its noun, in order to con- 
nect different prepositions with the same noun ; as, " To suppose the zodiac 
and planets to be efficient of, and antecedent to, themselves." This, whether 
in the familiar or the solemn style, is always inelegant, and should generally 
be avoided. In forms of law, and the like, where fulness and exactness of 
expression must take place of every other consideration, it may be admitted. 

Is it correct to. separate the preposition from the noun which it governs f 
When may it be admitted ? 

% 
" On these occasions, the pronoun is " They were refused entrance into, 
governed by (3.) and consequently and forcibly driven from, the 

agrees with, the preceding word." house." 

3. Different relations, and different senses, must be expressed by different 
prepositions, though in conjunction with the same verb or adjective. Thus 
we say, " To converse vriih a person, upon a subject, in a house," &c. 
We also say, " We are disappointed o/a thing," when we cannot get it, 
" and disappointed in it," when we have it, and find it does not answer our 
expectations. But two different prepositions must be improper in the same 
constructions, and in the same sentence; as, " The combat between thirty 
French against twenty English." 

Li some cases, it is difficult to say, to which of two prepositions the pre- 
ference is to be given, as both are used promiscuously, and custom has no: 
decided in favor of either of them. We say, " Expert at," and " Expert in 
a thing;" "Expert at finding a remedy for his mistakes;" "Expert in 

deception." 

_ 1I 



168 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

When prepositions are subjoined to nouns, they are generally the same 
that are subjoined to the verbs from which the nouns are derived ; as, " A 
compliance with, 11 " to comply with; 11 " A disposition to tyranny," "dis- 
posed to tyrannize." 

Do we express different relations and different sense by the same, or a 
different preposition ? 

3. 
"We are often disappointed of things, pany, but have always hitheng 

which, before possession, prom- been disappointed in that pleas- 

ised much enjoyment. 7 ' ure.' 

" I have frequently desired their corn- 
er. As an accurate and appropriate use of the preposition is of great im- 
portance, we shall select. a considerable number of examples of impropriety 
m the application of this part of speech. 

1st, With respect to the preposition of. " He is resolved of going to the 
Persian court ,*" " on going," &c. " He was totally dependent of the Papal 
crown ;" " on the Papal," &,c. " To call of a person," and " to wait of 
h : m;" "on a person," &c. " He was eager 01 recommending it to his 
fellow- citizens ;" " in recommending," &c. Of is sometimes omitted, and 
bometimes inserted, after worthy; as, " It is worthy observation," or, " of 
observation." But it would have been better omitted in the following sen- 
tinces: " The emulation, who should serve their country best, no longer 
subsists among them, but of who should obtain the most lucrative command." 
* The rain hath been falling of a. long time ;" "'falling a long time." " It 
is situation chiefly which decides of the fortune and characters of men;" 
"decides the fortune," or, "concerning the fortune." "He found the 
greatest difficulty of writing ;" " in writing." " It might have given me a 
greater taste of its antiquities." A taste of a thing implies actual enjoyment 
of it ; but a taste for it, implies only a capacity for enjoyment. " This had 
a mucti greater share of inciting him, than any regard after his father'*: 
commands ;" " share in inciting," and " regard to his father's," &c. 

2d ? With respect to the prepositions to and for. "You have bestowed 
your favors to the most deserving persons ;" " upon the most deserving, 
&c. " He accused the ministers for betraying the Dutch;" " of having 
betrayed." " His abhorrence to that superstitious figure ;" " oj that," &c. 
" A great change to the better ;" "for the better." " Your prejudice to 
my cause ;" "against. 1 ' "The English were very different people then 
to what they are at present ;" "from what," &c. " In compliance to the 
declaration ;" " with, 11 &e. " It "13 more than they Thought for ;" " thought 
qf. 11 " There is no need for it ;" " of it." For is superfluous in the phrase, 
" More than he knows for" " No discouragement for the authors to pro- 
ceed ;" " to the authors," &c. " It was perfectly in compliance to some 
persons ;" " with. 11 " The wisest princes need not think it any diminution 
to their greatness, or derogation to their sufliciency, to rely upon counsel ;" 
" diminution of, 11 and " derogation frorn. 11 

3d, With respect to the prepositions with and upon. " Reconciling him- 
self with the king." " Those things which have the greatest resemblance 
with each other, frequently differ the most," "That such rejection should 
be.consonant with our common nature." " Conformable with," &c. *' The 
history of Peter is agreeable with the sacred texts." In all the above in- 
stances, it should be " to, 71 instead of " with. 11 "It is a use that, perhaps, 
I should not have thought on ;" " thought of" " A greater quantity may 
be taken from the heap, without making any sensible alteration upon it ;" 
" in it." " Intrusted to persons on whom the parliament could confide ;" 
"in whom." " He was made much on at Argos;" "much of. 11 "If 
policy can prevail upon force ;" " over force." " I do likewise dissent with 
the examiner ;" "from. 11 

4th, With respect to the prepositions in, from, &c. " They should be in- 
formed in some parts of his character ; " " about , " or ' 4 concerning. " " Upofl 
such occasions as fell into their cognizance ;" "under." " That variety of 
factions into which we are still engaged ;" " in which." " To restore myself 
into the favor ;" "to th^javor." " Could he have profited from his repeated 
experiences ;" " hy." From seems to be superfluous after forbear ; as, " H« 



8 Y JN T A % 



1G9 



could not forbear from appointing the pope. &c. "A strict observanco 
after times and fashions ;" "of times." " Thu character which we may now 
value ourselves by drawing ; f ' "upon drawing." " Neither of them shall 
make me swerve out of the path;" "from the path." " Ye blind guides, 
which strain at a gnat, and swallow a camel ;" ii ought to be, " which strain 
out a gnat, or, take a gnat out of the liquor by straining it." The impro- 
priety of the preposition has wholly destroyed the meaning of the phrase. 

The preposition among generally implies a number of things. It cannot 
be properly used in conjunction with the word every, which is in the singu- 
lar number ; as, " Which is found among every species of liberty," " The 
opinion 1 seems to gain ground among every body." 

" He is resolved of going to the Persian court." Will you correct this 
sentence ? " You have bestowed your favors to the most deserving per- 
sons." How should this sentence be altered ? 

" Reconciling himself with the king." What inaccuracy is there in this 
sentence? "They should be informed in some parts of hio character.'* 
Will you correct this sentence ? 



'■' She finds a difficulty of fixing her 
mind." 

"Her sobriety is no derogation to 
her understanding." 

(i There was no water, ana he died 
for (1.) thirst." 

:i We can fully confide on (2.) none 
but the truly good." 

" I have no occasion of his services." 

" Many have profited from good ad- 
vice." 

"Many ridiculous practices have 
been brought in vogue." 

" The error was occasioned by com- 
pliance to earnest entreaty," 

"Tnis is a principle in unison to our 
nature." 

4 We should entertain no prejudices 
to simple and rustic persons." 

" They are at present resolved of 
doing their duty." 

'* That boy is known under the name 
of the idler." 

"Though conformable with custom, 
it is not warrantable." 

" This remark is founded in truth." 

'*His parents think on him and his 
improvements, with pleasure and 
hope." 

" His excuse was admitted of hy (3.) 
his master." 

** What went ye out for to see ?" 

" There appears to have been a mil- 
lion men brought into the field." 

' His present was accepted of by his 
friends." 

* More than a thousand of men were 
destroyed." 

*' It is my request that he will be 
particular in speaking to the fol- 
lowing points." 

** The Saxons reduced the greater 



part of Britain to their own 
power." 

: He lives opposite the royal ex- 
change." 

i Their house is situated to the north- 
east side of the road." 

* The performance was approved of 

by all who understood it." 

* He was accused with having acted 

unfairly." 

4 She has an abhorrence to all de- 
ceitful conduct." 

1 They were some distance (4.) from 
home, when the accident hap- 
pened." 

' His deportment was adapted fo? 
conciliating regard." 

' My father writes me very fre- 
quently." 

{ Their conduct was agreeable wi&» 
their profession." 

' We went leisurely above stairs, and 
came hastily below. We shaB 
write up stairs this forenoon, and 
down stairs in the afternoon." 

1 The politeness of the world has 
the same resemblance with 
benevolence, that the shadow 
has with its substance." 

' He had a taste of such studies, and 
pursued them earnestly." 

' When we have had a true taste fat 
the pleasures of virtue, we can 
have no relish for those of vice." 

1 How happy it is to know how we 
live at times by one's self, to 
.leave one's self in regret, to find 
one's self again with pleasure ! 
The world is then less necessary 
for us." 

1 Civility makes its way among' 
every kind of persons." 



f 



15 



170 ENGLISH GRAM M A R . 

5. The preposition to is made use of before nouns of place, when the? 
follow verbs and participles of motion ; as, " I went to London ;" " I am 
going to town." But the preposition at is generally used after the neuter 
verb to be ; as, "I have been at London ;" "I was at the place appointed ;" 
"I shall be at Paris." We likewise say, "He touched, arrived at any 
place." The preposition in is set before countries, cities, and large towns ; 
as, " He lives in France, in London, or in Birmingham." But before vil- 
lages, single houses, and cities which are in distant countries, at is used ; 
&3, " He lives at Hackney ;" " He resides at Montpellier." 

It is a matter of indifference, with respect to the pronoun one another, 
whether the preposition of be placed between the two parts of it, or before 
them both. We may say, "They were jealous of one another;" or. 
" They were jealous one of another ;" but perhaps the former is better. 

Participles are frequently used as prepositions ; as, excepting, respecting., 
touching, concerning, according. "They were all in fault except or except- 
ing him/* 

How is ths preposition to used with nouns of place ? Give an example. 
Jk re paniciples ever used as prepositions ? Give an example. 

5. 

" I have been to London, after hav- and are going for Liverpool. 

ing resided a year at France ; They intend to reside some time 

and I now live at Islington." in Ireland." 

'They have just landed iii Hull, 

IULE 2EZ. 

Corresponding with RTurray's Grammar, 
RULE XVIII. 

Conjunctions usually connect verbs of the same mood and 
tense, and nouns or pronouns of the same case. 

A few examples of inaccuracy respecting this rule may further display its 
utility. " If he prefer a virtuous life, and is sincere in his professions, he 
will succeed ;" " if he prefers." " To deride the miseries of the unhappy, 
is inhuman ; and wanting compassion towards them, is unchristian ;" " and 
to want compassion." " The parliament addressed the king, and has been 
prorogued the same day ;" " and was prorogued." " His wealth and him 
bid adieu to each other ;" " and he." " He entreated us, my comrade and 
I, to live harmoniously ;" " comrade and me." " My sister and her were 
on good terms;" "and she." "We often overlook the blessings which 
are m our possession, and are searching after those which are out of our 
reach ;" it ought to be " and search after." 

"Bis wealth and him bid adieu to each other." Will you correct thia 
sentence, and give the rule for Conjunctions ? 
" Professing regard, and to act " To be moderate in our views, and 

(1.) differently, discover a base proceeding temperately in the 

mind." pursuit of them, is the best way 

4 * Did he not tell me bis fault, and to ensure success." 

entreated me to forgive him ?" "Between him and I there is some 

M My brother and him are tolerable disparity of years ; but none be- 

grammarians." tween him and she." 

"If he understand the subject, and "By forming themselves on fantas- 

Gttends to it industriously, he can tic models, and ready to vie with 

scarcely fail of success." one another in the reigning fol- 

* You and us enjoy many privileges." lies, the young begin with being 

''She and him"" are very unhappily ridiculous, and end with being 

connected." vicious and immoral." 

1. Conjunctions are, indeed, frequently msde to connect different moods 
%n£ tenses of verbs ; but in these instances, the nominative must generally, if 

;'!.. * acting," ar w Ta prsfaat regard. awu* u «vrf." ft* 



SYNTAX. 171 

Dtet always, he repeated, which is not necessary, though it may be done, 
oxtdar the construction to which the rule refers. We may say, " He lives 
temperately, and he should live temperately;" " He may return, but he 
will not continue;" " She was proud, though she is now humble :" but it 
is obvious, that, in such cases, the nominative ought to be repeated ; and 
that, by this means, the latter members of these sentences are rendered not 
so strictly dependent on the preceding, as those are which come under this 
rule. When, in the progress of a sentence, we pass from the affirmative to 
the negative form, or from the negative to the affirmative, the subject or 
nominative is always resumed ; as, " He is rich, but he is not respectable.* 1 
There appears to be, in general, equal reason for repeating the nominative, 
and resuming the subject, when the course of the sentence is diverted by a 
change of the mood or tense. The following sentences may therefore bs 
improved : " Anger glances into the breast of a wise man, but will rest only 
in the bosom of fools;" "but rests only;" or, " but it will rest only." 
" Virtue is praised by many, and would be desired also, if her worth were 
really known;" "and she would." "The world begins to recede, and 
will soon disappear ;" " and it will." 

Do conjunctions ever connect different moods ana tenses of verbs ? What 
case must generally be repeated in such instances ? Give an example. 

1 

11 We have met with many disap- great riches, but do not command 

pointments ; and, if life continue, esteem." 

shall (1.) probably meet with " Our seasons of improvement are 
many more." m short, and, whether used or not, 

11 Rank may conter influence, but will will soon pass away." 

(2.) not necessarily produce vir- " He might have been happy, and is 
tue." now (3.) fully convinced of it." 

'* Re does not want courage, but is " Learning strengthens the mind, and 
4®fcctive in sensibility." if properly applied, will improve 

u Th«0d people have indeed acquired Gur morals too," 

EWLE 1I¥III. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar. 

RULE XIX. 

Somt conjunctions require the indicative, some the sub- 
junctive, mood after them. It is a general rule, that 
when something contingent or doubtful is implied, the 
subjunctive ought to be used ; as, " If I were to write, 
he would not regard it ;" " He will not be pardoned, 
unless he repent" 

Conjunctions that are of a positive and absolute nature 
require the indicative mood. "As virtue advances^ 
so vice recedes ;" " He is healthy, because he is tern 
perate." 

The conjunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, &c, generally require 
the subjunctive mood after them; as, "if thou he afflicted, repine not;" 
" Though he slay me, yet will I trust in him ;" "He cannot be clean, units* 
he wash himself;" "No power, except it were given from above;" 
" Whether it were I or they, so we preach." But even these conjunctions, 
when the sentence does not imply doubt, admit of the indicative ; aa } 
u Tlioush he is poor, he is contented." 

The following example may, in some measure, serve to illustrate th» diis- 



172 ENGLISH GRAMMA P'. 

tinction between the subjunctive and the indicative moods ; ' v Though ha 
were divinely inspired, and spoke therefore as the oracles of God, with 
supreme authority ; though he were erdued with supernatural powers, and 
could, therefore, have confirmed the truth of what he uttered, by miracles; 
yet, in compliance with the way in which human nature and reasonable 
creatures are usually wrought upon, he reasoned." That our Savioar was 
divinely inspired, and endued with supernatural powers, are positions that 
are here taken for granted, as not admitting the least doubt ; they would 
therefore have been better expressed in the indicative mood: " Though he 
mas divinely inspired ; though he was endued with supernatural powers." 
The subjunctive is used in the like improper manner, in the following 
example : " Though he were a son, yet learned he obedience, by the things 
which he suffered." But, in a similar passage, the indicative, with great 
propriety, is employed to the same purpose ; " Though he was rich, yet fat 
your sakes he became poor." 

What conjunctions generally require the subjunctive mood after them ? 
"If he acquires (1.) riches, they will " Though he were her friend, he did 

corrupt his mind, and be useless not attempt to justify her cop • 

to others." duct." 

"Though he urges me yet more " Whether he improve or not, I can 

earnestly, I shall not comply, not determine." 

unless he advances more forcible " Though the fact be extraordinary, 

reasons." it certainly did happen." 

"I shall walk in the fields to-day, "Remember what thou wert, and 

unless it rains.''' 1 be (3.) humble." 

'* As the governess were (2.) present, "O that his heart was tender, am? 

the children behaved properly." susceptible of the woes of others." 

" She disapproved the measure, be- " Shall then this verse to future age 

cause it were very improper." pretend, 

" Though he be high, he hath respect Thou wert my guide, philosopher, 

to the lowly." and friend ?" 

1. Lest and that, annexed to -a command preceding, necessarily require 
the subjunctive mood; as, " Ltfve not sleep, lest thou come to poverty;" 
" Reprove not a scorner, lest he hate thee ;" " Take heed that thou speak 
not to Jacob." 

If, with but following it, when futurity is denoted, requires the subjunctive 
mood ; as, " If he do but touch the hills, they shall smoke ;" " If he be but 
discreet, he will succeed." But the indicative ought to be used, on this 
occasion, when future time is not signified ; as, " If, in this expression, he 
does but jest, no offence should be taken ;" "If she is but sincere, I am 
happy." The same distinction applies to the following forms of expression : 
" If he do submit, it will be from necessity ;" " Though he does submit, he 
is not convinced ;" "If thou do not reward this service, he will be discou- 
raged ;*' " If thou dost heartily forgive him, endeavor to forget the olTence." 
When do lest and that require the subjunctive mood after them * When 
does tf require the subjunctive ? When the indicative ? 

1. 

" Despise not any condition, lest it abilities, he is worthy of aften- 

happens to be your own." tion." 

** Let him that is sanguine take heed " If he be but in health, I am con- 
test he miscarries." tent." 

Take care that thou breakest not " If he does promise, he will certain- 
any of the established rules." ly perform." 

'* If V'j does but (4.) intimate his de- " Though he do praise her, it Is only 
sir«, it will be sufficient to pro- for ner beauty." 

duce obedience." "If thou dost not forgive, perhaps 

s * At the time of his return, if he is thou wilt not be forgiven." 

but expert in the business, he "If thou do sincerely believe th« 
will find employment." truths of religion, act according 

"If he do but speak to display ms ly." 



SYNTAX. 173 

S. In the following instances, the conjunction that, expressed or understood, 
seems to be improperly accompanied with the subjunctive mood : " So much 
she dreaded his tyranny, that the fate of her friend she dare not lament;" 
" He reasoned so artfully, that his friends would listen, and think [that] h« 
were not wrong." 
Will you repeat this Note, and give an example under it ? 

2. 

'* His confused behaviour made it rea- rebuke, that he dare not make any 
sonable to suppose that he were reply- 1 ' 

guilty." " His apology was so plausible, thfi 

* He is so conscious of deserving the many befriended him, and thought 

he were innocent." 

3. The same conjunction governing both the indicative and the subjunc- 
tive moods, in the same sentence, and in the same circumstances, seems to 
be a great impropriety ; as in these instances : "If there be but one body of 
legislators, it is no better than a tyranny ; if there are only two, there will 
want a casting voice." " If a man have a Hundred sheep, and one of them 
is gone astray," &c. 

May the same conjunction have both the subjunctive and indicative moods 
after it in the same sentence ? Give an example of this impropriety. 

3. 
" If one man prefers life of industry, unless he aim at reputation, or 

it is, because he has an idea of com- hopes for some singular advan- 

fort in wealth; if another prefers tage." 

a life of gayety, it is from a like " Though the design be laudable, and 

idea concerning pleasure." is favourable to our interest, it will 

" No one engages in that business, involve much anxiety and labour." 

4. Almost all the irregularities in the construction of any language, have 
arisen from the ellipsis of some words which were originally inserted in the 
sentence, and made it regular ; and it is probable, that this has generally been 
the case with rfepect to the conjunctive form of words now in use ; which 
will appear from the following examples : " We shall overtake him, though 
he run ;" that is, " though he should run." " Unless he act prudently, he 
will not accomplish his purpose ;" that is, "unless he shall act prudently." 
" If he succeed, and obtain his end, he will not be the happier for it ;" that 
is, " If he should ^succeed, and should obtain his end." These remarks and 
examples are designed to show the original of many of our present conjunc- 
tive forms of expression ; and to enable the student to examine the propriety 
of using them, by tracing the words in question to their proper origin and 
ancient connections. But it is necessary to be more particular on this sub- 
ject, and therefore we shall add a few observations respecting it. 

That part of the verb which grammarians call the present tense of the sub 
junctive mood, has a future signification. This is effected by varying the 
terminations of the second and third persons singular of the indicative ; as will 
be evident from' the following examples : "If thou prosper, thou sbouldst be 
thankful." " Unless he study more closely, he will never be learned.' ' Some 
writers, however, would express these sentiments without those variations,' 
" If t\um prosper est," &c. ; " Unless he studies" &lc. ; and, as therein great 
diversity of practice in this pointy it is proper to offer the learners a few re- 
marks, to assist them in distinguishing the right application of these different 
forms of expression. It may be considered as a rule, that the changes of ter- 
mination are necessary, when these two circumstances concur : 1st, When 
the subject is of a dubious and contingent nature ; and, 2d, When the verb 
has a reference to future time. JPi the following sentences, both these circum- 
stances will be found to unite : ' * If thou injure another, thou wilt hurt thyself." 
" He has a hard heart ; and if he continue impenitent, he must suffer." " He 
will maintain his principles, though he lose his estate." " Whether he succeed 
or not, his intention is laudable." li If he he not prosperous, he will not re« 
pine." *' If a man smite hjs servant, and he die,' 1 &,c. Exod. xxi. 20. In all 
Jhese examples, the things signified by the verbs are uncertain, &nd refer la 
^Uure time. But in the intfancas which follow, future time is no: referred to 

15* 



174 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

and therefore a different construction takes place : " If thou HvfM virtuous* 
ly, thou art happy." " Unless he means what he says, he is doubly faith- 
less." " If he allows the excellence of Virtue, he does not regard hei 
precepts." " Though he seems to be simple and artless, Le has deceived 
us." " Whether virtue is better than rank or wealth, admits not of any dis- 
pute." " It thou believest with all thy heart, thou mayest," &c. Acts viii. 
37. There are many sentences, introduced by conjunctions, in which neither 
contingency nor futurity is denoted ; as, " Though he exceU her in know- 
ledge, she far exceeds him in virtue." " I have no doubt of his principles ; 
but if he believes the truths of religion, he does not act according to them." 
That both the circumstances of contingency and futurity are necessary, 
as tests of the propriety of altering the terminations, will be evident, bj 
inspecting the following examples ; which show that there are instances in 
which neither of the circumstances alone implies the other. In the three 
examples following, contingency is denoted, but not futurity : " If he thinks 
as he speaks, he may safely be trusted." " If he is now disponed to it, I 
will perform the operation." " He acts uprightly, unless he deceives me." 
In the following sentences, futurity is signified, but not contingency. *' Aa 
soon as the sun sets, it will be cooler." " As the autumn advances, these 
birds will gradually emigrate." 

It appears, from the tenor of the examples adduced, that the rule3 above 
mentioned may be extended to assert, that, in cases wherein contingency and 
futurity do not concur, it is not proper to turn the verb from its signification ol 
present time, or to vary its form or termination. The verb would then be in 
the indicative mood, whatever conjunctions might attend it. If these rules, 
which seem to form the true distinction between the subjunctive and the in- 
dicative moods in this tense, were adopted and established in practice, we 
should have, on this point, a principle of decision simple and precise, and 
readily applicable to every case that might occur. It will, doubtless, some 
times happen, that, on this occasion, as well as on many other occasions, a 
strict adherence to grammatical rules would render the language stir! and 
formal ; but when cases of this sort occur, it is better to give the expression a 
different turn, than violate grammar for the sake of ease, or even of elegance. 
Has the present tense of the subjunctive mood a future signification? 
How is this effected? What two circumstances should concur to render 
necessary this change of termination ? 

Should the termination be changed when futurity and contingency do no* 
concur ? What mood or form will the verb then be in ? 

4. 
' ' Unless he learns faster, he will be — - Persevere until thou gainest the 

no scholar." summit: there, all is order, beauty 

w Though he falls, he shall not be and pleasure." 

utterly cast down." " If Charlotte desire to gain esteem 

" On condition that he comes, I will and love, she does not employ 

consent to stay." the proper means." 

" However that affair terminates, (1.) " Unless the accountant deceive me, 

my conduct will be unimpeach- my estate is considerably im- 

able." proved." 

" If virtue rewards us not so soon as " Though self-government produce 

we desire, the payment will be some uneasiness, it is light when 

made with interest." compared with the pain of vici- 

48 Till repentance composes his mind, ous indulgence." 

he will be a stranger to peace." " Whether he think as he speaka, 
t& Whether he confesses or not, the time will discover." 

truth will certainly be discover- " If thou censure uncharitably, thou 

ed." - deservest no favor." 

''If thou censurest uncharitably, thou " Though Virtue appear severe, sha 

wilt be entitled to no favor." is truly amiable." 

" Though, at times, the ascent to the " Though success be very doubtful, 

temple of virtue appears steep it is proper that he ekdeawrs to 

and craggy, be not discouraged. succeed." 

f J.) Or, H me$ ttrvn»n&*i." 



SVNTAX. 175 

*. On the.fonn of the auxiliaries in the compound tenses of the subjunc- 
tive mood, it seems proper to make a few observations. Some writers 
express themselves in the perfect tense as follows: " If thou have deter- 
mined, we must submit :" " Unless he have consented, the writing, will be 
void:" but we believe that few authors of critical sagacity write in this 
manner. The proper form seems to be, " If thou hast determined," " Un- 
less he has consented," &c, conformably to what we generally meet with 
in the Bible : "i have surnamed thee, though thou hast not known me." 
Isaiah xlv. 4, 5. " What is the hope of the hypocrite, though he hatk 
Alined," &c. Job xxvii. 8. See, also, Acts xxviii. 4. 

"If thou have determined, we must submit." How should this sen- 
tence be altered ? 

5. 
" If thou have promised, be faithful to submission, he is too generous 

to thy engagement." to exact it." 

" Though he have proved his right " Unless he have improved, he m 

unfit for the office." 

6. In the pluperfect and future tenses, we sometimes meet with such ex- 
pressions as these; " If thou had applied thyself diligently, thou wouldst 
nave reaped the advantage ;" " Unless thou shall speak the whole truth, 
we cannot determine;" " If thou will undertake the business, there is 
little doubt of success." This mode of expressing the auxiliaries does not 
appear to be warranted by the general practice of correct writers. T t .ey 
should be, hadst, shall and wilt : and we find them used in this form, is 
the Sacred Scriptures: " If thou hadst known," &c. Luke xix. 47. " If 
thou hadst been here," &c. John xi. 21. "If thou wilt, thou canst make 
me clean." Matt. viii. 2. See, also, 2 Sam. ii. 27; Matt. zvii. 4. 

" If thou wilt undertake the business, there ia little doubt of success.'' Is 
this mode of expression warranted by good authority ? How should it be 
altered * 

6. 
" If thou had succeeded, perhaps of the measure, we shall not de- 

thou wouldst not be the happier sire thy support." 

for it." "Though thou will not acknowledge, 

" Unless then shall see the propriety thou canst not deny the fact." 

7. The second person singular of the imperfect tense in the subjunctive 
mood, is also very frequently varied in its termination; as, "If thou loved 
him truly, thou wouldst obey him;" "Though thou did conform, tho-Ti. 
hast gained nothing by it." This variation, however, appears to be impro- 
per. Our prec^nt version of the Scriptures, which we again refer to as a 
good grammatical authority in points of this nature, decides against it : "If 
thou knewest the gift," &c. John iv. 10. " If thou didst receive it, wk> 
dost thou glory ?" &.g. 1 Cor. iv. 7. See, also, Dan. v.- 22. But it is pro- 
per to remark, that the form of the verb to be, when used subjunctively m 
the imperfect tense, ia indeed very considerably and properly varied from 
that which it has in the imperfect of the indicative mood ; as the learnei 
will perceive by turning to the conjugation of that verb. 

Is the second person singular of the imperfect ever varied in its termi- 
nation in the subjunctive mood ? Will you give an example ? Is this varia- 
tion proper ? 

7 - 
" If thou gave liberally, thou wilt " Was he ever so great and opu- 

receive a liberal reward." lent, this conduct would debase 

"Though thou did injure him, he him." 

harbors no resentment.' ' ' ' Was I to enumerate all her virtues, 

" It would be well, if the report was it would look like flattery." 

only the misrepresentation of her ' ' Though I was perfect, yet would 

enemies." I not presume." 

8. It may not be superfluous also to observe, that the auxiliaries of the po- 
tential mood, when applied to the subjunctive, do not change the termination 
of the second person singular. We properly say, " If thou mayst or canst go;" 
'* Though thou mights* dve ;" " Unless thou ceuldit rewi ;" ** Ii thou wauJdat 



176 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

learn j M — and not, " If thou may or can go," &c. It is sufficient, on this point, 
to adduce the authorities of Johnson and Lowth: — "If thou shouldst go;" 
Johnson. "If thou mayst, mightst, or couldst love;" Lowth. Some authors 
think that, when that expresses the motive or end, the termination of these 
auxiliaries should be varied; as, "I advise thee, that thou may beware ;" 
"He checked thee, that thou should not presume;" but there does not appear 
to be any ground for this exception. If the expression of " condition, doubt, 
contingency," &c. does not warrant a change in the form of these auxiliaries, 
why should they have it, when a motive or end is expressed? The transla- 
tors of the Scriptures do not appear to have made the distinction contended 
for. "Thou buiidest the wall, that thou mayst be their king." Neh. vi. 6. 
"There is forgiveness with thee, that thou mayst be feared." Ps. cxxx. 4. 

From the preceding observations under this rule, it appears, that, with re- 
spect to what is termed the present tense of any verb, when the circumstances 
of contingency and futurity concur, it is proper to vary the terminations of the 
second and third persons singular; that without the concurrence of those cir-„ 
cumstances, the terminations should not be altered ; and that the verb and the 
auxiliaries of the three past tenses, and the auxiliaries of the first future, un- 
dergo no alterations whatever, except -the imperfect of the verb to be, which, in 
, cases denoting contingency, is varied in all the persons of the singular number. 

After perusing what has been advanced on this subject, it will be natural fot 
ihe student to inquire, What is the extent of the subjunctive mood ? Some 
grammarians think it extends only to what is called the present tense of verbs 
generally, under the circumstances of contingency and futurity, and to the 
imperfect tense of the verb to be, when it denotes contingency, &o. ; because 
in these tenses only, the form of the verb admits of variation ; and they sup- 
pose that it is variation merely which constitutes the distinction of moods. 
It is the opinion of other grammarians, (in which opinion we concur,) that, 
besides the two cases just mentioned, all verbs in the three past and the two 
future tenses are in the subjunctive mood, when they denote contingency 
or uncertainty, though they have not any change of termination ; and that, 
when contingency is not signified, the verb, through all these five tenses, 
belongs to the indicative mood, whatever conjunction may attend it. They 
think that the definition and nature of the subjunctive mood have no refer- 
ence to change of termination, but that they refer merely to the manner of 
the being, action, or passion signified by the verb; and that the subjunctive 
mood may as properly exist without a variation of the verb, as the infinitive 
mood, which has no terminations different from those of the indicative. The 
decision of this point may not, by some grammarians, be thought of much 
consequence. But the rules which ascertain the propriety of varying or 
not varying the terminations of the verb, will certainly be deemed impor- 
tant. These rules may be well observed, without a uniformity of senti 
ment respecting the nature and limits of the subjunctive mood.* 

Do the auxiliaries of the potential mood, when applied to the subjunctive, 
change the termination of the second person singular ? When is it proper 
to vary the terminations of the second and third persons singular of the 
present tense ? Do the verb and auxiliaries of the past tenses, and the 
auxiliaries of the first future, undergo any alteration? What exception? 
What is the opinion of some grammarians in regard to the extent of the 
subjunctive mood ? What is the opinion of other grammarians ? In which 
of these opinions does the author concur ? 

8. 

"If thou may share in his labors, be " Unless thou can fairly support the 

thankful, and do it cheerfully/ 7 cause, give it up honorably." 

* We have stated, for the student's information, the different opinions of grammarians, respecting the English 
injunctive mood ; First, that which supposes there is no such mood in our language ; Secondly, that which ex- 
tends it no farther than the variations of the verb extend ; Thirdly, that which we have adopted, and explained 
C large, and which, in general, corresponds with the views of the meet approved writers on English grammar 
We may add a Fourth opinion, which appear* to posses*, at least, much plausibility. This opinion admits th« 
sorangenieut we have given, with one variation, namely, tfcat of assigning to the first tense of the su'. : 
trro forms — let, that which simply denotes <x ltin^ency ; as, u If he deJtres it, I will perform the oper 
that is, if hs now desires it: 2dly, th?.t which denote? both contiB?ercv and futurity ; as, " If he desire it, I wiU 
perform the operation ;" that is, " If ha should hereafter desire if." This last theory of the subjunctiTe nx*^ 
claimo the merit of rendering the whole system of the moods consisicnt and regular; of being more conformabl* 
«&SJa sny other to the defioiUou of the subjunctive, and of not referring to the inditativa mewd forms tt *zvr«* 
t»tu whicn 511 urc.Y? witb \tt •u»pHc* | tv *r>d natur*. P*rhar» th«l fbeory will *«ar « .on* er»miri*v>o«* 



SYNTAX. 177 

1 Though thou might have foreseen " Unless thou should make a timely 
the danger, thou couldst not have retreat, the danger will be una 

avoided it." voidable." 

fc 'If thou could convince him, he " I have labored and weaned my sell 
would not act accordingly." that thou may be at ease." 

H If thou would improve in know- li He enlarged on those dangers, that 
ledge, be diligent." thou should avoid them." 

9. Some conjunctions have correspondent conjunctions belonging to them, 
either expressed or understood ; as, 

1st Though— yet, nevertheless ; as, " Though he waa rich, yet for our sake* hj 
became poor ;" " Though powerful, he was meek." 

2d. Whether— o* ; as, " Whether he will go or not, I cannot tell ' 

3d. Either— or ; as, " T will either send it, or bring it myself." 

4th. Neither— nor ; as, " Neither he nor I am able to compass it." 

5th. As— as ; expressing a comparison of equality ; as, " She is as amiable es her 
lister ; and as much respected." 

6th. As— so, expressing a comparison of equality ; as, " As the stars, so shall itey 
iced be. ' 

?th. As— so; expressing a comparison of quality ; an, " As the one dieth, so dietb 
the other ;" " As he reads, they read." 

8th. So— as ; with a verb expressing a comparison of quality ; as, " To see thy 
glory, so as J have seen thee in the sanctuary." 

9th. So—as; with a negative and an adjective expressing a comparison of quanti- 
ty ; as, »' Pompey was not so great a general as Csesar, nor so great a man." 

IGth. So— that; expressing a consequence ; as, " He was so fatigued, that he could 
scarcely move." 

The conjunctions or and nor may often be used, with nearly equal pro- 
priety. "The king, whose character was not sufficiently vigorous iwr deci- 
sive, assented to the measure." In this sentence, or wouia, perhaps, have 
been better ; bat, in general, nor seems to repeat the negation in the former 
part of the sentence, and, therefore, gives more emphasis to the expression. 

Are there any conjunctions which have correspondent conjunctions belong- 
ing to them ? Give examples. 

11 Neither the cold or the fervid, but " The dog m the manner would no* 

characters uniformly warm, are eat the hay himself, nor stifle? 

formed for friendship." the ox to eat it." 

" They are both praiseworthy, and " As far as I am able to judge, the 

one is equally (1.) deserving as book is well written." 

the other." "We should faithfully perform the 

"He is not as diligent and learned trast committed to us, or ingenu- 

as his brother." ously relinquish the charge." 

' I will present it to him myself, or " He is not as eminent, and as much 

direct it to be given to him." esteemed, as he thinks himself 

•Neither despise or oppose .what to be." 

thou dost not understand." " The work is a dull performance, 

3 The house is not as commodious nnd is neither capable of ple&scnr 

as we expected it would be." (3.) the understanding, or the im- 

* I must, however, be so candid to agination. 

own I have been mistaken." " There is no condition so secure, fc2 

xi There was something so amiable, cannot admit of change." 

and yet so piercing in his look, as " This is an event which nobody prs- 

(2.) affected me at once with love sumes upon, or is so sanguine to 

and terror." hope for." 

— "I gained a son; " We are generally pleased with an? 

And such a son as all men hailed me little accomplishments of body or 

happy." mind." 

10. Conjunctions are often improperly used, both singly and in pairs. The 
following are examples of this impropriety : " The relations are so uncertain, 
as that they require a great deal of examination ;" It should be, " thai they 
require," &c " There was no man so sanguine* who did not apprehend 

fJL) ^ '* Ufwttity* rwi « m»." ft.) « that «.• ft.) » *eiiJur Owi." 



178 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

tome ill consaquences ; it ought to be, " so sanguine as not to apprehend/* 
&c. ; or, " no man, how sanguine soever, who did not," &c. " To trust in 
Sim is no more but to acknowledge his power." " This is no other but the 
gate of paradise." In both of these instances, hut should be than. " Wo 
should Sufficiently weigh the objects of our hope ; whether they are such as 
we may reasonably expect from them what they propose," &c. It ought to 
be, " that we may reasonably " &c. " The duke had not behaved with that 
loyalty as he ought to have done ;" " with which he ought." " In the order 
as they lie in his preface ;" it should be, "in order as they lie ;" or, "ia 
die order in.tvhich they lie." " Such sharp replies that cost him his life ;" 
" as cost," &c. " If he were truly that scarecrow, as he is now commonly 
painted ;" " such a scarecrow," &c. " I wish I could do that justice to his 
memory, to oblige the painters," &e. ; " do such justice as to oblige," &c. 
Will you repeat this Note, and give an example under it ? What is said 
of sentences beginning with the conjunctive form of the verb ? Give an ex- 
ample. When has as the force of a relative pronoun ? (1.) Give an example. 



There is a peculiar neatness in a sentence beginning with the conjunctive form 
©fa verb. " Were there no difference, there would be no choice." 

A double conjunctive, in two correspondent clauses of a sentence, is sometimes 
made use of; as, " Had he done this, he had escaped ;" " Had the limitations on the 
prerogative been, in his time, quite fixed and certain, his integrity had made him 
regard as sacred the boundaries of the constitution." The sentence in the common 
form would have read thus : " If the limitations on the prerogative had seen," &x. 
H his integrity would have made him regard," Sec. 

The particle as, when it is connected with the pronoun such, has the force of a 
relative pronoun ; as, " Let such as presume to advise others, look well to their own 
conduct ;" which is equivalent to, " Let them who presume," &c. But when used by 
itself, this particle is to be considered as a conjunction, or perhaps as an adverb. 

Our language wants a a conjunction adapted to a familiar style, equivalent to net- 
withstanding. The words for all that seem to be too low. " The word was in the 
mouth of every one, but, for all that, the subject may still be a secret." 

In regard that is solemn and antiquated ; because would do much better in the fol- 
lowing sentence : " It cannot be otherwise, in regard that the French prosody differs 
from that of every other language." 

The word except is far preferable to other than. " It admitted of no effectual cure 
other than amputation." Except is also to be preferred to all but. " They were 
happy, ail but the stranger." In the two following phrases, the conjunction as is 
improperly omitted : " Which nobody presumes, or is so sanguine to hope." " I 
must, however, be so just to own." 

The conjunction that is often properly omitted, aad understood ; as, " I beg yoa 
would come to me;" "See thou do it not;" instead of " that you would," " that 
thou do." But in the following, and many similar phrases, this conjunction were 
much better inserted : " Yet it is reason the memory of their virtues remain to pos- 
terity." It should be, " Yet it is just that the memory," &c. 

10. 

"Be ready to Euccor such persons "He gained nothing further by his 

who (2.) need thy assistance." speech, hut only (6.) to be com- 

" The matter was no sooner pro- mended for his eloquence." 

posed, but (3.) he privately with- "He has little more of the scholar 

drew to consider it." besides the name." 

" He has too much sense and pru- " He has little of the scholar than the 

dence than to become a dupe to name." 

such artifices." "They had no sooner risen, \xi\ 

It is not sufficient that our conduct they applied themselves to U.eit 

as far as it respects others, ap- studies." 

pears to be unexceptionable." " From no other institution, besides 

4 The resolution was not the less the admirable one of juries, could 

fixed, that (4.) the secret was yet so great a benefit be expected." 

communicated to very few." " Those savage people seemed to 

B.e opposed the most "remarkable have no other element but war." 

corruptions of the church of Rome, "Such men that act treacherously 

so (5.) as that his doctrines were ought to be avoided." 

embracer by great numbers.'' 

rR.) "tftuMR.^. <<,) "'though.* Fi.1 " *nd en thit sce^m*.* ft) 



SYNTAX. 173 

w Germany ran the same risk as " No errors are so trivial, but they 
Italy had done " (1.) deserve to be corrected." 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XX. 

When the qualities of different things are compared, the 
latter noun or pronoun is not governed by the conjunc- 
tion than or as, but agrees with the verb, or is governed 
by the verb or the preposition, expressed or understood ; 
as, " Thou art wiser than I ;" that is, " than I am." 
" They loved him more than me f that is, " more than 
they loved me." " The sentiment is well expressed by 
Plato, but much better by Solomon than him ;' ? that is, 
" than by him." 

The propriety or impropriety of many phrases, in the preceding as well 
as in some other forms, may be discovered, by supplying the words that are 
not expressed ; which will be evident from the following instances of errone- 
ous construction: "He can read better than me." "He is as good as 
her." " Whether I be present or no." " Who did this ? Me." 6y sup- 
plying the words understood, in each of these phrases, their impropriety 
and governing rule will appear ; as,. " better than I can read ;" "as good 
as she is;" " present or not present ;" "I did it." 

" Thou art wiser than I." Will you parse /, and repeat the rule for it? 
" In some respects, we have had as " They know how tr "**«tV» as we!] 
many advantages as them ; but as "him ; but he is a much better 

in the article of a good library, grammarian than them." 

they have had a greater privilege " Though she is not so learned as 
than us." him, she is as much beloved and 

11 The undertaking was much better respected." 

executed by his brother than he." " These people, though they possess 

1 ; They are much greater gainers than more shining qualities, are not so 

me by this unexpected event." proud as him, nor so vain as her." 

1. By not attending to this rule, many errors have been committed ; a 
mimber of which is subjoined, as a further caution and direction to the 
learner : " Thou art a much greater loser than me by his death." " She 
suffers hourly more than me." " We contributed a third more than the 
Dutch, who were obliged to the same proportion more than us." " King 
Char'es, and, more than him, the duke and the popish faction, were at 
liberty to form new schemes.' " The drift of all his sermons was, to pre- 
pare the Jews for the reception of a prophet mightier than him, and whose 
shoes he was not worthy to bear." " It was not the work of so eminent 
an author as him to whom it was first imputed." "A stone is heavy, and 
the sand weighty ; but a fool's wrath is heavier than them both." "If the 
king give us leave, we may perform the office as well as them that do." 
In these passages, it ought to be, "I, we, he, they, 11 respectively. 

When the relative who immediately follows than, it seems to form an ex- 
ception to the 29th Rule ; for, in that connection, the relative must be in the 
objective case ; as, " Alfred, than wham a greater king never reigned," &e. 
" Peelzebub, than whom, Satan excepted, none higher sat," <&c. It is re- 
mat kable that, in such instances, if the personal pronoun were used, it would 
be in the nominative case; as, "A greater king never reigned than he, 13 
that is, " than he was. 71 " Beelzebub, than he, 11 &c, that is, " than he sat." 
The phrase than whom is, however, avoided by the best modern, writers. 

"She suffers hourly more than me." Will you correct this sentencoj 
and explain why it is wrong ? 

(I.) "that ttoydtMt"* 



180 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

E. 

1 Who^ betrayed her companion ?" " Whether he will be learned or ne, 
'* Not me." must depend on his application." 

fi Who revealed the secrets he ought " Charles XII. of Sweden, than who 
to have concealed?" " Not him." (I.) a more courageous person 

" Who related falsehoods to screes, never lived, appears to have been 

herself, and to bring an odium destitute of the tender sensibili- 

upon others ?" " Not me ; it was ties of nature." 

her" " Salmasius (a more learned man than 

u There is but one in fault, and that him has seldom appeared) was 

is me." not happy at the close of life/' 

EULB x^:z. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XXI. 

To avoid disagreeable repetitions, and to express our ideas 
in a few words, an ellipsis, or omission of some woi-ds, 
is frequently admitted. Instead of saying, " He was a 
learned man, he was a wise man, and he was a good 
man," we make use of the ellipsis, and say, " He was a 
learned, wise and good man." 

When the omission 0/* words would obscure the sentence, 
weaken its force, or be attended with an impropriety, 
ihev M»*t be expressed. In the sentence, "We are apt 
to Sove who love us," the word them should be supplied. 
" A beautiful field and trees," is not proper language ; 
it should be, " Beautiful fields and trees," or, "A beauti- 
ful field and fine trees." 

Almost all compounded sentences are more or less elliptical ; some ex- 
amples of which may be seen under the different parts of speech. 

"I gladly shunned who gladly fled from me." Will you correct this 
tentence, and repeat the latter part oi Rale XXX, by which the correction 
fcs made ? 

" I gladly shunned (2.) who gladly fell a victim to the madness of 

ned from me." the people, truth, virtue, religion, 

"And this is (3.) it men mean by fel with him." (5.) 

distributive justice, and is proper- "The fear of death, nor hope of 
iy termed equity." life, could make him submit to a 

" His honor, interest, religion, were dishonest action." (6.) 

all embarked in this under- " An elegant house and furniture 
taking." (4.) were, by this event, irrecover- 

" When so good a man as Socrates ably lost to the owner." (7.) 

' 1. The ellipsis of the article is thus used : " A man, woman, and child ;' J 
tliat is, "a man, a woman, and a child." " A house and garden ;" that is, 
" a house and a garden." " The sun and moon ;" that is, " the sun and 
the mcon." " The day and hour;" that is, " the day and the hour." In 
all these instances, the article being once expressed, the repetition of it 
becomes unnecessary. There is, however, an exception to this observa- 
tion, when some peculiar emphasis requires a repetition ; as in the following 
sentence : " Not only the year, but the day and the hour." In this cast, 
the ellipsis of the last, article would be improper. When a different foru 
of the article is requisite, the article is also properly repeated; as, "a houjo 
and an orchard," instead of " a house and orchard." 

(1.) " toftor*."— Note XX. (648.) ft > 4 * him who." (L) « that trfcc*." f 4.) U*Ktt * W 

**rwa aaoTj*. (&.) M and>' tvnc*. WL) " W*ithar— *.*r." Cf.) " math aHttyJ* 



SYNTAX. 181 

Will you give an example of the ellipsis of the article t Is it necessary to 

repeat the article in each of these instances ? 

1. 

14 These rules are addressed to none with an unimproved, or with a 

but the intelligent and the (1.) at- corrupted, mind." 

tentive." "The more I see of his conduct, I 

1 ' The gay and the pleasing are, some- like hira better." 

times, the most insidious, and the " It is not only the duty, but interest, 
most dangerous companions." of young persons to be studious 

*'01d age will prove a joyless and a and. diligent." 

dreary season, if we arrive at it 

2. The noun is frequently omitted in the following manner : " The laws 
of God and man ;" that is, " The laws of God and the laws of man." In 
some very emphatical expressions, the ellipsis should not be used; as, 
" Christ, the power of God, and the wisdom of God ;" which is more 
emphatical than " Christ the power and wisdom of God." 

Will you give an example of the omission of the noun? Should thia 
ellipsis always be used ? 

2. 
"These counsels were the dictates entertainment, when others leave 

of virtue, and the dictates (2.) of us." (4.) 

true honor." " Without firmness, nothing that is 

'* Avarice and cunning may acquire great can be undertaken ; that is 

an estate, but avarice ana cunning difficult or hazardous, can be ac- 

cannot gain friends." (3.) complished." (5.) 

"A taste for useful knowledge will "The anxious man is the votary of rich. 

provide for us a great and noble es; the negligent of pleasure." (6.) 

3. The ellipsis of the adjective is used in the following manner: " A de 
lightful garden and orchard ;" that is, "A delightful garden and a delight 
nil orchard." " A little man and woman;" that is, " a little man and » 
little woman." In such elliptical expressions as these, the adjective ought 
to have exactly the same signification, and to be quite as proper, when 
joined to the latter substantive as to the former ; otherwise the ellipsis 
should not be admitted. 

Sometimes the ellipsis is improperly applied to nouns of different num- 
bers ; as, " A magnificent house and gardens." In this case it is better to 
use another adjective ; as, "A magnificent house, and fine gardens." 

Will you give an example of the ellipsis of the adjective ? What rule is 
to be observed in the use of this ellipsis ? 

3. 

"His crimes had brought him into " 1a&-. opecies of commerce will pro- 
extreme distress and extreme duce ^reat gain or loss." (10.) 

perplexity." (7.) " Many nays, and even weeks, pass 

" He has an affectionate brother, and away unimproved." (10.) 

an affectionate sister, and they " This wonderful action struck the 
live in great harmony." (8.) beholders with exceeding (11.) 

"We must guard against too great se- astonishment." (10.) 

verity, and facility of manners."(9.) " The people of this country possess 

" We should often recollect what the a healthy climate and soil." (9.) 

wisest men have said and written ' * They enjoy also a free constitution 
concerning human happiness and and laws." (10.) 

vanity." (10.) 

4. The following is the ellipsis of the pronoun : " I love and fear him ;" 
that is," I love him, and I fear him." " My house and lands ;" that is, " My 
house, and my lands." In these instances, the ellipsis may take place with 
propriety ; but if we would be more express and emphatical, it must not be 
used; as, " His friends and his foes ;" " My sons and my daughters." 

In some of the common forms o£ speech, the relative pronoun is usually 
o mitted ; as, " This is the man they love," instead of, " This is the man 

(I.) Raj*ct " the." (2.) " virtue and of true" (5.) Insert " t W> in th» plaoi of two neuaa. 

(4. > foaart « antartttinrntntt" (6.) lasert " nothing." (9 ) Insert " man, thai J' (f.) Hejact in «#»* 

1i»* «.) Btrjwrt *nro went* f* > 1vm*rt *wt» w,%r<3» MO ) [tiwrt « n *rii«rtt«* fll- > " *<r+*jit&n,frz * 

n 



182 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

wham they love;" "These are the goods they bought/' for " These &?® 
the goods which they bought." 

In complex sentences, it is much better to have the relative pronoun es« 
pressed; as it is more proper to say, " The posture in which I lay," than 
"In the posture I lay ;" " The horse on which I rode, fell down," than 
" The horse I rode, fell down." 

The antecedent and the relative connect the parts of a sentence together ; 
and, to prevent obscurity and confusion, they should answer to each other 
with great exactness, " We speak that we do know, and testify that we have 
Been. Here the ellipsis is manifestly improper, and ought to be supplied ; as, 
" We speak that which we do know, and testify that which we have seen." 
Will you give an example of the ellipsis of the pronoun? Can this ellipsis 
bo properly used at all times I 

4. 
" His reputation and Ms estate were " Ke is not only sensible and learned, 

both lost by gaming." (1.) but is religious too." (2.) 

" This intelligence not only excited "The Chinese language contains an 
our hopes, but fears too." (2.) immense number of words ; and 

" His conduct is not scandalous ; and who would learn them must pos- 

that is the best can be said of it." seas a great memory." (2.) 

(3.) " By presumption and by vanity, we 

w This was the person whom calumny provoke enmity, and we incur 

had greatly abused, and sustained contempt.' ' (1 .) 

the injustice with singular pa- " In the circumstances I was at that 
tience.' ' (2.) time, my troubles pressed heavily 

" He discovered some qualities in the upon me." (4.) 

youth of a disagreeable nature, " He had destroyed his constitution, 
and to him were wholly unac- by the very same errors that bo 

countable." (2.) many have been destroyed." 

" The captain had several men died 
in his ship of the scurvy." (2.) 
5. The ellipsis of the verb is used in the following instances : " The man 
wm old and crafty ;" that is, " The man was old, and the man was crafty." 
" She was young, and beautiful, and good ;" that is, " She was younsr, she 
was beautiful, and she wa3 good." " Thou art poor, and wretched, and 
miserable, and blind, and naked." If we would fill up the ellipsis in the 
last sentence, thou art ought to be repeated before each of the adjectives. 

If, in such enumeration, we choose to point out one property above the 
rest, that property must be placed last, ana the ellipsis supplied; as, " She 
it> young and beautiful, and she is good." 

" I went to see and hear him " that is, " I went to see, and I went to hear 
him." In this instance, theie is not only an ellipsis of the governing verb, J 
went, but likewise of the sign of the infinitive mood, which is governed by it. 
Do, did, have, had, shall, will, may, might, and the rest of the auxiliaries 
of the compound tenses, are frequently used alone to spare the repetition of 
the verb ; as, "He regards his word, but thou dost not;" that is, "dost 
not regard it." " We succeeded, but they did not ;" " did not succeed." 
" I have learned my task, but thou hast not;" " hast not learned." " They 
must, and they shall be punished ;" that is, " they must be punished." 

Will you give an example of the ellipsis of the verb ? Suppose we wish to 
point out one property above the rest ? How are the auxiliaries "feometimui 
used? 

5. 
" Ke is temperate, he is disinterest- " Perseverance in laudable pursuits 
ed, he is benevolent ; he is an will reward all our toils, and will 

ornament to his family, and a produce effects beyond our calcu 

credit to his profession." (5.1 lation." (7.) 

'Genuine virtue supposes our benev- "It is happy for us, when we can 
olence to be strengthened, and to calmly and deliberately look back 

be confirmed by principle." (6.) on the past, and can quietly an- 

ticipate the future." (7.) 

(J ,) &rfect & prontraa. (2.) ln**rt « pronoaau (3.) " tktst—OtaL* (i.J Ic*»rt tw* wwfe 

O. i feet** «* wnrAi. mu$ ijw*H w»* i<£ > »*,«* *•"> «">"*» flTN«« «** «»«•<* 



SYNTAX. 183 

"The sacrifices of virtue will not only rules of virtue, not only vs'ould 

be rewarded hereafter, but re- they escape innumerable dan- 

compensed even in this life." (1.) gers, but command respect from 

" All those possessed of any office, the licentious themselves." (2.) 

resigned their former commis- " Charles was a man of learning, 
sion." (2.) knowledge, and benevolence 

1 If young persons were determined and, what is still more, a true 

to conduct themselves by the Christian." (2.) 

6. The ellipsis of the adverb is used in the following manner : "He 
spoke and acted wisely ;" that is, " He spoke wisely, and he acted wisely." 
" Thrice I went and offered my service;" that is, " Thrice I went, and 
thrice I offered my service." 

How is the ellipsis of the adverb used ? 

6. 
u The temper of him who is always " How a seed grows up into a tree, 
in the bustle of the world, will and the mind acts upon the body, 

be often ruffled, and be often are mysteries which we cannot 

disturbed." (3.) explain." (5.) 

" We often commend imprudently, " Verily there is a reward for the 
as well as censure imprudent- righteous. There is a God that 

ly." (4.) judgeth in the earth." (5.) 

7. The ellipsis of the preposition, as well as of the verb, is seen in the 
following instances: "He went into the abbeys, halls, and public build- 
ings ;" that is, "He went into the abbeys, he went into the halls, and he 
went into the public buildings." " He also went through all the streets and 
.anes of the city;" that is, "through all the streets, and through all the 
lanes," &c. "He spoke to every man and woman there;" that is, "to 
every man and to every woman." " This day, next month, last year;" 
that is, " On this day, in the next month, in the last year." " The Lord 
do that which seemeth him good f that is, " which seemeth to him." 

Will you give an example of the ellipsis of the preposition and the verb % 

7. 
" Changes are almost continually gins smiled at what they blush- 

taking place, in men and in man- ed before." (5.) 

ners, m opinions and in customs, " They are now reconciled to what 
in private fortunes and public they could not formerly be 

conduct." (5.) (3.) prompted, by any cohsidera- 

1 Averse either to contradict or tions." (5.) 

blame , the too complaisant man ' 'Censure is the tax which a man pays 

goes along with the manners that the public for being eminent." (5. 

prevail." (5.) " Reflect on the state of human life, 

" By this habitual indelicacy, the vir- and the society of men as mixed 

with good and with evil." (5.) 

8. The ellipsis of the conjunction is as follows : " They confess the power 
wisdom, goodness, and love of their Creator;" that is, "the power, and 
wisdom, and goodness, and love of," &c. " Though I love him, I do not 
Batter him ;" that is, " Though I love him, yet J \o not flatter him. 

Will you give an example of the ellipsis of a conjunction ? 

8. 

°* In all stations and conditions, the " Religious persons are often unjust- 
important relations take place, of ly represented as persons of 
masters and servants, and hus- romantic character, visionary 
bands and wives, and parents and notions, unacquainted with the 
children, and brothers and friends, world, unfit to live in it." (1.) 
and citizens and subjects." (6.) "No rank, station, dignity of birth, 

'Destitute of principle, he regarded possessions, exempt men from 

neither his family, nor his friends, contributing their share to public 

nor his reputation." (4.) utility." (7. N 

9. The ellipsis of the interjection is not very common : it, however, is some- 
times used ; as, " Oh, pity and shame !" that is, " Oh, pity ! oh, shame ,n 

( 1. ) Svssrt thr*j yrnri*. (2.) Isasrt two word*. (3.) Reject two word*. \ f*.) R«&»ct ob» woi* 



184 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

As the ellipsis occurs in almost every sentence in the English bmgnage. 
numerous examples of it might be given ; but only a few more can be ad- 
mitted here. 

In the following instance, there is a very considerable one: "He wi.2 
often argue, that if this part of our trade were well cultivated, we should 
gain from one nation; and if another, from another;" that is, "He wili 
often argue, that if this part of our trade were well cultivated, we shouk 
gain from one nation ; and if another part of our trade were well cultivated, 
we should gain from another nation.* ' 

The following instances, though short, contain much of the ellipsis : " ¥- r c 
is me ;" i. e. " wo is to me." " To let blood ;" i. e. " to let out blood."* 
' To let down ;" i. e. " to let it fall or slide down." " To walk a mile ;" 
. e. " to walk through the space of a mile." " To sleep all night ;" i. ©, 
* to sleep through all the night." " To go a fishing ;" " To go a hunt- 
ing ;" i. e. " to go on a fishing voyage or business ;" " to go on a hunting 
party." " I dine at two o'clock ;" i. e. " at two of the clock." " By s&a, 
by land, on shore ;" i. e. " by the sea, by the land, on the shore." 
What is said of the ellipsis of the interjection ? 

9. 
*' Oh, my father! Oh, my friend t How " Oh, piety ! virtue ! how insensible 

great has been my ingratitude!" have I been to your charms!*' 

(1.) (2.) 

10. The examples that follow are produced to show the impropriety of 
ellipsis in some particular cases. " The land was always possessed, during 
pleasure, by those intrusted with the command;" it should be, "those 
persons intrusted ;" or, " those who were intrusted." " If he had read far- 
ther, he would have found several of his objections might have been spared ;" 
that is, " he would have found that several of his objections," &c. " There 
is nothing men are more deficient in, than knowing their own characters ;" 
it ought to be, " nothing in which men,'* and, " than in knowing." " I 
scarcely know any part of natural philosophy would yield more variety and 
use;" it should be, "which would yield," &c. " In the temper of mind 
he was then ;" that is, " in which he then was." " The little satisfaction 
and consistency to be found in most of the systems of divinity I have met 
with, made me betake myself to the sole reading of the Scriptures ;" it 
ought to be, " which are to be found," and which I nave met with." " He 
desired they might go to the altar together, and jointly return their thanks 
to whom only they were due ;" that is, " to him to whom," &c. 

" There is nothing men are more deficient in, than in knowing their ows 
characters." Will you correct this sentence 

10. 
" That is a property most men have, " Most, if not all, the royal family 

or at least may attain." (3.) had quitted the place." (2.) 

•' Why do ye that which is not lawful " By these happy labors, they who 

to do on the sabbath days ?" (2.) sow and reap, will rejoice to- 

" The show bread, which is not lawful gether.' ' (4.) 

to eat, but for the priests alone. "(2.) 

BULS SSZZ. 

Corresponding with Murray's Grammar, 
RULE XXII. 

All Hie parts of a sentence should correspond to each other: 
a regular and dependent construction, throughout, should 
be carefully preserved. The following sentence is, there- 
fore, inaccurate : " He was more beloved, but not so 
much admired, as Cinthio," It should be, " He was more 
beloved than Cinthio, but not so much admired." 

ff .) &«jlM» «»• "Pwi ?*.:> Iowa* **» **>rt r%.\ IsMrrt ttarm* waiJt '•*.> T**w* «"»■"• t»r»W 



SYNTAX. 185 

The txtal example under this rule presents a most irregular construction, namely 
* he was more beloved as Cinthio." The words more and so much are very impro- 
perly stated as having the same regimen. In correcting such sentences, it is nol 
necessary to supply the latter ellipsis; because it cannot lead to any discordant cs 
improper construction, and the supply would often be harsh or iuelegant. 

As the 31st rule comprehends all the preceding rules, it may, at the first vieWi 
appear to be too general to be useful. But, by ranging under it a number of sen- 
Cences peculiarly constructed, we shall perceive that it is calculated to ascertain tha 
true grammatical construction of many modes of expression, which none of ths 
particular rules can sufficiently explain. 

41 This dedication may serve for almost any book, that has, is, or shall be publish- 
ed ;" it ought to be. " that has been, or shall be published." " He was guided by 
interests always different, sometimes contrary to, those of the community ;" " dif- 
ferent from ;" or, "always different from those of the community, and sometimes 
contrary to them." " Will it be urged that these books are as old, or even oldee 
than tradition ?" the words " as old," and " older," cannot have a common regimen ; 
5t should be, " as old as tradition, or even older." " It requires few talents to which 
mo9t men are not born, or at least may not acquire ;" " or which, at least, they m&y 
:*ot acquire." " The court of chancery frequently mitigates and breaks the teeth of 
the common law." In this construction, the first verb is said to mitigate the teeth 
of the common law, which is an evident solecism. " Mitigates the common law 
ar>d breaks the teeth of it," would have been grammatical. 

" They presently grow into good humor and good language towards the crown ;' 
'grow into good language," is very improper. A There is never wanting a set of 
evil instruments, who, either out of mad zeal, private hatred, or filthy lucre, ar$ , 
always ready," Sea. We say properly, " A man acts out of mad zeal," or, " out oi 
private hatred;" but we cannot say, if we would speak English, "he acts out of 
filthy lucre." " To double her. kindness and caresses of me :" the word kindness 
requires to be followed by either to or for, and cannot be construed with the preposi 
tion of. " Never was man so teased, or suffered half the uneasiness, as I have don«» 
r.hie evening :" the first and third clauses, namely, " never was man so teased," " as 
I have done this evening," cannot be joined without an impropriety; and to con 
nect the second and third, the word that must be substituted for as; " or suffered 
half the uneasiness that I have done ;" or else, "half so much uneasiness as I hav 
suffered." , 

The first part of the following sentence abounds with adverbs, and those such as 
are hardly consistent with one another : " How mucfy soever the reformation of this 
degenerate age is almost utterly to be despaired of, we may yet have a more com- 
fortable prospect of future times." The sentence would be more correct in tins 
following form : " Though the reformation of this degenerate age is nearly to b® 
despaired of," &c. 

" Oh ! shut not up my soul with the dinners, nor my life with the bloodthirsty ; in 
whose hands is wickedness, and their right hand is full of gifts." As the passage 
introduced by the copulative conjunction and, was not intended as a continuation 
of the principal and independent part of the sentence, but of the dependent part, that 
relative iihose should have been used instead of the possessive their ; namely, " and 
whose right hand is full of gifts," 

"Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, neither have entered into the heart of man, 
the things which God hath prepared for them that love him." There seems to ba 
an impropriety in this instance, in which the same noun serves in a double capacity, 
performing at "the same time the offices both of the nominative and objective cases 
" Neither hath it entered into the heart of man to conceive the things," &c. wouk- 
have been regular. 

*' We have the power of retaining, altering, and compounding those images which 
we have once received, into all the varieties of picture and vision." ft is very 
proper to say, " altering and compounding those images which we have onca 
received, into all the varieties of picture and vision ;" but we cannot with propriety 
say. " retaining them into all the varieties;" and yet, according to the manner in 
which the words are ranged, this construction is unavoidable : for retaining, altering, 
and compounding are participles, each of which equally refers to and governs the 
subsequent noun, those images ? and that noun, again, is necessarily connected with 
the following preposition, into. The construction might easily have been rectified, 
by disjoining the participle retaining from the other two participles, in this way: 
>4 We have the power of retaining those images which we have once received, and 
yf altering and compounding them into all the varieties of picture and vision ;" or. 
perhaps, better thus : " We have the power of retaining, altering, and compounding 
those images which we have once received, and of forming them into all the varie- 
ties of picture and vision." 

Why is the first example under this rule inaccurate ? " This dedication 
i^ay serve for almost any book, that has, is, or shall be published." Will 
?«u point out the inaccuracies in this sentence, suvd correct them f 

16* 



186 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



* Several alterations and additions 

have been made to ike work." (1.) 
' The first proposal was essentially 
different, and inferior to the se- 
cond." (2.) 

* He i3 more bold and active, but not^ 

so wise and studious as his com-^ 
panion." (3.) 
4 Tnou hearest the sound of wind, 
but thou canst not tell whence it 
cometh, and whither it goeth." 

* Neither has he, nor any other per- 

sons, suspected so much dissimu- 
lation." (4.) 

1 The court of France or England 
was to have been the umpire." (5.) 

' In the reign of Henry II. all foreign 
commodities were plenty in Eng- 
land." (6.) 

8 There is no talent so useful towards 
success in business, or which puts 
men more out of the reach of ac- 
cidents, than that quality gener- 
ally possessed by persons of cool 
temper, and is, in common lan- 

fuage, called discretion." (7.) 
e first project was to shorten dis- 
course, by cutting polysyllables 
into one." (8.) 

'I shall do all I can to persuade 
others to take the same measures 
for their cure which I have." (9.) 

*The greatest masters of critical 
learning differ among one an- 
other: 1 

* Micaiah said, If thou certainly re- 

turn in peace, then hath not the 
Lord spoken by me." (10.) 

* I do not suppose, that we Britons 

want a genius, more than the 
rest of our neighbors." (10.) 

* The deaf man whose ears were 

opened, and his tongue loosened, 
doubtless glorified the great Phy- 
sician." (11.) 



" Groves, fields, and meadows ace, or 
any season of the year, pleasant 
to look upon ; but never so much 
as in the opening of the spring." 
(12.) 
The multitude rebuke them, because 
they should hold their peace." 

" The intentions of some of these phi- 
losophers, nay, of many, might 
and probably were good." (13.) 

" It was an unsuccessful undertak 
ing ; which, although it has failed, 
is no objection at all to an enter- 
prise so well concerted." (14.) 

" The reward is his due, and it ha? 
already, or will hereafter be given 
to him." (15.) 

" By intercourse with wise and expe- 
rienced persons, who know the 
world, we may improve and rub 
off the rust of a private and retir- 
ed education." (16.) 

" Sincerity is as valuable, and even 
more valuable, than knowledge." 
(17.) 

" No person was ever so perplexed, 
or sustained the mortifications, as 
he has done to-day." (18.) 

" The Romans gave not only the 
freedom of the city, but capacity 
for employments, to several towns 
in Gaul, Spain, and Germany." 
(19.) 

" Such writers have no other standard 
on which to form themselves, ex- 
cept what chances to be fashion- 
able and popular." (20.) 

" Whatever we do secretly, shall be 
displayed and heard in the clear- 
est light." (21.) 

" To the happiness of possessing a 
person of so uncommon merit, 
Boethius soon had the satisfaction 
of obtaining the highest honor his 
country could bestow." 



(I.) " This work has received" &c. (2.) " was inferior to the second, and— from it." (3.) " atiivt 

ik&nhis." (4.) Insert "have." (5.) " or t hot of." (6.) " plentiful." (7.) fcssrt "mart* 

ted "wJt-ich." (8.) " by reducing — to words of one syllable." (9.) Insert a participle. (10.1 R&. 

J«et one wcrd. (11.,) Insert two wordt, said reject one. (12.) Insert "so." (13.) Insert "have been,* 
'!4.) " the failure of which is, hawzver." (15.) Insert * been." (16.) End with, "and ruh off its rwi" 
111.) u ai knowledge, and." (18.) Iraert '" bt*n" for "done," and end with "tt/rA morti/teutim.*' 

(!».) a ihs inhabitant* of." (2©.) Bac*at oos word. (SI.) u ditpls§id in thi cte&r&t." 



y 



PROSODY. 



PaosoDY consists of two parts : the former teaches the true pso- 
suNciATioN of words, comprising accent, quantity, emphasis 
*pause, and tone; the latter, the laws of versification. 



OF PRONUNCIATION. 

OF ACCENT. 

Accent is the laying of a peculiar stress of the voice on a certain letter or 
syllable in a word, that it may be better heard than the rest, or distinguished 
from them ; as, in the v/ord presume, the stress of the voice must be on the 
tetter u, and second syllable sume, which take the accent. 

OF QUANTITY. 

The quantity of a syllable is that time which is occupied in pronouncing 
it. It is considered long or short. 

A vowel or syllable is long, when the accent is on the vowel, which occa- 
sions it to be slowly joined in pronunciation with the following letter ; as, 
fall, tale, mood, house, feature. 

A syllable is short, wnen the accent is on the consonant, which occasions 
&e vowel to be quickly joined to the succeeding letter ; as, ant, bonnet, hunger 

A long syllable generally requires double the time of a short one in pro- 
nouncing it ; thus mate and note should be pronounced as slowly again as 
mat and not. 

OF EMPHASIS. 

By emphasis is meant a stronger and fuller sound of voice, by which we 
distinguish some word or words on which we design to lay a particular stress, 
and to show how they affect the rest of the sentence. Sometimes the em- 
phatic words must be" distinguished by a particular tone of voice, as well as 
by a greater atresia. 

OF PAUSES. # 

Pauses or rests, in speaking and reading, are a total cessation of tL* 
voice, during a perceptible, and in many cases, a measurable space of time. 

OF TONES. 

Tones are different both from emphasis and pauses, consisting in the 
modulation of the voice, the notes or variations which we employ in the 
expression of our sentiments. 



OF VERSIFICATION, 

Versification is the arrangement of a certain number and variety of 
syllables, according to certain laws. 

Rhyme is the correspondence of the last sound of one verse to the last 
sound of another. 

What is prosody ? How much more time does the pronunciation of a 

What it accent ? What it the quantity of a syllabi* ? long syllable occupy, than a thort one ? What sa eat 

When is a vowel or syllable lonj When sbor* ? Give phasit ? What are pautes ? What are tones ? What it 

Ssasaplw el *ach. weraSncatioD ? What' is rhysra ? 

(187) 



188 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

OP POETICAL FEET. 

A certain number of syllables connected form a foot. They are called 
feet, because it is by their aid that the voice, as it were, steps along tarougb 
the verse in a measured pace. 

All feet used in poetry consist either of two, or of three syllables, and are 
reducible to eight kinds — four of two syllables, and four of three — as follows s 

DISSYLLABLE. TRISYLLABLE. 

A Trochee, — — - A Dactyl, — w w 

An Iambus, w — An Amphibrach, ^ — ** 

A Spondee, — — An Anapaest, ^ — - 

A Pyrrhic, ^ ~ A Tribrach, ^ ^ -" 

A Trochee has the first syllable accented, and the last unaccentea ; as, 
"Hateful, pettish." 

An Iambus has the first syllable unaccented, and the latter accented ; as, 
* Betray, consist." 

A Spondee has both the words or syllables accented ; as, " The pale 
moon." 

A Pyrrhic has both the words or syllables unaccented; as, "on the tail 
tree." 

A Dactyl has the first syllable accented, and the two latter unaccented; 
as, " Laborer, possible." 

An Amphibrach has the first and last syllables unaccented, and the mid- 
dle one accented ; as, " Delightful, domestic." 

An Anapaest has the two first syllables unaccented, and the last accented > 
as, "Contravene, acquiesce." 

A Tribrach has ail its syllables unaccented; as, " Numerable, conquer- 
able." 

Some of these may be denominated principal feet, as pieces of poetry may 
be wholly or chiefly formed of any of them. Such are the Iambus, Trochee, 
Dactyl, and Anapaest. The others may be termed secondary feet, because 
their chief use is to diversify the numbers, and to improve the verse. 



PUNCTUATION. 
Punctuation is the art of dividing a written composition into sea- 
lances, by points or stops, for the purpose of marking the different 
pauses which the sense and an accurate pronunciation require. 

The Comma represents the shortest pause ; the Semicolon, a pause double 
that of the comma; the Colon, double that of the semicolon; and the 
Period, double that of the colon. 

OF THE COMMA. 

The Comma usually separates those parts of a sentence which, though very 
closely connected in sense and construction, require a pause between them. 

Rule !.• — With respect to a simple sentence, the several words of which it 
is composed, have so near a relation to each other, that, in general, no points 
are requisite, except a full stop at the end of it ; as, " The fear of the Lord is the 
beginning of wisdom." " Every part of nature swarms with living creatures." 

A simple sentence, however, when it is a long one, and the nominative 
cf.se i3 accompanied with inseparable adjuncts, may admit of a pause im- 
mediately before the verb ; as, " The good taste of the present age, has not 
allowed us to neglect the cultivation of the English language." " To bo 
totally indifferent to praise or censure, is a real defect in character." 

■•"■■•' bat constitutes a poetical foot, and why is it so What in pufictuation ? What doej the comma repr» 

isd'ed? Of bow many* syllables do poetical feet con- gent? the semicolon? the colon? the period? 

mi} How many kinds' of feet ?.re there, and what How io the cimaia used ? 

"!Tb tb*y ? What is a Trochee ? an Iambus? a Spoil- u The fear of the Lord ia the beginning of wisdom.* 

d«ts ? a Pyrrhic? a L>actyl ? an .Amphibrach ? an Doss thia seatence require a paise in it? Will yog 

Anapaest ? ' a Tribrach ? Will yon give aa example give the rule for sentence* of toil kind? "The gooi 

ft" each ? Whifh ar* ealled printiy-xl fwt f Whirb tssta of the present agje hr.s not allowed n§ to n«gi*el 

«*r#«ui«vr» f t^h* » ffc* <-uH)T»tino at th* Kturl'*"» "OTfM«."~ tV»#« Ui4» 



PROSODY 189 

Hulk 2, — When the connection of the different parts of a simple sentence, 
Is interrupted by an imperfect phrase, a comma is usually introduced before 
the beginning and at the end of the phrase ; as, " I remember, with grati- 
tude, his goodness to me." " His work is, in many respects, very imper- 
fect." " It is, therefore, not much approved." But when the interruptions 
are slight and unimportant, the comma is better omitted ; as, " Flattery is 
certainly pernicious." " There is surely a pleasure in beneficence." 

Rule 3. — When two or more nouns occur in the same construction, they 
are parted by a comma ; as, " The husband, wife, and children, suffered ex- 
tremely " " They took away their furniture, clothes, and stock in trade." 

From this rule there is mostly an exception, with regard to two nouns 
closely connected by a conjunction; as, "Virtue and vice form a strong 
contrast to each other." " Libertines call religion bigotry or superstition." 
If the parts connected are not short, a comma may be inserted, though the 
conjunction is expressed^; as, " Romances may be said to be miserable 
rhapsodies, or dangerous incentives to evil." 

Rule 4. — Two or more adjectives, belonging to the same substantive, 
are likewise separated by commas; as, "Plain, honest truth wants no 
artificial covering." " David was a brave, wise, and pious man." 

But two adjectives immediately connected by a conjunction, are not sepa- 
rated by a comma ; as, " Truth is fair and artless." " We must be wise 
or foolish: there is no medium." 

Rule 5. — Two or more verbs, having the same nominative case, and im- 
mediately following one another, are also separated by commas ; as, " Vir- 
tue supports in adversity, moderates in prosperity." " In a letter we may 
advise, exhort, comfort, request, and discuss." 

Two verbs immediately connected by a conjunction, are an exception to 
the rule ; as, " The study of natural history expands and elevates the mind." 
- Two or more participles are subject to a similar rule and exception. 

Rule 6. — Two or more adverbs immediately succeeding each other, must 
be separated by commas; as, "We are fearfully, wonderfully framed." 
" We must act prudently, steadily, and vigorously." 

When two adverbs are joined by a conjunction, they are not parked by a 
comma ; as, " Some men sin deliberately and presumptuously." 

Rule 7. — When participles are followed by something that depends upon 
them, they are generally separated from the rest of the sentence by commas; 
as^ "The king, approving the plan, put it in execution." "His talents, 
formed for great enterprises, could not fail of rendering him conspicuous." 

Rule 8. — When a conjunction is parted by a phrase or sentence from the 
rerb to which it belongs, such intervening phrase has usually a comma at 
»ach extremity; as, "They set out early, and, before the dawn of day, 
arrived at the destined place." 

Rule 9. — Expressions in a direct address are separated from the rest of 
the sentence by commas; as, "My son, give me thy heart." "I am 
obliged to you, my friends, for your many favors." 

Rule 10. — The case absolute, and the infinitive mood absolute, are sepa- 
rated by commas from the body of the sentence ; as, " His father dying, 
he succeeded to the estate." " At length, their ministry performed, and 
race well run, they left the world in peace." " To confess the truth, I was 
much in fault." 

Rule 11. — Nouns in apposition, that is, nouns added to other nouns in the 
same case, by way of explication or illustration, when accompanied with ad- 
juncts, are set oft* by commas ; as, " Paul, the apostle of the Gentiles : was 

i^itence admit of a pause ? If so, where, and what is state what points should be placed in this seu'.:ncr, 

the rule? "1 remember with gratitude his goodness and the rule for it ? State the exceptions. 
tome." Will you slate how this sentence should be " The king approving the plan, put : t in execv*'OD.* 

pointed, and the rule for it? Wiil you state the ex- Will you stite how this sentence should be pointed, 

Mp'ion to this rule ? and the rule for it? 

*< Plain honest truth wants no artificial covering." " They set out early and before the dawn of day st- 

Will you state how this sentence should be pointed, rived at the destined place." Will you state the n?J» 

and the rule for it? What exception is there to this for pointing; this sentence, aud others of a Bim.aJ 

rule? "Virtue supports in adversity, moderates in kind? 

prosperity." Will you state how this sentence should " My son give me thy heart." What is the rule lot 

be poiB ed, and the rule for it ? State the exceptions to pointing this sentence ?' 
b'u rule. " Paul the apoatle of tin? Gentiles waa emin«»3 

44 We are farufmry, wonderfully made." Will you for his zeal and knowledge.-' Will yoa ttate brv 



190 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

eminent for his zeal and knowledge.' " The butterfly, child of the BUia 
mer, flutters in the sun." 

But if such nouns are single, or only form a proper name, they are n<* 
divided; as, "Paul the apostle." "The emperor Antoninus wrote an 
excellent hook." 

Rule 12. — Simple members of sentences, connected by comparatives, 
are for the most part distinguished by a comma ; as, " As the hart pantetb 
after the water-brooks, so doth my soul pant after thee." "Better is a 
dinner of herbs with love, than a stalled ox and hatred with it." 

If the members in comparative sentences are short, the comma is, in gen- 
eral, better omitted ; as, " How much better is it to get wisdom than gold 1" 

Rule 13. — When words are placed in opposition to each other, or with 
h&me marked variety, they require to be distinguished by a comma ; as, 

" Though deep, yet clear ; though gentle, yet not dull ; 
Strong, without rage ; without o'erflowing, full." 

44 Good men, in this frail, imperfect state, are often found not only in 
anion with, but in opposition to, the views and conduct of one another." 

Sometimes, when the word with which the last preposition agrees, is 
single, it is better to omit the comma before it ; as, " Many states were in 
alliance with, and under the protection of Rome." 

44 The same rule and restriction must be applied when two or more no&ns 
refer to the same preposition; as, 4 'He was composed both under fche 
threatening, and at the approach, of a cruel and lingering death." 

Rule 14. — A remarkable expression, or a short observation, somewhat 
in the manner of a quotation, may be properly marked with a comma; as, 
44 It hurts a man's pride to say, I do not know." 4i Plutarch calls lying, 
the vice of slaves." 

Rule 15.— Relative pronouns are connective words, and generally admit 

comma before them; as, "He preaches sublimely, who lives a sober, 
righteous, and pious life." 

But when two members or phrases are closely connected by a relative, re- 
straining the general notion of the antecedent to a particular sense, the comma 
should be omitted; as, 44 Self-denial is the sacrifice which virtue must make." 

The fifteenth rule applies equally to cases in which the relative is not ex- 
pressed, but understood; as, "It was from piety, warm and unaffected, 
that his morals derived strength." 

Rule 16. — A simple member of a sentence, contained within another 
of following another, must be distinguished by a comma ; as, 44 To improve 
time whilst we are blessed with health, will smooth the bed of sickness." 
44 Very often, while we are complaining of the vanity and the evils of 
human life, we make that vanity, and we increase those evils." 

If, however, the members succeeding each other are very closely con 
nected, the comma is unnecessary ; as, " 4 Revelation tells us how we maj 
attain happiness." 

When a verb in the infinitive mood follows its governing verb, witb 
several words between them, those words should generally have a comma 
&t the end of them ; as, 44 It ill becomes good and wise men, to oppose and 
degrade one another." 

toever^al verbs in the infinitive mood, having a common dependence, and 
succeeding one another, are also divided by commas ; as, 44 To relieve the 
indigent, to comfort the afflicted, to protect the innocent, to reward the 
deserving, are humane and noble employments." 

Rule 17.— -When the verb to he is followed by a verb in the infinitive mood 
which, by transposition, might be made the nominative case to it, the formei 

ihia sentence should be pointed, and the rule for it? liraeiy who lives a sober righteous ani piout 

s * A* the hart panteth after the water-brooks so doth life." Will you state how this sentence should "03 

my soul pant aiter thee." How should this sentence pointed, and the rule for it ? Will you slate when 

<»e pointed, and what is the rule for it ? the comma should be omitted ? Does this rule apply 

•"Though deep yet clear though gentle yet not to cases in which the relative is expressed ? Give as 

dull." How should this sentence be pointed, and example. 

what is the role for it ? State the exception to " To improve time whilst we are blessed wifc 

ttea rale. ♦' It hurts a man* pride to say I do health will smooth the t-ed of tickness." How «konl« 

»ot know." How should this «entence be pointed, .tbia sentence be pointed, and what is the rule fer it 

%&4 what in the rule for it? "He preaches sub-- Will you stata the exception*, to. thw rule > 



FROSODY. 191 

•a generally separated from the latter verb by a comma ; as, "The moat 
obvious remedy is, to withdraw from all associations with bad men." " Tho 
first and most obvious remedy against the infection, is, to withdraw from all 
associations with bad men." 

Rule IS. — When adjuncts or circumstances are of importance, and often 
w^en the natural order of them is inverted, they may be set off by com- 
mas ; as, " Virtue must be formed and supported, not by unfrequcnt acts, 
but by daily and repeated exertions." " Vices, like shadows, towards tha 
evening of life, prow great and monstrous." 

Rule 19. — Where the verb is understood, a comma may often be pro- 
perly introduced. This is a general rule, which, besides comprising some 
ef the preceding rules, will apply to many cases not determined by any of 
them; as, "From law arises security; from security, curiosity; from 
curiosity, knowledge." 

Rule 20. — The words nay, so, hence, again, first, secondly, formerly ^ 
now, lastly, once more, above all, on the contrary, in the next place, in shorty 
and all other words and phrases of the same kind, must generally be 
sr-parated from the context by a comma. 

OF THE SEMICOLON. 

The Semicolon is used for dividing a compound sentence into two or 
more parts, not so closely connected as those which are separated by a 
oomraa, nor yei so little dependent on each other as those which are dis- 
tinguished by a colon. 

The semicolon is sometimes used when the preceding member of the 
sentence does not of itself give a complete sense, but depends on the fol- 
lowing clause ; and sometimes when the sense of that member would be 
complete without the concluding one ; as in the following instance : " As 
the desire of approbation, when it works according to reason, improves the 
amiable part of our species in every thing that is laudable ; so nothing is 
more destructive to them when it is governed by vanity and folly." 

OF THE COLON. 

The colon is used to divide a sentence into two or more parts, less con- 
nected than those which are separated by a semicolon ; but not so indepen- 
dent as separate, distinct sentences. 

The colon may be properly applied in the three following cases -.-7- 

1. When a member of a sentence is complete in itself, but followed by 
some supplemental remark, or further illustration of the subject ; as-, " Na- 
ture felt her inability to extricate herself from the consequences of guilt : 
the gospel reveals the plan of divine interposition and aid." 

2. When several semicolons have preceded, and a still greater pause is 
necessary, in order to mark the connecting or concluding sentiment ; as, 
" A divine Legislator, uttering his voice from heaven ; an almighty 
Governor, stretching forth his arm to punish or reward ; informing ua of 
perpetual rest prepared hereafter for the righteous, and of m origination and 
wrath awaiting the wicked : these are the considerations which overawe the 
world, which support integrity, and check guilt." 

3. The colon is commonly used when an example, a quotation, or a 
•peech is introduced ; as, " The Scriptures give us an amiable represent* 
tk>n of the Deity, in these words : ' God is love.' " 



OF THE PERIOD. 
Whe;i a sentence is complete and independent, and not connected in 
Ll»3tioa with the follow 'ng sentence, it is marked with a Period. 



*«The moat obvious remedy is to withdraw from all and what is the rule for it? « He feared want hencs 

aaooiations with bad men." Will you state how this he overvalued riches." Will you state how this kb< 

Sffr^^vJ be P° ,nted » a*** 1 the rule for it? tence should be pointed, and, the rule for it ? 

Vices like *hadows toward* the evening of life grow When is the semicolon used ? When is the co?o» 

(jnat- and monstrous." Will you give the rule for used In whit three cases may the coloo te oropem 

pointing this sentence, and apply it ? « 7rom law app! «d ? 

Anrcn security from security curiosity from curiosity ' When is the period used ? After Abbreviate wor&a 

txxnrjt&ga. How should this scatene* be pointed, what paint sJh&uld b» wed f Give asatnpwa, 



192 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. N 

The period should be used after every abbreviated word; as, M. £., F 
S., N. B., A. D., O. S., N. S., &c. 

THE DASH. . 
The Dash, though often used improperly by hasty and incoherent wn 
iers, may be introduced with propriety where the sentence breaks of? 
abruptly ; where a significant pause is required ; or where there is an un 
expected turn in the sentiment ; as, " If thou art he, so much respected 
once — but, oh ! how fallen ! how degraded !'" 

INTERROGATION. 
A Note of Interrogation is used at the end of an interrogative sentence ; 
that is, when a question is asked ; as, " Who will accompany me?" " Shall 
we always be friends ?" 

EXCLAMATION. 

The Note of Exclamation is applied to expressions of sudden emotion, 
surprise, joy, grief, &c, and also to invocations or addresses; as, "My 
friend! this conduct amazes me!" "Bless the Lord, O my soul! and 
forget not all his benefits !" 

The interrogation and exclamation points are indeterminate as to their 
quantity or time, and may be equivalent, in that respect, to a semicolon, 
a colon, or a period, as the sense may require. They mark an elevation 
of the voice. 



PARENTHESIS. 
A Parenthesis is a clause containing some necessary information, or use- 
ful remark, introduced into the body of a sentence obliquely, and which 
may be omitted without injuring the grammatical construction ; as, 
" Know, then, thif truth, (enough for man to know,) 
Virtue, alone, is happiness below/' 

The parenthesis marks a moderate depression of the voice, and may ba 
tccompanied with every point which the sense would require if the paren- 
thetical characters were omitted. 

Directions respecting the Use of CAPITAL LETTERS. 

It is proper to begin with a capital, 

1. The first word of every book, chapter, letter, note, or any other piece 
9f writing. 

2. The first, word after a period, and, if the two sentences are totally 
independent, after a note of interrogation or exclamation. 

3. The appellations of the Deity ; as, God, Jehovah, the Almighty, the 
Supreme Being, the Lord, Providence, the Messiah, the Holy Spirit. 

4. Proper names of persons, places, streets, mountains, rivers, ships ; 
as, George, York, the Strand, the Alps, the Thames, the Seahorse. 

5. Adjectives derived from the proper names of places; as, Grecian, 
Roman, English, French, Italian, &c. 

6. The first word of a quotation, introduced after a colon, or when it. is in ?, 
lirect form ; as, " Always remember this ancient maxim : ' Know thyself.' " 

The first word of an example may also very properly begin with a capital. 

7. Every substantive and principal word in the titles of books ; as, John- 
eon's Dictionary of the English Language ; Thomson's Sea 

8. The first word of every line in poetry. 

9. The pronoun I and the interjection O are written in capitals 

• Other words, besides the preceding, may begin with capitals, when they 
are remarkably emphatical, or the principal subject of the compo sition. 

When era? the dash be introduced with propriety ? What i* b circs thesis ? Givs an example ^» 

* Who wiil 'accompany me?" What point Bhould'be whisfe it is OMsd with propriety. Should th« vexa 

wed at the wid of this sentence ? be eleT&fcsd or depressed in pronoaacieg a par©» 

To what a the note of exclamation applied ? Give thesis ? 

m example. Are the exclamation and interrogation Ween riioak! ccpital tattar* ba «t«4 > 
gAtintv daJarminateaa to thair quantity w b-roe ? 



S RY ° FC0 ^RESS 



ippaW I 




°03 237 893 6 , 



GOODRICH'S SERIES OF SCHOOL HISTORII 

MCH'S PICTORIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES. 

''CHS CHILD'S PICTORIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES; 
GOODRICH'S PICTORIAL HISTORY OF ENGLAND 
GOODRICH'S PICTORIAL HISTORY OF ROME, 

GOODRICH'S PICTORIAL HISTORY OF GREECE. • 

GOODRICH'S PICTORIAL HISTORY OF FRANCE. 

GOODRICH'S (PARLEY'S) COMMON SCHOOL HISTORY OF THE WORLD. 
GOODRICH'S PICTORIAL NATURAL HISTORY. 

HOWS' LADIES' READERS. 

HOWS' PRIMARY LADIES' READER. 

HOWS' JUNIOR LADIES' READER. 

HOWS' LADIES' READER. 

HOWS' LADIES' BOOK OF READINGS AND RECITATIONS. 

MITCHELL'S SCHOOL GEOGRAPHIES-NEW SERIES, 

MITCHELL'S NEW SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY AND ATLAS— ENTIRELY Nl v 
MITCHELL'S NEW INTERMEDIATE GEOGRAPHY—ENTIRELY NEW. 
MITCHELL'S NEW PRIMARY GEOGRAPHY— ENTIRELY NEW. 
MITCHELL'S FIRST LESSONS IN GEOGRAPHY— ENTIRELY NEW. 
MITCHELL'S NEW ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY— ENTIRELY NEW. 

MITCHELL'S SCHOOL GEOGRAPHIES-OLD SERIES. 

MITCHELL'S SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY AND ATLAS. 
MITCHELL'S PRIMARY GEOGRAPHY. 
MITCHELL'S GEOGRAPHICAL QUESTIONS. 
MITCHELL'S ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY AND ATLAS. 
MITCHELL'S BIBLICAL GEOGRAPHY. 

PROFESSOR HART'S SERIES. 

HARTS ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

HART'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR— PART I. s 

HART'S CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES. /V;V 

HART'S CLASS BOOK OF POETRY. BH 

HART'S CLASS BOOK OF PROSE. 

PROFESSOR COPPEE'S SERIES. 

C0PPE*E'S ELEMENTS OF LOGIC. 
COPP^E'S ELEMENTS OF RHETORIC. 
COPPEE'S SELECT ACADEMIC SPEAKER. 




H MrDEMAN'S AFFIXES— ENGLISH WORDS. 
SCHOLAR'S COMPANION. 
SMITH'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

• INS' SELECTIONS FROM THE SCRIPTURES. 
STOCKHAUDT'S PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY. 
FLEMING AND TIBBINS' FRENCH AND ENGLISH AND ES 

FRENCH PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY. 
FLEMING AND TIBBINS' FRENCH AND ENGLISH AND EN 

FRENCH PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY, ABRIDGED. 
DONNEGAN'S GREEK AND ENGLISH LEXICON. 



Published by E. H. BUTLER & CO., 

137 South Fourth Street, Philadelphia. 



